623069

Ford C-Max 2015 Handleiding

3
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/444
Pagina verder
FORD C-MAX Owner's Manual
The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest of
continuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications, design or equipment at any time
without notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a
retrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our written permission.
Errors and omissions excepted.
© Ford Motor Company 2015
All rights reserved.
Part Number: CG3642en 02/2015 20150213081543
Introduction
About This Manual...........................................7
Symbols Glossary.............................................7
Data Recording..................................................9
Replacement Parts
Recommendation......................................10
Mobile Communications
Equipment.....................................................10
At a Glance
Front Exterior Overview.................................11
Rear Exterior Overview..................................12
Vehicle Interior Overview..............................13
Instrument Panel Overview - LHD............14
Instrument Panel Overview - RHD...........15
Child Safety
Installing Child Seats......................................17
Child Seat Positioning..................................20
Child Safety Locks - Vehicles With:
Mechanical Child Proof Locks...............24
Child Safety Locks - Vehicles With:
Remote Child Proof Locks......................24
Safety Belts
Fastening the Safety Belts..........................25
Safety Belt Height Adjustment.................25
Safety Belt Minder.........................................26
Supplementary Restraints
System
Principle of Operation...................................27
Driver Airbag.....................................................27
Passenger Airbag............................................27
Side Airbags.....................................................28
Side Curtain Airbags.....................................28
Keys and Remote Controls
General Information on Radio
Frequencies..................................................29
Remote Control - Vehicles With: Keyless
Entry................................................................29
Remote Control - Vehicles With: Remote
Flip Key............................................................31
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote
Control............................................................32
MyKey™
Principle of Operation...................................33
Creating a MyKey............................................34
Clearing All MyKeys.......................................34
Checking MyKey System Status...............36
Using MyKey With Remote Start
Systems.........................................................36
MyKey Troubleshooting...............................36
Locks
Locking and Unlocking.................................38
Sliding Door.....................................................40
Manual Liftgate - Compact MAV
(5-seater).....................................................40
Manual Liftgate - Grand MAV (5+2
seater).............................................................41
Power Liftgate.................................................42
Hands-Free Power Liftgate........................44
Keyless Entry....................................................45
Security
Passive Anti-Theft System........................48
Anti-Theft Alarm - Vehicles With:
Integral Battery...........................................48
Anti-Theft Alarm - Vehicles With: Interior
Sensor............................................................50
Anti-Theft Alarm - Vehicles With:
Perimeter Alarm.........................................52
Steering Wheel
Adjusting the Steering Wheel....................53
Audio Control...................................................53
Voice Control...................................................54
Cruise Control..................................................54
Information Display Control.......................55
1
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Table of Contents
Heated Steering Wheel................................55
Wipers and Washers
Windshield Wipers........................................56
Autowipers.......................................................56
Windshield Washers.....................................58
Rear Window Wiper and Washers...........58
Headlamp Washers......................................59
Lighting
General Information.....................................60
Lighting Control..............................................60
Autolamps.........................................................61
Instrument Lighting Dimmer......................61
Headlamp Exit Delay.....................................61
Daytime Running Lamps.............................62
Automatic High Beam Control..................62
Front Fog Lamps............................................63
Rear Fog Lamps..............................................63
Headlamp Leveling.......................................64
Cornering Lamps............................................65
Direction Indicators.......................................65
Interior Lamps.................................................65
Ambient Lighting...........................................66
Windows and Mirrors
Power Windows.............................................68
Global Opening and Closing......................69
Exterior Mirrors................................................70
Interior Mirror.....................................................71
Sun Visors..........................................................72
Sun Shades.......................................................72
Instrument Cluster
Gauges................................................................74
Warning Lamps and Indicators.................75
Audible Warnings and Indicators.............78
Information Displays
General Information.....................................80
Trip Computer.................................................83
Information Messages.................................83
Climate Control
Principle of Operation..................................92
Air Vents............................................................92
Manual Climate Control..............................93
Automatic Climate Control........................94
Hints on Controlling the Interior
Climate..........................................................96
Heated Windows and Mirrors...................99
Heated Windshield........................................99
Auxiliary Heater..............................................99
Cabin Air Filter...............................................103
Seats
Sitting in the Correct Position.................104
Head Restraints............................................104
Manual Seats.................................................105
Power Seats...................................................106
Rear Seats.......................................................107
Heated Seats...................................................115
Auxiliary Power Points
Auxiliary Power Points.................................116
Cigar Lighter....................................................116
Storage Compartments
Cup Holders......................................................117
Center Console................................................117
Overhead Console.........................................117
Starting and Stopping the
Engine
General Information.....................................118
Ignition Switch................................................118
Push Button Ignition Switch......................118
2
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Table of Contents
Steering Wheel Lock - Vehicles With:
Push Button Start......................................121
Steering Wheel Lock - Vehicles Without:
Push Button Start......................................121
Starting a Gasoline Engine.........................121
Starting a Diesel Engine.............................124
Diesel Particulate Filter..............................124
Switching Off the Engine...........................125
Engine Block Heater....................................125
Unique Driving Character-
istics
Auto-Start-Stop............................................127
Fuel and Refueling
Safety Precautions.......................................129
Fuel Quality - Gasoline...............................130
Fuel Quality - E85........................................130
Fuel Quality - Diesel......................................131
Fuel Filler Funnel Location.........................131
Running Out of Fuel......................................131
Catalytic Converter......................................132
Refueling..........................................................133
Fuel Consumption........................................134
Transmission
Manual Transmission..................................136
Automatic Transmission............................136
Brakes
General Information....................................139
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes...........................................................139
Parking Brake.................................................140
Hill Start Assist.............................................140
Traction Control
Principle of Operation.................................142
Using Traction Control................................142
Stability Control
Principle of Operation.................................143
Using Stability Control................................143
Parking Aids
Principle of Operation.................................144
Rear Parking Aid............................................144
Front Parking Aid..........................................145
Side Sensing System...................................147
Active Park Assist.........................................149
Rear View Camera........................................155
Cruise Control
Principle of Operation.................................158
Using Cruise Control....................................158
Using Adaptive Cruise Control................159
Driving Aids
Speed Limiter - Vehicles With: Cruise
Control.........................................................166
Speed Limiter - Vehicles With: Adaptive
Cruise Control............................................167
Driver Alert.......................................................167
Lane Keeping System.................................169
Blind Spot Information System...............173
Traffic Sign Recognition..............................177
Active City Stop.............................................178
Eco Mode.........................................................179
Collision Warning System.........................180
Load Carrying
General Information....................................184
Luggage Anchor Points..............................184
Rear Under Floor Storage..........................184
Luggage Covers.............................................185
Roof Racks and Load Carriers.................185
Dog Guard.......................................................185
Towing
Towing a Trailer.............................................188
3
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Table of Contents
Trailer Sway Control....................................189
Tow Ball...........................................................189
Towing Points................................................196
Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels -
Manual Transmission..............................197
Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels -
Automatic Transmission.......................198
Driving Hints
Breaking-In....................................................200
Reduced Engine Performance...............200
Economical Driving....................................200
Cold Weather Precautions........................201
Driving Through Water................................201
Floor Mats.......................................................201
Roadside Emergencies
Hazard Warning Flashers.........................203
First Aid Kit.....................................................203
Warning Triangle..........................................203
Fuel Shutoff...................................................203
Jump Starting the Vehicle........................204
Post-Crash Alert System..........................205
Fuses
Fuse Box Locations....................................206
Fuse Specification Chart - Vehicles Built
Up To: 22-06-2015..................................207
Fuse Specification Chart - Vehicles Built
From: 23-06-2015....................................217
Changing a Fuse...........................................226
Maintenance
General Information...................................228
Opening and Closing the Hood..............228
Under Hood Overview - 1.0L
EcoBoost™................................................230
Under Hood Overview - 1.5L
EcoBoost™.................................................231
Under Hood Overview - 1.6L Duratec-16V
Ti-VCT (Sigma)/1.6L Flex Fuel...........232
Under Hood Overview - 1.5L
Duratorq-TDCi Diesel.............................233
Under Hood Overview - 1.6L
Duratorq-TDCi (DV) Diesel..................234
Under Hood Overview - 2.0L
Duratorq-TDCi (DW) Diesel................235
Engine Oil Dipstick - 1.0L
EcoBoost™................................................236
Engine Oil Dipstick - 1.5L
EcoBoost™................................................236
Engine Oil Dipstick - 1.6L Duratec-16V
Ti-VCT (Sigma)/1.6L Flex Fuel..........236
Engine Oil Dipstick - 1.5L Duratorq-TDCi
Diesel/1.6L Duratorq-TDCi (DV)
Diesel...........................................................236
Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.0L Duratorq-TDCi
(DW) Diesel...............................................237
Engine Oil Check...........................................237
Engine Coolant Check................................237
Brake Fluid Check........................................238
Clutch Fluid Check......................................239
Washer Fluid Check....................................239
Changing the 12V Battery.........................239
Checking the Wiper Blades.......................241
Changing the Wiper Blades......................241
Removing a Headlamp..............................243
Changing a Bulb...........................................243
Bulb Specification Chart..........................250
Vehicle Care
Cleaning the Exterior...................................251
Cleaning the Interior....................................251
Repairing Minor Paint Damage...............252
Cleaning the Alloy Wheels.......................252
Wheels and Tires
Temporary Mobility Kit..............................253
Tire Care..........................................................257
Using Winter Tires........................................257
Using Snow Chains.....................................257
Tire Pressure Monitoring System..........258
4
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Table of Contents
Changing a Road Wheel...........................262
Tire Pressures...............................................269
Lug Nuts..........................................................274
Capacities and Specific-
ations
Vehicle Dimensions.....................................275
Towbar Dimensions....................................276
Vehicle Identification Plate.......................277
Vehicle Identification Number................278
Capacities and Specifications - 1.0L
EcoBoost™................................................279
Capacities and Specifications - 1.5L
EcoBoost™...............................................280
Capacities and Specifications - 1.6L
Duratec-16V Ti-VCT (Sigma)/1.6L Flex
Fuel................................................................281
Capacities and Specifications - 1.5L
Duratorq-TDCi Diesel.............................283
Capacities and Specifications - 1.6L
Duratorq-TDCi (DV) Diesel.................284
Capacities and Specifications - 2.0L
Duratorq-TDCi (DW) Diesel................286
Fuel Consumption Figures.......................287
Audio System
General Information...................................288
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/
CD.................................................................290
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: SYNC.........292
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: SYNC 2......294
Digital Radio..................................................295
Digital Radio - Vehicles With: SYNC
2.....................................................................296
Audio Input Jack...........................................297
USB Port.........................................................298
Media Hub......................................................298
Audio Troubleshooting..............................299
SYNC™
General Information..................................300
Using Voice Recognition............................301
Using SYNC™ With Your Phone...........304
SYNC™ Applications and Services.......315
Using SYNC™ With Your Media
Player............................................................322
SYNC™ Troubleshooting.........................330
SYNC™ 2
General Information...................................340
Settings............................................................347
Entertainment...............................................361
Phone...............................................................370
Information....................................................378
Climate............................................................382
Navigation......................................................384
SYNC™ Troubleshooting.........................394
Appendices
Electromagnetic Compatibility..............403
End User License Agreement.................404
Type Approvals............................................426
5
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Table of Contents
6
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
Thank you for choosing Ford. We
recommend that you take some time to
get to know your vehicle by reading this
manual. The more that you know about
it, the greater the safety and pleasure you
will get from driving it.
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Note: This manual describes product
features and options available throughout
the range of available models, sometimes
even before they are generally available. It
may describe options not fitted to the
vehicle you have purchased.
Note: Some of the illustrations in this
manual may show features as used in
different models, so may appear different
to you on your vehicle.
Note: Always use and operate your vehicle
in line with all applicable laws and
regulations.
Note: Pass on this manual when selling
your vehicle. It is an integral part of your
vehicle.
This manual may qualify the location of a
component as left-hand side or right-hand
side. The side is determined when facing
forward in the seat.
Right-hand side.A
Left-hand side.B
SYMBOLS GLOSSARY
These are some of the symbols you may
see on your vehicle.
Safety alert
See Owner's Manual
Air conditioning system
Anti-lock braking system
Avoid smoking, flames or sparks
Battery
Battery acid
Brake fluid - non petroleum
based
7
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Introduction
Brake system
Cabin air filter
Check fuel cap
Child safety door lock or unlock
Child seat lower anchor
Child seat tether anchor
Cruise control
Do not open when hot
Engine air filter
Engine coolant
Engine coolant temperature
Engine oil
Explosive gas
Fan warning
Fasten safety belt
Front airbag
Front fog lamps
Fuel pump reset
Fuse compartment
Hazard warning flashers
Heated rear window
Heated windshield
Interior luggage compartment
release
Jack
Keep out of reach of children
Lighting control
Low tire pressure warning
Maintain correct fluid level
Note operating instructions
Panic alarm
8
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Introduction
Parking aid
Parking brake
Power steering fluid
Power windows front/rear
Power window lockout
Service engine soon
Side airbag
Shield the eyes
Stability control
Windshield wash and wipe
DATA RECORDING
A large number of electronic components
of your vehicle contain data storage
modules temporarily or permanently
storing technical data about the condition
of the vehicle, events and errors.
In general, this technical information
documents the condition of parts,
modules, systems or the environment:
• Operating conditions of system
components (e.g. filling levels).
• Status messages of the vehicle and its
individual components (e.g. number of
wheel revolutions/rotational speed,
deceleration, lateral acceleration).
• Malfunction and defects in important
system components (e.g. lighting and
brake system).
• Vehicle reactions in particular driving
situations (e.g. inflation of an airbag,
activation of the stability regulation
system).
• Environmental conditions (e.g.
temperature).
These data are exclusively technical and
help identification and correction of errors
as well as optimisation of vehicle
functions. Motion profiles indicating
travelled routes cannot be created with
these data.
If services are used (e.g. repair works,
service processes, warranty cases, quality
assurance), employees of the service
network (including manufacturers) are
able to read out this technical information
from the event and error data storage
modules using special diagnostic devices.
If required, you will receive further
information. After an error has been
corrected, these data are deleted from the
error storage module or they are constantly
overwritten.
When using the vehicle, situations may
occur in which these technical data related
to other information (accident report,
damages on the vehicle, witness
statements etc.) may be associated with
a specific person - possibly, with the
assistance of an expert.
9
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Introduction
Additional functions contractually agreed
upon with the client (e.g. vehicle location
in emergency cases) allow the
transmission of particular vehicle data
from the vehicle.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
RECOMMENDATION
Your vehicle has been built to the highest
standards using quality parts. We
recommend that you demand the use of
genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
whenever your vehicle requires scheduled
maintenance or repair. You can clearly
identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
by looking for the Ford, FoMoCo or
Motorcraft branding on the parts or their
packaging.
Scheduled Maintenance and
Mechanical Repairs
One of the best ways for you to make sure
that your vehicle provides years of service
is to have it maintained in line with our
recommendations using parts that
conform to the specifications detailed in
this Owner’s Manual. Genuine Ford and
Motorcraft parts meet or exceed these
specifications.
Collision Repairs
We hope that you never experience a
collision, but accidents do happen. Genuine
Ford replacement collision parts meet our
stringent requirements for fit, finish,
structural integrity, corrosion protection
and dent resistance. During vehicle
development we validate these parts
deliver the intended level of protection as
a whole system. A great way to know for
sure you are getting this level of protection
is to use genuine Ford replacement
collision parts.
Warranty on Replacement Parts
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement
parts are the only replacement parts that
benefit from a Ford Warranty. Damage
caused to your vehicle as a result of the
failure of non-Ford parts may not be
covered by the Ford Warranty. For
additional information, refer to the terms
and conditions of the Ford Warranty.
MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS
EQUIPMENT
Using mobile communications equipment
is becoming increasingly important in the
conduct of business and personal affairs.
However, you must not compromise your
own or others’ safety when using such
equipment. Mobile communications can
enhance personal safety and security when
appropriately used, particularly in
emergency situations. Safety must be
paramount when using mobile
communications equipment to avoid
negating these benefits. Mobile
communication equipment includes, but
is not limited to, cellular phones, pagers,
portable email devices, text messaging
devices and portable two-way radios.
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
10
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Introduction
FRONT EXTERIOR OVERVIEW
Fuel tank. See Refueling (page 133).A
Locks. See Locking and Unlocking (page 38).B
Exterior mirrors. See Exterior Mirrors (page 70).C
Wiper blades. See Changing the Wiper Blades (page 241).D
Engine. See Maintenance (page 228).E
Front towing point. See Towing Points (page 196).F
Front exterior lamps. See Changing a Bulb (page 243).G
Wheels and tires. Tire pressures. See Towing Points (page 196). See Changing
a Road Wheel (page 262).
H
11
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
At a Glance
REAR EXTERIOR OVERVIEW
Rear exterior lamps. See Changing a Bulb (page 243).A
High mounted stop lamp. See Changing a Bulb (page 243).B
Rear window wiper. See Changing the Wiper Blades (page 241).C
Liftgate. See Power Liftgate (page 42).D
Tire pressures. See Tire Pressures (page 269).E
Wheels and tires. See Changing a Road Wheel (page 262).F
12
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
At a Glance
VEHICLE INTERIOR OVERVIEW
Gearshift lever. See Transmission (page 136).A
Power window switches. See Power Windows (page 68).B
Safety belts. See Fastening the Safety Belts (page 25).C
Parking brake. See Parking Brake (page 140).D
Head restraints. See Head Restraints (page 104).E
Front seats. See Manual Seats (page 105).F
Temporary mobility kit. See Temporary Mobility Kit (page 253).G
Hood release lever. See Opening and Closing the Hood (page 228).H
13
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
At a Glance
INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW - LHD
Air vents. See Air Vents (page 92).A
Direction indicator lever. See Direction Indicators (page 65).B
Information display control. See Information Display Control (page 55).C
Instrument cluster. See Instrument Cluster (page 74).D
Audio control. See Audio Control (page 53).E
Wiper lever. See Wipers and Washers (page 56).F
Information and entertainment display. See SYNC™ 2 (page 340).G
Audio unit. See Audio System (page 288).H
Hazard flasher switch. See Hazard Warning Flashers (page 203).I
Climate controls. See Climate Control (page 92).J
Keyless start button. See Push Button Ignition Switch (page 118).K
Horn.L
Steering wheel adjustment. See Adjusting the Steering Wheel (page 53).M
14
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
At a Glance
Cruise control switches. See Using Cruise Control (page 158).N
Lighting control. See Lighting (page 60).O
INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW - RHD
Air vents. See Air Vents (page 92).A
Direction indicator lever. See Direction Indicators (page 65).B
Information display control. See Information Display Control (page 55).C
Instrument cluster. See Instrument Cluster (page 74).D
Audio control. See Audio Control (page 53).E
Wiper lever. See Wipers and Washers (page 56).F
Information and entertainment display. See SYNC™ 2 (page 340).G
Audio unit. See Audio System (page 288).H
Hazard flasher switch. See Hazard Warning Flashers (page 203).I
Climate controls. See Climate Control (page 92).J
15
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
At a Glance
Keyless start button. See Push Button Ignition Switch (page 118).K
Horn.L
Steering wheel adjustment. See Adjusting the Steering Wheel (page 53).M
Cruise control switches. See Using Cruise Control (page 158).N
Lighting control. See Lighting (page 60).O
16
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
At a Glance
INSTALLING CHILD SEATS
WARNINGS
Use an approved child seat to secure
children less than 59 in (150 cm) tall
on the rear seat.
NEVER use a rearward facing child
restraint on a seat protected by an
ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH
OR SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can
occur.
Read and follow the manufacturer’s
instructions when you are installing
a child seat.
Do not modify child seats in any way.
Do not hold a child on your lap when
your vehicle is moving.
WARNINGS
Do not leave children or pets
unattended in your vehicle.
If your vehicle has been involved in a
crash, have the child seats checked
by an authorized dealer.
Note: Mandatory use of child seats varies
from country to country.
Only child seats certified to ECE-R129,
ECE-R44.03 or later have been tested and
approved for use in your vehicle. A choice
of child seats are available from authorized
dealers.
Child Seats for Different Mass
Groups
Use the correct child seat as follows:
Baby Safety Seat (Group 0+)
Secure children that weigh less than 29 lb
(13 kg) in a rearward facing baby safety
seat on the rear seat.
17
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Child Safety
Child Safety Seat (Group 1)
Secure children that weigh between 29 lb
(13 kg) and 40 lb (18 kg)in a child safety
seat on the rear seat.
Booster Seats
WARNINGS
Do not install a booster seat or a
booster cushion with only the lap
strap of the safety belt.
Do not install a booster seat or a
booster cushion with a safety belt
that is slack or twisted.
Do not put the safety belt under your
child’s arm or behind your child's
back.
Do not use pillows, books or towels
to boost your child’s height.
Make sure that your children sit in an
upright position.
Note: Make sure the child seat rests tightly
against the vehicle seat. If necessary, adjust
the seat backrest to an upright position. It
may also be necessary to lift or remove the
head restraint. See Head Restraints (page
104).
Note: When using a child seat on a rear
seat, adjust the front seat in a position to
prevent contact with the rear passenger,
child feet or child legs.
Booster Seat (Group 2)
Secure children that weigh more than 33 lb
(15 kg) but are less than 59.06 in (150 cm)
tall in a booster seat or a booster cushion.
We recommend that you use a booster
seat that combines a cushion with a
backrest instead of a booster cushion only.
The raised seating position will allow you
to position the shoulder strap of the adult
safety belt over the center of your child’s
shoulder and the lap strap tightly across
your child's hips.
18
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Child Safety
Booster Cushion (Group 3)
ISOFIX Anchor Points
WARNING
Use an anti-rotation device when
using the ISOFIX system. We
recommend the use of a top tether
or support leg.
Note: When you are purchasing an ISOFIX
seat, make sure that you know the correct
mass group and ISOFIX size class for the
intended seating locations. See Child Seat
Positioning (page 20).
Your vehicle has ISOFIX anchor points that
accommodate universally approved
ISOFIX child seats.
The ISOFIX system has two rigid
attachment arms on the child seat. These
attach to anchor points on the second row
seats, where the cushion and backrest
meet. For child seats with a top tether,
tether anchor points are on the rear of the
second row seats.
Attaching a Child Seat With Top
Tethers
WARNINGS
Do not attach the top tether strap to
anything other than the correct top
tether strap anchor point.
Make sure that the top tether strap
is not slack or twisted and is properly
located on the anchor point.
Follow the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions for installing a child seat with
a top tether.
Top Tether Anchor Points
Compact C-MAX
19
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Child Safety
WARNING
If your vehicle is equipped with the
comfort seat system, slide the
second row seat forwards to gain
access to the anchor points. After installing
the ISOFIX seat, do not move the seat to
the comfort position as it could interfere
with the tether strap routing.
Grand C-MAX
The top tether anchor points are located
on the back of the rear seat.
Attaching a Child Seat With a
Support Leg
WARNINGS
Make sure the support leg is long
enough to reach the vehicle floor.
Make sure that the child seat
manufacturer lists your vehicle as
suitable for use with this type of child
seat.
Follow the child seat manufacturer's
instructions for installing a child seat with
a support leg.
CHILD SEAT POSITIONING
WARNINGS
See an authorized dealer for the
latest details relating to our
recommended child seats.
Extreme Hazard! Never use a
rearward facing child restraint on a
seat protected by an active airbag in
front of it. Death or serious injury to the
child can occur.
If you use a child seat that has a
support leg, make sure the support
leg rests securely on the floor.
If you use a child seat and a safety
belt, make sure that the safety belt
is not slack or twisted.
Make sure the child seat rests tightly
against the vehicle seat. If necessary,
adjust the seat backrest to an upright
position. It may also be necessary to lift or
remove the head restraint. See Head
Restraints (page 104).
20
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Child Safety
WARNINGS
You must reinstall the head restraint
following the removal of the child
seat. See Head Restraints (page
104).
Note: When using a child seat on a front
seat, always adjust the front passenger seat
as far back as possible. If it proves difficult
to tighten the lap section of the safety belt
without slack remaining, adjust the seat
backrest to the fully upright position and
raise the height of the seat. See Seats
(page 104).
Mass group categories
Seating positions
3210+0
46 - 79 lbs
(22 - 36 kg)
33 - 55 lbs
(15 - 25 kg)
20 - 40 lbs
(9 - 18 kg)
Up to 29
lbs (13 kg)
Up to 22
lbs (10 kg)
UF¹UF¹UF¹XX
Front passenger seat
with airbag ON
U¹U¹U¹U¹U¹
Front passenger seat
with airbag OFF
UUUUURear seats
X Not suitable for children in this mass group.
U Suitable for universal category child seats approved for use in this mass group.
U¹ Suitable for universal category child seats approved for use in this mass group. We
recommend that you secure children in a government approved child seat, on a rear seat.
UF¹ Suitable for universal category forward facing child seats approved for use in this
mass group. We recommend that you secure children in a government approved child
seat, on a rear seat.
21
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Child Safety
ISOFIX Child Seats
Mass group categories
Seating positions
10+0
Rear-
ward
facing
Forward
facing
Rearward facing
20 - 40 lbs (9 - 18
kg)
Up to 29 lbs (13 kg)
No ISOFIX
Size
class
Front passenger seat
Size type
C, D
1
A, B, B1
1
C, D, E
1
Size
class
Rear outboard seat
ISOFIX
IL
2
IL
2
, IUF
3
IL
2
Size type
No ISOFIX
Size
class
Rear center seat
Size type
IL Suitable for use with particular ISOFIX child restraints systems in the semi-universal
category. Refer to the child restraint system manufacturer vehicle recommendation list
for additional information.
IUF Suitable for use with forward facing ISOFIX child restraints systems in the universal
category.
1
The capital letters A to G define the ISOFIX size class for both universal and semi-universal
child restraints systems. You can see the identification letters on ISOFIX child restraints.
2
At the time of going to print, the recommended Group O+ ISOFIX baby safety seat is the
Britax Roemer Baby Safe.
3
At the time of going to print, the recommended Group 1 ISOFIX child seat is the Britax
Roemer Duo.
22
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Child Safety
i-Size Child Seats
Rear center seatRear outboard seatsFront passenger seat
Xi-UXi-Size Child Restraint
Systems
i-U Suitable for use with forward and rearward facing i-Size child restraint systems.
X Not suitable for use with i-Size child restraint systems.
23
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Child Safety
CHILD SAFETY LOCKS -
VEHICLES WITH: MECHANICAL
CHILD PROOF LOCKS
When these locks are set, the rear doors
cannot be opened from the inside.
The childproof locks are located on the
rear edge of each rear door and must be
set separately for each door.
Left-Hand Side
Turn counterclockwise to lock and
clockwise to unlock.
Right-Hand Side
Turn clockwise to lock and
counterclockwise to unlock.
CHILD SAFETY LOCKS -
VEHICLES WITH: REMOTE
CHILD PROOF LOCKS
Press the switch to turn them on.
Note: You cannot use the rear power
window switches with the child safety locks
on.
Press the switch again to turn them off.
24
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Child Safety
FASTENING THE SAFETY
BELTS
WARNINGS
You have not fastened the safety
belt correctly if you do not hear a
distinct click. Failure to fasten the
safety belt correctly could reduce its
effectiveness and increase the risk of injury
in a crash.
Make sure that your safety belt is
securely stored away and is not
outside your vehicle when closing the
door. Failure of an occupant to be able to
use a trapped safety belt increases the risk
of serious personal injury or death.
Pull the safety belt out steadily. It may lock
if you pull it sharply or if your vehicle is on
a slope.
Insert the tongue into the buckle until you
hear a distinct click.
To release the safety belt press the red
button on the buckle. Hold the tongue and
let the safety belt retract to its stowed
position.
Using Safety Belts During
Pregnancy
WARNING
Position the safety belt correctly for
your safety and that of your unborn
child. Do not use only the lap strap
or the shoulder strap. Failure to adjust the
safety belt correctly could reduce its
effectiveness and increase the risk of injury
in a crash.
Pregnant women should always wear their
safety belt. The lap belt portion of a
combination lap and shoulder belt should
be positioned low across the hips below
the belly and worn as tight as comfort will
allow. The shoulder belt portion of a
combination lap and shoulder belt should
be positioned to cross the middle of the
shoulder and the center of the chest.
SAFETY BELT HEIGHT
ADJUSTMENT
WARNING
Position the safety belt height
adjusters so that the belt rests
across the middle of your shoulder.
Failure to adjust the safety belt correctly
could reduce the effectiveness of the
safety belt and increase the risk of injury in
a crash.
25
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Safety Belts
To adjust the shoulder belt height, squeeze
the button and slide the height adjuster up
or down. Release the button and pull down
on the height adjuster to make sure it is
locked in place.
SAFETY BELT MINDER
WARNING
The system will only provide
protection when you use the safety
belt correctly.
The warning lamp illuminates and an
audible warning will sound when the
following conditions have been met:
• The front safety belts have not been
fastened.
• Your vehicle exceeds a relatively low
speed.
It will also illuminate and sound if a front
safety belt is unfastened when your vehicle
is moving.
If you do not fasten your safety belt the
warning switches off automatically after
approximately five minutes.
Turning the Safety Belt Minder Off
Contact an authorized dealer.
26
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Safety Belts
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Extreme Hazard! Never use a
rearward facing child restraint on a
seat protected by an active airbag in
front of it. Death or serious injury to the
child can occur.
Do not modify the front of your
vehicle in any way. This could
adversely affect deployment of the
airbags. Failure to adhere to this warning
could result in serious personal injury or
death.
Wear a safety belt and keep
sufficient distance between yourself
and the steering wheel. Only when
you use the safety belt correctly, can it hold
you in a position that allows the airbag to
achieve its optimum effect. See Sitting
in the Correct Position (page 104). Failure
to adhere to this warning could result in
serious personal injury or death.
Repairs to the steering wheel,
steering column, seats, airbags and
safety belts must be carried out by
an authorized dealer. Failure to adhere to
this warning could result in serious
personal injury or death.
Keep the areas in front of the airbags
free from obstruction. Do not affix
anything to or over the airbag covers.
In the event of a crash, hard objects could
cause serious personal injury or death.
Do not puncture the seat with sharp
objects. This could damage and
adversely affect deployment of the
airbags. Failure to adhere to this warning
could result in serious personal injury or
death.
Use seat covers designed for seats
with side airbags. Have these fitted
by an authorized dealer. Failure to
adhere to this warning could result in
serious personal injury or death.
Note: You will hear a loud bang and see a
cloud of harmless powdery residue if an
airbag deploys. This is normal.
Note: Only wipe airbag covers with a damp
cloth.
DRIVER AIRBAG
The airbag will deploy during significant
frontal collisions or collisions that are up
to 30 degrees from the left or the right. The
airbag will inflate within a few thousandths
of a second and deflate on contact with
the occupant, thus cushioning forward
body movement. During minor frontal
collisions, overturns, rear collisions and
side collisions, the airbag will not deploy.
PASSENGER AIRBAG
27
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
The passenger airbag will deploy during
significant frontal or near-frontal collisions.
The airbag will inflate within a few
thousandths of a second and deflate on
contact with the occupant, thus cushioning
forward body movement. During minor
frontal collisions, overturns, rear collisions
and side collisions, the front passenger
airbag will not deploy.
SIDE AIRBAGS
WARNING
Use seat covers designed for seats
with side airbags. Have these fitted
by an authorized dealer.
The airbags are located inside the
seatback of the front seats. There is a label
attached to the side of the seatback to
indicate this.
The airbag will deploy during significant
lateral collisions. It might also deploy
during significant frontal collisions. The
airbag will not deploy in minor lateral and
frontal collisions, rear collisions, or
overturns.
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS
The airbags are located over the front and
rear side windows.
The airbag will deploy during significant
lateral collisions. It will also deploy during
significant frontal angled collisions. The
curtain airbag will not deploy in minor
lateral and frontal collisions, rear collisions,
or overturns.
28
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
GENERAL INFORMATION ON
RADIO FREQUENCIES
Note: Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
The typical operating range for your
transmitter is approximately 33 ft (10 m).
A decrease in operating range could be
caused by:
• weather conditions
• nearby radio towers
• structures around your vehicle
• other vehicles parked next to your
vehicle.
The radio frequency used by your remote
control can also be used by other radio
transmitters, for example amateur radios,
medical equipment, wireless headphones,
wireless remote controls, cell phones,
battery chargers and alarm systems. If the
frequencies are jammed, you will not be
able to use your remote control. You can
lock and unlock the doors with the key.
Note: Make sure your vehicle is locked
before leaving it unattended.
Note: If you are in range, the remote control
will operate if you press any button
unintentionally.
Note: The remote control contains sensitive
electrical components. Exposure to moisture
or impact may cause permanent damage.
REMOTE CONTROL - VEHICLES
WITH: KEYLESS ENTRY
Intelligent Access Key
Key Blade
The intelligent access key also contains a
removable key blade that you can use to
unlock your vehicle.
To release the key blade:
1. Press and hold the buttons on the
edges to release the cover. Carefully
remove the cover.
2. Remove the key blade.
29
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
Programming a New Remote
Control
To program an additional remote control
See Security (page 48).
Changing the Remote Control
Battery
Make sure that you dispose of
old batteries in an
environmentally friendly way.
Seek advice from your local authority
regarding recycling.
1. Press and hold the buttons on the
edges to release the cover. Carefully
remove the cover.
2. Remove the key blade.
3. Use a suitable tool, for example a
screwdriver, to carefully seperate the
two halves of the remote control.
4. Twist the screwdriver in the position
shown to separate the two halves of
the remote control.
Note: Do not touch the battery contacts or
the printed circuit board with the
screwdriver.
5. Carefully prise out the battery with the
screwdriver.
6. Install a new battery (3V CR 2032) with
the + facing downwards.
7. Assemble the two halves of the remote
control.
8. Reinstall the key blade.
30
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
Note: Do not wipe off any grease on the
battery terminals or on the back surface of
the circuit board.
Note: Replacing the battery does not delete
the transmitter from the vehicle. The
transmitter should operate normally.
Locating Your Vehicle
Press the lock button on the key twice
within three seconds. The horn may sound
and the direction indicators flash.
The horn may sound twice and the
direction indicators do not flash if:
• Locking was not successful.
• Any door or the liftgate is open.
• The hood is open on vehicles with an
anti-theft alarm or remote start.
REMOTE CONTROL - VEHICLES
WITH: REMOTE FLIP KEY
Programming a New Remote
Control
Contact an authorized dealer.
Reprogramming the Unlocking
Function
Note: When you press the unlock button,
either all the doors are unlocked or only the
driver door is unlocked. Pressing the unlock
button again unlocks all the doors.
Press and hold the unlock and lock buttons
on the remote control simultaneously for
at least four seconds with the ignition off.
The direction indicators flash twice to
confirm the change.
To return to the original unlocking function,
repeat the process.
Changing the Remote Control
Battery
The remote control uses one coin-type
three-volt lithium battery CR2032 or
equivalent.
Make sure that you dispose of
old batteries in an
environmentally friendly way.
Seek advice from your local authority
about recycling old batteries.
1. Insert a suitable tool, for example a
screwdriver, in the position shown and
gently push the clip.
2. Press the clip down to release the
battery cover.
3. Carefully remove the battery cover.
31
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
Note: Do not touch the battery contacts or
the printed circuit board with the
screwdriver.
4. Turn the remote control over to remove
the battery.
5. Install a new battery with the + facing
upward.
6. Reinstall the battery cover.
Note: Do not wipe off any grease on the
battery terminals or on the back surface of
the circuit board.
Note: You do not need to reprogram the
remote control after you have replaced its
battery, it should operate normally.
Locating Your Vehicle
Press the lock button on the key twice
within three seconds. The direction
indicators flash.
The direction indicators do not flash if:
• Locking was not successful.
• Any door or the liftgate is open.
• The hood is open on vehicles with an
anti-theft alarm.
REPLACING A LOST KEY OR
REMOTE CONTROL
You can purchase replacement keys or
remote controls from an authorized dealer.
Authorized dealers can program remote
controls for your vehicle. See Replacing
a Lost Key or Remote Control (page 32).
To re-program the passive anti-theft
system see an authorized dealer.
32
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
The system allows you to program keys
with restricted driving modes to promote
good driving habits. You can use all but one
of the keys programmed to your vehicle
with these restricted modes.
Any keys that have not been programmed
are referred to as an administrator key or
admin key. These can be used to:
• Create a MyKey.
• Program configurable MyKey settings.
• Clear all MyKey features.
When you have programmed a MyKey, you
can access the following information using
the information display:
• How many admin keys and MyKeys are
programmed to your vehicle.
• The total distance your vehicle has
traveled using a MyKey.
Note: All MyKeys are programmed to the
same settings. You cannot program them
individually.
Note: For vehicles with push-button start,
when both a MyKey and an admin remote
transmitter are present, the admin remote
transmitter will be recognized by the vehicle
while switching the ignition on to start the
vehicle.
Non-Configurable Settings
The following settings cannot be changed:
• Safety belt minder. You cannot disable
this feature. The audio system will
mute when this feature is activated.
• Low fuel level warning. When the fuel
level is low, warnings will be shown in
the display followed by an audible
tone.
• Driver assist features, for example
traction control, navigation and parking
aids. These systems turn on
automatically whenever you switch the
ignition on.
Configurable Settings
You can configure MyKey settings when
you first create a MyKey. You can also
change the settings afterward with an
admin key.
The following settings can be configured
using an admin key:
• Various vehicle speed limits can be set.
Warnings will be shown in the display
followed by an audible tone when your
vehicle reaches the set speed. You
cannot override the set speed by fully
depressing the accelerator pedal.
WARNING
Do not set MyKey maximum speed
limit to a limit that will prevent the
driver from maintaining a safe speed
considering posted speed limits and
prevailing road conditions. The driver is
always responsible to drive in accordance
with local laws and prevailing conditions.
Failure to do so could result in accident or
injury.
33
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
MyKey™
• Various vehicle speed reminders can
be set. Warnings will be shown in the
display followed by an audible tone
when the set vehicle speed is
exceeded.
• Audio system maximum volume of
45%. A message will be shown in the
display when you attempt to exceed
the limited volume. Automatic volume
control will be disabled.
• Always on setting. When this is
selected you will not be able to disable
emergency assistance or the do not
disturb feature.
Note: If a MyKey and an admin key are
present, your vehicle will recognize the
admin key only.
CREATING A MYKEY
Vehicles without Keyless Starting
1. Insert the key you want to program into
the ignition.
2. Switch the ignition on.
3. Access the main menu using the
information display. Select MyKey and
press OK or the right arrow button.
4. Select Create MyKey and press OK.
5. When prompted, press and hold OK
until you see a message informing you
to label this key as a MyKey. The key
will be restricted the next time you use
it.
Note: Make sure you label the MyKey so
you can distinguish it from the admin keys.
Vehicles with Keyless Starting
1. Switch the ignition on using an admin
key.
2. Access the main menu using the
information display. Select MyKey and
press OK or the right arrow button.
3. Place the key into the backup position.
The location of your backup position is
in another chapter. See Starting and
Stopping the Engine (page 118).
4. Select Create MyKey and press OK.
5. When prompted, press and hold OK
until you see a message informing you
to label this key as a MyKey. The key
will be restricted the next time you use
it.
Note: Make sure you label the MyKey so
you can distinguish it from the admin keys.
CLEARING ALL MYKEYS
You can clear or change your MyKey
settings using the information display
control on the steering wheel. See
Information Displays (page 80).
Switch the ignition on using an admin key
or fob.
To clear all MyKeys of all MyKey settings, press the left arrow button to access
the main menu and scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.Settings
Press the OK button.MyKey
Press and hold the OK button until the following message
displays.
Clear MyKey
34
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
MyKey™
Action and DescriptionMessage
All MyKeys
Cleared
Note: When you clear your MyKeys, you remove all restrictions and return all MyKeys to
their original admin key status.
35
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
MyKey™
CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEM
STATUS
You can find information about your
programmed MyKeys by using the
information display.
MyKey Distance
Tracks the distance when drivers use a
MyKey. The only way to delete the
accumulated distance is by using an admin
key to clear all MyKeys. If the distance does
not accumulate as expected, then the
intended user is not using the MyKey, or an
admin key user recently cleared and then
recreated a MyKey.
Number of MyKeys
Indicates the number of MyKeys
programmed to your vehicle. Use this
feature to detect how many MyKeys you
have for your vehicle and determine when
all MyKeys have been deleted.
Number of Admin Keys
Indicates how many admin keys are
programmed to your vehicle. Use this
feature to determine how many admin
keys you have for your vehicle, and detect
if an additional MyKey has been
programmed.
USING MYKEY WITH REMOTE
START SYSTEMS
MyKey is not compatible with non
Ford-approved, aftermarket remote start
systems. If you choose to install a remote
start system, see an authorized dealer for
a Ford-approved remote start system.
MYKEY TROUBLESHOOTING
Potential CausesCondition
The key used to start the vehicle is not an admin key.I cannot create a MyKey.
The key used to start the vehicle is the only key. There
always has to be at least one admin key.
Vehicles with keyless start: The keyless start transmitter
is not placed in the backup position. See Starting and
Stopping the Engine (page 118).
The passive anti-theft system is disabled.
The key used to start the vehicle is not an admin key.I cannot program the
configurable settings. There are no MyKeys programmed to your vehicle. See
Creating a MyKey (page 34).
The key used to start the vehicle is not an admin key.I cannot clear the MyKeys.
There are no MyKeys programmed to your vehicle. See
Creating a MyKey (page 34).
Purchase a new key from an authorized dealer.I lost the only admin key.
36
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
MyKey™
Potential CausesCondition
Program a spare key. See Passive Anti-Theft System
(page 48).
I lost a key.
The MyKey is not being used by the intended user.The MyKey distance does
not accumulate. The MyKeys have been cleared. See Clearing All MyKeys
(page 34).
An admin transmitter is present at vehicle start.No MyKey functions with the
keyless entry transmitter. No MyKeys are created. See Creating a MyKey (page
34).
37
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
MyKey™
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
Power Door Locks
The power door lock control is on the driver
door.
Unlock.A
Lock.B
Remote Control
You can use the remote control at any time
while your vehicle is switched off.
Unlocking the Doors
Press the button to unlock all
doors. The direction indicators
will flash.
Note: You can unlock the driver's door with
the key. Use the key when the remote
control is not functioning.
Note: When you lock your vehicle for
several weeks, the remote control will be
switched off. Your vehicle must be unlocked
and started. Unlocking and starting your
vehicle once will enable the remote control.
Reprogramming the Unlocking
Function
You can reprogram the unlocking function
so that only the driver door is unlocked.
See Remote Control (page 29).
Locking the Doors
Press the button to lock all the
doors. The direction indicators
will flash.
Note: If any door or the luggage
compartment is not closed, or if the hood is
not closed on vehicles that have an
anti-theft alarm or remote start, the
direction indicators will not flash.
Double Locking the Doors
WARNING
Do not use double locking when
passengers or animals are inside your
vehicle. You will not be able to
unlock the doors from the inside if you have
double locked them.
Double locking is a theft protection feature
that prevents someone from opening the
doors from the inside. You can only double
lock the doors if they are all closed.
Press the button twice within
three seconds.
Automatic Relocking
The doors will automatically relock if you
do not open a door within 45 seconds of
unlocking the doors with the remote
control. The door locks and the alarm will
return to their previous state.
Locking and Unlocking the Doors
from Inside
Use the lock and unlock buttons located
on the driver door.
Locking and Unlocking the Doors
with the Key
Locking with the Key
Turn the top of the key toward the front of
your vehicle.
38
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Locks
Double Locking with the Key
Turn the key to the lock position twice
within three seconds.
Unlocking with the Key
Turn the top of the key toward the rear of
your vehicle.
Note: If the child safety locks are on and
you pull the interior handle, you will only
turn off the emergency locking, not the child
safety lock. You can only open the doors
using the external door handle.
Locking and Unlocking the Doors
Individually with the Key
Locking
If the central locking function fails to
operate, lock the doors individually using
the key in the position shown.
Left-Hand Side
Turn clockwise to lock.
Right-Hand Side
Turn counterclockwise to lock.
Unlocking
If the central locking function fails to
operate, unlock the driver door and then
unlock all other doors individually by
pulling the interior door handles.
Note: If the doors have been unlocked using
this method, the doors must be locked
individually until the central locking function
has been repaired.
Opening the Liftgate
With the Remote Control
Press the button twice within
three seconds.
From Outside Your Vehicle
Press the release button above the license
plate to unlatch the liftgate. Your vehicle
must be unlocked or have an intelligent
access transmitter within 3 ft (1 m) of the
liftgate.
39
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Locks
SLIDING DOOR
When the rear doors are fully open, make
sure that you do not step on the cable or
mechanism at the base of the door
aperture.
MANUAL LIFTGATE -
COMPACT MAV (5-SEATER)
WARNINGS
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a
vehicle. In a crash, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride
in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and safety belts. Make
sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and properly using a safety belt. Failure to
follow this warning could result in serious
personal injury or death.
WARNINGS
Make sure to close and latch the
liftgate to prevent drawing exhaust
fumes into your vehicle. This will also
prevent passengers and cargo from falling
out. If you must drive with the liftgate open,
keep the vents or windows open so outside
air comes into your vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning could result in serious
personal injury.
Note: Be careful when opening or closing
the liftgate in a garage or other enclosed
area to avoid damaging the liftgate.
Note: Do not hang anything, for example a
bike rack, from the glass or liftgate. This
could damage the liftgate and its
components.
Note: Do not leave the liftgate open while
driving. This could damage the liftgate and
its components.
Opening the Liftgate
Manually
Press the release button above the license
plate to unlatch the liftgate.
With the Remote Control
Press the button twice within
three seconds.
40
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Locks
Closing the Liftgate
A handle is located inside the liftgate to
help with closing.
MANUAL LIFTGATE - GRAND
MAV (5+2 SEATER)
WARNINGS
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a
vehicle. In a crash, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride
in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and safety belts. Be
sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a safety belt properly. Failure to
follow this warning could result in serious
personal injury or death.
Make sure to close and latch the
liftgate to prevent drawing exhaust
fumes into your vehicle. This will also
prevent passengers and cargo from falling
out. If you must drive with the liftgate open,
keep the vents or windows open so outside
air comes into your vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning could result in serious
personal injury.
Note: Be careful when opening or closing
the liftgate in a garage or other enclosed
area to avoid damaging the liftgate.
Note: Do not hang anything, for example a
bike rack, from the glass or liftgate. This
could damage the liftgate and its
components.
Note: Do not leave the liftgate open while
driving. This could damage the liftgate and
its components.
Opening the Liftgate
Manually
Press the button located in the top of the
liftgate pull cup handle to unlatch the
liftgate, and then pull on the outside
handle.
With the Remote Control
Press the button twice within
three seconds.
41
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Locks
Closing the Liftgate
A handle is located inside the liftgate to
help with closing.
POWER LIFTGATE
WARNINGS
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a
vehicle. In a crash, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride
in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and safety belts. Make
sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and properly using a safety belt. Failure to
follow this warning could result in serious
personal injury or death.
Make sure to close and latch the
liftgate to prevent drawing exhaust
fumes into your vehicle. This will also
prevent passengers and cargo from falling
out. If you must drive with the liftgate open,
keep the vents or windows open so outside
air comes into your vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning could result in serious
personal injury.
Keep keys out of reach of children.
Do not allow children to operate or
play near an open or moving power
liftgate. You should supervise the
operation of the power liftgate at all times.
Note: Make sure that you close the liftgate
before operating or moving the vehicle,
especially in an enclosure, like a garage or
a parking structure. You could damage the
liftgate or its components.
Note: Do not hang anything, for example a
bike rack, from the spoiler, glass or liftgate.
This could damage the liftgate and its
components.
The liftgate only operates with the
transmission in park (P).
One warning tone sounds as the liftgate
begins to power close. Three short chimes
indicate a problem with the open or close
request, caused by:
• The ignition is on and the transmission
is not in park (P).
• The battery voltage is below the
minimum operating voltage.
• The vehicle speed is at or above 3 mph
(5 km/h).
If the liftgate starts to close after it has
fully opened, this indicates there may be
excessive weight on the liftgate or a
possible gas strut failure. A repetitive
chime sounds and the liftgate closes under
control. Remove any excessive weight from
the liftgate. If the liftgate continues to
close after opening, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
Opening and Closing the Liftgate
WARNING
Make sure all persons are clear of the
power liftgate area before using the
power liftgate control.
Note: Be careful when opening or closing
the liftgate in a garage or other enclosed
area to avoid damaging the liftgate.
Note: Do not leave the liftgate open while
driving. This could damage the liftgate and
its components.
42
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Locks
From the Instrument Panel
Press the button on the
instrument panel.
With the Remote Control
Press the button twice within
three seconds.
With the Outside Control Button
Opening the Liftgate
1. Unlock the liftgate with the remote
control or power door unlock control.
If an intelligent access key is within 3 ft
(1 m) of the liftgate, the liftgate unlocks
when you press the liftgate release
button.
2. Press the control button located in the
top of the liftgate pull-cup handle.
Note: Allow the power system to open the
liftgate. Manually pushing or pulling the
liftgate may activate the system’s obstacle
detection feature and stop the power
operation or reverse its direction. Manually
interfering with the liftgate motion may also
replicate a gas strut failure.
Closing the Liftgate
WARNING
Keep clear of the liftgate when
activating the rear switch.
Press and release the button.
Stopping the Liftgate Movement
You can stop the liftgate movement by
doing any of the following:
• Pressing the liftgate control button.
• Pressing the liftgate button on the
remote control twice.
• Pressing the liftgate button on the
instrument panel.
• Pressing the exterior liftgate release
button.
• Activating the obstacle detection
feature.
• Moving your foot under and away from
the center rear bumper in a single-kick
motion.
*
*
This method only works for vehicles with
the hands-free liftgate feature.
Setting the Liftgate Open Height
1. Open the liftgate.
43
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Locks
2. Stop the liftgate movement by pressing
the control button on the liftgate when
it reaches the desired height.
Note: Once the liftgate has stopped
moving, you can also manually move it to
the desired height.
3. Press and hold the liftgate control
button on the liftgate until you hear a
chime, indicating programming is
complete.
Note: You can only use the liftgate control
button to program the height.
Note: You cannot program the height if the
liftgate position is too low.
The new open liftgate height is recalled
when the power liftgate is opened. To
change the programmed height, repeat the
above procedure. Once you open the
power liftgate, you can manually move it
to a different height.
Note: The system recalls the new
programmed height until you reprogram it,
even if you disconnect the battery.
When operating the power liftgate after
you have programmed a lower height than
full-open, you can fully open the liftgate
by manually pushing it upward to the
maximum open position.
Obstacle Detection
When Closing
The system stops when it detects an
obstacle. Two short tones sound and the
system reverses to open. Once you remove
the obstacle, you can power close the
liftgate.
Note: Entering your vehicle while the
liftgate is closing can cause your vehicle to
bounce and activate obstacle detection. To
prevent this, let the power liftgate close
completely before you enter your vehicle.
Before driving off, check the instrument
cluster for a liftgate or door ajar message or
warning indicator. Failure to do this could
result in unintentionally leaving the liftgate
open while driving.
When Opening
The system stops when it detects an
obstacle and two short tones sound. Once
you remove the obstacle, you can continue
to operate the liftgate.
HANDS-FREE POWER
LIFTGATE
WARNINGS
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a
vehicle. In a crash, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride
in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and safety belts. Make
sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and properly using a safety belt. Failure to
follow this warning could result in serious
personal injury or death.
Make sure to close and latch the
liftgate to prevent drawing exhaust
fumes into your vehicle. This will also
prevent passengers and cargo from falling
out. If you must drive with the liftgate open,
keep the vents or windows open so outside
air comes into your vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning could result in serious
personal injury.
Keep keys out of reach of children.
Do not allow children to play near an
open or moving power liftgate.
44
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Locks
Note: Do not hang anything, for example
a bike rack, from the glass or liftgate. This
could damage the liftgate and its
components.
Note: Be careful when opening or closing
the liftgate in a garage or other enclosed
area to avoid damaging the liftgate.
Note: Stand clear of the liftgate area once
the power liftgate begins to open or close.
Opening and Closing the Liftgate
The intelligent access key must be within
3 ft (1 m) of your vehicle.
1. Move your foot under and away from
the rear bumper detection area in a
single-kick motion. Do not move your
foot sideways or the sensors may not
detect the motion.
2. The liftgate opens or closes
automatically.
Note: Allow the power system to open or
close the liftgate. Manually pushing or
pulling the liftgate may activate the
obstacle detection feature and stop the
power operation.
Note: Splashing water may cause the
hands-free liftgate to open. Keep the
intelligent access key away from the rear
bumper detection area while washing your
vehicle.
Note: Switching the ignition on or off while
the liftgate is closing may cause the liftgate
to reverse to the fully open position.
Note: You can also open or close the power
liftgate using the remote control or power
liftgate control buttons. See Power
Liftgate (page 42).
Setting the Liftgate Open Height
See Power Liftgate (page 42).
KEYLESS ENTRY
General Information
The system will not function if:
• Your vehicle battery has no charge.
• The passive key battery has no charge.
• The passive key frequencies are
jammed.
Note: If the system does not function, you
will need to use the key blade to lock and
unlock your vehicle.
The system allows you to operate your
vehicle without the use of a key or remote
control.
45
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Locks
Passive locking and unlocking requires a
valid passive key to be located within one
of the three external detection ranges.
These are located approximately five feet
(1.5 meters) from the front door handles
and the liftgate.
Note: The system may not function if the
passive key is close to metal objects or
electronic devices, for example keys or a cell
phone.
Passive Key
Your vehicle can be locked and unlocked
using the passive key. You can also use the
passive key as a remote control to lock and
unlock your vehicle. See Locking and
Unlocking (page 38).
Locking Your Vehicle
Note: Your vehicle does not automatically
lock. If you do not touch a locking sensor
your vehicle will remain unlocked.
Locking buttons are located on each of the
front doors.
For central locking and to arm the alarm,
press a locking button once.
For double locking and to arm the alarm,
press a locking button twice within three
seconds.
Note: When locking your vehicle, do not
grip the door handle.
Note: Keep the door handle surface clean
to make sure the system operates correctly.
Note: Your vehicle will remain locked for
approximately one second. When the delay
period is over, you can open the doors again,
provided the passive key is within the
respective detection range.
Two short flashes of the direction
indicators confirms that all the doors and
the liftgate have been locked and that the
alarm has been armed.
Liftgate
The liftgate cannot be closed and will
reopen if the passive key is located inside
the luggage compartment with the doors
locked.
Note: If a second valid passive key is
located within the liftgate detection range,
the liftgate can be closed.
46
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Locks
Unlocking Your Vehicle
Pull an exterior door handle to unlock and
open the door. Do not touch the lock
sensor on the front of the handle.
One long flash of the direction indicators
confirms that all the doors and the liftgate
have been unlocked and that the alarm
has been disarmed.
Note: A valid passive key must be located
within the detection range of that door.
Unlocking Only the Driver's Door
You can program the system so that only
the driver door is unlocked. See Locking
and Unlocking (page 38).
If the unlocking function is reprogrammed
so that only the driver door is unlocked the
following will occur:
• If the driver’s door is the first door
which is opened, the other doors will
remain locked. All the other doors can
be unlocked from inside your vehicle
by pressing the unlock button located
on the driver's and front passenger's
door. Doors can be unlocked
individually by pulling the interior door
handles on those doors.
• If the front passenger's door is the first
door which is opened, all the doors and
the liftgate will be unlocked.
Disabled Keys
Any keys left inside your vehicle interior
when it is locked will be disabled.
You cannot use a disabled key to switch
the ignition on or start the engine.
You must enable all passive keys again in
order to use them. To enable all your
passive keys, unlock your vehicle using a
passive key that has not been disabled or
the remote control unlocking function. All
passive keys will then be enabled if you
switch the ignition on or you start your
vehicle with a valid key.
Note: You can still start your vehicle when
the passive key is in the back-up position.
See Push Button Ignition Switch (page
118).
Locking and Unlocking the Doors
with the Key Blade
1. Carefully remove the cover.
2. Remove the key blade and insert it into
the lock.
Note: Only the driver's door handle has a
lock cylinder.
47
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Locks
PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT
SYSTEM
Principle of Operation
The system prevents someone from
starting the engine with an incorrectly
coded key.
Note: Do not leave correctly coded keys in
the vehicle. Always take your keys and lock
all doors when leaving the vehicle.
Coded Keys
If you lose a key, you can obtain a
replacement from an authorized dealer. If
possible, provide them with the key
number from the tag provided with the
original keys. You can also obtain extra
keys from an authorized dealer.
Note: Have all of your remaining keys
erased and recoded if you lose a key. Have
replacement keys coded together with
recoding your remaining keys. See an
authorized dealer for further information.
Note: Do not shield your keys with metal
objects. This may prevent the receiver from
recognizing a coded key.
Arming the Engine Immobilizer
When you switch the ignition off the engine
immobilizer will arm automatically after a
short time.
Disarming the Engine Immobilizer
When you switch the ignition on the engine
immobilizer will disarm automatically if a
correctly coded key is used.
If you are unable to start your vehicle with
a correctly coded key, have your vehicle
checked by an authorized dealer.
ANTI-THEFT ALARM -
VEHICLES WITH: INTEGRAL
BATTERY
Alarm System
WARNING
Do not arm the alarm with full guard
if passengers, animals or other
moving objects are inside your
vehicle.
Perimeter Alarm
The perimeter alarm is a deterrent against
unauthorized access to your vehicle
through the doors and the hood.
Interior Sensors
Note: Do not cover up the interior lamp unit
sensors.
The sensors act as a deterrent against
unauthorized access by sensing any
movement within your vehicle.
48
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Security
Battery Back-up Sounder
The battery back-up sounder is an
additional alarm system, which sounds a
siren if your vehicle battery or the battery
back-up sounder is disconnected. When
you lock your vehicle the system is armed.
The sounder has its own battery and will
sound an alarm siren even if someone
disconnects your vehicle battery or the
battery back-up sounder itself.
Triggering the Alarm
Once armed, the alarm is triggered in any
of the following ways:
• If someone opens a door, the liftgate
or the hood without a valid key or
remote control.
• If someone removes the audio or
navigation system.
• If you switch your vehicle on without a
correctly coded key.
• If the interior sensors detect movement
within your vehicle.
• On vehicles with a battery back-up
sounder, if someone disconnects your
vehicle battery or the battery back-up
sounder itself.
If the alarm is triggered, the alarm horn will
sound for 30 seconds and the hazard
warning flasher will flash for five minutes.
Any further attempts to perform one of the
above sounds the alarm again.
Full and Reduced Guard
Full Guard
Full guard is the standard setting.
In full guard, the interior sensors are on
when you arm the alarm.
Reduced Guard
In reduced guard, the interior sensors are
off when you arm the alarm.
Selecting Full or Reduced Guard
You can select full or reduced guard using
the information display. See General
Information (page 80).
Ask on Exit (If Equipped)
You can set the information display to ask
you each time which level of guard you
wish to set.
Using the information display controls, scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.Settings
Press the OK button.Vehicle settings
Press the OK button.Alarm
Press the OK button.Ask on exit
Appears in the information display each time you switch your
vehicle off.
Reduced
If you wish to arm the alarm with reduced guard, press the
OK button when this message appears.
49
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Security
Action and DescriptionMessage
If you wish to arm the alarm with full guard, leave your vehicle
without pressing the OK button.
Note: Selecting reduced guard does not set the alarm permanently to reduced guard. It
sets it to reduced guard only for the current locking cycle.
Arming the Alarm
To arm the alarm, lock your vehicle. See
Locks (page 38).
Disarming the Alarm
Vehicles Without Keyless Entry
Perimeter Alarm
Disarm and silence the alarm by unlocking
the doors with the key and switching your
vehicle on with a correctly coded key or
unlocking the doors with the remote
control.
Category One Alarm
Disarm and silence the alarm by unlocking
the doors with the key and switching your
vehicle on with a correctly coded key within
12 seconds or unlocking the doors with the
remote control.
Vehicles with Keyless Entry
Note: A valid passive key must be located
within the detection range of that door for
keyless entry. See Keyless Entry (page 45).
Perimeter Alarm
Disarm and silence the alarm by unlocking
the doors and switching your vehicle on or
unlocking the doors with the remote
control.
Category One Alarm
Disarm and silence the alarm by unlocking
the doors and switching your vehicle on
within 12 seconds or unlocking the doors
or the liftgate with the remote control.
ANTI-THEFT ALARM -
VEHICLES WITH: INTERIOR
SENSOR
Alarm System
WARNING
Do not arm the alarm with full guard
if passengers, animals or other
moving objects are inside your
vehicle.
Perimeter Alarm
The perimeter alarm is a deterrent against
unauthorized access to your vehicle
through the doors and the hood. It also
protects the audio unit.
Interior Sensors
50
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Security
Note: Do not cover up the interior lamp unit
sensors.
The sensors act as a deterrent against
unauthorized intrusion by sensing any
movement inside your vehicle.
Triggering the Alarm
Once armed, the alarm is triggered in any
of the following ways:
• If someone opens a door, the liftgate
or the hood without a valid key or
remote control.
• If someone removes the audio unit or
navigation system.
• If you switch your vehicle on without a
correctly coded key.
• If the interior sensors detect movement
within your vehicle.
If the alarm is triggered, the alarm horn will
sound for 30 seconds and the hazard
warning flasher will flash for five minutes.
Any further attempts to perform one of the
above will trigger the alarm again.
Full and Reduced Guard
Full Guard
Full guard is the standard setting.
In full guard, the interior sensors are on
when you arm the alarm.
Reduced Guard
In reduced guard, the interior sensors are
off when you arm the alarm.
Selecting Full or Reduced Guard
You can select full or reduced guard using
the information display. See General
Information (page 80).
Ask on Exit (If Equipped)
You can set the information display to ask
you each time which level of guard you
wish to set.
Using the information display controls, scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.Settings
Press the OK button.Vehicle settings
Press the OK button.Alarm
Press the OK button.Ask on exit
Appears in the information display each time you switch your
vehicle off.
Reduced guard
If you wish to arm the alarm with reduced guard, press the
OK button when this message appears.
If you wish to arm the alarm with full guard, leave your vehicle
without pressing the OK button.
Note: Selecting reduced guard does not set the alarm permanently to reduced guard. It
sets it to reduced guard only for the current locking cycle.
51
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Security
Arming the Alarm
To arm the alarm, lock your vehicle. See
Locks (page 38).
Disarming the Alarm
Vehicles Without Keyless Entry
Disarm and silence the alarm by unlocking
the doors with the key and switching your
vehicle on with a correctly coded key or
unlocking the doors with the remote
control.
Vehicles with Keyless Entry
Note: A valid passive key must be located
within the detection range of that door for
keyless entry. See Keyless Entry (page 45).
Disarm and silence the alarm by unlocking
the doors and switching your vehicle on or
unlocking the doors with the remote
control.
ANTI-THEFT ALARM -
VEHICLES WITH: PERIMETER
ALARM
The perimeter alarm is a deterrent against
unauthorized access to your vehicle
through the doors and the hood. It also
protects the audio unit.
If the alarm is triggered, the alarm horn will
sound and the hazard warning flasher will
flash.
Take all remote controls to an authorized
dealer if there is any potential alarm
problem with your vehicle.
Arming the Alarm
To arm the alarm, lock your vehicle. See
Locks (page 38).
Disarming the Alarm
Vehicles Without Keyless Entry
Disarm and silence the alarm by unlocking
the doors with the key and switching your
vehicle on with a correctly coded key or
unlocking the doors with the remote
control.
Vehicles With Keyless Entry
Note: A valid passive key must be located
within the detection range of that door for
keyless entry. See Keyless Entry (page 45).
Disarm and silence the alarm by unlocking
the doors and switching your vehicle on or
unlocking the doors with the remote
control.
52
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Security
ADJUSTING THE STEERING
WHEEL
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel
when your vehicle is moving.
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the
correct position. See Sitting in the Correct
Position (page 104).
1. Unlock the steering column.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired
position.
3. Lock the steering column.
AUDIO CONTROL
Select the required source on the audio
unit.
You can operate the following functions
with the control:
Type One
Volume up.A
Seek up or next.B
Volume down.C
Seek down or previous.D
53
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Steering Wheel
Type Two
Volume up.A
Seek up or next.B
Volume down.C
Seek down or previous.D
Press to select source.E
Seek, Next or Previous
Press the seek button to:
• Tune the radio to the next or previous
stored preset.
• Play the next or the previous track.
Press and hold the seek button to:
• Tune the radio to the next station up
or down the frequency band.
• Seek through a track.
VOICE CONTROL
Press the button to select or deselect voice
control. See Using Voice Recognition
(page 301).
CRUISE CONTROL
Type 1
54
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Steering Wheel
Type 2
See Cruise Control (page 158).
INFORMATION DISPLAY
CONTROL
See General Information (page 80).
HEATED STEERING WHEEL
Press the button to switch the system on.
The LED on the switch illuminates when
the system is on.
Note: The system only operates when the
engine is running.
Press the button to switch the system off.
The system automatically controls the
temperature to avoid overheating.
Under high interior temperature conditions,
there may be no perceived warming. This
is normal and is not a sign of a system
fault.
55
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Steering Wheel
WINDSHIELD WIPERS
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before
you switch the windshield wipers on.
Note: Make sure you switch the windshield
wipers and vehicle power off before using
an automatic car wash.
Note: If streaks or smears appear on the
windshield, clean the windshield and the
wiper blades. See Checking the Wiper
Blades (page 241). If that does not resolve
the issue, install new wiper blades. See
Changing the Wiper Blades (page 241).
Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry
windshield. This may scratch the glass,
damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper
motor to burn out. Always use the
windshield washers before wiping a dry
windshield.
Single wipe.A
Intermittent wipe.B
Normal wipe.C
High-speed wipe.D
Note: Move to position O marked on the
wiper lever to switch off.
Intermittent Wipe
Short-wipe interval.A
Intermittent wipe.B
Long-wipe interval.C
Push the wiper lever up to switch the
wipers on, and then use the rotary control
to adjust the intermittent wipe interval.
Speed Dependent Wipers (If Equipped)
When your vehicle speed increases, the
interval between wipes decreases.
AUTOWIPERS
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before
switching on the windshield wipers.
Note: Check your wipers before you enter
a car wash to make sure you switched them
off.
The autowipers feature uses a rain sensor.
You can find it in the area around the
interior mirror. The rain sensor monitors
the amount of moisture on the windshield
and automatically turns on the wipers. It
adjusts the wiper speed by the amount of
moisture that the sensor detects on the
windshield.
56
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Wipers and Washers
Highest sensitivity.A
On.B
Lowest sensitivity.C
Switch the autowipers on by moving the
wiper lever up to the first position.
Switch the autowipers off by moving the
wiper lever down.
Use the rotary control to adjust the
sensitivity of the rain sensor:
• Rotate the control down to low
sensitivity, and the wipers turn on when
the rain sensor detects a large amount
of moisture on the windshield.
• When you move the wiper lever up
to the first position and the
autowiper system is on, the
autowiper sensitivity setting adjusts
the wiper speed according to the
moisture on the windshield only.
• When you lower the sensitivity, the
wipers remain in their ready
position only. They do not wipe the
windshield automatically unless
the sensor detects moisture.
• Move the wiper lever position up to
the second position to wipe the
windshield on-demand.
• Rotate the control up to high
sensitivity, and the wipers turn on when
the rain sensor detects a small amount
of moisture on the windshield.
• When you set the wiper control to
a higher sensitivity, the wipers wipe
the windshield once.
• Remember to move the wiper lever
position up to the second position
to wipe the windshield on-demand.
The autowipers feature is active and ready
when the wiper lever is in the first position
and selected in the information display.
You can change the autowipers feature to
intermittent wipers through the
information display. See General
Information (page 80).
57
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Wipers and Washers
Note: Check your wiper function in the
information display. See General
Information (page 80). The autowipers
feature functions only when you select the
menu choice in the information display and
you move the wiper lever up to the first
position. The autowipers feature then
remains on in the information display menu
until you change it to intermittent wipe.
Note: If you switch autolamps on in
conjunction with autowipers, your low beam
headlamps turn on automatically when the
rain sensor activates the windshield wipers
continuously. See Autolamps (page 61).
Keep the outside of the windshield clean.
The rain sensor is very sensitive. If the area
around the mirror is dirty, then the wipers
may operate if dirt, mist or insects hit the
windshield.
Wet or winter driving conditions with ice,
snow or salty road mist can cause
inconsistent and unexpected wiping or
smearing. In these conditions, you can do
the following to help keep your windshield
clear:
• Lower the sensitivity of the autowipers
to reduce the amount of smearing.
• Switch to normal or high-speed wipe
by moving the wiper lever up.
• Switch the autowipers off and switch
intermittent mode on through the
information display. See General
Information (page 80).
• Switch the autowipers off by moving
the wiper lever down.
Note: Clean the windshield and wiper
blades if they begin to leave streaks or
smears. If that does not resolve the issue,
install new wiper blades. See Changing
the Wiper Blades (page 241).
WINDSHIELD WASHERS
Note: Do not operate the washers when
the washer reservoir is empty. This may
cause the washer pump to overheat.
To operate the washers and spray the
windshield, pull the lever toward you.
When you release the lever, the wipers will
operate for a short time.
REAR WINDOW WIPER AND
WASHERS
Rear Window Wiper
Note: Make sure you switch the rear
window wiper and ignition off before using
an automatic car wash.
Intermittent wipe.A
Low speed wipe.B
Off.C
58
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Wipers and Washers
Press the top of the button to switch
intermittent wipe on. Press the top of the
button again to switch low speed wipe on.
Press the bottom of the button to switch
the rear window wiper off.
When you switch on the front wipers and
move the gearshift lever to reverse (R),
rear intermittent wipe automatically turns
on.
Rear Window Washer
Push the lever away from you to operate
the rear window washer. When you release
the lever, wiping continues for a short
period of time.
HEADLAMP WASHERS
When the headlamps are on, the
headlamp washers will operate with the
windshield washers.
Note: The headlamp washers will not
operate every time you use the windshield
washers. This is to prevent the washer fluid
reservoir from emptying quickly.
59
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Wipers and Washers
GENERAL INFORMATION
Condensation in Lamp Assemblies
Exterior lamps have vents to
accommodate normal changes in air
pressure.
Condensation can be a natural by-product
of this design. When moist air enters the
lamp assembly through the vents, there is
a possibility that condensation can occur
when the temperature is cold. When
normal condensation occurs, a fine mist
can form on the interior of the lens. The
fine mist eventually clears and exits
through the vents during normal operation.
Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours
under dry weather conditions.
Examples of acceptable condensation are:
• The presence of a fine mist (no streaks,
drip marks or large droplets).
• A fine mist covers less than 50% of the
lens.
Examples of unacceptable condensation
are:
• A water puddle inside the lamp.
• Streaks, drip marks or large droplets
present on the interior of the lens.
If you see any unacceptable condensation,
have your vehicle checked by an authorized
dealer.
LIGHTING CONTROL
OffA
Parking lamps, instrument panel
lamps, license plate lamps and
tail lamps
B
HeadlampsC
High Beams
Push the lever away from you to switch
the high beam on.
60
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Lighting
Push the lever forward again or pull the
lever toward you to switch the high beams
off.
Headlamp Flasher
Slightly pull the lever toward you and
release it to flash the headlamps.
AUTOLAMPS
The headlamps will switch on and off
automatically in low light situations or
during poor weather.
Note: It may be necessary to switch your
headlamps on manually in severe weather
conditions.
Note: If you have autolamps on, you can
only switch the high beam on once
autolamps has switched the headlamps on.
Note: If you switch autolamps on in
conjunction with autowipers, low beam
headlamps will illuminate automatically
when the rain sensor activates the
windshield wipers continuously.
INSTRUMENT LIGHTING
DIMMER
HEADLAMP EXIT DELAY
After you switch the ignition off, you can
switch the headlamps on by pulling the
direction indicator lever toward you. You
will hear a short tone. The headlamps will
switch off automatically after three
minutes with any door open or 30 seconds
after the last door has been closed. You
can cancel this feature by pulling the
direction indicator toward you again or
switching the ignition on.
61
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Lighting
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS
WARNING
Always remember to switch your
headlamps on in low light situations
or during inclement weather. The
system does not activate the tail lamps
and may not provide adequate lighting
during these conditions. Failure to activate
your headlamps under these conditions
may result in a collision.
To switch the system on:
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Switch the lighting control to the off or
autolamp position.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM
CONTROL
WARNINGS
The system does not relieve you of
your responsibility to drive with due
care and attention. A manual
override may be necessary if the system
fails to switch the high beam on or off.
A manual override may be required
when approaching other road users
such as cyclists.
Do not use the system in fog.
In cold and severe weather
conditions the system may not
function. A manual override may be
necessary in these cases.
The system may not deactivate the
high beam if the lights of oncoming
vehicles are hidden by obstacles (for
example guard rails).
WARNINGS
Check and replace wiper blades
regularly to ensure the camera
sensor has a clear view through the
windscreen. Replacement wiper blades
must be the correct length.
Note: Keep the windscreen free from
obstructions such as bird droppings, insects
and snow or ice.
Note: Reflective road signs may be
detected as oncoming traffic and the
headlamps will be switched to low beam.
Note: Always fit Ford Original Parts when
replacing headlamp bulbs. Other bulbs may
reduce system performance.
The system will automatically switch on
high beams if it is dark enough and no other
traffic is present. If it detects an
approaching vehicle’s headlamps or tail
lamps, or street lighting ahead the system
will switch off high beam before it can
distract other road users. Low beam will
remain on.
A camera sensor is centrally mounted
behind the windshield of your vehicle. This
monitors conditions continuously to decide
when to switch the high beams on and off.
Once the system is active the high beam
will switch on if:
• It is dark enough to require the use of
high beams and
• there is no traffic or street lighting
ahead and
• vehicle speed is greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
The high beam will switch off if:
• The rear fog lamps are switched on.
• The ambient light is high enough that
high beam is not required.
• An approaching vehicle's headlamps
or tail lamps are detected.
62
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Lighting
• Street lighting is detected.
• Vehicle speed falls below 19 mph
(30 km/h).
• The camera sensor is too hot or
becomes blocked.
Activating the System
Switch the system on using the information
display. See Information Displays (page
80). Turn the switch to the autolamps
position. See Autolamps (page 61).
The indicator will illuminate to confirm
when the system is ready to assist.
Manually Overriding the System
Push or pull the lever to switch between
high and low beam.
FRONT FOG LAMPS
Press the control to switch the fog lamps
on or off.
You can switch the fog lamps on when the
lighting control is in any position except
off.
REAR FOG LAMPS
WARNINGS
Only use the rear fog lamps when
visibility is restricted to less than 164
feet (50 meters).
Do not use the rear fog lamps when
it is raining or snowing and visibility
is more than 164 feet (50 meters).
Press the control to switch the fog lamps
on or off.
You can switch the fog lamps on when
either the front fog lamps or low beam
headlamps are on.
63
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Lighting
HEADLAMP LEVELING
Note: Vehicles with Xenon headlamps have
automatic headlamp leveling.
Raised headlamp beamsA
Lowered headlamp beamsB
Adjust the level of the headlamps
according to the load you are carrying in
your vehicle.
Recommended Headlamp Leveling Switch Positions
Switch position
Load in luggage
compartment
*
Load
Second row seatsFront seats
0--1-2
0 (0.5)
**
--1-2
1 (0.5)
**
-
31-2
3 (0.5)
**
Max
*
31-2
4 (1.5)
**
Max
*
-1
*
See Vehicle Identification Plate (page 277).
**
Vehicles with active suspension.
64
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Lighting
CORNERING LAMPS
Headlamp beamA
Cornering lamp beamB
The cornering lamps illuminate the inside
of a corner when you are turning.
DIRECTION INDICATORS
Push the lever up or down to use the
direction indicators.
Note: Tap the lever up or down to make the
direction indicators flash three times to
indicate a lane change.
INTERIOR LAMPS
The lamps turn on when:
• You open any door.
• You press a remote control button.
• You press the buttons on the map
lamps.
65
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Lighting
Front Interior Lamps (If Equipped)
Note: Press the door function switch to
switch off interior lights when you open any
door. The indicator lamp illuminates amber
when the door function is off. When the door
function is off and you open a door, the
courtesy and door lamps stay off. Press the
switch again to switch the door function
back on. The indicator lamp illuminates
white when the door function is on. When
the door function is on and you open a door,
the courtesy and door lamps switch on.
Center Mounted Lamp
Left-hand side map lamp.A
Right-hand side map lamp.B
Door function switch.C
All lamps on switch.D
Side Mounted Lamp
Map lamp.A
Door function switch.B
All lamps on switch.C
AMBIENT LIGHTING
The ambient lighting system illuminates
the interior with a choice of several colors.
The ambient lighting control is located in
the overhead console.
Color paletteA
Control knobB
Search modeC
66
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Lighting
Rotate B past the first detent to switch on
and adjust to the desired brightness.
Press A to cycle through the color choices.
Press C to switch on all interior lamps and
the ambient lighting. Press C again to
switch off the interior lamps and return the
ambient lighting to the previously selected
color.
The ambient lighting will switch on when
the following conditions have been met:
• you switch the ignition on
• you switch the headlamps on
The ambient lighting will remain on until
you switch the ignition off and one of the
following conditions have been met:
• you lock your vehicle
• the accessory delay timer expires.
67
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Lighting
POWER WINDOWS
WARNINGS
Do not leave children unattended in
your vehicle and do not let them play
with the power windows. They may
seriously injure themselves.
When closing the power windows,
you should verify they are free of
obstructions and make sure that
children and pets are not in the proximity
of the window openings.
Press the control to open the window.
Lift the control to close the window.
Note: You may hear a pulsing noise when
just one of the windows is open. Lower the
opposite window slightly to reduce this
noise.
One-Touch Down (If Equipped)
Press the control fully and release it. Press
again or lift it to stop the window.
One-Touch Up (If Equipped)
Lift the control fully and release it. Press
or lift it again to stop the window.
Window Lock
Press the control to lock or unlock the rear
window controls. It lights when the rear
window controls lock.
Bounce-Back (If Equipped)
The window stops automatically while
closing. It reverses some distance if there
is an obstacle in the way.
Overriding the Bounce-Back Feature
WARNING
When you override the bounce-back
feature the window will not reverse
if it detects an obstacle. Take care
when closing the windows to avoid
personal injury or damage to your vehicle.
Proceed as follows to override this
protection feature when there is a
resistance, for example in winter:
68
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
1. Close the window twice until it reaches
the point of resistance and let it
reverse.
2. Close the window a third time to the
point of resistance. You disabled the
bounce-back feature and you can now
close the window manually. The
window travels past the point of
resistance and you can close it fully.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible if the window does not close after
the third attempt.
Resetting the Bounce-Back Feature
WARNING
The bounce-back feature remains
turned off until you reset the
memory.
If you have disconnected the battery, you
must reset the bounce-back memory
separately for each window.
1. Lift and hold the control until the
window is fully closed.
2. Release the control.
3. Lift and hold the control again for a few
seconds.
4. Release the control.
5. Lift and hold the control again for a few
seconds.
6. Release the control.
7. Press and hold the control until the
window is fully open.
8. Lift and hold the control until the
window is fully closed.
9. Release the control.
10. Open the window and then try to
close it automatically.
11. Repeat the procedure if the window
does not close automatically.
Accessory Delay (If Equipped)
You can use the window controls for
several minutes after switching off the
ignition or until opening either front door.
GLOBAL OPENING AND
CLOSING
You can also operate the power windows
with the ignition off using the global
opening and global closing function.
Note: Global opening will only operate for
a short period of time after you have
unlocked your vehicle using the remote
control.
Note: Global closing will only operate if you
have set the memory correctly for each
window. See Power Windows (page 68).
Global Opening (If Equipped)
To open all the windows:
1. Press and release the remote control
unlock button.
2. Press and hold the remote control
unlock button for at least three
seconds.
69
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
Press the lock or unlock button to stop the
opening function.
Global Closing (If Equipped)
Vehicles Without Keyless Entry
WARNING
Take care when using global closing.
In an emergency, press the lock or
unlock button immediately to stop.
To close all the windows, press and hold
the remote control lock button for at least
three seconds. Press the lock or unlock
button to stop the closing function. The
bounce-back function is also on during
global closing.
Vehicles With Keyless Entry
WARNING
Take care when using global closing.
In an emergency, touch a door
handle lock sensor to stop.
Note: Global closing can be switched on
using the driver’s door handle. Global
opening and closing can also be switched
on using the buttons on the passive key.
To close all the windows, press and hold
the driver’s door handle for at least three
seconds. The bounce-back function is also
on during global closing.
EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Power Exterior Mirrors
WARNING
Do not adjust the mirrors when your
vehicle is moving.
Left-hand mirrorA
OffB
Right-hand mirrorC
70
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
Press the arrows to adjust the mirror.
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors
Push the mirror toward the door window
glass. Make sure that you fully engage the
mirror in its support when returning it to its
original position.
Power-Folding Mirrors
When you switch the ignition on, you can
use the power-folding feature. Press the
control to fold or unfold the mirrors.
Note: You can operate the mirrors (mirror
tilting and folding) for several minutes after
switching off the ignition. When you open a
door, the power-folding feature
automatically turns off.
Press the button again to stop and reverse
the direction of movement.
Note: Continuous folding and unfolding of
the mirrors will cause them to overheat and
shut down for a short time. This is to avoid
permanent damage.
Heated Exterior Mirrors (If Equipped)
See Heated Windows and Mirrors (page
99).
Blind Spot Monitor (If Equipped)
See Blind Spot Information System
(page 173).
INTERIOR MIRROR
WARNING
Do not adjust the mirror when your
vehicle is moving.
Note: Do not clean the housing or glass of
any mirror with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum or ammonia-based cleaning
products.
You can adjust the interior mirror to your
preference. Some mirrors also have a
second pivot point. This lets you move the
mirror head up or down and from side to
side.
Pull the tab below the mirror toward you
to reduce glare at night.
Auto-Dimming Mirror (If Equipped)
Note: Do not block the sensors on the front
and back of the mirror. Mirror performance
may be affected. A rear center passenger or
raised rear center head restraint may also
block light from reaching the sensor.
71
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
The mirror will dim automatically to reduce
glare when bright lights are detected from
behind your vehicle. It will automatically
return to normal reflection when you select
reverse gear to make sure you have a clear
view when backing up.
SUN VISORS
Rotate the sun visor toward the side
window and extend it rearward for extra
shade.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror (If Equipped)
Lift the cover to switch the lamp on.
SUN SHADES
WARNINGS
Do not let children play with the sun
shade or leave them unattended in
the vehicle. They may seriously hurt
themselves.
When closing the sun shade, you
should verify that it is free of
obstructions and make sure that
children and pets are not in the proximity
of the sunshade.
The control is located in the overhead
console.
The sun shade has a one-touch open and
close feature. To stop motion during
one-touch operation, press the control a
second time.
Opening and Closing the Sun
Shade
Fully press and release the front of the
control to open the sun shade.
Fully press and release the rear of the
control to close the sun shade.
Bounce-Back
The sun shade will stop automatically
while closing. It will reverse some distance
if there is an obstacle in the way.
72
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
Sun Shade Relearning
WARNING
The bounce-back function is not
active during this procedure. Make
sure that there are no obstacles in
the way of the moving sun shade.
Note: You must start the relearning process
within 30 seconds of switching the ignition
on.
In case the sun shade no longer opens or
closes properly, follow this relearning
procedure:
1. Press the front of the control to the first
action point twice and release it within
two seconds.
2. Press the rear of the control to the first
action point twice and release it within
two seconds.
3. Press and hold the front of the control
to the first action point, until the sun
shade fully opens.
4. Press and hold the rear of the control
to the first action point, until the sun
shade fully closes.
If you do not complete Step 2 within 15
seconds of Step 1, the relearning function
end. Switch the ignition off, wait for
another 30 seconds and then switch the
ignition back on again. Start the procedure
again from the beginning.
Confirm that relearning was successful by
opening and closing the sun shade.
73
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
GAUGES
Information display.A
Speedometer.B
Engine coolant temperature gauge.C
Fuel gauge.D
Tachometer.E
Information Display
Odometer
Records the total distance traveled by your
vehicle.
Outside Air Temperature
Shows the outside air temperature.
Trip Computer
See Trip Computer (page 83).
Vehicle Settings and Personalization
See General Information (page 80).
74
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge
WARNING
Never remove the coolant reservoir
cap while the engine is running or hot.
At normal operating temperature the
indicator will remain in the center section.
Note: Do not restart the engine until the
cause of overheating has been determined
and resolved.
If the needle enters the red section, the
engine is overheating. Stop the engine,
switch the ignition off and determine the
cause once the engine has cooled down.
See Engine Coolant Check (page 237).
Fuel Gauge
Switch the ignition on. The fuel gauge will
indicate approximately how much fuel is
left in the fuel tank. The arrow adjacent to
the fuel pump symbol indicates on which
side of your vehicle the fuel filler door is
located.
WARNING LAMPS AND
INDICATORS
The following warning lamps and
indicators alert you to a vehicle condition
that may become serious. Some lamps
illuminate when you start your vehicle to
make sure they work. If any lamps remain
on after starting your vehicle, refer to the
respective system warning lamp for further
information.
Note: Some warning indicators appear in
the information display and operate the
same as a warning lamp but do not
illuminate when you start your vehicle.
Anti-Lock Braking System Warning
Lamp
If it illuminates when you are
driving, this indicates a
malfunction. You will continue
to have the normal braking system
(without anti-lock braking system) unless
the brake system warning lamp is also
illuminated. Have your vehicle checked by
an authorized dealer.
Automatic High Beam Lamp (If
Equipped)
It will illuminate when this
feature is on. See Automatic
High Beam Control (page 62).
Battery Warning Lamp
If it illuminates when driving, this
indicates a malfunction. Switch
off all unnecessary electrical
equipment. Have your vehicle checked by
an authorized dealer immediately.
Blind Spot Monitor Indicator (If
Equipped)
It will illuminate when you switch
this feature off or in conjunction
with a message. See Blind Spot
Information System (page 173). See
Information Messages (page 83).
Brake System Warning Lamp
It will illuminate when you
engage the parking brake with
the ignition on.
75
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
If it illuminates when you are driving, check
that the parking brake is not engaged. If
the parking brake is not engaged, this
indicates low brake fluid level or a brake
system malfunction. Have your vehicle
checked by an authorized dealer
immediately.
WARNING
Driving your vehicle with the warning
lamp on is dangerous. A significant
decrease in braking performance
may occur. It will take you longer to stop
your vehicle. Have your vehicle checked by
an authorized dealer immediately. Driving
extended distances with the parking brake
engaged can cause brake failure and the
risk of personal injury.
Cruise Control Indicator (If Equipped)
It will illuminate when you switch
this feature on. See Using
Cruise Control (page 158).
Direction Indicator
Illuminates when the left or right
direction indicator or the hazard
warning flasher is turned on. If
the indicators stay on or flash faster, check
for a burnt out bulb. See Changing a Bulb
(page 243).
Door Ajar
Displays when the vehicle is on
and any door is not completely
closed.
Engine Oil Warning Lamp
WARNING
If it illuminates when you are driving
do not continue your journey, even if
the oil level is correct. Have your
vehicle checked.
If it illuminates with the engine
running or when you are driving,
this indicates a malfunction.
Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to
do so and switch the engine off. Check the
engine oil level. See Engine Oil Check
(page 237).
Engine Warning Lamps
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
All Vehicles
If it illuminates when the engine is running,
this indicates a malfunction. The engine
will continue to run but it may have limited
power. If it flashes when you are driving,
reduce the speed of your vehicle
immediately. If it continues to flash, avoid
heavy acceleration or deceleration. Have
your vehicle checked by an authorized
dealer immediately.
WARNING
Have this checked immediately.
Fasten Safety Belt Warning Lamp
It will illuminate and a chime will
sound to remind you to fasten
your safety belt. See Safety
Belt Minder (page 26).
Front Airbag Warning Lamp
If the warning lamp does not
illuminate during start up,
remains on or flashes, the
system may be disabled.
Have your vehicle checked by an
authorized dealer.
76
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
Front Fog Lamps Indicator
It will illuminate when you switch
the front fog lamps on.
Frost Warning Lamp
WARNING
Even if the temperature rises to
above 39°F (4°C) there is no
guarantee that the road is free of
hazards caused by inclement weather.
It will illuminate when the
outside air temperature is 39°F
(4°C) or below.
Glow Plug Indicator
See Starting a Diesel Engine
(page 124).
High Beam Indicator
It will illuminate when you switch
the high beam headlamps on. It
will flash when you use the
headlamp flasher.
Information Indicator
It will illuminate when a new
message is stored in the
information display. It will be red
or amber in color depending on the severity
of the message and will remain on until the
cause of the message has been rectified.
See Information Messages (page 83).
Liftgate Ajar
Lights when the liftgate is not
completely closed.
Low Fuel Level Warning Lamp
If it illuminates when you are
driving, refuel as soon as
possible.
Low Washer Fluid
Lights when the windshield
washer fluid is low.
Headlamp and Parking Lamp
Indicator
It will illuminate when you switch
the headlamps or parking lamps
on.
Rear Fog Lamps Indicator
It will illuminate when you switch
the rear fog lamps on.
Shift Indicator
It will illuminate to inform you
that shifting to a higher or lower
gear as indicated may give
better fuel economy and lower
CO2 emissions. It will not
illuminate during periods of high
acceleration, braking or when
the clutch pedal is pressed.
Stability Control Off Indicator
It will illuminate when you switch
the system off. It will go out
when you switch the system
back on or when you switch the ignition
off.
77
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
Stability Control Warning Lamp
It will flash when the system is
active. If it remains illuminated
or does not illuminate when you
switch the ignition on, this indicates a
malfunction. During a malfunction the
system will switch off. Have your vehicle
checked by an authorized dealer
immediately.
Start-Stop Active Indicator
It will illuminate when the
automatic engine stop occurs.
See Auto-Start-Stop (page
127). See Information Messages (page
83).
Start-Stop Unavailable Indicator
It will illuminate when automatic
engine stop is not available. See
Auto-Start-Stop (page 127).
See Information Messages (page 83).
AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND
INDICATORS
Automatic Transmission
Sounds when you open the driver's door
and do not move the transmission selector
lever to position P.
Key Outside Car
Vehicles With Keyless System
Sounds when you close the door, the
engine is running and the system does not
detect a passive key inside your vehicle.
Headlamps On
Sounds when you remove the key from the
ignition and open the driver's door and you
have left the headlamps or parking lamps
on.
Fuel Gauge
Switch the ignition on. The fuel gauge will
indicate approximately how much fuel is
left in the fuel tank. The fuel gauge may
vary slightly when your vehicle is moving
or on a gradient. The arrow adjacent to the
fuel pump symbol indicates on which side
of your vehicle the fuel filler door is located.
Low Fuel Reminder
Vehicles with Trip Computer
A low fuel level reminder displays and
sounds when the distance to empty
reaches 75 mi (120 km) for MyKey and
50 mi (80 km) for all other keys.
Note: The low fuel reminder can appear at
different fuel gauge positions depending on
fuel economy conditions. This variation is
normal.
Vehicles without Trip Computer
A low fuel level reminder displays and
sounds when the fuel gauge needle is at
1/16th.
Safety Belt Minder
WARNINGS
The safety belt minder remains in
stand-by mode when the front safety
belts have been fastened. It will
sound if either safety belt is unfastened.
Do not sit on top of a fastened safety
belt to prevent the safety belt minder
from coming on. The occupant
protection system will only provide
optimum protection when you use the
safety belt properly.
78
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
Sounds when your vehicle speed exceeds
the pre-determined limit and the front
safety belts are unfastened. The chime will
stop after a period of time.
79
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
You can control various systems on your
vehicle using the information display
controls on the steering wheel.
The information display shows the
corresponding information.
Information Display Controls
• Press the up and down arrow buttons
to scroll through and highlight the
options within a menu.
• Press the right arrow button to enter a
submenu.
• Press the left arrow button to exit a
submenu.
• Press the OK button to choose and
confirm settings or messages.
Menu Structure - Information
Display
You can access the menu using the
information display control.
Note: It may describe options not fitted to
the vehicle you have purchased.
Trip computer 1 and 2
1
Option to display all the values on screen.
Speed
Trip odometer
Ford EcoModeAverage fuel
Gear shifting
80
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Information Displays
Trip computer 1 and 2
1
Anticipation
Speed
Ford EcoMode
Instant fuel
Dist to empty
Trip timer
Average speed
Option to select for navigation display.
1
See Trip Computer (page 83).
Information
Driver alert
Traffic signs
MyKey
MyKey
System check
Settings
Traction ctrlDriver assist
BLIS
City Stop
Forward alert
Cross traffic alrt
AdaptiveCruise control
Normal
Driver alert
81
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Information Displays
Settings
Hill start assist
Tyre monitor
Traffic signs
Lane keeping
Aux heaterVehicle settings
Heater clockPark heater
Time 1
Time 2
Once
Heat now
Full guardAlarm
Reduced
Ask on exit
Park slot foundChimes
Information
Warning
Traffic (R/L)Lighting
Auto highbeam
Rain light
Hdlamp delay
Rain sensingWipers
Hold OK to create.Create MyKeyMyKey
Always on or user selectable.Traction ctrl
Always on or user selectable.ESC
User selectable or off.Max speed
User selectable or off.Speed warning
Volume limit
82
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Information Displays
Settings
Always on or user selectable.Do not disturb
Hold OK to clear all MyKeys.Clear all
Choose your applicable setting.LanguageDisplay
Vehicle graphic
Choose your applicable setting.Measure unit
Choose your applicable setting.Temp unit
System Check
All active warnings will display first if
applicable. The system check menu may
appear different based upon equipment
options and current vehicle status. Use the
up and down arrow buttons to scroll
through the list. See Information
Messages (page 83).
TRIP COMPUTER
Resetting the Trip Computer
Press and hold OK on the current screen
to reset the respective trip, distance, time
and average fuel consumption information.
All Values
Indicates all the respective trip, distance,
time and average fuel consumption
information.
Average Fuel Consumption
Indicates the average fuel consumption
since the function was last reset.
Distance to Empty
Indicates the approximate distance your
vehicle will travel on the fuel remaining in
the tank. Changes in driving pattern may
cause the value to vary.
Outside Air Temperature
Shows the outside air temperature.
Trip Odometer
Registers the distance traveled of
individual journeys.
Trip Timer
Registers the elapsed time of individual
journeys or the total time since the function
was last reset.
INFORMATION MESSAGES
Note: Depending on your vehicle options
and instrument cluster type, not all of the
messages will display or be available.
Note: The information display may
abbreviate or shorten certain messages.
83
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Information Displays
Press the OK button to acknowledge and
remove some messages from the
information display.
The information display will automatically
remove other messages after a short
period of time.
You need to confirm certain messages
before you can access the menus.
Message Indicator (If Equipped)
The message indicator
illuminates to supplement some
messages.
The indicator will be red or amber
depending on the severity of the condition
and it remains on until the condition is
resolved.
A system-specific symbol with a message
indicator may supplement some
messages.
Active City Stop
ActionMessage
See Active City Stop (page 178).Active City Stop Auto braking
See Active City Stop (page 178).
Active City Stop Sensor blocked
Clean screen
See Active City Stop (page 178).Active City Stop not available
Airbag
ActionMessage
Displays when the system requires service due to a
malfunction. Contact an authorized dealer.
Airbag fault Service now
Alarm
ActionMessage
Displays when the alarm has been triggered due to
unauthorized entry. See Anti-Theft Alarm (page 52).
Alarm activated Check Vehicle
Displays when the system requires service due to a
malfunction. Contact an authorized dealer.
Alarm fault Service required
84
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Information Displays
Battery and Charging System
ActionMessage
Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so and
switch off the ignition. Contact an authorized dealer.
Electrical system overvoltage
Stop safely
Displays to warn of a low battery condition. Turn off
all unneeded electrical accessories. Contact an
authorized dealer.
Battery low See manual
Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic Alert System
ActionMessage
Displayed when the blind spot information system and
cross traffic alert system sensors are blocked. See
Blind Spot Information System (page 173).
BLIS Low visibility See manual
Displayed when a fault with the system has occurred.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
BLIS: right sensor fault Service
required
Displayed when a fault with the system has occurred.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
BLIS: left sensor fault Service
required
Displayed when the system is not available due to
trailer use. See Blind Spot Information System
(page 173).
BLIS not available Trailer
attached
Displayed when the system detects a vehicle. See
Blind Spot Information System (page 173).
Cross traffic Vehicle coming
from right
Displayed when the system detects a vehicle. See
Blind Spot Information System (page 173).
Cross traffic Vehicle coming
from left
Displayed when the blind spot information system and
cross traffic alert system sensors are blocked. See
Blind Spot Information System (page 173).
Cross traffic Sensor blocked See
manual
Displays when the system requires service due to a
malfunction. Contact an authorized dealer.
Cross traffic malfunction
Service required
Displayed when the system is not available due to
trailer use. See Blind Spot Information System
(page 173).
Cross traffic disabled Trailer
attached
85
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Information Displays
Child Safety Locks
ActionMessage
Retry to activate or deactivate the system. If the issue persists
contact an authorized dealer.
Child lock fault Service
required
Engine
ActionMessage
Engine service is required. Contact an authorized
dealer.
Engine fault Service now
Displays when the engine temperature is too high. Stop
the vehicle in a safe place and allow the engine to cool.
If the problem persists, contact an authorized dealer.
See Engine Coolant Check (page 237).
High engine temperature Stop
safely
Displays when the engine has reduced power in order
to help reduce high coolant temperature.
Power reduced to lower engine
temperature
Hill Start Assist
ActionMessage
Displays when hill start assist is not available. Contact
an authorized dealer. See Hill Start Assist (page 140).
Hill start assist not available
Keyless Vehicle
ActionMessage
Displays to remind you that the key is in the trunk. See
Push Button Ignition Switch (page 118).
Ford KeyFree Key inside vehicle
Displayed if the key is not detected by the system. See
Push Button Ignition Switch (page 118).
Ford KeyFree No key detected
Displayed as a reminder to turn off the vehicle. See
Push Button Ignition Switch (page 118).
Ford KeyFree Switch ignition off
Press POWER
86
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Information Displays
ActionMessage
Displayed as a reminder to press the brake while
starting the vehicle.
Press brake to start
Displayed when a valid key is not detected within the
vehicle. See Push Button Ignition Switch (page 118).
Ford KeyFree Key not inside car
Displays when the key battery is low. Change the
battery as soon as possible. See Remote Control
(page 31).
Key Battery low Replace soon
Lane Keeping Aid
ActionMessage
Displays when the system has detected a condition that
requires service. Have your vehicle checked by an author-
ized dealer.
Lane keeping sys malfunc-
tion Service required
Lighting
ActionMessage
Displays when the brake lamp bulb has burned out.
Contact an authorized dealer.
Brake lamp Bulb fault
Displays when the rear fog lamp bulb has burned out.
Contact an authorized dealer.
Rear fog lamp Bulb fault
Displays when the low beam headlamp bulb has
burned out. Contact an authorized dealer.
Low beam Bulb fault
Displays when an electrical system problem occurs
with the headlamp system. Contact an authorized
dealer.
Headlamp fault Service required
87
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Information Displays
Maintenance
ActionMessage
Displays when the engine oil life is depleted and
requires a change. See Engine Oil Check (page 237).
Oil change required
Indicates the brake fluid level is low and the brake
system should be inspected immediately. See Brake
Fluid Check (page 238).
Brake fluid level low Service
now
MyKey
ActionMessage
Displays when MyKey is active.MyKey active Drive Safely
Displays when a MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed
limit is on and the vehicle speed is approaching 80
mph (130 km/h).
MyKey Vehicle near top speed
Displays when a MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed
limit is reached.
MyKey Vehicle at top speed
Displays when MyKey is active.MyKey Check speed Drive safely
Displays when a MyKey is in use and Belt-Minder is
activated.
MyKey Buckle up to unmute
audio
Displays when a MyKey is in use and park aid is activ-
ated.
MyKey Park aid cannot be
deactivated
Displays when trying to create a MyKey with a key
already designated as a MyKey.
MyKey Key is already MyKey
Displays when programming a MyKey.MyKey ESC cannot be deactiv-
ated
Occupant Protection
ActionMessage
Displays when the system has detected a condition that
requires service. Have your vehicle checked by an author-
ized dealer as soon as possible.
Service Beltminder
88
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Information Displays
Park Aid
ActionMessage
Displays when the system has detected a condition
that requires service. Contact an authorized dealer.
See Principle of Operation (page 144).
Parking aid malfunction Service
required
Park Brake
ActionMessage
Displays when the parking brake is set, the engine is
running and the vehicle is driven more than 3 mph (5
km/h). If the warning stays on after the parking brake
is released, contact an authorized dealer.
Park brake applied
Power Steering
ActionMessage
The power steering system is not working. Stop the
vehicle in a safe place. Contact an authorized dealer.
Steering loss Stop safely
The power steering system is not working. Stop the
vehicle in a safe place. Contact an authorized dealer.
Steering assist malfunction
Service required
The power steering system has detected a condition
within the power steering system or passive entry or
passive start system requires service. Contact an
authorized dealer.
Steering malfunction Service
now
Starting System
ActionMessage
Displays when starting the vehicle as a reminder to
apply the brake.
Press brake to start
Displays when the vehicle fails to start.Cranking time exceeded
89
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Information Displays
Start-Stop
ActionMessage
Switch the ignition off before leaving your vehicle if the
system has shut down the engine. See Auto-Start-Stop
(page 127).
Auto StartStop Switch igni-
tion off
The engine needs to be restarted, press the clutch pedal
to start. See Auto-Start-Stop (page 127).
Auto StartStop Press a
pedal to start engine
Select neutral for the system to restart the engine. See
Auto-Start-Stop (page 127).
Auto StartStop Select
neutral to start engine
The system is not functioning. A manual restart is required.
See Auto-Start-Stop (page 127).
Auto StartStop Manual
restart required
The engine needs to be restarted manually, but the trans-
mission is not in P. See Auto-Start-Stop (page 127).
Auto StartStop Shift to P,
then Restart Engine
The engine needs to be restarted, press the brake pedal
to start. See Auto-Start-Stop (page 127).
Auto StartStop Press Brake
to Start Engine
Transmission
ActionMessage
See an authorized dealer.Transmission malfunction
Service now
The transmission is overheating and needs to cool.
Stop in a safe place as soon as it’s possible.
Transmission overheating Stop
safely
Transmission is getting hot. Stop to let it cool or speed
up.
Transmission overheating Stop
safely
Displays as a reminder to shift into park.Transmission not in Park Select
P
Displays to request the operator to apply the brake as
needed by the transmission.
Press brake to unlock selector
lever
Displays when the transmission shift lever is unlocked
and free to select gears.
Selector lever unlocked
90
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Information Displays
Tyre Pressure Monitoring System
ActionMessage
Displays when one or more tires on your vehicle have
low tire pressure. See Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (page 258).
Check tyre pressures
Displays when the tire pressure monitoring system is
malfunctioning. If the warning stays on or continues
to come on, contact an authorized dealer. See Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (page 258).
Tyre monitor malfunction
Service required
Displayed when a tire pressure sensor is malfunc-
tioning, or your spare tire is in use. More information
on how the system operates under these conditions
is available. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(page 258). If the warning stays on or continues to come
on, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Tyre sensors not detected
Check handbook
91
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Information Displays
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
Outside Air
Keep the air intakes in front of the
windshield free from obstruction (such as
snow or leaves) to allow the climate
control system to function effectively.
Recirculated Air
WARNING
Prolonged use of recirculated air may
cause the windows to mist up. If the
windows mist up, follow the settings
for demisting the windshield.
The air currently in the passenger
compartment recirculates. Outside air does
not enter your vehicle.
Heating
Heating performance depends on the
temperature of the engine coolant.
General Information on Controlling
the Interior Climate
Fully close all the windows.
Warming the Interior
Direct the air toward your feet. In cold or
humid weather conditions, direct some of
the air toward the windshield and the door
windows.
Cooling the Interior
Direct the air toward your face.
Air Conditioning
The system directs air through the
evaporator for cooling. The evaporator
extracts humidity from the air to help keep
the windows free of mist. The system
directs the resulting condensation to the
outside of your vehicle, which may cause
a small pool to form under your vehicle.
This is normal.
Note: The air conditioning operates only
when the temperature is above 39°F (4°C).
Note: When you use air conditioning, your
vehicle uses more fuel.
AIR VENTS
Center Air Vents
To close the air vent, turn the thumbwheel
above the vent fully downward.
92
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Climate Control
Side Air Vents
To close the air vent, turn the thumbwheel
to the left of the vent fully downward.
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL
Fan speed control: Adjust the volume of air circulated in the vehicle.A
A/C: Press the button to turn the air conditioning on or off. Use air conditioning
with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency.
B
Heated windshield (if equipped): Press the button to clear the heated
windshield of thin ice and fog. See Heated Windshield (page 99).
C
Air distribution control: Adjust the control to turn airflow from the windshield,
instrument panel, or footwell vents on or off. You can distribute air through any
combination of these vents.
D
Heated rear window: Press the button to switch the heated rear window on
and off. See Heated Windows and Mirrors (page 99).
E
93
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Climate Control
Recirculated air: Press the button to switch between outside air and
recirculated air. The air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates.
This can reduce the time needed to cool the interior and reduce unwanted odors
from entering your vehicle.
F
Temperature control: Control the temperature of the air circulated in your
vehicle.
G
MAX Defrost: Adjust the control to switch on defrost. Outside air flows through
the windshield vents, air conditioning automatically turns on, and fan
automatically adjusts to the highest speed. You can also use this setting to
defrost and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice.
H
MAX A/C: Adjust the control for maximum cooling. Recirculated air flows
through the instrument panel vents, air conditioning automatically turns on and
the fan automatically adjusts to the highest speed.
I
Heated seats (if equipped): Press the button to switch the heated seats on
and off. See Heated Seats (page 115).
J
Power: Press the button to switch the system on and off. When the system is
off, it prevents outside air from entering the vehicle.
K
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
94
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Climate Control
AUTO: Press the button to turn on automatic operation. Select the desired
temperature using the temperature control. The system adjusts fan speed, air
distribution, air conditioning operation, and selects outside air or recirculated
air to heat or cool the vehicle in order to maintain the desired temperature. You
can also use the AUTO button to turn off dual zone operation by pressing and
holding the button for more than two seconds.
A
Heated windshield (if equipped): Press the button to clear the heated
windshield of thin ice and fog. See Heated Windshield (page 99).
B
Fan speed control: Adjust the volume of air circulated in the vehicle.C
Air distribution control: Adjust the control to turn airflow from the windshield,
instrument panel, or footwell vents on or off. You can distribute air through any
combination of these vents.
D
Climate control display: The display shows the set temperatures and the fan
speed.
E
Heated rear window: Press the button to switch the heated rear window on
and off. See Heated Windows and Mirrors (page 99).
F
A/C: Press the button to turn air conditioning compressor on or off. Use air
conditioning with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency.
G
Note: In certain conditions (for example, maximum defrost), the air conditioning
compressor may continue to operate even though the air conditioning is
switched off.
Recirculated air: Press the button to switch between outside air and
recirculated air. When you select recirculated air, the air currently in the
passenger compartment recirculates. This may reduce the time needed to cool
the interior (when used with A/C) and may reduce unwanted odors from
entering your vehicle.
H
Note: Recirculated air may turn off automatically (or be prevented from turning
on) in all airflow modes except MAX A/C to reduce risk of fogging. Recirculated
air may also turn on and off automatically in Panel or Panel and Floor airflow
modes during hot weather in order to improve cooling efficiency.
Heated seats (if equipped): Press the button to switch the heated seats on
and off. See Heated Seats (page 115).
I
MAX A/C: Press the button to maximize cooling. Recirculated air flows through
the instrument panel vents, air conditioning automatically turns on, and the fan
automatically adjusts to the highest speed.
J
MAX Defrost: Press the button to switch on defrost. Outside air flows through
the windshield vents, air conditioning automatically turns on, and fan
automatically adjusts to the highest speed. You can also use this setting to
defrost and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice. The heated rear window
also automatically turns on when you select maximum defrost.
K
95
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Climate Control
Note: To prevent window fogging, you cannot select recirculated air when
maximum defrost is on.
Power: Press the button to switch the system on and off. When the system is
off, it prevents outside air from entering the vehicle.
L
Note: If you press a fan speed or airflow
direction button, it will turn off the
automatic operation function. Press the
AUTO button to return to auto mode.
Note: Prolonged use of recirculated air may
cause the windows to fog up. If the system
detects high humidity inside your vehicle,
recirculated air will automatically turn off.
The system will not automatically turn
recirculated air back on.
Temperature Control
You can set the temperature between
60°F (15.5°C) and 85°F (29.5°C). In
position LO, the system switches to
permanent cooling. In position HI, the
system switches to permanent heating.
Note: If you select either position LO or HI,
the system does not regulate a stable
temperature.
Mono Mode
In this mode, the temperature settings for
both the driver side and passenger side are
linked. If you adjust the setting using the
rotary control on the driver side, the system
adjusts the temperature to the same
setting on the passenger side.
Switching Mono Mode Off
Select a temperature for the passenger
side using the rotary control on the
passenger side. Mono mode automatically
switches off. The temperature on the driver
side remains unchanged. You can now
adjust the driver side and passenger side
temperatures independently. The
temperature settings for each side are
shown in the display.
Note: The maximum temperature
difference between driver and passenger
side is 39.2°F (4°C).
Switching Mono Mode Back On
Press and hold the AUTO button. The
passenger side temperature is adjusted to
the driver side temperature setting.
HINTS ON CONTROLLING THE
INTERIOR CLIMATE
General Hints
Note: Prolonged use of recirculated air may
cause the windows to fog up.
Note: To reduce humidity build-up inside
your vehicle, do not drive with the system
switched off or with recirculated air always
switched on.
Note: Do not place objects under the front
seats as this may interfere with the airflow
to the rear seats.
Note: Remove any snow, ice or leaves from
the air intake area at the base of the
windshield.
96
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Climate Control
Note: To improve air conditioning when
starting your vehicle, drive with the windows
open until you feel cold air through the
vents.
Manual Climate Control
Note: To reduce fogging of the windshield
during humid weather, adjust the air
distribution control to the windshield air
vents position.
Automatic Climate Control
Note: Do not adjust the settings when your
vehicle interior is extremely hot or cold. The
system automatically adjusts to the
previously stored settings. For the system
to function efficiently, the instrument panel
and side air vents should be fully open.
Note: At low ambient temperatures with
AUTO selected, the air stream is directed
toward the windshield and side windows
for as long as the engine remains cold.
Note: When the system is in AUTO mode,
and the interior and exterior temperatures
are high, the system automatically selects
recirculated air to maximize cooling of the
interior. When the selected air temperature
is reached, the system automatically selects
outside air.
Heating the Interior Quickly
Vehicle with automatic climate controlVehicle with manual climate control
Press the AUTO button.Adjust the fan speed to the highest
speed setting.
1
Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting.
Adjust the temperature control to the
highest setting.
2
Adjust the air distribution control to the
footwell air vents position.
3
Recommended Settings for Heating
Vehicle with automatic climate controlVehicle with manual climate control
Press the AUTO button.Adjust the fan speed to the second
speed setting.
1
Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting.
Adjust the temperature control to the
midway point of the hot settings.
2
Adjust the air distribution control to the
footwell air vents position.
3
97
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Climate Control
Cooling the Interior Quickly
Vehicle with automatic climate controlVehicle with manual climate control
Press the MAX A/C button.Adjust the temperature control to the
MAX A/C position.
1
Adjust the fan speed to the highest
setting.
2
Drive with the windows open until you
feel cold air through the vents.
3
Recommended Settings for Cooling
Vehicle with automatic climate controlVehicle with manual climate control
Press the AUTO button.Adjust the fan speed to the second
speed setting.
1
Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting.
Adjust the temperature control to the
midway point of the cold settings.
2
Adjust the air distribution control to the
instrument panel air vents position.
3
Side Window Defogging in Cold Weather
Vehicle with automatic climate controlVehicle with manual climate control
Press the windshield defrosting and
defogging button.
Select the windshield air vents using the
air distribution buttons.
1
Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting.
Press the A/C button.2
Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting.
3
Adjust the fan speed to the highest
setting.
4
98
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Climate Control
HEATED WINDOWS AND
MIRRORS
Heated Rear Window
Press the button to clear the
window of thin ice and fog. It
will switch off automatically
after a short period of time. Make sure the
engine is running before operating the
heated windows.
Note: Do not use razor blades or other
sharp objects to clean the inside of the rear
window or to remove decals from the inside
of the rear window. This may cause damage
to the heated grid lines and will not be
covered by your warranty.
Heated Exterior Mirrors (If Equipped)
They will switch on
automatically when you switch
the heated rear window on.
Note: Do not remove ice from the mirrors
with a scraper or attempt to readjust the
mirror glass if it is frozen in place. These
actions could cause damage to the glass
and mirrors.
Note: Do not clean the housing or glass of
any mirror with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum-based cleaning products.
HEATED WINDSHIELD
Press the button to clear the
heated windshield of thin ice and
fog. The heated windshield will
automatically turn off after a short period
of time. Start the engine before you switch
the heated windshield on.
AUXILIARY HEATER
Fuel Operated Parking Heater
WARNING
Do not use the fuel operated parking
heater at fuel filling stations or near
sources of combustible vapors, dust
or in enclosed spaces. This could result in
serious personal injury or death.
The system warms the engine and the
vehicle interior, it uses fuel from the vehicle
fuel tank.
Used correctly the system will:
• Warm the engine and the vehicle
interior.
• Keep the windows clear of ice in the
event of frost and prevent
condensation.
• Avoid cold starts to assist the engine
to reach operating temperature sooner.
Following a heating cycle, if you do not
start the engine the system will not turn
on the next programmed heating cycle.
Following a heating cycle, we recommend
that you drive your vehicle for at least the
same period of time as the heating cycle.
This prevents the vehicle battery from
running out of charge.
The system will only operate if there is a
minimum of 1.6 gal (7.5 L) of fuel in the
vehicle fuel tank and the outside air
temperature is below 59°F (15°C). The
system will not operate if the battery
charge level is low.
Note: When the system is operating,
exhaust fumes will come from under your
vehicle. This is normal.
Note: On vehicles with manual climate
control, heating the vehicle interior will
depend on the heater control settings. See
Climate Control (page 92).
99
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Climate Control
Programming the Fuel Operated
Parking Heater
Use the information display controls on
the steering wheel. See Information
Displays (page 80).
Note: The time and date on your vehicle’s
clock must be set correctly. See General
Information (page 80).
Note: You must program the time at least
70 minutes before the time you wish to set.
Note: The programmed time is when you
want your vehicle to be warm and ready to
drive, not when the heater turns on.
To program the fuel operated parking heater, scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.Settings
Press the OK button.Vehicle settings
Press the OK button.Park heater
Select one of the following:
Allows you to program a heating cycle for each day of the
week. These times will remain stored and the system will
warm up your vehicle at the programmed times.
Time 1
Allows you to program a second heating cycle for each day
of the week. These times will remain stored and the system
will warm up your vehicle at the programmed times.
Time 2
Select to set a second heating cycle, for example different
times on different days or twice on the same day.
Allows you to program one heating cycle for a specific day.Once
Switches the system on immediately.Heat now
Programming the Time Functions
Set the time you want your vehicle to be
warm and ready to drive. Use the
information display controls on the
steering wheel. See Information
Displays (page 80).
1. Select the desired days you want the
system to warm up your vehicle.
Highlight each desired day and press
the OK button.
2. Highlight the time at the top of the
menu and press the OK button. The
hours will flash.
3. Set the hours using the up and down
arrow buttons.
4. Press the right arrow button. The
minutes will flash. Set the minutes
using the up and down arrow buttons.
Press the OK button.
100
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Climate Control
Programming the Once Function
Selecting this function allows you to
program one heating cycle for one specific
day.
Set the time you want your vehicle to be
warm and ready to drive. Use the
information display controls on the
steering wheel. See Information
Displays (page 80).
1. Highlight the time at the top of the
menu and press the OK button. The
hours start to flash.
2. Set the hours using the up and down
arrow buttons.
3. Press the right arrow button. Set the
minutes using the up and down arrow
buttons. Press the OK button.
Switching Programmed Functions Off
Use the information display controls on
the steering wheel. See Information
Displays (page 80).
To switch the programmed functions off, scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.Settings
Press the OK button.Vehicle settings
Press the OK button.Park heater
Select one of the following:
Uncheck the active programmed heating cycles as required.Time 1
Uncheck the active programmed heating cycles as required.Time 2
Uncheck the active programmed heating cycles as required.Once
Switching the Heat Now Function On
WARNING
Do not use the fuel operated parking
heater at fuel filling stations or near
sources of combustible vapors, dust
or in enclosed spaces. This could result in
serious personal injury or death.
Selecting this function allows you to switch
the system on immediately.
Use the information display controls on
the steering wheel. See Information
Displays (page 80).
101
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Climate Control
To switch the heat now function on, scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.Settings
Press the OK button.Vehicle settings
Press the OK button.Park heater
Press the OK button. An X appears in the box when you switch
the heater on. To switch the heater off, uncheck the option.
Heat now
Switching the Heat Now Function On
and Off Using the Remote Control
Selecting this function allows you to switch
the system on immediately using the
remote control.
Note: The vehicle does not need to be
unlocked.
1. Press the ON button on the remote
control to switch the system on.
2. Press the OFF button on the remote
control to switch the system off.
Fuel Operated Heater
WARNING
Do not use the fuel operated parking
heater at fuel filling stations or near
sources of combustible vapors, dust
or in enclosed spaces. This could result in
serious personal injury or death.
The heater operates by warming the
engine cooling system. It uses fuel from
the vehicle fuel tank.
The system will only operate if there is a
minimum of 1.6 gal (7.5 L) of fuel in the
vehicle fuel tank. The system will not
operate if the battery charge level is low.
The system automatically turns on and off
depending on the engine coolant
temperature when the outside air
temperature is below 37°F (3°C), unless
you have switched it off.
Note: The default setting is on.
Note: When the system is operating,
exhaust fumes will come from under your
vehicle. This is normal.
Note: On vehicles with manual climate
control, heating the vehicle interior will
depend on the heater control settings. See
Climate Control (page 92).
Use the information display controls on
the steering wheel. See Information
Displays (page 80).
102
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Climate Control
To switch the auxiliary heater on and off, scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.Settings
Press the OK button.Vehicle settings
Press the OK button. An X appears in the box when the
system is switched on.
Aux heater
CABIN AIR FILTER
Your vehicle is equipped with a cabin air
filter, which gives you and your passengers
the following benefits:
• It improves your driving comfort by
reducing particle concentration.
• It improves the interior compartment
cleanliness.
• It protects the climate control
components from particle deposits.
You can locate the cabin air filter behind
the glove box.
Note: Make sure you have a cabin air filter
installed at all times. This prevents foreign
objects from entering the system. Running
the system without a filter in place could
result in degradation or damage to the
system.
Replace the filter at regular intervals.
For additional cabin air filter information,
or to replace the filter, see an authorized
dealer.
103
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Climate Control
SITTING IN THE CORRECT
POSITION
WARNINGS
Do not recline the seat backrest too
far as this can cause the occupant
to slide under the safety belt,
resulting in serious injury in the event of a
crash.
Sitting improperly, out of position or
with the seat backrest reclined too
far, can result in serious injury or
death in the event of a crash. Always sit
upright against your seat backrest, with
your feet on the floor.
Do not place objects higher than the
seat backrest to reduce the risk of
serious injury in the event of a crash
or during heavy braking.
When you use them properly, the seat,
head restraint, safety belt and airbags will
provide optimum protection in the event
of a crash.
We recommend that you follow these
guidelines:
• Sit in an upright position with the base
of your spine as far back as possible.
• Do not recline the seat backrest more
than 30 degrees.
• Adjust the head restraint so that the
top of it is level with the top of your
head and as far forward as possible.
Make sure that you remain
comfortable.
• Keep sufficient distance between
yourself and the steering wheel. We
recommend a minimum of 10 inches
(25 centimeters) between your
breastbone and the airbag cover.
• Hold the steering wheel with your arms
slightly bent.
• Bend your legs slightly so that you can
press the pedals fully.
• Position the shoulder strap of the
safety belt over the center of your
shoulder and position the lap strap
tightly across your hips.
Make sure that your driving position is
comfortable and that you can maintain full
control of your vehicle.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNINGS
Raise the rear head restraint when
the rear seat is occupied by a
passenger.
Do not remove the front head
restraints when the front seats are
in use.
Adjusting the Head Restraints
Adjust the head restraint so that the top
of it is level with the top of your head.
104
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Seats
Removing the Head Restraints
Front head restraints
1. Press and hold the locking button.
2. Using a suitable implement, release
the retaining clip.
Rear outer head restraints
Press the locking button and remove the
head restraint.
Rear Center Head Restraint
Press the locking buttons and remove the
head restraint.
MANUAL SEATS
Moving the Seat Backward and
Forward
WARNING
Rock the seat backward and forward
after releasing the lever to make sure
that it is fully engaged.
105
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Seats
Adjusting the Height of the Driver
Seat
Adjusting the Angle of the
Seatback
Adjusting the Lumbar Support (If
Equipped)
POWER SEATS
WARNINGS
Do not adjust the driver seat or
seatback when your vehicle is
moving. Adjusting your seatback
while your vehicle is in motion may cause
loss of control of your vehicle.
Reclining the seatback can cause an
occupant to slide under the seat’s
safety belt, resulting in severe
personal injuries in the event of a crash.
106
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Seats
REAR SEATS
Second row seats - C-MAX
WARNING
Do not slide the outboard seats
rearward if the center seat is folded
forward. There is a risk of injury in the
event of an accident or if the center seat
falls back down.
Note: Do not fold the seatback forward
when the seat is fully to the rear. Slide the
seat fully forward.
Fold the center seat up and move the
outboard seats rearward and slightly
inboard to provide more leg and shoulder
room for the rear passengers.
1. Remove the luggage cover. See
Luggage Covers (page 185).
2. Pull the release lever on the underside
of the seat.
107
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Seats
Note: The complete seat moves rearward
as the seat cushion is folded up.
3. Fold the seatback until it engages.
Note: As the seats slide rearward, they also
move slightly inboard.
4. Pull the lever on the outer front edge
of the outboard seats and push the
seats rearward.
To return the seats to the forward position,
pull the lever and slide the seats forward.
To return the center seat to its original
position, pull the lever on the underside of
the seat. Fold the center seat forward and
push it back down fully until it engages.
Install the luggage cover. See Luggage
Covers (page 185).
Folding the seatbacks down
Remove the seat belts from the belt guides
on the outboard seatbacks.
Pull the lever on the side of the seatback
and fold the seatback forward. Push it
down until it engages.
108
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Seats
Folding the seatbacks up
WARNING
Make sure the seatback is fully
engaged in its latch.
Note: When in use, place the rear seat belts
in the belt guides on the outboard
seatbacks. See Luggage Covers (page 185).
Pull the lever on the seatback and lift the
seatback up.
Folding the seats forward
Note: To increase the space in the luggage
compartment, fold the rear seats forward.
Note: If one or both outboard seats is
folded forward together with the center
seat, fold the center seat forward first.
Note: If only the outboard seats are to be
folded forward, the center seatback must
be left in the upright position.
Fold the seatback down. See Folding the
seatbacks down.
Pull the lower bar on the rear of the seats
to release them from the floor and fold the
seats forward.
WARNING
Always attach the retaining strap to
the front head restraint when a rear
seat is folded forward.
109
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Seats
Pull out and attach the retaining straps to
the front head restraints to hold the folded
seats in the upright position.
Returning the seats to the seating
position
WARNINGS
To avoid injury, take care when
folding the seats down.
Make sure that the locking hole on
the floor is clear of sand, rock or any
objects which may prevent the seat
from locking.
When the retaining strap is detached
from the head restraint, it will recoil
back into the seat.
Note: If one or both outboard seats are
folded forward together with the center
seat, fold the outboard seats back down
first.
Before folding the seats back down, pull
the lower bar on the rear of each seat and
check that the latches are in the extended
position.
Detach the retaining straps.
WARNING
Make sure the seat is securely locked
by pushing forward and rearward on
the top of the seatback or by trying
to pull up the edge of the cushion.
110
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Seats
Fold the seats back down until they
engage.
Raise the seatbacks. See Folding the
seatbacks up.
Install the rear seatbelts in the belt guides
on the outboard seatbacks.
Removing the seats
WARNING
The rear seats are heavy. To avoid
injury, take care when lifting the
seats.
Note: To increase the space in the luggage
compartment, the rear seats can be
removed completely.
1. Fold the seat forward. See Folding the
seats forward.
2. Fold the seat up to an angle to the
floor.
3. Push down both red levers to open the
locking mechanism.
4. Remove the seat.
Installing the seats
WARNINGS
To avoid injury, take care when
folding the seats down.
Make sure that the locking hole on
the floor is clear of sand, rock or any
objects which may prevent the seat
from locking.
Note: Make sure the locking mechanism is
fully open.
111
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Seats
Holding the seat at an angle to the floor,
lower the seat onto the retaining bar.
Before folding the seats back down, pull
the lower bar on the rear of each seat and
check that the latches are in the extended
position.
Push the seat back down until it engages.
Second row seats - Grand C-MAX
Folding the seatback forward or
backward
Lift the lever and push the seatback.
Stowing the center seat
WARNING
Make sure the center seatback is in
the upright position when the vehicle
is moving.
1. Pull the lever on the back of the center
seat and push the seatback down until
it locks.
112
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Seats
2. Pull the strap and lift the right-hand
seat cushion.
3. Pull the strap to fold the center seat
over into the right-hand seat base.
4. Fold the right-hand seat cushion down.
Note: You can use the space between the
outboard seats to access the third row seats
when the center seat has been stowed.
Moving the seats backward and
forward
Note: If the center seat is not stowed, it will
move with the right-hand seat.
Folding the seats forward
WARNING
Do not use the third row seats when
the second row seats have been
folded forward.
Note: The center seat must be stowed into
the right-hand seat base before the
right-hand seat is folded.
113
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Seats
1. Pull the strap and lift the cushion.
2. Lift the lever and push the seatback
down until it locks.
Easy entry position
WARNING
Do not use the seat when it is in the
easy entry position.
Note: You can move the outboard seats
forwards to allow access to the third row
seats.
1. Either pull the lever on the side of the
seat cushion or pull the strap at the
rear of the seat. The seat will move
forward.
2. Fold the seatback forward.
Third row seats - Grand C-MAX
Note: Remove the luggage cover. See
Luggage Covers (page 185).
Note: When not in use, place the seat belts
in the clips on the outboard trim. See
Luggage Covers (page 185).
Folding the seats flat
Note: When transporting a load with the
seats folded flat, fold the carpet forward to
cover the folded seatback.
114
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Seats
Pull the strap at the top of the seatback
and fold the seatback forward.
HEATED SEATS
WARNING
People who are unable to feel pain
to their skin because of advanced
age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal
cord injury, medication, alcohol use,
exhaustion or other physical conditions,
must exercise care when using the heated
seat. The heated seat may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods of time. Do not place
anything on the seat that insulates against
heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the heated seat to overheat.
Do not puncture the seat with pins, needles
or other pointed objects. This may damage
the heating element which may cause the
heated seat to overheat. An overheated
seat may cause serious personal injury.
Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the heated seat if water or any
other liquid is spilled on the seat. Allow
the seat to dry thoroughly.
• Operate the heated seats unless the
engine is running. Doing so can cause
the battery to lose charge.
Press the heated seat symbol to cycle
through the various heat settings and off.
Warmer settings are indicated by more
indicator lights.
115
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Seats
12 Volt DC Power Point
WARNING
Do not plug electrical accessories
into the cigar lighter socket. Incorrect
use of the lighter can cause damage
not covered by your warranty, and can
result in fire or serious injury.
Note: When you switch the ignition on, you
can use the socket to power 12 volt
appliances with a maximum current rating
of 20 amps. After you switch the ignition off,
the power supply works only for a maximum
of 30 minutes.
Note: Do not insert objects other than an
accessory plug into the power point. This
damages the outlet and can blow the fuse.
Note: Do not hang any type of accessory or
accessory bracket from the plug.
Note: Do not use the power point over the
vehicle capacity of 12 volt DC 180 watt or a
fuse may blow.
Note: Do not use the power point for
operating a cigar lighter element.
Note: Incorrect use of the power point can
cause damage not covered by your
warranty.
Note: Always keep the power point caps
closed when not in use.
Run the engine for full capacity use of the
power point.
To prevent the battery from running out of
charge:
• Do not use the power point longer than
necessary when your engine is not
running.
• Do not leave devices plugged in
overnight or when your vehicle is in park
(P) for extended periods.
Location
Power points may be found:
• On the center console.
• In the center console.
• In the cargo area (Wagons only).
CIGAR LIGHTER
Press the element in to use the cigar
lighter. It will pop out automatically.
Note: Do not hold the cigar lighter element
pressed in.
Note: If the power supply does not work
after you switch the ignition off, switch the
ignition on.
Note: If you use the socket when the engine
is not running, the battery may lose charge.
Note: When you switch the ignition on, you
can use the socket to power 12 volt
appliances with a maximum current rating
of 15 amps.
116
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Auxiliary Power Points
CUP HOLDERS
WARNINGS
Do not place hot drinks in the cup
holders when your vehicle is moving.
Make sure that cups placed in the
holders do not obstruct your vision
while driving.
CENTER CONSOLE
Stow items in the cup holder carefully as
items may become loose during hard
braking, acceleration or crashes, including
hot drinks which may spill.
Available console features include:
Cup holder.A
Storage compartment with
auxiliary power point, auxiliary
input jack, USB port and media
hub.
B
Auxiliary power point.C
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
Press near the rear edge of the door to
open it.
117
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Storage Compartments
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNINGS
Extended idling at high engine
speeds can produce very high
temperatures in the engine and
exhaust system, creating the risk of fire or
other damage.
Do not park, idle or drive your vehicle
on dry grass or other dry ground
cover. The emission system heats up
the engine compartment and exhaust
system, creating the risk of fire.
Do not start the engine in a closed
garage or in other enclosed areas.
Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always
open the garage door before you start the
engine.
If you smell exhaust fumes inside
your vehicle, have your vehicle
checked by an authorized dealer
immediately. Do not drive your vehicle if
you smell exhaust fumes.
If you disconnect the battery, your vehicle
may exhibit some unusual driving
characteristics for approximately 5 miles
(8 kilometers) after you reconnect it. This
is because the engine management system
must realign itself with the engine. You can
disregard any unusual driving
characteristics during this period.
The powertrain control system meets all
Canadian interference-causing equipment
standard requirements regulating the
impulse electrical field or radio noise.
When you start the engine, avoid pressing
the accelerator pedal before and during
operation. Only use the accelerator pedal
when you have difficulty starting the
engine.
IGNITION SWITCH
Note: Make sure the key is clean before
inserting it into any lock cylinder.
0(off) - The ignition is off.
Note: When you switch the ignition off and
leave your vehicle, do not leave your key in
the ignition. This could cause your vehicle
battery to lose charge.
I (accessory) - Allows the electrical
accessories such as the radio to operate
while the engine is not running.
Note: Do not leave the ignition key in this
position for too long to avoid your vehicle
battery losing charge.
II (on) - All electrical circuits operational.
Warning lamps and indicators are
illuminated.
III (start) - cranks the engine. Release the
key as soon as the engine starts.
PUSH BUTTON IGNITION
SWITCH
WARNING
Always check that the steering wheel
lock is deactivated before
attempting to move your vehicle.
Failure to deactivate the steering wheel
lock could result in a crash.
118
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Note: The system may not function if the
passive key is close to metal objects or
electronic devices, for example keys or a cell
phone.
Note: The ignition will automatically turn
off if your vehicle is left unattended. This is
to prevent the vehicle battery from losing
charge.
Note: A valid passive key must be located
inside your vehicle to switch the ignition on
and start your vehicle.
Switching the Ignition On to
Accessory Mode
Press the push button ignition switch once
without your foot on the brake or clutch
pedal. It is on the instrument panel near
the steering wheel. All electrical circuits
and accessories are operational and the
warning lamps and indicators illuminate.
Press the push button ignition switch again
without your foot on the brake or clutch
pedal to switch the ignition off.
Starting Your Vehicle
Vehicles with Manual Transmission
1. Fully depress the clutch pedal.
2. Briefly press the push button ignition
switch.
Note: Releasing the clutch pedal during
engine starting stops the engine from
cranking.
Vehicles with Automatic Transmission
1. Shift into park (P).
2. Fully depress the brake pedal.
3. Briefly press the push button ignition
switch.
Note: Releasing the brake pedal during
engine starting stops the engine from
cranking.
Vehicles with a Diesel Engine
Note: Engine cranking will not start until
the engine glow plug warning lamp turns
off. This may take several seconds in
extremely cold conditions.
Failure to Start
The system does not function if:
• The passive key frequencies are
jammed.
• The passive key battery has no charge.
If you are unable to start your vehicle, do
the following:
119
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
1. Press and slide the centre console
divider to access the back-up slot.
2. Place the passive key flat on the
symbol at the bottom of the floor
console storage compartment.
3. With the passive key in this position,
you can use the push button ignition
switch to switch the ignition on and
start your vehicle.
Vehicles with Manual Transmission
If the engine does not crank when the
clutch pedal has been fully depressed and
the push button ignition switch is pressed,
do the following:
1. Fully depress both the clutch and brake
pedals.
2. Press the push button ignition switch
until the engine starts.
Note: Releasing the clutch pedal during
engine starting stops the engine from
cranking. A message may appear in the
information display.
Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Stationary
Vehicles with Manual Transmission
Briefly press the push button ignition
switch.
Vehicles with Automatic Transmission
1. Shift into park (P).
2. Press the push button ignition switch.
Note: The ignition, all electrical circuits and
all warning lamps and indicators will be
turned off.
Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Moving
WARNING
Switching off the engine when the
vehicle is still moving will result in a
loss of brake and steering assistance.
The steering will not lock, but higher effort
will be required. When the ignition is
switched off, some electrical circuits,
including air bags, warning lamps and
indicators may also be off. If the ignition
was turned off accidentally, you can shift
into neutral (N) and re-start the engine.
1. Press and hold the push button ignition
switch, or press it three times within
two seconds.
2. Shift into neutral and use the brakes to
bring your vehicle to a safe stop.
3. When your vehicle has stopped, shift
into park (P) and switch the ignition
off.
120
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Fast Restart
The fast restart feature allows you to
restart your vehicle within 10 seconds of
switching it off, even if it does not detect
a valid passive key.
Within 10 seconds of switching your vehicle
off, press the brake pedal and press the
push button ignition switch. After 10
seconds, you can no longer start your
vehicle if it does not detect a valid passive
key.
Once your vehicle starts, it remains running
until you press the push button ignition
switch, even if your vehicle does not detect
a valid passive key. If you open and close
a door while your vehicle is running, the
system searches for a valid passive key.
You cannot start your vehicle if the system
does not detect a valid passive key within
10 seconds.
STEERING WHEEL LOCK -
VEHICLES WITH: PUSH
BUTTON START
Your vehicle has an electronically
controlled steering wheel lock that
operates automatically.
The system will lock the steering wheel
after a short period of time once you have
parked your vehicle and the passive key is
outside your vehicle, or when you lock your
vehicle.
Note: The system will not lock the steering
wheel when the ignition is on or while your
vehicle is moving.
Unlocking the Steering Wheel
Switch the ignition on to unlock the
steering wheel.
Note: You may have to rotate the steering
wheel slightly to assist unlocking.
STEERING WHEEL LOCK -
VEHICLES WITHOUT: PUSH
BUTTON START
WARNING
Always check that the steering is
unlocked before attempting to move
your vehicle.
To lock the steering wheel:
1. Remove the key from the ignition
switch.
2. Rotate the steering wheel slightly to
engage the lock.
To unlock the steering wheel:
1. Insert the key in the ignition switch.
2. Turn the key to position I.
Note: You may need to rotate the steering
wheel slightly to assist unlocking if there is
a steering wheel load applied.
STARTING A GASOLINE
ENGINE
The speed at which the engine idles
immediately after starting is optimized to
minimize vehicle emissions and maximize
cabin comfort and fuel economy.
121
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Note: You can crank the engine for a total
of 60 seconds without the engine starting
before the starting system temporarily
disables. The 60 seconds does not have to
be all at once. For example, if you crank the
engine three times for 20 seconds each
time, without the engine starting, you
reached the 60-second time limit. A
message appears in the information display
alerting you that you exceeded the cranking
time. You cannot attempt to start the engine
for at least 15 minutes. After 15 minutes, you
are limited to a 15-second engine cranking
time. You need to wait 60 minutes before
you can crank the engine for 60 seconds
again.
Before starting your vehicle, check the
following:
• Make sure all occupants have fastened
their safety belts.
• Make sure the headlamps and
electrical accessories are off.
• Make sure the parking brake is on.
• Make sure the transmission is in park
(P) or neutral.
• Switch the ignition key to position II. If
your vehicle is equipped with a keyless
ignition, see the following instructions.
Vehicles with an Ignition Key
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
1. Fully press the brake pedal. If your
vehicle is equipped with a manual
transmission, fully press the clutch
pedal.
2. Turn the key to position III to start the
engine.
Note: The engine may continue cranking
for up to 15 seconds or until it starts.
Note: If the engine does not start within 10
seconds, wait for a short period and try
again.
Vehicles with Keyless Start
See Push Button Ignition Switch (page
118).
Failure to Start
If you cannot start the engine after three
attempts, wait 10 seconds and follow this
procedure:
1. If your vehicle is equipped with an
automatic transmission, fully press the
brake pedal. If your vehicle is equipped
with a manual transmission, fully press
the clutch pedal and apply the
handbrake.
2. Move the transmission selector lever
to position P or N.
3. Fully depress the accelerator pedal and
hold it there.
4. Start the engine.
Automatic Shutdown
This feature automatically shuts down
your vehicle if it has been idling for an
extended period. The ignition also turns off
in order to save battery power. Before your
vehicle shuts down, a message appears in
the information display showing a timer
counting down from 30 seconds. If you do
not intervene within 30 seconds, your
vehicle shuts down. Another message
appears in the information display to
inform you that your vehicle has shut down
in order to save fuel. Start your vehicle as
you normally do.
Automatic Shutdown Override
Note: You cannot permanently switch off
the automatic shutdown feature. When you
switch it off temporarily, it turns on at the
next ignition cycle.
122
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
You can stop the shutdown, or reset the
timer, at any point before the 30-second
countdown has expired by doing any of the
following:
• You can reset the timer by interacting
with your vehicle (such as pressing the
brake pedal or accelerator pedal).
• You can temporarily switch off the
shutdown feature any time the ignition
is on (for the current ignition cycle
only). Use the information display to
do so. See Information Displays
(page 80).
• During the countdown before
shutdown, you are prompted to press
OK or RESET (depending on your type
of information display) to temporarily
switch the feature off (for the current
ignition cycle only).
Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Stationary
Vehicles with an Ignition Key
1. For vehicles with automatic
transmission, shift into park (P). For
vehicles with manual transmission,
shift into neutral.
2. Turn the key to position 0.
3. Apply the parking brake.
Vehicles with Keyless Start
See Push Button Ignition Switch (page
118).
Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Moving
WARNING
Switching off the engine when the
vehicle is still moving will result in a
loss of brake and steering assistance.
The steering will not lock, but higher effort
will be required. When the ignition is
switched off, some electrical circuits,
including air bags, warning lamps and
indicators may also be off. If the ignition
was turned off accidentally, you can shift
into neutral (N) and re-start the engine.
Vehicles with an Ignition Key
1. Shift into neutral and use the brakes to
bring your vehicle to a safe stop.
2. When your vehicle has stopped, shift
into park (P) or neutral and switch the
ignition off.
3. Apply the parking brake.
Vehicles with Keyless Start
See Push Button Ignition Switch (page
118).
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes
WARNING
If you smell exhaust fumes inside
your vehicle, have your vehicle
checked by your authorized dealer
immediately. Do not drive your vehicle if
you smell exhaust fumes. Carbon
monoxide is present in exhaust fumes.
Take precautions to avoid its dangerous
effects.
123
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Important Ventilating Information
If you stop your vehicle and then leave the
engine idling for long periods, we
recommend that you do one of the
following:
• Open the windows at least 1 in (3 cm).
• Set your climate control to outside air.
STARTING A DIESEL ENGINE
Cold or Hot Engine
1. Switch the ignition on and wait until
the glow plug indicator goes off.
2. Fully depress the clutch pedal.
3. Start the engine.
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
Note: Releasing the clutch pedal while the
engine is starting will stop the engine
cranking and return to ignition on.
Note: When the temperature is below 5°F
(-15°C), you may need to crank the engine
for up to 10 seconds.
Note: You can only operate the starter for
a limited period of time.
Note: After a limited number of attempts
to start your engine, the system will not
allow you to try again until a period of time
has elapsed, for example 30 minutes.
Failure to Start
If the engine does not crank when the
clutch pedal has been fully depressed and
the ignition key is turned to position III.
1. Fully depress the clutch and brake
pedals.
2. Turn the key to position III until the
engine has started.
DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER
The filter forms part of the emissions
reduction system on your vehicle. It filters
harmful diesel particulates (soot) from the
exhaust gas.
Regeneration
WARNING
Do not park or idle your vehicle over
dry leaves, dry grass or other
combustible materials. The
regeneration process creates very high
exhaust gas temperatures and the exhaust
will radiate a considerable amount of heat
during and after regeneration and after you
have switched the engine off. This is a
potential fire hazard.
Note: Avoid running out of fuel.
Note: During regeneration at low speed or
engine idle, you may smell a hot metallic
odor and could notice a clicking metallic
sound. This is due to the high temperatures
reached during regeneration and is normal.
Note: Changes in the engine or exhaust
sound may be heard during the regeneration
process.
Note: After you have switched your engine
off the fans may continue to run for a short
period of time.
The diesel particulate filter on your vehicle
requires periodic regeneration to maintain
its correct function. Your vehicle will carry
out this process automatically.
If your journeys meet one of the following
conditions:
• You drive only short distances.
• You frequently switch the ignition on
and off.
• Your journeys contain a high level of
acceleration and deceleration.
124
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
You must carry out occasional trips with
the following conditions to assist the
regeneration process:
• Drive your vehicle in more favorable
conditions, which you will find at higher
vehicle speeds in normal driving, on a
main road or freeway for a minimum
of 20 minutes. This drive may include
short stops that will not affect the
regeneration process.
• Avoid prolonged idling and always
observe speed limits and road
conditions.
• Do not switch the ignition off.
• Select a suitable gear to ideally
maintain engine speed between 1500
and 3000 RPM.
SWITCHING OFF THE ENGINE
Vehicles With a Turbocharger
WARNING
Do not switch the engine off when it
is running at high speed. If you do, the
turbocharger will continue running
after the engine oil pressure has dropped
to zero. This will lead to premature
turbocharger bearing wear.
Release the accelerator pedal. Wait until
the engine has reached idle speed and then
switch it off.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER
WARNINGS
Failure to follow engine block heater
instructions could result in property
damage or serious personal injury.
Do not use your heater with
ungrounded electrical systems or
two-pronged adapters. There is a risk
of electrical shock.
Note: The heater is most effective when
outdoor temperatures are below 0°F
(-18°C).
The heater acts as a starting aid by
warming the engine coolant. This allows
the climate control system to respond
quickly. The equipment includes a heater
element (installed in the engine block) and
a wire harness. You can connect the
system to a grounded 220-240 volt AC
electrical source.
We recommend that you do the following
for a safe and correct operation:
• Use an extension cord suitable for use
outdoors and in cold temperatures. It
should be clearly marked that it is
suitable for use with outdoor
appliances. Do not use an indoor
extension cord outdoors. This could
result in an electric shock or become a
fire hazard.
• Use as short an extension cord as
possible.
• Do not use multiple extension cords.
• Make sure that when in operation, the
extension cord plug and heater cord
plug connections are free and clear of
water. This could cause an electric
shock or fire.
• Make sure your vehicle is parked in a
clean area, clear of combustibles.
• Make sure the heater, heater cord and
extension cord are firmly connected.
• Check for heat anywhere in the
electrical hookup once the system has
been operating for approximately 30
minutes.
• Make sure the system is unplugged and
properly stowed before starting and
driving your vehicle.
• Make sure the heater system is
checked for proper operation before
winter.
125
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Using the Engine Block Heater
The engine block heater plug is located in
the front bumper. Open the hinged, circular
door and make sure the receptacle
terminals are clean and dry prior to use.
The heater uses 0.4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours
of energy per hour of use. The system does
not have a thermostat. It achieves
maximum temperature after
approximately three hours of operation.
Using the heater longer than three hours
does not improve system performance and
unnecessarily uses electricity.
126
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
AUTO-START-STOP
The system reduces fuel consumption and
CO2 emissions by shutting down the
engine when your vehicle is idling, for
example at traffic lights.
WARNINGS
If your vehicle has an automatic
transmission, move the transmission
selector lever to position P before
leaving your vehicle.
The engine may restart
automatically if required by the
system.
Switch the ignition off before
opening the hood or carrying out any
maintenance.
Always switch the ignition off before
leaving your vehicle, as the system
may have shut down the engine but
the ignition will still be live.
Note: The auto-start-stop indicator
illuminates green when the engine shuts
down. See Warning Lamps and Indicators
(page 75). It flashes amber with a message
when the driver needs to shift to neutral or
press a pedal. See Information Messages
(page 83). If it illuminates grey the system
is not available.
Using Auto-Start-Stop Manual
Transmission
To Stop the Engine
1. Stop your vehicle.
2. Shift into neutral.
3. Release the clutch and accelerator
pedal.
To Re-Start the Engine
Press the clutch pedal.
Note: To obtain maximum benefit from the
system, move the transmission lever to
neutral and release the clutch pedal during
any stop of longer than three seconds.
Note: Start-stop also comes with stall
recovery. If you fully depress the clutch
pedal after stalling the engine, the engine
automatically restarts.
Using Auto-Start-Stop Automatic
Transmission
To Stop the Engine
1. Stop your vehicle in drive (D).
2. Release the accelerator pedal.
3. Maintain pressure on the brake pedal.
Note: The engine will also shut down if the
gearshift lever is in park (P) or neutral (N)
regardless of brake pedal position.
To Re-Start the Engine
Release the brake pedal or press the
accelerator pedal.
Limitations of Use
The system may not shut down the engine
under certain conditions, for example:
• Low engine operating temperature.
• To maintain the interior climate.
• The battery charge level is low.
• The outside temperature is too low or
too high.
• Opening the driver door when in
motion.
• When the driver safety belt is
unfastened.
• The heated windshield is on.
127
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Unique Driving Characteristics
• During regeneration of the diesel
particulate filter.
• Transmission is in Sport or Manual
modes (automatic transmission only).
The system may automatically restart the
engine under certain conditions, for
example:
• To maintain the interior climate, for
example air conditioning.
• The battery charge level is low.
• Your vehicle starts to roll downhill in
neutral.
• The heated windshield is turned on.
• When the driver safety belt is
unfastened (automatic transmission
only).
• The driver door is opened (automatic
transmission only).
• Transmission is shifted to Sport or
Manual modes (automatic
transmission only).
Switching the System On and Off
When you switch the ignition on, the
system automatically turns on.
To switch the system off, press the switch
and the word OFF illuminates. Press again
to switch the system back on. The system
only switches off for the current ignition
cycle.
Note: If the system detects a malfunction,
it turns off. The OFF lamp on the switch
illuminates continuously. If this remains on
after an ignition cycle, have your vehicle
checked by an authorized dealer.
Note: The system may not function if you
leave electrical equipment connected with
the ignition off.
Note: For vehicles with auto-start-stop, the
battery requirement is different. Replace it
with one of exactly the same specification
as the original.
128
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Unique Driving Characteristics
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNINGS
Do not overfill the fuel tank. The
pressure in an overfilled tank may
cause leakage and lead to fuel spray
and fire.
The fuel system may be under
pressure. If you hear a hissing sound
near the fuel filler door (Easy Fuel
capless fuel system), do not refuel until
the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray
out, which could cause serious personal
injury.
Automotive fuels can cause serious
injury or death if misused or
mishandled.
Flow of fuel through a fuel pump
nozzle can produce static electricity.
This can cause a fire if you are filling
an ungrounded fuel container.
Fuel ethanol and gasoline may
contain benzene, which is a
cancer-causing agent.
When refueling always shut the
engine off and never allow sparks or
open flames near the filler neck.
Never smoke or use a cell phone while
refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely
hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid
inhaling excess fumes.
Observe the following guidelines when
handling automotive fuel:
• Extinguish all smoking materials and
any open flames before refueling your
vehicle.
• Always turn off the vehicle before
refueling.
• Automotive fuels can be harmful or
fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as
gasoline is highly toxic and if
swallowed can cause death or
permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed,
call a physician immediately, even if no
symptoms are immediately apparent.
The toxic effects of fuel may not be
visible for hours.
• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too
much fuel vapor of any kind can lead
to eye and respiratory tract irritation.
In severe cases, excessive or prolonged
breathing of fuel vapor can cause
serious illness and permanent injury.
• Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If
fuel is splashed in the eyes, remove
contact lenses (if worn), flush with
water for 15 minutes and seek medical
attention. Failure to seek proper
medical attention could lead to
permanent injury.
• Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed
through the skin. If fuel is splashed on
the skin, clothing or both, promptly
remove contaminated clothing and
wash skin thoroughly with soap and
water. Repeated or prolonged skin
contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes
skin irritation.
• Be particularly careful if you are taking
“ Antabuse” or other forms of disulfiram
for the treatment of alcoholism.
Breathing gasoline vapors, or skin
contact could cause an adverse
reaction. In sensitive individuals, serious
personal injury or sickness may result.
If fuel is splashed on the skin, promptly
wash skin thoroughly with soap and
water. Consult a physician immediately
if you experience an adverse reaction.
129
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
FUEL QUALITY - GASOLINE
WARNINGS
Do not mix gasoline with oil, diesel
or other liquids. This could cause a
chemical reaction.
Do not use leaded gasoline or
gasoline with additives containing
other metallic compounds (e.g.
manganese-based). They could damage
the emission system.
Note: We recommend that you use only
high quality fuel.
Note: We do not recommend the use of
additional additives or other engine
treatments for normal vehicle use.
Use minimum 95 octane unleaded
gasoline that meets the specification
defined by EN 228 or the equivalent
national specification.
Your vehicle is suitable for use with ethanol
blends up to 10% (E5 and E10).
Long-Term Storage
Most gasoline contains ethanol. We
recommend that you fill the fuel tank with
fuel that does not contain ethanol if you
intend to store your vehicle for more than
two months. Alternatively, we recommend
that you seek advice from an authorized
dealer.
FUEL QUALITY - E85
Choosing the Right Fuel
Use only regular unleaded gasoline with a
minimum pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of
87, or regular unleaded gasoline blended
with a maximum of 85% ethanol (E85).
Flex fuel vehicles have a yellow bezel on
the fuel tank filler pipe opening. Some fuel
stations offer fuels posted as regular
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating
below 87, particularly in high altitude areas.
Fuels with octane levels below 87 are not
recommended.
Do not use any fuel other than those
recommended because they could lead to
engine damage that may not be covered
by the vehicle Warranty.
Note: Use of any fuel other than those
recommended can impair the emission
control system and cause a loss of vehicle
performance.
Do not use:
• Diesel fuel.
• Fuels containing kerosene or paraffin.
• Fuels containing more than 85%
ethanol or E100 fuel.
• Fuels containing methanol.
• Fuels containing metallic-based
additives, including manganese-based
compounds.
130
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
• Fuels containing the octane booster
additive, methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
• Leaded fuel (using leaded fuel is
prohibited by law).
The use of fuels with metallic compounds
such as methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (commonly known
as MMT), which is a manganese-based
fuel additive, will impair engine
performance and affect the emission
control system.
Do not be concerned if the engine
sometimes knocks lightly. However, if it
knocks heavily under most driving
conditions while you are using fuel with the
recommended octane rating, contact an
authorized dealer to prevent any engine
damage.
FUEL QUALITY - DIESEL
WARNINGS
Do not mix diesel with oil, gasoline
or other liquids. This could cause a
chemical reaction.
Do not add kerosene, paraffin or
gasoline to diesel. This could cause
damage to the fuel system.
Use diesel that meets the
specification defined by EN 590 or
the relevant national specification.
Note: We recommend that you use only
high quality fuel.
Note: We do not recommend the use of
additional additives or other engine
treatments for normal vehicle use.
Note: We do not recommend the use of
additional additives to prevent fuel waxing.
Long-Term Storage
Most diesel fuels contain biodiesel. We
recommend that you fill the fuel tank with
fuel that does not contain biodiesel if you
intend to store your vehicle for more than
two months. Alternatively, we recommend
that you seek advice from your dealer.
FUEL FILLER FUNNEL
LOCATION
The fuel filler funnel is located in the spare
wheel storage tray.
RUNNING OUT OF FUEL
Running out of fuel can cause damage not
covered by the vehicle Warranty.
If your vehicle runs out of fuel:
• Add a minimum of 1.1 gal (5 L) of fuel
to restart the engine. If your vehicle is
out of fuel and on a steep slope, more
fuel may be required.
• You may need to switch the ignition
from off to on several times after
refueling to allow the fuel system to
pump the fuel from the tank to the
engine. When restarting, cranking time
takes a few seconds longer than
normal.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Use the following guidelines to avoid
electrostatic charge build-up when filling
an ungrounded fuel container:
• Only use an approved fuel container to
transfer fuel to your vehicle. Place the
container on the ground when filling it.
• Do not fill a fuel container when it is
inside your vehicle (including the cargo
area).
131
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact
with the fuel container when filling it.
• Do not use a device that holds the fuel
pump nozzle lever in the fill position.
Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel
Container
WARNINGS
Do not insert the nozzle of a fuel
container or an aftermarket funnel
into the fuel system filler neck. This
may damage the fuel system filler neck or
its seal and cause fuel to run onto the
ground.
Do not try to pry open or push open
the capless fuel system with foreign
objects. This could damage the fuel
system and its seal and cause injury to you
or others.
Do not dispose of fuel in the
household refuse or the public
sewage system. Use an authorized
waste disposal facility.
When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from
a fuel container, use the plastic funnel
included with your vehicle. See Fuel Filler
Funnel Location (page 131).
Note: Do not use aftermarket funnels as
they will not work with the capless fuel
system and can damage it.
When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from
a fuel container, do the following:
1. Fully open the fuel tank filler door until
it engages and remove the fuel tank
filler cap.
Note: Capless fuel systems do not have a
fuel tank filler cap.
2. Fully insert the plastic funnel into the
fuel tank filler pipe opening.
3. Add fuel to your vehicle from the fuel
container.
4. Remove the plastic funnel from the
fuel tank filler pipe opening.
5. Replace the fuel tank filler cap and
close the fuel tank filler door.
6. Clean the plastic funnel and place it
back in your vehicle or properly dispose
of it.
Note: Extra funnels can be purchased from
an authorized dealer if you choose to
dispose of the funnel.
CATALYTIC CONVERTER
WARNING
Do not park or idle your vehicle over
dry leaves, dry grass or other
combustible materials. The exhaust
will radiate a considerable amount of heat
during use, and after you have switched
the engine off. This is a potential fire
hazard.
Driving with a Catalytic Converter
WARNINGS
Avoid running out of fuel.
132
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
WARNINGS
Do not crank the engine for long
periods.
Do not run the engine when a spark
plug lead is disconnected.
Do not push-start or tow-start your
vehicle. Use booster cables. See
Jump Starting the Vehicle (page
204).
Do not switch the ignition off when
driving.
REFUELING
WARNINGS
Do not overfill the fuel tank. The
pressure in an overfilled tank may
cause leakage and lead to fuel spray
and fire.
Do not try to pry open or push open
the capless fuel system with foreign
objects. This could damage the fuel
system and its seal and cause injury to you
or others.
Do not remove the fuel pump nozzle
from its fully inserted position when
refueling.
Do not attempt to start the engine if
you have filled the fuel tank with the
incorrect fuel. This may cause engine
damage not covered by the vehicle
Warranty. Have your vehicle checked
immediately.
When refueling always shut the
engine off and never allow sparks or
open flames near the fuel tank filler
valve. Never smoke or use a cell phone
while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely
hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid
inhaling excess fumes.
WARNINGS
If you use a high pressure spray to
wash your vehicle, only spray the fuel
tank filler door briefly from a distance
not less than 8 in (20 cm).
Wait at least 10 seconds before
removing the fuel pump nozzle to
allow any residual fuel to drain into
the fuel tank.
Stop refueling after the fuel pump
nozzle automatically shuts off for the
second time. Failure to follow this
will fill the expansion space in the fuel tank
and could lead to fuel overflowing.
Note: Your vehicle does not have a fuel filler
cap.
Type 1: Left hand side - press the
fuel tank filler door to open it.
A
Type 1: Right hand side - press
the fuel tank filler door to open
it.
B
Type 2: Left hand side - pull the
fuel tank filler door to open it.
C
Type 2: Right hand side - pull the
fuel tank filler door to open it.
D
133
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
1. Fully open the fuel tank filler door until
it engages.
Note: When you insert the correct size fuel
pump nozzle a spring loaded inhibitor will
open.
2. Insert the fuel pump nozzle up to the
first notch on the nozzle A. Keep it
resting on the cover of the fuel tank
filler pipe opening.
3. Hold the fuel pump nozzle in position
B when refueling. Holding the fuel
pump nozzle in position A may affect
the flow of fuel and shut off the fuel
pump nozzle before the fuel tank is full.
4. Operate the fuel pump nozzle within
the area shown.
5. Slightly raise the fuel pump nozzle and
then slowly remove it.
FUEL CONSUMPTION
We derive CO2 and fuel consumption
figures in laboratory tests according to
Regulation (EC) 715/2007 or CR (EC)
692/2008 and subsequent amendments.
They are intended as a comparison
between makes and models of vehicles.
They are not intended to represent the real
world fuel consumption you may get from
your vehicle.
Real world fuel consumption is governed
by many factors, for example driving style,
high speed driving, stop-start driving, air
conditioning usage, the accessories fitted,
payload and towing.
134
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
The advertised capacity is the indicated
capacity and the empty reserve combined.
Indicated capacity is the difference in the
amount of fuel in the fuel tank and when
the fuel gauge indicates empty. Empty
reserve is the amount of fuel in the fuel
tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty.
Note: The amount of fuel in the empty
reserve varies and should not be relied upon
to increase driving range. When refueling
your vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates
empty, you might not be able to refuel the
full amount of the advertised capacity due
to the empty reserve still present in the fuel
tank.
Filling the Fuel Tank
For consistent results when refueling:
• Switch the ignition off.
• Allow no more than two automatic
shut-offs when refueling.
Results are most accurate when the
refueling method is consistent.
Calculating Fuel Economy
Do not measure fuel economy during the
first 1,000 mi (1,600 km) of driving (this is
the engine break-in period). A more
accurate measurement is obtained after
2,500 mi (4,000 km). Also, fuel expense,
frequency of fill ups or fuel gauge readings
are not accurate ways to measure fuel
economy.
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record
the initial odometer reading.
2. Each time you fill the fuel tank, record
the amount of fuel added.
3. After at least three fill ups, fill the fuel
tank and record the current odometer
reading.
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading
from the current odometer reading.
5. Calculate fuel economy by dividing
miles traveled by gallons used (For
Metric: Multiply liters used by 100, then
divide by kilometers traveled).
Keep a record for at least one month and
record the type of driving (city or freeway).
This provides an accurate estimate of your
vehicle’s fuel economy under current
driving conditions. Additionally, keeping
records during summer and winter show
how temperature impacts fuel economy.
In general, your vehicle will use more fuel
in cold temperatures.
135
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
Selecting Reverse Gear
Do not engage reverse gear when your
vehicle is moving. This can cause damage
to the transmission.
Raise the collar when you select reverse
gear.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNINGS
Always set the parking brake fully
and make sure you shift the gearshift
lever to park (P). Switch the ignition
off and remove the key whenever you leave
your vehicle.
Do not apply the brake pedal and
accelerator pedal simultaneously.
Applying both pedals simultaneously
for more than three seconds will limit
engine rpm, which may result in difficulty
maintaining speed in traffic and could lead
to serious injury.
Selector Lever Positions
ParkP
ReverseR
NeutralN
DriveD
Sport modeS
WARNING
Apply the brakes before shifting the
gearshift lever to a forward or reverse
gear. Keep the brakes applied until
you are ready to move off.
Press the button on the front of the
gearshift lever to shift to each position.
The gearshift lever position will be shown
in the instrument cluster display.
Park (P)
WARNINGS
Shift the gearshift lever to park (P)
only when your vehicle is stationary.
Apply the parking brake and shift the
gearshift lever to park (P) before
leaving your vehicle. Make sure that
the gearshift lever is latched in position.
136
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Transmission
In this position, power is not transmitted
to the driven wheels and the transmission
is locked. You can start the engine with the
gearshift lever in this position.
Note: A warning tone sounds if you open
the driver door and you have not shifted the
gearshift lever to park (P).
Reverse (R)
WARNINGS
Shift the gearshift lever to reverse
(R) only when your vehicle is
stationary and the engine is at idle
speed.
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting the gearshift lever out
of reverse (R).
Shift the gearshift lever to reverse (R) to
allow your vehicle to move backward.
Neutral (N)
In this position, power is not transmitted
to the driven wheels but the transmission
is not locked. You can start the engine with
the gearshift lever in this position.
Drive (D)
Drive (D) is the normal driving position for
the best fuel economy and smoothness.
Shift the gearshift lever to drive (D) to
allow your vehicle to move forward and
shift automatically through the forward
gears.
The transmission will shift to the
appropriate gear for optimum performance
based on ambient temperature, road
gradient, vehicle load and your input.
Sport Mode (S)
Switch on sport mode by shifting the
gearshift lever to sport (S).
Emergency Park Position Release
Lever
WARNINGS
Do not drive your vehicle until you
verify that the brake lamps are
working.
This procedure requires you to shift
the gearshift lever out of park (P)
causing your vehicle to roll. Make
sure you fully set the parking brake before
attempting to release the gearshift lever.
If you release the parking brake and
the brake warning lamp remains
illuminated, the brakes may not be
working correctly. The system has
detected a fault that requires service.
Note: For some markets this feature will be
disabled.
Your vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift
interlock feature that prevents moving the
gearshift lever from park (P) when the
ignition is in the on position and the brake
pedal is not pressed.
If you cannot move the gearshift lever out
of park (P) position with the ignition in the
on position and the brake pedal pressed,
a malfunction may have occurred. It is
possible that a fuse has blown or your
vehicle’s brake lamps are not operating
properly. See Fuse Specification Chart
(page 207).
If the fuse is not blown and the brake
lamps are working properly, the following
procedure will allow you to move the
gearshift lever from park (P):
137
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Transmission
1. Remove the side panel on the right side
of the gearshift lever.
2. Locate the access hole.
3. Insert the screwdriver (or similar tool)
into the access hole and press the lever
forward while pulling the gearshift lever
out of the park (P) position and into
the neutral (N) position.
4. Remove the tool and reinstall the
panel.
5. Start your vehicle and release the
parking brake.
Automatic Transmission Adaptive
Learning
This feature may increase durability and
provide consistent shift feel over the life
of your vehicle. A new vehicle or
transmission may have firm shifts, soft
shifts or both. This operation is considered
normal and does not affect function or
durability of the transmission. Over time,
the adaptive learning process fully updates
transmission operation.
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud
or Snow
Note: Do not rock your vehicle if the engine
is not at normal operating temperature or
damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock your vehicle for more
than a minute or damage to the
transmission and tires may occur, or the
engine may overheat.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow,
it may be rocked out by shifting between
forward and reverse gears, stopping
between shifts in a steady pattern.
Press lightly on the accelerator in each
gear.
138
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Transmission
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any handheld device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Note: Occasional brake noise is normal. If
a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding or
continuous squeal sound is present, the
brake linings may be worn-out. If your
vehicle has continuous vibration or shudder
in the steering wheel while braking, have
your vehicle checked by an authorized
dealer.
Note: Brake dust may accumulate on the
wheels, even under normal driving
conditions. Some dust is inevitable as the
brakes wear. See Cleaning the Alloy
Wheels (page 252).
Note: Depending on applicable laws and
regulations in the country for which your
vehicle was originally built, the brake lamps
may flash during heavy braking. Following
this the hazard warning flashers may also
flash when your vehicle comes to a stop.
Wet brakes result in reduced braking
efficiency. Gently press the brake pedal a
few times when driving from a car wash or
standing water to dry the brakes.
Brake Over Accelerator
In the event the accelerator pedal
becomes stuck or entrapped, apply steady
and firm pressure to the brake pedal to
slow the vehicle and reduce engine power.
If you experience this condition, apply the
brakes and bring your vehicle to a safe
stop. Shift the transmission to park (P)
(automatic transmission) or to a low gear
(manual transmission), switch the engine
off and apply the parking brake. Inspect
the accelerator pedal and the area around
it for any items or debris that may be
obstructing its movement. If none are
found and the condition persists, have your
vehicle towed to the dealer for service.
Brake Assist
Brake assist detects when you brake
heavily by measuring the rate at which you
press the brake pedal. It provides
maximum braking efficiency as long as you
press the pedal. Brake assist can reduce
stopping distances in critical situations.
Anti-lock Brake System
This system helps you maintain steering
control and vehicle stability during
emergency stops by keeping the brakes
from locking.
HINTS ON DRIVING WITH
ANTI-LOCK BRAKES
Note: When the system is operating, the
brake pedal will pulse and may travel
further. Maintain pressure on the brake
pedal. You may also hear a noise from the
system. This is normal.
The anti-lock braking system will not
eliminate the risks when:
• You drive too closely to the vehicle in
front of you.
• Your vehicle is hydroplaning.
139
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Brakes
• You take corners too fast.
• The road surface is poor.
PARKING BRAKE
Vehicles With Automatic
Transmission
WARNING
Always set the parking brake fully
and leave your vehicle with the
transmission selector lever in
position P.
Note: If you park your vehicle on a hill and
facing uphill move the transmission selector
lever to position P and turn the steering
wheel away from the curb.
Note: If you park your vehicle on a hill and
facing downhill move the transmission
selector lever to position P and turn the
steering wheel toward the curb.
Vehicles With Manual
Transmission
WARNING
Always set the parking brake fully.
Note: If you park your vehicle on a hill and
facing uphill select first gear and turn the
steering wheel away from the curb.
Note: If you park your vehicle on a hill and
facing downhill select reverse gear and turn
the steering wheel toward the curb.
All Vehicles
Note: Do not press the release button while
pulling the lever up.
To apply the parking brake:
1. Press the foot brake pedal firmly.
2. Pull the parking brake lever up to its
fullest extent.
To release the parking brake:
1. Press the brake pedal firmly.
2. Pull the lever up slightly.
3. Press the release button and push the
lever down.
HILL START ASSIST
WARNINGS
The system does not replace the
parking brake. When you leave your
vehicle, always apply the parking
brake. Failure to leave your vehicle securely
parked may lead to a crash or injury. See
Parking Brake (page 140).
You must remain in your vehicle
when the system turns on. At all
times, you are responsible for
controlling your vehicle, supervising the
system and intervening, if required. Failure
to take care may result in the loss of
control of your vehicle, serious personal
injury or death.
The system will turn off if a
malfunction is apparent or if you rev
the engine excessively. Failure to
take care may result in the loss of control
of your vehicle, serious personal injury or
death.
The system makes it easier to pull away
when your vehicle is on a slope without the
need to use the parking brake.
When the system is active, your vehicle
remains stationary on the slope for two to
three seconds after you release the brake
pedal. This allows time to move your foot
from the brake to the accelerator pedal.
The system releases the brakes
automatically once the engine has
140
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Brakes
developed sufficient drive to prevent your
vehicle from rolling down the slope. This
is an advantage when pulling away on a
slope, for example from a car park ramp,
traffic lights or when reversing uphill into
a parking space.
Note: The system only functions when you
bring your vehicle to a complete standstill
in an uphill gear (for example, drive when
facing uphill or reverse when facing
downhill).
Note: There is no warning light to indicate
the system is either on or off.
Using Hill Start Assist
1. Press the brake pedal to bring your
vehicle to a complete standstill. Keep
the brake pedal pressed.
2. If the sensors detect that your vehicle
is on a slope, the system activates
automatically.
3. When you remove your foot from the
brake pedal, your vehicle remains on
the slope without rolling away for
about two to three seconds. This hold
time automatically extends if you are
in the process of driving off.
4. Drive off in the normal manner. The
system releases the brakes
automatically.
Note: When you remove your foot from the
brake pedal and press the pedal again when
the system is active, you will experience
significantly reduced brake pedal travel. This
is normal.
Switching the System On and Off
Vehicles with Manual Transmission
You can switch this feature on or off in the
information display. The system
remembers the last setting when you start
your vehicle.
Vehicles with Automatic Transmission
You cannot turn the system on or off.
When you switch the ignition on, the
system automatically turns on.
141
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Brakes
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
The traction control system helps avoid
drive wheel spin and loss of traction.
If your vehicle begins to slide, the system
applies the brakes to individual wheels
and, when needed, reduces engine power
at the same time. If the wheels spin when
accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces,
the system reduces engine power in order
to increase traction.
USING TRACTION CONTROL
The system automatically turns on each
time you switch the ignition on.
Switching the System Off and On
Using the Information Display
Controls
Your vehicle comes with this feature
already enabled. If required, you can switch
this feature off using the information
display controls.
When you switch the system off, stability
control remains fully active.
Switching the System Off Using a
Switch (If Equipped)
The switch is located in the instrument
panel.
Press the switch. You will see a message
in conjunction with an illuminated icon in
the display. Press the switch again to
return the system to normal mode.
When you switch the system off, stability
control remains fully active.
142
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Traction Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
Electronic Stability Program
WARNING
The system does not relieve you of
your responsibility to drive with due
care and attention. Failure to do so
could result in loss of vehicle control,
personal injury or death.
Without ESCA
With ESCB
The system supports stability when your
vehicle starts to slide away from your
intended path. The system performs this
by braking individual wheels and reducing
engine torque as required.
The system also provides an enhanced
traction control function by reducing
engine torque if the wheels spin when you
accelerate. This improves your ability to
pull away on slippery roads or loose
surfaces, and improves comfort by limiting
wheel spin in hairpin bends.
Stability Control Warning Lamp
While driving, it flashes when the system
is operating. See Warning Lamps and
Indicators (page 75).
USING STABILITY CONTROL
The system automatically turns on each
time you switch the ignition on.
Switching the System Off and On
Using the Information Display
Controls
Your vehicle comes with this feature
already enabled. If required, you can switch
this feature off using the information
display. See General Information (page
80).
Stability control will remain on even when
you have switched the traction control off.
Switching the System Off Using a
Switch (If Equipped)
The switch is located in the instrument
panel.
Press the switch. You will see a message
in conjunction with an illuminated icon in
the display. Press the switch again to
return the system to normal mode.
Stability control will remain on even when
you have switched the traction control off.
143
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Stability Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
The system does not relieve you of
your responsibility to drive with due
care and attention.
If your vehicles has a non-Ford
approved trailer tow module the
system may not correctly detect
objects.
The sensors may not detect objects
in heavy rain or other conditions that
cause disruptive reflections.
The sensors may not detect objects
with surfaces that absorb ultrasonic
waves.
The system does not detect objects
that are moving away from your
vehicle. They will only be detected
shortly after they start to move toward
your vehicle.
Take particular care when reversing
with a tow ball arm or a rear fitted
accessory. For example, a bicycle
carrier. The rear parking aid will only
indicate the approximate distance from
the rear bumper to an object.
Note: If you use a high pressure spray to
wash your vehicle, only spray the sensors
briefly from a distance not less than 8 in
(20 cm).
Note: If your vehicle has a tow ball arm, the
system is turned off automatically when
trailer lamps (or lighting boards) are
connected to the 13-pin socket through a
Ford approved trailer tow module.
Note: Keep the sensors free from dirt, ice
or snow. Do not clean with sharp objects.
Note: The system may emit false alerts if
it detects a signal using the same frequency
as the sensors or if your vehicle is fully
loaded.
Note: The outer sensors may detect the
side walls of a garage. If the distance
between the outer sensors and the side wall
remains constant for three seconds, the
alert will turn off. As you continue the inner
sensors will detect objects directly behind
your vehicle.
REAR PARKING AID
WARNINGS
Sensing is only an aid to detect some
objects when moving forward or
backward at low speeds. Traffic
control systems, inclement weather or an
external motor and fan can affect the
sensors; this may include reduced
performance or false activation. To help
avoid personal injury you must read and
understand the limitations of the system
detailed in this section.
The parking aid system may not
prevent contact with small or moving
objects that are close to the ground.
The parking aid system gives an audible
warning when it detects a large object
helping to avoid damage to your vehicle.
To help avoid personal injury you must take
care when using the parking aid system.
Rear Sensing System
When the parking aid system produces an
audible warning, the audio system may
reduce the set volume to a predetermined
level.
Note: Some add-on equipment can cause
reduced performance or false activation.
For example, large trailer hitches, bike or
surfboard racks.
Note: The parking aid system sensors must
be kept clean and free from snow or ice to
avoid reduced performance or false
activation. Do not clean the sensors with
sharp objects.
144
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Parking Aids
Note: If the parking aid sensors are
misaligned due to vehicle bumper damage
it will cause reduced performance or false
activation.
The rear parking aid sensors turn on
automatically when you move the
transmission selector lever to R (reverse)
and your vehicle is moving at a speed of
less than 3 mph (5 km/h). Moving your
vehicle closer to a large object will increase
the audible warning repeat rate. When the
object is less than 12 inches (30
centimeters) from the center of your
vehicle’s rear bumper the audible warning
will sound continuously.
Sensor coverage area is up to 71
in (180 cm) from the rear
bumper.
A
Note: There is a decreased coverage area
at the outer corners.
The system detects large objects when
you move the transmission selector lever
to R (reverse):
• Your vehicle is moving backward at low
speed.
• Your vehicle is stationary but an object
is approaching the rear of your vehicle
at a low speed.
• Your vehicle is moving backward at low
speed and an object is approaching the
rear of your vehicle at a low speed.
Note: If your vehicle remains stationary for
two seconds the audible tone will mute. If
your vehicle moves backward, you will hear
the tone again.
Move the transmission selector lever from
R (reverse) or press the parking aid button
to switch the system off. If a fault is
present in the system, a warning message
appears in the information display and
does not allow you to switch the system
on. See Information Messages (page
83).
FRONT PARKING AID
WARNINGS
The parking aid system can only
assist you to detect objects when
your vehicle is moving at parking
speeds. Take care when using the system
to avoid personal injury.
To help avoid personal injury, always
use caution when in reverse and
when using the sensing system.
This system is not designed to
prevent contact with small or moving
objects. The system is designed to
provide a warning to assist you in detecting
large stationary objects to avoid damaging
your vehicle. The system may not detect
smaller objects, particularly those close to
the ground.
145
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Parking Aids
WARNINGS
Traffic control systems, inclement
weather, air brakes and external
motors and fans may affect correct
operation of the sensing system; this may
include reduced performance or a false
alerts.
Front Sensing System
When the parking aid system produces an
audible warning, the audio system may
reduce the set volume to a predetermined
level.
Note: Keep the sensors located on the
bumper or fascia free from snow, ice and
large accumulations of dirt. If the sensors
are covered, the system’s accuracy can be
affected. Do not clean the sensors with
sharp objects.
Note: If your vehicle sustains damage to
the bumper or fascia, leaving it misaligned
or bent, the sensing zone may be altered
causing inaccurate measurement of
obstacles or false beeps.
The front sensors are active when the
transmission is in any position other than
park (P). When your vehicle approaches
an object, a warning tone sounds. When
your vehicle moves closer to an object, the
warning tone repeat rate increases. The
warning tone sounds continuously when
an object is 12 in (30 cm) or less from the
front bumper.
You can also press the parking aid button
to switch the front parking aid system on
without selecting reverse (R).
The system automatically turns off when
your vehicle speed reaches 7 mph
(12 km/h).
Sensor coverage area is up to 28
in (70 cm) from the front
bumper and 6-14 inches (15-35
centimeters) to the side of the
front bumper.
A
If the transmission is in reverse (R), the
front sensing system provides audio
warnings when the vehicle is moving and
the detected obstacle is moving towards
the vehicle. Once the vehicle is stationary,
the audio warning will be stopped after 2
seconds.
The system detects objects when:
• Your vehicle is moving forward at low
speed.
• Your vehicle is moving forward at low
speed and an object is approaching the
front of your vehicle at a low speed.
Press the parking aid button to switch the
system off. If a fault is present in the
system, a warning message appears in the
information display and does not allow you
to switch the system on. See Information
Messages (page 83).
146
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Parking Aids
Obstacle Distance Indicator (If
Equipped)
The system provides obstacle distance
indication through the information display.
The distance indicator displays when the
transmission is in reverse (R).
The indicator displays:
• As the distance to the obstacle
decreases the indicator blocks
illuminate and move towards the
vehicle icon.
• If there is no obstacle detected, the
distance indicator blocks are greyed
out.
Vehicles with automatic transmission
If the gearshift is in neutral (N), the system
provides obstacle distance indication
through the information display. If your
vehicle moves, the front sensing system
provides an audible warning when the
vehicle is moving at 5 mph (8 km/h) or
below and an obstacle is located inside
the detection area. Once the vehicle is
stationary, the audio warning will be
stopped after 2 seconds.
If the gearshift is in drive (D) or any other
forward gear, the front sensing system
provides audio warnings when the vehicle
is moving and an obstacle is located inside
the detection area. Once the vehicle is
stationary, the audio warning will be
stopped after 2 seconds.
SIDE SENSING SYSTEM
The side sensing system uses the front and
rear outer sensors to detect obstacles that
are near to the sides of your vehicle. The
system places them on a virtual map in the
instrument cluster as your vehicle moves
past them. The system detects obstacles
even when they are no longer in the
sensor’s field of view.
Note: If an obstacle approaches the side
of the vehicle without passing a front or rear
side sensor, the obstacle will not be
detected.
The side sensors are active when the
transmission is in any other position other
than park (P).
Coverage area is up to 24 in (60 cm) from
the side of your vehicle.
When the system detects an object close
to the side of your vehicle, an audible
warning sounds. As the object comes
closer to the side of your vehicle, the rate
of the audible warning increases. The rate
of the audible warning varies depending
on whether the obstacle is inside or outside
of the driving path of your vehicle.
147
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Parking Aids
Distance Indication (If Equipped)
The system may provide obstacle distance
indication through the information display.
As the distance to the obstacle decreases,
the indicator blocks illuminate and move
toward the vehicle icon. If there is no
obstacle detected, the distance indicator
blocks will not be present.
When you shift to reverse (R), the side
sensing system provides audible and visual
distance indication when your vehicle is
moving and obstacles are detected within
12 in (30 cm), or when obstacles are
detected within 12– 24 in (30–60 cm) and
are inside the driving path of your vehicle.
When you stop your vehicle the audible
warning stops after two seconds.
Note: Visual distance indication remains
on when the transmission is in reverse (R).
When you shift to drive (D) or any other
forward gear, for example, low (L), sport
(S) or any forward gear in manual
transmission, the side sensing system
provides audible and visual distance
indication when your vehicle is moving at
7 mph (12 km/h) or below and obstacles
are detected within 12 in (30 cm), or when
obstacles are detected within 12–24 in
(30–60 cm) and are inside the driving path
of your vehicle. When you stop your vehicle
the audible warning stops after two
seconds and the visual distance indication
stops after four seconds.
Note: If the obstacle remains within
12–24 in (30–60 cm) visual distance
indication remains on.
When you shift to neutral (N), the side
sensing system only provides visual
distance indication when your vehicle is
moving at 7 mph (12 km/h) or below, for
example when moving on a slope, and
obstacles are detected within 12 in
(30 cm). When you stop your vehicle the
visual distance indication stops after four
seconds.
If the side sensing system is not available,
the side distance indicator blocks will not
be present.
The side sensing system is not available
under the following condition:
• If you switch the traction control
system off.
The side sensing system may not available
until you have driven approximately the
length of your vehicle in order for the
system to reinitialize if:
• You switch the ignition on, off and back
on.
• Your vehicle remains stationary for over
two minutes.
• The anti-lock brake system is
activated.
• The traction control system is
activated.
148
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Parking Aids
ACTIVE PARK ASSIST
Parallel Parking, Perpendicular
Parking, Park Out Assist
WARNINGS
You must remain in your vehicle
when the system turns on. You are
responsible at all times for
controlling your vehicle, supervising the
system and intervening if required. Failure
to take care may result in the loss of
control of your vehicle, serious personal
injury or death.
The sensors may not detect objects
in heavy rain or other conditions that
cause disruptive reflections.
Note: The driver is always responsible for
controlling the vehicle, supervising the
system and intervening if required by
grabbing the steering wheel or pushing the
active park assist button.
The system detects an available parallel
or perpendicular parking space and
automatically steers your vehicle into the
space (hands-free) while you control the
accelerator, gearshift and brakes. The
system visually and audibly guides you to
park your vehicle.
If you are uncomfortable with the proximity
to any vehicle or object, you may choose
to override the system.
Park Out Assist automatically steers your
vehicle out of a parallel parking space
(hands-free) while you control the
accelerator, gearshift and brakes. The
system visually and audibly guides you to
enter traffic.
Note: The Blind Spot Information System
does not detect traffic alongside or behind
your vehicle during a park assist maneuver.
The system may not correctly operate in
any of the following conditions:
• You use a spare tire or a tire
significantly worn more than the other
tires.
• You use a unauthorized tire size.
• You try to park on a tight curve.
• Something passes between the front
bumper and the parking space (a
pedestrian or cyclist).
• The edge of the neighboring parked
vehicle is high off the ground (for
example, a bus, tow truck or flatbed
truck).
• The weather conditions are poor
(heavy rain, snow, fog, etc).
Note: Keep the sensors, located on the
bumper or fascia, free from snow, ice and
large accumulations of dirt. Covered sensors
can affect the system's accuracy. Do not
clean the sensors with sharp objects.
Note: The sensors may not detect objects
with surfaces that absorb ultrasonic waves
or cause ultrasonic interference (motorcycle
exhaust, truck air brakes or horns).
Do not use the system if:
• You have attached a foreign object
(bike rack or trailer) to the front or rear
of your vehicle or close to the sensors.
• You have attached an overhanging
object (surfboard) to the roof.
• A foreign object damages or obstructs
the front or rear bumper or side
sensors.
• The correct tire size is not in use on your
vehicle (for example, a mini-spare tire).
Using Active Park Assist - Parallel
Parking
Press the button located on the
center console near the gearshift
lever or the right side of the
center stack once.
149
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Parking Aids
When driving at a speed less than 22 mph
(35 km/h) the system automatically scans
both sides of your vehicle for an available
parking space. The system displays a
message and a corresponding graphic to
indicate it is searching for a parking space.
Use the direction indicator to select
searching either to the left-hand side or
right-hand side of your vehicle.
Note: If the direction indicators are not
used, the system defaults to the passenger
side of your vehicle.
Note: The system passively searches for
parking spaces prior to pressing the button,
so activating the system is still possible
while passing a parking space.
When the system finds a suitable space,
it displays a message and a tone sounds.
Stop your vehicle and follow the
instructions on the screen. If your vehicle
is moving very slowly, you may need to pull
forward a short distance before the system
is ready to park.
Note: You must observe that the selected
space remains clear of obstructions at all
times during the maneuver.
Note: Active park assist may not detect
street furniture and other items. You must
make sure the selected space is suitable for
parking.
Note: You should drive your vehicle within
5 ft (1.5 m) and as parallel as possible to
the other vehicles while passing a parking
space.
Note: The system always offers the last
detected parking space (for example, if your
vehicle detects multiple spaces while you
are driving, it offers the last one).
Note: If driven above approximately 22 mph
(35 km/h), the system shows a message to
alert you to reduce your vehicle speed.
Automatic Steering into Parking Space
Note: If your vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph
(9 km/h) or the maneuver is interrupted
(driver input), the system switches off and
you need to take full control of your vehicle.
When you shift the transmission into
reverse ( R), with your hands off the wheel
(and nothing obstructing its movement),
your vehicle steers itself into the space.
The system displays instructions to move
your vehicle back and forth in the space.
150
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Parking Aids
When you think your vehicle is properly
parked, or you hear a solid tone from the
parking aid (accompanied by a display
message and a chime), bring your vehicle
to a complete stop.
When automatic steering is complete, the
system displays a message and a tone
sounds, indicating that the active park
assist process is finished. You are
responsible for checking the parking job
and making any necessary corrections
before leaving your vehicle.
Using Active Park Assist -
Perpendicular Parking
Press the button located on the
center console near the gearshift
lever or the right side of the
center stack twice.
The system displays a message and a
corresponding graphic to indicate it is
searching for a parking space. Use the
direction indicator to select searching
either to the left-hand side or right-hand
side of your vehicle.
Note: If you do not make a selection the
system will default to the passenger's side.
When the system finds a suitable space,
it displays a message and a tone sounds.
Stop your vehicle and follow the
instructions on the screen. If your vehicle
is moving very slowly, you may need to pull
forward a short distance before the system
is ready to park.
Note: You must observe that the selected
space remains clear of obstructions at all
times during the maneuver.
Note: You should drive your vehicle within
4.9 ft (1.5 m) and as perpendicular as
possible to the other vehicles while passing
a parking space.
151
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Parking Aids
Note: The system always offers the last
detected parking space (for example, if your
vehicle detects multiple spaces while you
are driving, it offers the last one).
Note: If driven above approximately 19 mph
(30 km/h), the system shows a message to
alert you to reduce your vehicle speed.
Automatic Steering into Parking Space
Note: If your vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph
(9 km/h) or the maneuver is interrupted
(driver input), the system switches off and
you need to take full control of your vehicle.
When you shift the transmission into
reverse ( R), with your hands off the wheel
(and nothing obstructing its movement),
your vehicle steers itself into the space.
The system displays instructions to move
your vehicle back and forth in the space.
When you think your vehicle is properly
parked, or you hear a solid tone from the
parking aid (accompanied by a display
message and a chime), bring your vehicle
to a complete stop.
When automatic steering is complete, the
system displays a message and a tone
sounds, indicating that the active park
assist process is finished. You are
responsible for checking the parking job
and making any necessary corrections
before leaving your vehicle.
Using Active Park Assist - Park Out
Assist
While your vehicle is at rest in a
parallel parking space, press the
active park assist button.
The system displays a message requesting
an indication of direction. Use the direction
indicator to signal which side of your
vehicle you want to exit the parking space.
152
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Parking Aids
The system determines the clearance to
the front and rear of your vehicle and
automatically steers your vehicle out of a
parallel parking space (hands-free) while
you control the accelerator, gearshift and
brakes. The system visually and audibly
guides you to enter traffic.
After the system has directed your vehicle
past the adjacent vehicle or object, it
guides you to take control of the steering
to complete the exit from the parking spot.
The system may not function correctly if
something passes between the front
bumper and the parking space (a
pedestrian or cyclist) or if the edge of the
neighboring parked vehicle is high off the
ground (for example, a bus, tow truck or
flatbed truck).
Note: If the clearance in front of your
vehicle allows easy departure, the Park Out
Assist feature might not be available.
Note: You are responsible for controlling
your vehicle and making sure the path is
clear prior to pulling into traffic.
Note: This system is not intended to assist
in exiting perpendicular parking spaces,
damages to your vehicle may occur.
Note: If your vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph
(9 km/h) or the maneuver is interrupted
(driver input), the system switches off and
you need to take full control of your vehicle.
Deactivating the Active Park
Assist Feature
Manually deactivate the system by:
• Pressing the active park assist button
twice.
• Grabbing the steering wheel during an
active maneuver.
• Driving above approximately 22 mph
(35 km/h) for 30 seconds during an
active park search.
• Driving above 6 mph (9 km/h) during
automatic steering.
• Switching off the traction control
system.
Certain vehicle conditions can also
deactivate the system, such as:
• Traction control has activated.
• There is an anti-lock brake system
activation or failure.
If a problem occurs with the system, a
warning message displays accompanied
by a tone. Occasional system messages
may occur in normal operation. For
recurring or frequent system faults, contact
an authorized dealer to have your vehicle
serviced.
Troubleshooting the System
The system does not look for a space
The traction control system may be off.
The transmission is in reverse ( R). Your vehicle must be moving forward to be able to
detect a parking space.
153
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Parking Aids
The system does not offer a particular space
The sensors may be covered (for example, snow, ice or dirt buildup). Covered senors
can affect the system's functionality.
There is not enough room in the parking space for your vehicle to safely park.
There is not enough space for the parking maneuver on the opposite side of the parking
space.
The parking space is farther than 5 ft (1.5 m) or closer than 16 in (0.4 m) away.
The transmission is in reverse ( R). Your vehicle must be moving forward to be able to
detect a parking space.
Your vehicle is going faster than 22 mph (35 km/h) for parallel and 19 mph (30 km/h)
for perpendicular parking.
The system does not position the vehicle where I want in the space
Your vehicle is rolling in the opposite direction of the transmission (rolling forward with
reverse [R] selected).
An irregular curb along the parking space prevents the system from aligning your vehicle
properly.
Vehicles or objects bordering the space may not be positioned correctly.
You pulled your vehicle too far past the parking space. The system performs best when
you drive the same distance past the parking space.
The tires may not be installed or maintained correctly (not inflated correctly, improper
size, or of different sizes).
A repair or alteration has changed detection capabilities.
A parked vehicle has a high attachment (salt sprayer, snowplow or moving truck bed).
The parking space length or position of parked objects changed after your vehicle passed.
The temperature around your vehicle changes quickly (driving from a heated garage
into the cold, or after leaving a car wash).
154
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Parking Aids
REAR VIEW CAMERA
WARNINGS
The rear view camera system is a
reverse aid supplement device that
still requires the driver to use it in
conjunction with the interior and exterior
mirrors for maximum coverage.
Objects that are close to either
corner of the bumper or under the
bumper, might not be seen on the
screen due to the limited coverage of the
camera system.
Back up as slow as possible since
higher speeds might limit your
reaction time to stop your vehicle.
Use caution when using the rear
video camera and the luggage
compartment door is ajar. If the
luggage compartment door is ajar, the
camera will be out of position and the
video image may be incorrect. All
guidelines disappear when the luggage
compartment door is ajar.
Use caution when turning camera
features on or off. Make sure your
vehicle is not moving.
The rear view camera provides an image
of the area behind your vehicle.
During operation, lines appear in the
display which represent your vehicle’s path
and proximity to objects behind your
vehicle.
The camera is located on the luggage
compartment door.
Using the Rear View Camera
System
The rear view camera system displays
what is behind your vehicle when you shift
the transmission into reverse (R).
Note: The reverse sensing system is not
effective at speeds above 7 mph (12 km/h)
and may not detect certain angular or
moving objects.
The system uses three types of guides to
help you see what is behind your vehicle:
• Active guidelines: Show the intended
path of your vehicle when reversing.
• Fixed guidelines: Show the actual path
your vehicle is moving in while reversing
in a straight line. This can be helpful
when backing into a parking space or
aligning your vehicle with another
object behind you.
• Centerline: Helps align the center of
your vehicle with an object (for
example, a trailer).
Note: If the transmission is in reverse (R)
and the luggage compartment door or
liftgate is open, no rear view camera
features will display.
155
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Parking Aids
Note: When towing, the camera only sees
what you are towing. This might not provide
adequate coverage as it usually provides in
normal operation and some objects might
not be seen. In some vehicles, the guidelines
may disappear when you connect the trailer
tow connector.
The camera may not operate correctly
under the following conditions:
• Nighttime or dark areas if one or both
reverse lamps are not operating.
• Mud, water or debris obstructs the
camera's view. Clean the lens with a
soft, lint-free cloth and non-abrasive
cleaner.
• The rear of your vehicle is hit or
damaged, causing the camera to
become misaligned.
Camera Guidelines
Note: Active guidelines are only available
when the transmission is in reverse (R).
Active guidelinesA
CenterlineB
Fixed guideline: Green zoneC
Fixed guideline: Yellow zoneD
Fixed guideline: Red zoneE
Rear bumperF
Active guidelines only show with fixed
guidelines. To use active guidelines, turn
the steering wheel to point the guidelines
toward an intended path. If the steering
wheel position changes while reversing,
your vehicle might deviate from the original
intended path.
The fixed and active guidelines fade in and
out depending on the steering wheel
position. The active guidelines do not
display when the steering wheel position
is straight.
156
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Parking Aids
Always use caution while reversing.
Objects in the red zone are closest to your
vehicle and objects in the green zone are
farther away. Objects are getting closer to
your vehicle as they move from the green
zone to the yellow or red zones. Use the
side view mirrors and rear view mirror to
get better coverage on both sides and rear
of your vehicle.
Manual Zoom
WARNING
When manual zoom is on, the full
area behind your vehicle may not
show. Be aware of your surroundings
when using the manual zoom feature.
Note: Manual zoom is only available when
the transmission is in reverse (R).
Note: When you enable manual zoom, only
the centerline is shown.
Selectable settings for this feature are
Zoom in (+) and Zoom out (-). Press the
symbol in the camera screen to change the
view. The default setting is Zoom OFF.
This allows you to get a closer view of an
object behind your vehicle. The zoomed
image keeps the bumper in the image to
provide a reference. The zoom is only
active while the transmission is in reverse
(R).
Camera System Settings
You can adjust the camera settings using
the vehicle settings menu in the
information display.
Enhanced Park Aids or Park Pilot (If
Equipped)
Selectable settings for this feature are ON
and OFF.
The system uses red, yellow and green
highlights that appear on top of the video
image when any of the sensing systems
detect an object.
Rear Camera Delay
Selectable settings for this feature are ON
and OFF.
The default setting for the rear camera
delay is OFF.
When shifting the transmission out of
reverse (R) and into any gear other than
park (P), the camera image remains in the
display until:
• Your vehicle speed sufficiently
increases.
• You shift your vehicle into park (P).
• 10 seconds of time elapse.
157
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Parking Aids
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
Cruise control lets you maintain a set
speed without keeping your foot on the
accelerator pedal. You can use cruise
control when your vehicle speed is greater
than 20 mph (30 km/h).
USING CRUISE CONTROL
WARNINGS
Do not use cruise control on winding
roads, in heavy traffic or when the
road surface is slippery. This could
result in loss of vehicle control, serious
injury or death.
When you are going downhill, your
vehicle speed may increase above
the set speed. The system will not
apply the brakes but a warning displays.
The cruise controls are on the steering
wheel.
Switching Cruise Control On
Press and release the cruise control icon.
The indicator appears in the
instrument cluster.
Setting the Cruise Speed
1. Drive to desired speed.
2. Press and release SET+ or SET-.
3. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
Note: The indicator will change color.
Note: Cruise control will disengage if your
vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph
(16 km/h) below your set speed while
driving uphill.
Changing the Set Speed
• Press and release SET+ or SET-. The
set speed will change in approximately
5 mph (5 km/h) increments.
• Press the accelerator or brake pedal
until you reach the desired speed. Press
and release SET+ or SET-.
• Press and hold SET+ or SET-. Release
the control when you reach the desired
speed.
Note: If you accelerate by pressing the
accelerator pedal, the set speed will not
change. When you release the accelerator
pedal, your vehicle returns to the speed that
you previously set.
Canceling the Set Speed
Press and release CAN to place the system
in standby mode. The system will not erase
the set speed.
Resuming the Set Speed
Press and release RES.
Switching Cruise Control Off
Press and release the cruise control icon,
when the system is in stand by mode or
switch the ignition off.
Note: You erase the set speed when you
switch the system off.
158
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Cruise Control
USING ADAPTIVE CRUISE
CONTROL
WARNINGS
Adaptive cruise control is not a crash
warning or avoidance system.
Adaptive cruise control does not
detect stationary or slow moving
vehicles below 6 mph (10 km/h).
Always pay close attention to
changing road conditions when using
adaptive cruise control. The system
does not replace attentive driving. Failing
to pay attention to the road may result in
a crash, serious injury or death.
Adaptive cruise control does not
detect oncoming vehicles in the
same lane.
Adaptive cruise control does not
detect pedestrians or objects in the
road.
The system does not brake when
your vehicle is approaching slower
vehicles. Always be aware of which
mode you have selected and apply the
brakes when necessary.
Do not use the system when entering
or leaving a freeway.
Do not use adaptive cruise control
on winding roads, in heavy traffic or
when the road surface is slippery.
This could result in loss of vehicle control,
serious injury or death.
Do not use the system in poor
visibility, for example fog, heavy rain,
spray or snow.
WARNINGS
Do not use the system when towing
a trailer with brake controls.
Aftermarket trailer brakes will not
operate when you switch the system on
because the brakes are electronically
controlled. Failure to do so may result in
loss of vehicle control, which could result
in serious injury.
Do not use tire sizes other than those
recommended because this can
affect the normal operation of the
system. Failing to do so may result in a loss
of vehicle control, which could result in
serious injury.
The system helps you to maintain a gap
from the vehicle in front of you. The
system adjusts your vehicle speed to
maintain the set gap between you and the
vehicle in front of you in the same lane.
If there is no vehicle in front of you the
system will maintain a set speed. The
system is intended to provide enhanced
operation of your vehicle when following
other vehicles which are in the same lane
and traveling in the same direction.
The system is based on the use of a radar
sensor which projects a beam directly
forward of your vehicle. This beam will
detect any vehicle ahead within the
system's range.
159
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Cruise Control
The adaptive cruise controls are on the
steering wheel.
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
On
Press and release the Adaptive Cruise
Control CAN/OFF button.
The information display shows:
• The cruise control indicator.
• The current gap setting indicator.
• The SET mph (kph) or Standby.
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed
1. Drive to desired speed.
2. Press and release SET-.
3. The information display shows a green
indicator light, current gap setting and
desired set speed.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
5. A vehicle graphic illuminates if there is
a vehicle detected in front of you.
Note: When adaptive cruise control is
active, the set speed displayed in the
information display may vary slightly from
the speedometer.
Changing the Set Speed
• Press and release RES+ or SET-. The
set speed changes in 5 mph (5 km/h)
increments.
• Press the accelerator or brake pedal
until you reach the desired speed. Press
and release SET-.
• Press and hold RES+ or SET-. Release
the control when you reach the desired
speed.
The system may apply the brakes to slow
the vehicle to the new set speed.
Canceling the Set Speed
Press and release the Adaptive Cruise
Control CAN/OFF button or tap the brake
pedal. The last set speed displays with a
strikethrough.
Resuming the Set Speed
Press and release RES+. The vehicle
returns to the previously set speed and gap
setting. The set speed displays
continuously in the information display
while the system is active.
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
Off
Press and release the Adaptive Cruise
Control CAN/OFF button when the
system is in stand by mode or switch the
ignition off.
Note: You erase the set speed when you
switch the system off.
160
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Cruise Control
Following a Vehicle
WARNINGS
When following a vehicle, your
vehicle does not decelerate
automatically to a stop, nor does
your vehicle always decelerate quickly
enough to avoid a crash without driver
intervention. Always apply the brakes when
necessary. Failing to do so may result in a
crash, serious injury or death.
Adaptive cruise control only warns
of vehicles detected by the radar
sensor. In some cases there may be
no warning or a delayed warning. You
should always apply the brakes when
necessary. Failure to do so may result in a
crash, serious injury or death.
When a vehicle ahead of you enters the
same lane or a slower vehicle is ahead in
the same lane, the vehicle speed adjusts
to maintain a preset gap distance.
The lead vehicle graphic illuminates.
Your vehicle will maintain a consistant gap
from the vehicle ahead until:
• The vehicle in front of you accelerates
to a speed above the set speed.
• The vehicle in front of you moves out
of your lane or out of view.
• The vehicle speed falls below 12 mph
(20 km/h).
• A new gap is set.
If required, the system automatically
applies the brakes to maintain the set gap
between your vehicle and the vehicle
ahead. This braking capacity is limited to
approximately 30% of the total manual
braking capacity to maintain smooth and
comfortable cruising.
The system is designed to assist you by
warning you of the risk of a crash with the
vehicle ahead.
The system alerts you with warning chimes
and a visual warning in the information
display.
Brake support assists with full braking and
reduces the severity of a crash with the
vehicle in front of you.
Note: The brakes may emit noise when
applied by the system.
Setting the Gap Distance
Gap decrease.A
Gap increase.B
You can decrease or increase the gap
between your vehicle and the vehicle in
front of you by pressing the gap control.
Note: It is your responsibility to select a gap
appropriate to the driving conditions.
The selected gap appears in the
information display as shown by the bars
in the image. You can select five gap
settings.
161
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Cruise Control
Note: The gap setting is time dependent
and therefore the distance will
automatically adjust with your speed.
Adaptive cruise control gap settings
Dynamic beha-
vior
GapTime gap,
seconds
Graphic display,
bars indicated
between
vehicles
Set speed
yd (m)mph ( km/h)
Sport31 (28)1162 (100)
36 (33)1.2262 (100)
Normal46 (42)1.5362 (100)
55 (50)1.8462 (100)
Comfort63 (58)2.1562 (100)
Note: The system status and settings
remain unchanged each time you switch the
ignition on.
Overriding the Set Speed
WARNING
If you override the system by pressing
the accelerator pedal, it does not
automatically apply the brakes to
maintain a gap from any vehicle ahead.
Use the accelerator pedal normally to
intentionally exceed the set speed limit.
When you override the system,
the green indicator light
illuminates and the vehicle
graphic does not show in the
information display.
It will switch back on when you release the
accelerator pedal.
Automatic Cancellation
The system does not operate below
12 mph (20 km/h). An audible warning
sounds and the automatic braking releases
if the vehicle drops below this speed.
Automatic cancellation can also occur if:
• Your vehicle speed falls below
approximately 12.4 mph (20 km/h).
• The tires lose traction.
• The engine speed is too low.
• You apply the parking brake.
Note: If the engine speed drops too low,
the information display indicates low engine
speed. Shift to a lower gear (manual
transmission only) to avoid automatic
cancellation.
162
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Cruise Control
Hilly Condition Usage
You should select a lower gear position
when the system is active in situations
such as prolonged downhill driving on
steep grades, for example in mountainous
areas. The system needs additional engine
braking in these situations to reduce the
load on the vehicle’s regular brake system
to prevent them from overheating.
Note: An audible warning sounds and the
system shuts down if it applies brakes for
an extended period of time. This allows the
brakes to cool down. The system functions
normally again when the brakes have cooled
down.
Detection Issues
WARNING
On rare occasions, detection issues
can occur due to the road
infrastructures, for example bridges,
tunnels and safety barriers. In these cases,
the system may brake late or
unexpectedly. At all times, you are
responsible for controlling your vehicle,
supervising the system and intervening, if
required.
The radar sensor has a limited field of
vision. It may not detect vehicles at all or
detect a vehicle later than expected in
some situations. The vehicle graphic does
not illuminate if the system does not
detect a vehicle in front of you.
Detection issues can occur:
With vehicles that edge into your
lane that can only be detected
once they have moved fully into
your lane.
A
Motorcyclists may be detected
late, or not at all.
B
With vehicles in front of you
when going into and coming out
of a bend. The detection beam
does not follow sharp curves in
the road.
C
In these cases the system may brake late
or unexpectedly. You should stay alert and
intervene if necessary.
163
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Cruise Control
If something hits the front of your vehicle
or damage occurs, the radar-sensing zone
may change. This could cause missed or
false vehicle detections. Contact an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
System Not Available
Conditions that can cause the system to
deactivate or prevent the system from
activating when requested include:
• A blocked sensor.
• High brake temperature.
• A failure in the system or a related
system.
Blocked Sensor
A message displays if something obstructs
the radar signals from the sensor. The
sensor is in the lower grille. The system
cannot detect a vehicle ahead and does
not function when something blocks the
sensor.
Keep the front of your vehicle free of dirt,
metal badges or objects. Vehicle front
protectors and aftermarket lights may also
block the sensor.
The following table lists possible causes and actions for this message displaying
ActionCause
Wait a short time. It may take several
minutes for the radar to detect that it is free
from obstruction.
The surface of the radar in the grille is clean
but the message remains in the display.
Do not use the system in these conditions
because it may not detect any vehicles
ahead.
Swirling water, snow or ice on the surface
of the road may interfere with the radar
signals.
Do not use the system in these conditions
because it may not detect any vehicles
ahead.
Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the
radar signals.
It is possible to get a blockage warning and not be blocked. A false blocked condition self
clears or clears after a key cycle.
164
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Cruise Control
Switching to Normal Cruise
Control
WARNING
Normal cruise control will not brake
when your vehicle is approaching
slower vehicles. Always be aware of
which mode you have selected and apply
the brakes when necessary.
You can manually change from adaptive
cruise control to normal cruise control
through the information display.
The cruise control indicator light
replaces the adaptive cruise
control indicator light if you
select normal cruise control. The system
defaults to adaptive cruise control when
you start the vehicle.
165
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Cruise Control
SPEED LIMITER - VEHICLES
WITH: CRUISE CONTROL
Principle of Operation
WARNING
When you are going downhill, your
speed may increase above the set
speed. The system will not apply the
brakes but a warning will be given.
The system allows you to set a speed, to
which your vehicle then becomes limited.
The set speed will become the effective
maximum speed of your vehicle, but with
the option to temporarily exceed this limit
if required.
Using the System
Note: The set speed limit can be
intentionally exceeded for a short period of
time if required, for example when
overtaking.
The system is operated by adjustment
controls mounted on the steering wheel.
Switching the System On and Off
Press LIM to set the limiter in standby
mode. The information display will prompt
you to set a speed. Press LIM again to turn
the system off.
Setting the Speed Limit
• Press SET+ or SET- with the limiter in
standby mode to set the limiter to the
current vehicle speed.
• Press SET+ or SET- to select your
desired speed limit. The speed is
displayed in the information display
and stored as the set speed.
• Press CAN to cancel the limiter and
place it in standby mode. The
information display will confirm this
has been turned off by showing the set
speed crossed out.
• Press RES to resume the limiter. The
information display will confirm this
has been turned on by showing the set
speed again.
Intentionally Exceeding the Set Speed
Limit
Depress the accelerator fully to temporarily
turn the system off. The system will
reactivate once your vehicle speed drops
below the set speed.
System Warnings
If you accidently exceed the set speed, the
set speed indication will flash in the
information display and you will hear and
audible warning chime.
If you intentionally exceed the set speed,
the set speed indication will flash in the
information display.
166
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Driving Aids
SPEED LIMITER - VEHICLES
WITH: ADAPTIVE CRUISE
CONTROL
Principle of Operation
WARNING
When you are going downhill, your
speed may increase above the set
speed. The system will not apply the
brakes but a warning will be given.
The system allows you to set a speed, to
which your vehicle then becomes limited.
The set speed will become the effective
maximum speed of your vehicle, but with
the option to temporarily exceed this limit
if required.
Using the System
Note: The set speed limit can be
intentionally exceeded for a short period of
time if required, for example when
overtaking.
The system is operated by adjustment
controls mounted on the steering wheel.
Switching the System On and Off
Press LIM CNCL/OFF to set the limiter in
standby mode. The information display
will prompt you to set a speed. Press LIM
again to turn the system off.
Setting the Speed Limit
• Press SET+ or SET- with the limiter in
standby mode to set the limiter to the
current vehicle speed.
• Press SET+ or SET- to select your
desired speed limit. The speed is
displayed in the information display
and stored as the set speed.
• Press CAN to cancel the limiter and
place it in standby mode. The
information display will confirm this
has been turned off by showing the set
speed crossed out.
• Press RES to resume the limiter. The
information display will confirm this
has been turned on by showing the set
speed again.
Intentionally Exceeding the Set Speed
Limit
Depress the accelerator fully to temporarily
turn the system off. The system will
reactivate once your vehicle speed drops
below the set speed.
System Warnings
If you accidently exceed the set speed, the
set speed indication will flash in the
information display and you will hear an
audible warning chime.
If you intentionally exceed the set speed,
the set speed indication will flash in the
information display.
DRIVER ALERT
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING
The driver alert system is designed
to aid you. It is not intended to
replace your attention and judgment.
You are still responsible to drive with due
care and attention.
167
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Driving Aids
Note: The system will store the on or off
setting in the information display menu
through ignition cycles.
Note: If enabled in the menu, the system
will be active at speeds above 40 mph
(64 km/h). When below the activation
speed, the information display will inform
the driver that the system is unavailable.
Note: The system works as long as one lane
marking can be detected by the camera.
Note: If the camera is blocked or if the
windshield is damaged, the system may not
function.
Note: The system may not be available in
poor weather or other low visibility
conditions.
The system automatically monitors your
driving behavior using various inputs
including the front camera sensor.
If the system detects that your driving
alertness is reduced below a certain
threshold, the system will alert you using
a chime and a message in the cluster
display.
USING DRIVER ALERT
Switching the System On and Off
Switch the system on or off using the
information display. See General
Information (page 80).
When activated, the system will monitor
your alertness level based upon your
driving behavior in relation to the lane
markings, and other factors.
System Warnings
Note: The system will not issue warnings
below approximately 40 mph (64 km/h).
The warning system has two stages. At
first, the system issues a temporary
warning that you need to take a rest. This
message will only appear for a short time.
If the system detects further reduction in
driving alertness, it may issue another
warning that will remain in the information
display for a longer time. You can press OK
on the steering wheel control to clear the
warning.
System Display
When active the system will run
automatically in the background and only
issue a warning if required. You can view
the status at any time using the
information display. See General
Information (page 80).
The alertness level is shown by six steps
in a colored bar.
The current assessment of your alertness
is within a typical range.
The current assessment of your alertness
indicates that you should rest as soon as
safely possible.
The status bar will travel from left to right
as the calculated alertness level
decreases. As the rest icon is approached
the color turns from green to yellow to red.
168
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Driving Aids
The yellow position indicates the first
warning is active and the red position
indicates the second warning is active.
Note: If you have recently received a
warning; you should consider resting, even
if the current assessment is within the
typical range.
Note: If the camera sensor cannot track the
road lane markings or if your vehicle speed
drops below approximately 40 mph
(64 km/h), the alertness level will change
to grey for a short time and the information
display will inform you that the system is
unavailable.
Resetting the System
You can reset the system by either:
• Switching the ignition off and on.
• Stopping the vehicle and then opening
and closing the driver’s door.
LANE KEEPING SYSTEM
WARNINGS
The system does not relieve you of
your responsibility to drive with due
care and attention.
At all times you are responsible for
controlling your vehicle, supervising
the system and intervening if
required.
If the sensor becomes blocked the
system may not function.
In cold and severe weather
conditions the system may not
function. Rain, snow, spray can all
limit sensor performance.
Large contrasts in lighting can limit
sensor performance.
The system will not operate if the
sensor cannot track the road lane
markings.
WARNINGS
The vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer for inspection if
damage occurs in the immediate
area surrounding the sensor.
Note: The system works above 40 mph
(64 km/h).
Note: The system works as long as the
camera can detect one lane marking.
Note: The system may not function if the
camera is blocked or there is damage to the
windshield.
Note: When Aid mode is on and the system
detects no steering activity for a short
period, the system will alert you to put your
hands on the steering wheel. The system
may detect a light grip or touch on the
steering wheel as hands off driving.
The system notifies you to stay in your lane
through the steering system and the
instrument cluster display when the front
camera detects an unintentional drift out
of your lane is likely to occur. The system
automatically detects and tracks the road
lane markings using a camera mounted
behind the interior rear view mirror.
Switching the System On and Off
Note: The system on or off setting is stored
until it is manually changed, unless a MyKey
is detected. If the system detects a MyKey
it defaults to on and the mode is set to Alert.
Note: If a MyKey is detected, pressing the
button will not affect the on or off status of
the system.
Press the button located on the
left steering wheel stalk to
switch the system on or off.
169
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Driving Aids
System Settings
The system has optional setting menus
available. To view or adjust the settings,
See General Information (page 80). The
system stores the last-known selection for
each of these settings. You do not need to
readjust your settings each time you turn
on the system.
Mode: This setting allows you to select
which of the system features you can
enable.
Alert only – Provides a steering wheel
vibration when the system detects an
unintended lane departure.
Aid only – Provides an assistance steering
torque input toward the lane center when
the system detects an unintended lane
departure.
AlertA
AidB
Alert + Aid – Provides an assistance
steering torque input toward the lane
center. If your vehicle continues drifting out
of the lane, the system provides a steering
wheel vibration.
Note: The alert and aid diagrams illustrate
general zone coverage. They do not provide
exact zone parameters.
Intensity: This setting affects the intensity
of the steering wheel vibration used for the
alert and alert + aid modes. This setting
does not affect the aid mode.
• Low
• Normal
• High
System Display
170
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Driving Aids
When you switch on the system, an
overhead graphic of a vehicle with lane
markings will display in the information
display. If you select aid mode when you
switch on the system, a separate white
icon will also appear or in some vehicles
arrows will display with the lane markings.
When you switch off the system, the lane
marking graphics will not display.
While the system is on, the color of the
lane markings will change to indicate the
system status.
Gray: Indicates that the system is
temporarily unable to provide a warning
or intervention on the indicated side(s).
This may be because:
• Your vehicle is under the activation
speed.
• The turn indicator is active.
• Your vehicle is in a dynamic maneuver.
• The road has no or poor lane markings
in the camera field-of-view.
• The camera is obscured or unable to
detect the lane markings due to
environmental conditions (significant
sun angles, shadows, snow, heavy rain
or fog), traffic conditions (following a
large vehicle that is blocking or
shadowing the lane), or vehicle
conditions (poor headlamp
illumination).
See Troubleshooting for additional
information.
Green: Indicates that the system is
available or ready to provide a warning or
intervention, on the indicated side(s).
Yellow: Indicates that the system is
providing or has just provided a lane
keeping aid intervention.
Red: Indicates that the system is providing
or has just provided a lane keeping alert
warning.
The system can be temporarily suppressed
at any time by the following:
• Quick braking.
• Fast acceleration.
• Using the turn signal indicator.
• Evasive steering maneuver.
Troubleshooting
Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings
on the road?
Vehicle speed is outside the operational range of the feature
Sun is shining directly into the camera lens
Quick intentional lane change
Staying too close to the lane marking
Driving at high speeds in curves
The last Alert warning or Aid intervention occurred a short time ago
171
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Driving Aids
Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings
on the road?
Ambiguous lane markings (mainly in construction zones)
Rapid transition from light to dark or vice versa
Sudden offset in lane markings
ABS or AdvanceTrac activation
Camera blockage due to dirt, grime, fog, frost or water on the windshield
Driving too close to the vehicle in front of you
Transitioning between no lane markings to lane markings or vice versa
Standing water on the road
Faint lane markings (partial yellow lane markings on concrete roads)
Lane width too narrow or too wide
Camera not calibrated after a windshield replacement
Driving on tight roads or on uneven roads
Why does the vehicle not come back toward the middle of the lane, as expected, in the
Aid or Aid + Alert mode?
High cross winds
Large road crown
Rough roads, grooves, shoulder drop-offs
Heavy uneven loading of the vehicle or improper tire inflation pressure
If the tires have been exchanged (including snow tires), or the suspension has been
modified
172
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Driving Aids
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION
SYSTEM
Blind Spot Information System
(BLIS™) with Cross Traffic Alert
(If Equipped)
WARNING
Do not use the system as a
replacement for using the mirrors or
looking over your shoulder before
changing lanes. You should only use the
system as an aid. It is not a replacement
for careful driving.
The system is a convenience feature that
assists you in detecting vehicles that may
have entered the blind spot zone (A). The
detection area is on both sides of your
vehicle extending rearward from the
exterior mirrors to approximately 10 feet
(3 meters) beyond the rear bumper. The
system is designed to alert you if other
vehicles enter the blind spot zone when
driving.
Cross Traffic Alert is designed to warn you
of vehicles approaching from the sides
when the transmission is in reverse (R).
Note: The Blind Spot Information System
does not prevent contact with other vehicles
or objects; nor detect parked vehicles,
people, animals or infrastructure (fences,
guardrails, trees, etc.). It's only designed to
alert you to vehicles in the blind zones.
Note: Vehicles that pass through the blind
spot zone quickly (typically less than 2
seconds) will not trigger the alert.
Using the Systems
The Blind Spot Information System turns
on when you start the engine and you drive
you vehicle forward above 5 mph
(8 km/h); it remains on while the
transmission is in drive (D) or neutral (N).
If shifted out of drive (D) or neutral (N),
the system enters cross traffic alert mode.
Once shifted back into drive (D), the Blind
Spot Information System turns back on
when you drive your vehicle above 5 mph
(8 km/h).
Note: The Blind Spot Information System
does not function in reverse (R) or park (P)
or provide any additional warning when a
turn signal is on.
Note: Cross Traffic Alert is designed to
detect approaching vehicles from up to 131 ft
(40 m) away, though coverage decreases
when the sensors are blocked. Reversing
slowly helps increase the coverage area and
effectiveness.
Note: For manual transmission vehicles,
the Cross Traffic Alert will be active only if
the transmission is in reverse (R). If your
vehicle is rolling backwards and the
transmission is not in reverse (R) then Cross
Traffic Alert will not be active.
WARNING
Do not use the system as a
replacement for using the mirrors or
looking over your shoulder before
changing lanes. You should only use the
system as an aid. It is not a replacement
for careful driving.
173
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Driving Aids
In this first example, the left sensor is only
partially obstructed; zone coverage is
nearly maximized.
Zone coverage also decreases when
parking at shallow angles. Here, the left
sensor is mostly obstructed; zone coverage
on that side is severely limited.
174
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Driving Aids
System Lights and Messages
The system displays a yellow warning
indicator located in the exterior mirrors.
Note: It will dim when the ambient light
decreases.
Cross Traffic Alert also sounds a series of
tones and a message appears in the
information display indicating a vehicle is
coming from the right or left. Cross Traffic
Alert works with the reverse sensing
system that sounds its own series of tones.
See Parking Aids (page 144).
System Sensors
WARNING
Prior to the system recognizing a
blocked condition and issuing a
warning, the number of missed
objects will increase.
Note: It is possible to get a blockage
warning with no blockage present; this is
rare and known as a false blockage warning.
A false blocked condition either
self-corrects or clears after a key cycle.
The system uses radar sensors which are
located behind the bumper fascia on each
side of your vehicle. Do not allow mud,
snow or bumper stickers to obstruct these
areas, this can cause degraded system
performance.
If the system detects a degraded
performance condition, a message warning
of a blocked sensor or low visibility will
appear in the information display along
with a warning indicator. You can clear the
information display warning but the
warning indicator will remain illuminated.
When you remove a blockage, you can
reset the system in two ways:
• While driving, the system detects at
least two objects.
• You cycle the ignition from on to off
and then back on.
If the blockage is still present after the key
cycle and driving in traffic, check again for
a blockage.
175
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Driving Aids
Reasons for messages being displayed
Clean the fascia area in front
of the radar or remove the
obstruction.
The radar
surface is
dirty or
obstructed
Drive normally in traffic for
a few minutes to allow the
radar to detect passing
vehicles so it can clear the
blocked state.
The radar
surface is
not dirty or
obstructed
No action required. The
system automatically resets
to an unblocked state once
the rainfall or snowfall rate
decreases or stops. Do not
use the Blind Spot Informa-
tion System or Cross Traffic
Alert in these conditions.
Heavy rain-
fall or
snowfall
interferes
with the
radar
signals
Detection Limitations
There may be instances where the system
will not always detect vehicles entering
and exiting the blind spot zone.
Instances which may cause non-detection:
• Debris build up on the rear bumper
panels in the area of the sensors.
• Certain maneuvering of vehicles
entering and exiting the blind spot
zone.
• Vehicles passing through the blind spot
zone at high speed.
• Severe weather conditions.
• Several vehicles passing through the
blind spot zone following each other
closely.
The following are other situations that may
limit the Cross Traffic Alert system:
• Adjacently parked vehicles or objects
obstructing the sensors.
• Approaching vehicles passing at
speeds greater than 15 mph (24 km/h).
• Driving in reverse faster than 5 mph
(8 km/h).
• Backing out of an angled parking spot.
False Alerts
Note: If your vehicle has a trailer tow
module approved by us, the system will
detect a connected trailer and turn off. For
non-factory equipped tow bars, you may
want to turn the Blind Spot Information
System off manually.
There may be certain instances when there
is a false alert by either the Blind Spot
Information or the Cross Traffic Alert
systems that illuminates the alert indicator
with no vehicle in the coverage zone. Some
amount of false alerts are normal; they are
temporary and self-correct.
Detection Errors
If either system senses a problem with the
left or right sensor, the Blind Spot
Information System warning indicator will
illuminate and a message will appear in
the information display.
All other system faults will display only
with a message in the information display.
See Information Messages (page 83).
Switching the Systems Off and On
You can temporarily switch off one or both
systems in the information display. See
General Information (page 80). When
you switch off the Blind Spot Information
System, you will not receive alerts and the
information display will display a system
off message.
176
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Driving Aids
Note: The Cross Traffic Alert system always
switches on whenever the ignition is
switched on. However, the Blind Spot
Information System will remember the last
selected on or off setting.
One or both systems cannot be switched
off when MyKey is used. See Principle of
Operation (page 33).
You can also have one or both systems
switched off permanently at an authorized
dealer. Once switched off, the system can
only be switched back on at an authorized
dealer.
TRAFFIC SIGN RECOGNITION
Principle of Operation
WARNINGS
The system does not relieve you of
your responsibility to drive with due
care and attention.
At all times you are responsible for
controlling your vehicle, supervising
the system and intervening if
required.
If the sensor becomes blocked the
system may not function.
Note: In cold and severe weather conditions
the system may not function. Rain, snow,
spray and large contrasts in lighting can all
prevent the sensor from functioning
correctly.
Note: Do not carry out windshield repairs
in the immediate area surrounding the
sensor.
Note: If your vehicle has a suspension kit
not approved by us, the system may not
function correctly.
Note: Always fit Ford original parts when
replacing headlamp bulbs. Other bulbs may
reduce system performance.
Note: Keep the windshield free from
obstructions such as bird droppings, insects
and snow or ice.
Note: The system may not detect all traffic
signs and may read signs incorrectly.
Note: The system is designed to
automatically detect traffic signs meeting
the Vienna convention.
Note: Traffic sign data provided by the
navigation system contains information
integrated to the data carrier release.
There is a sensor mounted behind the
interior rear view mirror. It continuously
monitors road signs to inform you of the
current speed limit and overtaking
regulations.
The system automatically detects
recognisable traffic signs, such as:
• Speed limit signs.
• No overtaking signs.
• Speed limit cancellation signs.
When the system recognises a traffic sign,
it will be shown in the display.
Using the System
Switching the System On and Off
Note: The system status and settings will
remain unchanged during ignition cycles.
You can switch the system on and off using
the information display. See General
Information (page 80).
Setting the System Speed Warning
The system has a number of speed
warning levels which can be set using the
information display. See General
Information (page 80).
177
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Driving Aids
System Display
The system can display two traffic signs
in parallel.
You can view the status at any time using
the information display.
The system display is in four stages as
follows:
1. All new recognizable traffic signs will
appear brighter than the other traffic
signs in the display.
2. After a predetermined time they will
be shown normally.
3. After a predetermined distance they
will be shown greyed out.
4. After another predetermined distance
they will be deleted.
If the system detects a supplementary
traffic sign, this sign is indicated as a box
below the respective traffic sign. For
example, when passing a reduced speed
limit in wet road conditions sign.
If your vehicle has a navigation system,
stored traffic sign data may influence the
indicated speed limit value.
ACTIVE CITY STOP
Principle of Operation
WARNINGS
You are responsible for controlling
your vehicle at all times. The system
does not relieve you of your
responsibility to drive with due care and
attention. Failure to take care may result
in the loss of control of your vehicle, serious
personal injury or death.
To achieve full system performance
you must break in the braking
system. See Breaking-In (page 200).
Failure to take care may result in the loss
of control of your vehicle, serious personal
injury or death.
If the system applies the brakes and
the engine stops the hazard warning
flashers will automatically turn on.
Failure to take care may lead to a crash or
personal injury.
The system does not react to
cyclists, motorcyclists, pedestrians,
animals or vehicles that are driving
in a different direction. Failure to take care
may result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, serious personal injury or death.
The system does not operate during
harsh acceleration or steering. Failure
to take care may lead to a crash or
personal injury.
The system may not operate during
cold or severe weather conditions.
Snow, ice, heavy rain and spray can
influence the system. Keep the hood free
of snow and ice. Failure to take care may
result in the loss of control of your vehicle,
serious personal injury or death.
The system may not operate when
driving around sharp curves. Failure
to take care may lead to a crash or
personal injury.
178
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Driving Aids
WARNINGS
The system may not operate
correctly if you replace the
windshield with a non-Ford
windshield. Do not carry out windshield
repairs in front of the sensor. Failure to
adhere to this warning may lead to an
accident or injury.
The system may not detect objects
with surfaces that absorb reflections.
Failure to take care may result in the
loss of control of your vehicle, serious
personal injury or death.
The system will not operate correctly
if the sensor is blocked. Keep the
windshield free from obstructions,
for example, bird droppings, insects, snow
or ice. Failure to adhere to this warning may
lead to an accident or injury.
When you switch the ignition on the
sensor transmits a laser beam. Never
look directly into the sensor. There is
a risk of eye injury.
The sensor is on the rear of the interior
mirror. It continuously monitors conditions
to decide when to intervene.
The system operates at speeds below
approximately 31 mph (50 km/h) by
applying the brakes if it detects that a
crash is likely. If the system applies the
brakes a message will appear in the
information display.
The system may reduce the risk of a low
speed crash into another vehicle. It also
helps reduce impact damage or may avoid
the crash completely.
Note: You must depress the brake pedal to
obtain full braking force.
Switching the System Off and On
You can switch this feature off using the
information display controls. See General
Information (page 80).
Note: The system automatically turns on
every time you switch the ignition on.
In certain situations we recommend that
you switch the system off, for example:
• Driving off-road when objects may
cover the windshield.
• Driving through a car wash facility.
ECO MODE
This system assists you in driving more
efficiently by constantly monitoring
characteristics of gear changing,
anticipation of traffic conditions and
speeds while driving.
The value of these characteristics is
represented by petals shown in the display,
with five petals being the most efficient.
The more efficiently you drive, the better
the rating, and the better your vehicle's
overall fuel economy.
Note: These efficiency values do not result
in a defined fuel consumption figure. It might
vary as it is not only related to these driving
habits, but also influenced by many other
factors such as short trips and cold starts.
Note: Frequent short trips, where the engine
does not fully warm up, will also increase
fuel consumption
The system is accessed using the
information display control. See General
Information (page 80).
179
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Driving Aids
Type 1
Gear shiftingA
AnticipationB
Efficient speedC
Gear shifting
Use the highest drivable gear appropriate
for the road conditions to improve fuel
consumption.
Anticipation
Adjust your vehicle speed and the distance
to other vehicles to avoid the need for
heavy braking or acceleration to improve
fuel economy.
Efficient speed
Reduce your cruising speed on open roads
to improve economy. Higher speeds use
more fuel.
Type 2 and 3
The relevant information is shown in the
display.
Resetting Eco Mode
Reset the average fuel consumption by
using the information display control.
Note: New values may take a short time to
calculate
COLLISION WARNING SYSTEM
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
This system is designed to be a
supplementary driving aid. It is not
intended to replace your attention,
and judgment, or the need to apply the
brakes. Failure to press the brake pedal to
activate the brakes may result in a
collision.
Never wait for a crash warning. When
driving you are responsible for
maintaining the correct distance and
speed, even when the system is used.
Note: The system does not detect, warn or
respond to potential collisions with vehicles
to the rear or sides of the vehicle.
Note: The collision warning system is active
at speeds above approximately 5 mph
(8 km/h).
The system is designed to assist you by
warning you of the risk of a crash with the
vehicle in front of you. The system is
designed to alert you by warning chimes
and a visual warning in the information
display.
180
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Driving Aids
The brake support system assists the driver
in reducing the collision speed by charging
the brakes. If the risk of collision further
increases after the warning light
illuminates, the brake support prepares
the brake system for rapid braking. This
may be apparent to the driver. Brake
support may apply if the system
determines that a collision is imminent.
The system may help reduce impact
damage or avoid the crash completely.
Using the Collision Warning System
WARNING
The collision warning system’ s brake
support can only help reduce the
speed at which a collision occurs.
The brake pedal must be pressed just like
any typical braking situation.
Distance Alert
If the distance to the lead vehicle
is small, the red warning lamp
will illuminate in the instrument
cluster.
Note: The warning lamp is small and below
the Distance Indication graphic. It does not
flash when Distance Alert is active.
Distance Indication
Distance Indication provides a graphical
indication of the time gap to other vehicles
traveling in the same direction. The
information display will show one of the
graphics below in color.
Key: Left to right.
Outline - Stand by.
Grey, no object - No object detected or
object outside of Distance Indication range.
Grey, with object - Object detected or
object within Distance Indication range.
Yellow, with object - Early Distance
Indication warning threshold.
Red, with object - Final Distance
Indication warning threshold.
Note: Distance Alert and Distance
Indication turns off when adaptive cruise
control is switched on. The Distance
Indication graphics do not display in the
information display unless adaptive cruise
control is switched off.
Adjusting Pre-Collision Assist Settings
If collision warnings are perceived as being
too frequent, the warning sensitivity can
be reduced, we recommend using the
highest sensitivity setting where possible.
Setting lower sensitivity would lead to
fewer and later system warnings.
You can adjust the Collision Warning and
Distance Alert sensitivity to one of three
possible settings by using the information
display control. You can also switch the
Distance Indication function off using the
information display controls. See General
Information (page 80).
181
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Driving Aids
Distance Alert sensitivity
Time gapDistance gapGraphicSensitivitySpeed
Greater than 0.9
seconds
Greater than
82 ft (25 m)
GreyNormal62 mph
(100 km/h)
Between 0.6
and 0.9 seconds
Between 56 ft
(17 m) and 82 ft
(25 m)
YellowNormal62 mph
(100 km/h)
Less than 0.6
seconds
Less than 56 ft
(17 m)
RedNormal62 mph
(100 km/h)
Blocked Sensors
The sensors are located at the center of
the lower grille.
If a message regarding a blocked sensor
appears in the information display, the
radar signals from the sensor have been
obstructed. When the sensors are
obstructed, a vehicle ahead cannot be
detected and the collision warning system
does not function. The following table lists
possible causes and actions for this
message being displayed.
182
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Driving Aids
ActionCause
Clean the grille surface in front of the radar
or remove the object causing the obstruc-
tion
The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty
or obstructed in some way
Wait a short time. It may take several
minutes for the radar to detect that it is no
longer obstructed
The surface of the radar in the grille is clean
but the message remains in the display
The collision warning system is temporarily
disabled. Collision warning should automat-
ically reactivate a short time after the
weather conditions improve
Heavy rain, spray, snow, or fog is interfering
with the radar signals
The collision warning system is temporarily
disabled. Collision warning should automat-
ically reactivate a short time after the
weather conditions improve
Swirling water, or snow or ice on the surface
of the road may interfere with the radar
signals
System Limitations
WARNING
The collision warning system’ s brake
support can only help reduce the
speed at which a collision occurs.
The brake pedal must be pressed just like
any typical braking situation.
Due to the nature of radar technology,
there may be certain instances where
vehicles do not provide a collision warning.
These include:
• Stationary vehicles or vehicles moving
below 6 mph (10 km/h).
• Pedestrians or objects in the roadway.
• Oncoming vehicles in the same lane.
• Severe weather conditions (see
blocked sensor section).
• Debris build-up on the grille near the
headlamps (see blocked sensor
section).
• Small distance to vehicle ahead.
• Steering wheel and pedal movements
are large (very active driving style).
If the front end of the vehicle is hit or
damaged, the radar sensing zone may be
altered causing missed or false collision
warnings. See your authorized dealer to
have your collision warning radar checked
for proper coverage and operation.
183
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Driving Aids
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNINGS
Use load securing straps to an
approved standard, e.g. DIN.
Make sure that you secure all loose
items properly.
Place luggage and other loads as low
and as far forward as possible within
the luggage or loadspace.
Do not drive with the luggage
compartment or rear door open.
Exhaust fumes may enter your
vehicle.
Do not exceed the maximum front
and rear axle loads for your vehicle.
See Vehicle Identification Plate
(page 277).
Do not allow items to contact the
rear windows.
Note: When loading long objects in to your
vehicle, for example pipes, timber or
furniture be careful not to damage the
interior trim.
LUGGAGE ANCHOR POINTS
Luggage Retention Nets
Note: Your vehicle does not have luggage
retention net anchor points fitted behind
the first or second row seats.
REAR UNDER FLOOR
STORAGE
Cargo Management System (If
Equipped)
The system is located in the floor of the
cargo area. Lift the handle to open.
Adjustable Load Floor (If Equipped)
184
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Load Carrying
Vehicles with the standard size spare tire
can adjust the load floor to two positions.
The front of the load floor can be placed
either on (for high position) or below (for
low position) the ledges behind the rear
seats. The rear of the load floor always sits
on the two small shelves located on the
liftgate trim.
LUGGAGE COVERS
WARNING
Do not place objects on the luggage
cover.
Removing the Cover
ROOF RACKS AND LOAD
CARRIERS
WARNINGS
If you use a roof rack, the fuel
consumption of your vehicle will be
higher and you may experience
different driving characteristics.
Read and follow the manufacturer’s
instructions when you are fitting a
roof rack.
WARNINGS
When loading the roof racks, we
recommend you evenly distribute the
load, as well as maintain a low
center of gravity. Loaded vehicles, with
higher centers of gravity, may handle
differently than unloaded vehicles. Take
extra precautions, such as slower speeds
and increased stopping distance, when
driving a heavily loaded vehicle.
The maximum recommended load, evenly
distributed on the roof rack, is:
• 165 pounds (75 kilograms) for vehicles
without a moonroof
• 132 pounds (60 kilograms) for vehicles
with a moonroof.
Note: Never place loads directly on the roof
panel. The roof panel is not designed to
directly carry a load.
For correct roof rack system function, you
must place loads directly on crossbars
affixed to the roof rack side rails. When
using the roof rack system, we recommend
you use Ford Genuine Accessory crossbars
designed specifically for your vehicle.
Make sure that you securely fasten the
load. Check the tightness of the load
before driving and at each fuel stop.
DOG GUARD
WARNING
Leave at least 0.4 in (1 cm) space
between the dog guard and the seats
in front of it.
185
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Load Carrying
Installing behind the front seats
1. Attach the mounting hardware to the
grille.
2. Secure the grille using the mounting
hardware into the retainers on the roof.
Tighten the handwheels.
3. Attach the grille to the lower bar with
the supplied hardware.
4. Attach the dog guard to the lower
anchor points using the supplied
handwheels. Tighten the handwheels
at the lower anchor points.
Note: Passengers should not sit in the
second row of seats when the dog guard is
installed behind the front seats.
Installing behind the rear seats
1. Attach the mounting hardware to the
grille.
186
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Load Carrying
2. Secure the grille using the mounting
hardware into the retainers on the roof.
Do not tighten the handwheels.
3. Attach the dog guard to the lower
anchor points by hooking the lower bar
to the anchor points. See Luggage
Anchor Points (page 184).
4. Attach the grille to the lower bar with
the supplied hardware.
5. Tighten the handwheels.
6. Place the small package tray inside the
luggage compartment.
Remove in the reverse order.
187
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Load Carrying
TOWING A TRAILER
WARNINGS
Do not exceed 62 mph (100 km/h).
The rear tire pressures must be
increased by 2.9 psi (0.2 bar) above
specification. Do not exceed the
maximum pressure stated on the tire
sidewall. This could cause serious personal
injury. See Wheels and Tires (page 253).
Do not exceed the maximum gross
train weight stated on your vehicle
identification plate. This could result
in the loss of vehicle control, serious
personal injury or death. See Vehicle
Identification Plate (page 277).
Do not exceed the maximum
permissible trailer vertical weight on
the tow ball as stated in the vehicle
specification chart. This could result in the
loss of vehicle control, serious personal
injury or death. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 275).
The anti-lock brake system does not
control the trailer brakes.
When towing a trailer:
• Obey country specific regulations for
towing a trailer.
• Do not exceed 62 mph (100 km/h)
even if a country allows higher speeds
under certain conditions.
• Place loads as low as possible and
central to the axle of your trailer. If you
are towing with an unloaded vehicle,
you should place the load in your trailer
toward the front, within the maximum
vertical load, as this gives the best
stability. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 275).
• The trailer vertical weight on the tow
ball is essential for the driving stability
of your vehicle and trailer.
• The vertical weight on the tow ball
should be at least 4% of the trailer
weight and not exceed the maximum
permissable weight. See Capacities
and Specifications (page 275).
• Reduce speed immediately if the trailer
shows any sign of swaying. See Trailer
Sway Control (page 189).
• Use a low gear when descending a
steep downhill gradient.
Note: The maximum permissible trailer
vertical weight on the trailer identification
plate is the trailer manufacturer’s testing
value. The vehicle maximum permissible
trailer vertical weight may be lower.
The stability of your vehicle-to-trailer
combination depends on the quality of the
trailer.
Towing a trailer changes the handling
characteristics of your vehicle and
increases stopping distances. Adapt your
speed and driving behavior according to
the trailer load.
The gross train weight stated on the
vehicle identification plate applies for road
gradients up to 12% and altitudes up to
3,281 ft (1,000 m) when towing a trailer. In
mountainous regions the engine
performance decreases due to lower air
density with increasing altitude. In high
altitude regions above 3,281 ft (1,000 m),
you should reduce the stipulated
maximum permitted gross train weight by
10% for every additional 3,281 ft (1,000 m).
Note: Not all vehicles are suitable or
approved to have a tow bar fitted. Ask an
authorized dealer for more information.
188
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Towing
TRAILER SWAY CONTROL
If the trailer begins to sway the stability
control warning lamp flashes in the
information display. The system applies
the brakes to the individual wheels and
reduces engine torque to aid vehicle
stability.
Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to
do so. Check the vertical weight on the tow
ball and trailer load distribution. See
Capacities and Specifications (page
275). See Capacities and Specifications
(page 275).
Note: This feature does not prevent trailer
sway, but reduces it once it begins.
Note: This feature cannot stop all trailers
from swaying.
Note: In some cases, if your vehicle speed
is too high, the system may turn on multiple
times, gradually reducing your vehicle speed.
TOW BALL
Retractable Tow Ball - Manually
Operated
Only move the tow ball arm with your
hand. Never use your foot or auxiliary tools
as damage to the mechanism may result.
You can turn the retractable tow ball arm
through 90 degrees using the handwheel
A.
A 13-pin trailer socket B is provided
underneath the rear bumper next to the
tow ball arm C.
Swivelling the Tow Ball In
WARNINGS
Keep your hands away from the
handwheel as it rotates during the
locking process.
You will hear a warning tone when
the tow ball arm is not in one of the
locked positions. If you do not hear
the tone when moving the tow ball arm,
do not use the tow bar and have it checked
by an authorised dealer.
Before retracting the ball neck into its
stowage position always unhitch the trailer
or dismantle load carriers and their
attachments. Dismantle attachments for
tracking stabilization. Remove the plug for
the trailer power supply and the adapter
from the socket. Failure to do so may result
in damage to the bumper.
189
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Towing
1. Insert the key into the handwheel and
turn it clockwise to unlock.
2. Pull the handwheel out and turn it
counterclockwise to the stop. The tow
ball arm automatically swivels into a
midway position.
3. Release the handwheel. The tow ball
arm is not locked. This is indicated by
the warning tone and the handwheel
projects about five millimeters (0.2
inch) from its housing.
4. Manually turn the tow ball arm steadily
from its midway position to the stop in
the stowage position. The tow ball arm
automatically locks in the end position.
The locking process is clearly audible
if the level of background noise is not
too high. When the locking process is
completed, the warning tone stops and
the handwheel will return to its original
position.
5. Turn the key counterclockwise and
remove it.
190
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Towing
Swivelling the Tow Ball Out
WARNING
You will hear a warning tone when
the tow ball arm is not in one of the
locked positions. If you do not hear
the tone when moving the tow ball arm,
do not use the tow bar and have it checked
by a properly trained technician.
1. Insert the key into the handwheel and
turn it clockwise to unlock.
2. Pull the handwheel out and turn it
counterclockwise to the stop. The tow
ball arm automatically swivels into the
midway position.
3. Release the handwheel. The tow ball
arm is not locked. This is indicated by
the warning tone and the handwheel
projects about five millimeters (0.2
inch) from its housing.
4. Manually turn the tow ball arm steadily
from its midway position to the stop in
the operating position. The tow ball
arm automatically locks in the end
position. The locking process is clearly
audible if the level of background noise
is not too high. When the locking
process is completed, the warning tone
stops and the handwheel will return to
its original position.
5. Turn the key counterclockwise and
remove it.
Driving with a Trailer
WARNING
If any of the conditions below cannot
be met, do not use the tow bar and
have it checked by a properly trained
technician.
Before starting your journey, make sure
that the tow ball arm is properly locked.
Check that:
• there is no warning tone when the
locking procedure has been completed
• the handwheel is in its housing and that
there is no gap
• you have locked the handwheel
(counterclockwise) and removed the
key
• the tow ball arm is locked. It must not
move when jerked.
Maintenance
The towing hitch and control unit are
maintenance free. Do not grease or oil
them.
Only the manufacturer should carry out
repairs or dismantle the towing hitch.
If you use a high pressure spray to wash
your vehicle, do not direct the spray onto
the swivel joint of the tow ball arm.
191
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Towing
Retractable Tow Ball - Electrically
Operated
You will hear a warning tone when the tow
ball arm is not in one of the locked
positions. The warning tone will switch off
after 30 seconds. If you do not hear the
tone when moving the tow ball arm or at
system activation, do not use the tow bar
and have it checked by a properly trained
technician.
Only move the tow ball arm with your
hand. Never use your foot or auxiliary tools
as damage to the mechanism may result.
A 13-pin trailer socket A is provided
underneath the rear bumper next to the
tow ball arm B.
Releasing the Tow Ball Arm
Do not touch the tow ball arm during the
release process.
Note: If the release process is interrupted,
for example an obstacle in the way or loss
of power supply, the system will need to be
reset. To reset the system, repeat the
release process.
Note: The lamp in the switch illuminates
when the system is activated.
The following conditions must be met
before releasing the tow ball arm:
• The luggage compartment lid must be
open.
• The ignition must be off.
• No plug must be attached to the 13-pin
trailer socket.
• The battery voltage must be greater
than 11 volts.
1. Press the button until it illuminates to
activate the system.
2. Press the button again within four
seconds to release the tow ball arm.
The tow ball arm automatically swivels
into the lowered position.
If the tow ball arm fails to release, press
the button again for 15 seconds.
192
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Towing
WARNING
If it still fails to release, do not use
the tow bar and have it checked by
a properly trained technician.
Swivelling the Tow Ball Arm Out
Move the tow ball arm to the operating
position. The tow ball arm automatically
locks in the operating position. The locking
process is clearly audible and the warning
tone will stop.
Swivelling the Tow Ball In
WARNING
Before swivelling the tow ball arm in,
always unhitch the trailer or
dismantle load carriers and their
attachments. Dismantle attachments for
tracking stabilization. Remove the plug for
the trailer power supply and the adapter
from the socket. Failure to do so may result
in damage to the bumper.
1. Release the tow ball arm. See releasing
the tow ball arm.
2. The tow ball arm automatically swivels
into the lowered position.
3. Move the tow ball arm to the stop in
the stowed position. The tow ball arm
automatically locks in the stowed
position. The locking process is clearly
audible and the warning tone will stop.
Fault Conditions
If the tow ball arm release button is
illuminated or you hear a warning tone
when the ignition switch is in position II,
repeat the release process.
If you pull on the tow ball arm during the
release process, the system will stop
moving to prevent an overload condition.
To reset the system, press the release
button for 15 seconds.
193
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Towing
Driving with a Trailer
WARNINGS
In the event of a vehicle breakdown,
disconnect the trailer before towing
the vehicle.
If any of the conditions below cannot
be met, do not use the tow bar and
have it checked by a properly trained
technician.
Before starting your journey, make sure
that the tow ball arm is properly locked.
Check that:
• there is no warning tone when the
locking procedure has been completed
• the tow ball arm is locked. It must not
move when jerked.
Maintenance
Note: The towing hitch and control unit are
maintenance-free. Do not grease or oil
them.
Note: Only the manufacturer should carry
out repairs or dismantle the towing hitch.
Note: If you use a high pressure spray to
wash your vehicle, do not direct the spray
onto the swivel joint of the tow ball arm.
Detachable Tow Ball
WARNINGS
When not in use, always transport
the tow ball arm securely fastened
in the luggage compartment.
Take special care when fitting the
tow ball arm as the safety of your
vehicle and the trailer depends on
this.
Do not use any tools for mounting or
dismounting the tow ball arm.
Do not modify the trailer coupling.
WARNINGS
Do not disassemble or repair the tow
ball arm.
A 13-pin trailer socket and the tow ball arm
seat are provided under the rear bumper.
Turn the trailer socket down through 90
degrees until it engages in the end position.
Unlocking the Tow Ball Arm
Mechanism
1. Remove the protecting cap.
2. Insert the key and turn it
counterclockwise to unlock.
3. Hold the tow ball arm. Pull the
handwheel out and turn it clockwise
until it clicks.
Note: The red mark on the handwheel must
align with the white dot on the tow ball.
4. Release the handwheel. The tow ball
arm is unlocked.
194
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Towing
Inserting the Tow Ball Arm
WARNING
The tow ball arm may only be
inserted when completely unlocked.
Note: Pull out the plug.
1. Insert the tow ball arm vertically and
press it upward until it engages.
Note: Do not hold your hand near the
handwheel.
Note: The green mark on the handwheel
must align with the white dot on the tow
ball.
2. Turn the key clockwise and remove the
key to lock the tow ball.
3. Pull the protecting cap from the key
bow and press it onto the lock.
Driving with a Trailer
WARNING
If any of the below conditions cannot
be met, do not use the tow bar and
have it checked by an authorized
dealer.
Before starting your journey, make sure
that the tow ball arm is correctly locked.
Check that:
• the green mark on the handwheel is
aligned with the white dot on the tow
ball
• the handwheel (A) is correctly fitted to
the tow ball arm
• you have removed the key (B)
• the tow ball arm is securely positioned.
195
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Towing
Removing the Tow Ball Arm
Note: Unhitch the trailer.
1. Remove the protecting cap. Insert the
key and unlock.
2. Hold the tow ball arm. Pull the
handwheel out, turn it clockwise
against the stop.
3. Remove the tow ball arm.
4. Release the handwheel.
When unlocked in this way, the tow ball
arm can be reinserted at any time.
Driving without a Trailer
WARNING
Never unlock the tow ball arm with
the trailer attached.
Remove the tow ball arm. Insert the plug
into its seat (1).
Maintenance
WARNING
Remove the tow ball arm and
protect the seat with the plug before
steam cleaning your vehicle.
Keep the system clean. Periodically
lubricate bearings, sliding surfaces, and
locking balls with resin free grease or oil
and the lock with graphite.
In case of loss, replacement keys are
available from the manufacturer by stating
the number on the lock cylinder.
TOWING POINTS
WARNING
The towing eye has a left-hand
thread. Turn it counterclockwise to
install it. Make sure that the towing
eye is fully tightened.
196
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Towing
Front Towing Eye
Space is provided in the spare wheel well.
You must carry the towing eye in your
vehicle at all times.
Remove the cover and install the towing
eye.
Rear Towing Eye
Note: If your vehicle has a tow bar, you
cannot install the towing eye at the rear of
your vehicle. Use the tow bar to tow other
vehicles.
TOWING THE VEHICLE ON
FOUR WHEELS - MANUAL
TRANSMISSION
WARNINGS
You must switch the ignition on when
your vehicle is being towed. Failure
to follow this warning could seriously
increase the risk of injury or death.
The brake and steering assistance
will not operate unless the engine is
running. Press the brake pedal harder
and be aware of increased stopping
distances and heavier steering.
If your vehicle has a steering wheel
lock make sure the ignition is in the
accessory or on position when being
towed.
Too much tension on a tow rope
could cause damage to your vehicle
or the vehicle that is towing.
When towing your vehicle you must
select neutral. Failure to follow this
warning could damage the
transmission and may lead to a crash or
injury.
Drive off slowly and smoothly without
jerking the vehicle you are towing.
You must only use the towing eye that was
delivered with your vehicle. See Towing
Points (page 196).
Tow ropes or rigid towing bars must be
placed on the same side. For example; right
hand rear towing point to right hand front
towing point.
You must use a tow rope or rigid towing
bar that is of the correct strength for the
weight of the towing vehicle and the
vehicle that is being towed.
The weight of the vehicle that is being
towed must not exceed the weight of the
towing vehicle.
197
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Towing
Do not exceed 31 mph (50 km/h). See
Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels
(page 197).
TOWING THE VEHICLE ON
FOUR WHEELS - AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
WARNINGS
You must switch the ignition on when
your vehicle is being towed. Failure
to follow this warning could seriously
increase the risk of injury or death.
You must make sure the
transmission selector lever is placed
in position N. Failure to follow this
warning could damage the transmission
and may lead to a crash or injury.
The brake and steering assistance
will not operate unless the engine is
running. Press the brake pedal harder
and allow for increased stopping distances
and heavier steering. Failure to take care
may lead to a crash or personal injury.
If your vehicle has a steering wheel
lock, make sure the ignition is in the
accessory or on position before you
tow.
Too much tension on a tow rope
could cause damage to your vehicle
or the vehicle that is towing.
Emergency Towing
If your vehicle is disabled without access
to wheel dollies, a car-hauling trailer, or a
flatbed transport vehicle it can be
flat-towed with all wheels on the ground.
You may do this under the following
conditions:
• Your vehicle is facing forward so that
it is towed in a forward direction.
• The transmission selector lever is
placed in position N. If the transmission
gear shift lever cannot be moved to
position N, it may need to be
overridden. See Transmission (page
136).
• Maximum speed is 30 mph (50 km/h).
• Maximum distance is 50 mi (80 km).
Note: If you need to exceed a speed of
30 mph (50 km/h) and a distance of 50 mi
(80 km) while towing, you must lift the drive
wheels clear of the ground.
Note: We recommend you do not tow with
the drive wheels on the ground. However, if
it is required to move the vehicle from a
dangerous location, do not tow your vehicle
faster than 30 mph (50 km/h) or farther
than 50 mi (80 km).
WARNING
In the event of a mechanical failure
of the transmission, do not use
individual axle carriers. All wheels
must be lifted clear of the ground on a level
platform.
Drive off slowly and smoothly without
jerking the vehicle that is being towed.
You must only use the towing eye that was
delivered with your vehicle. See Towing
Points (page 196).
Tow ropes or rigid towing bars must be
placed on the same side. For example; right
hand rear towing point to right hand front
towing point.
198
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Towing
You must use a tow rope or rigid towing
bar that is of the correct strength for the
weight of the towing vehicle and the
vehicle that is being towed.
Note: Using a rigid towing bar is the safest
way to tow a vehicle.
The weight of the vehicle that is being
towed must not exceed the weight of the
towing vehicle.
199
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Towing
BREAKING-IN
Tires
WARNING
New tires need to be run-in for
approximately 300 miles (500
kilometers). During this time, you
may experience different driving
characteristics.
Brakes and Clutch
WARNING
Avoid heavy use of the brakes and
clutch if possible for the first 100
miles (150 kilometers) in town and
for the first 1000 miles (1500 kilometers)
on freeways.
Engine
WARNING
Avoid driving too fast during the first
1000 miles (1500 kilometers). Vary
your speed frequently and change
up through the gears early. Do not labor
the engine.
Vehicles With a Diesel Engine
During the first 2000 miles (3000
kilometers), you may notice a ticking sound
when your vehicle slows down. This is due
to adjustments of your new diesel engine
and is normal.
REDUCED ENGINE
PERFORMANCE
WARNING
Continued operation will increase the
engine temperature and cause the
engine to shut down completely.
If the engine coolant temperature gauge
needle moves to the upper limit position,
the engine is overheating. See Gauges
(page 74).
You must only drive your vehicle for a short
distance if the engine overheats. The
distance you can travel depends on
ambient temperature, vehicle load and
terrain. The engine will continue to operate
with limited power for a short time.
If the engine temperature continues to rise,
the fuel supply to the engine will reduce.
The air conditioning will switch off and the
engine cooling fan will operate continually.
1. Reduce your speed gradually and stop
your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so.
2. Switch the engine off immediately to
prevent severe engine damage.
3. Wait for the engine to cool down.
4. Check the coolant level. See Engine
Coolant Check (page 237).
5. Have your vehicle checked by an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
ECONOMICAL DRIVING
The following will help to improve fuel
consumption.
Tire Pressures
Check your tire pressures regularly to
optimize fuel economy. For best results
use the economy pressures. See Tire
Pressures (page 269).
Gear Shifting
Use the highest drivable gear appropriate
for the road conditions.
200
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Driving Hints
Anticipation
Adjust your vehicle speed and the distance
to other vehicles without the need for
heavy braking or acceleration.
Efficient Speed
Higher speeds use more fuel. Reduce your
cruising speed on open roads.
Accessories
Try not to add unnecessary accessories to
the exterior of your vehicle. If you use a roof
rack, remember to fold it down or remove
it when not in use.
Electrical Systems
Switch off all electrical systems when not
in use, for example air conditioning. Make
sure you unplug any accessories from the
auxiliary power points when not in use.
COLD WEATHER
PRECAUTIONS
The functional operation of some
components and systems can be affected
at temperatures below -13°F (-25°C).
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
WARNING
Do not drive through flowing or deep
water as you may lose control of your
vehicle.
Note: Driving through standing water can
cause vehicle damage.
Note: Engine damage can occur if water
enters the air filter.
Before driving through standing water,
check the depth. Never drive through water
that is higher than the bottom of the front
rocker area of your vehicle.
When driving through standing water, drive
very slowly and do not stop your vehicle.
Your brake performance and traction may
be limited. After driving through water and
as soon as it is safe to do so:
• Lightly press the brake pedal to dry the
brakes and to check that they work.
• Check that the horn works.
• Check that the exterior lights work.
• Turn the steering wheel to check that
the steering power assist works.
FLOOR MATS
WARNINGS
Always use floor mats that are
designed to fit the foot well of your
vehicle. Only use floor mats that
leave the pedal area unobstructed. Only
use floor mats that are firmly secured to
retention posts so that they cannot slip out
of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in
other ways.
Pedals that cannot move freely can
cause loss of vehicle control and
increase the risk of serious personal
injury.
201
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Driving Hints
WARNINGS
Always make sure that the floor
mats are properly attached to the
retention posts in the carpet that are
supplied with your vehicle. Floor mats must
be properly secured to both retention posts
to make sure mats do not shift out of
position.
Never place floor mats or any other
covering in the vehicle foot well that
cannot be properly secured to
prevent them from moving and interfering
with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
Never place floor mats or any other
covering on top of already installed
floor mats. Floor mats should always
rest on top of vehicle carpeting surface and
not another floor mat or other covering.
Additional floor mats or any other covering
will reduce the pedal clearance and
potentially interfere with pedal operation.
Check attachment of floor mats on
a regular basis. Always properly
reinstall and secure floor mats that
have been removed for cleaning or
replacement.
Always make sure that objects
cannot fall into the driver foot well
while the vehicle is moving. Objects
that are loose can become trapped under
the pedals causing a loss of vehicle control.
Failure to properly follow floor mat
installation or attachment
instructions can potentially cause
interference with pedal operation causing
a loss of vehicle control.
To install floor mats, position the floor mat
so that the eyelet is over the retention post
and press down to lock in.
To remove the floor mat, reverse the
installation procedure.
202
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Driving Hints
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The hazard warning button is located on
the instrument panel. Use it when your
vehicle is creating a safety hazard for other
motorists.
Press the button to turn on the hazard
warning function, and the front and rear
direction indicators will flash.
Press the button again to turn them off.
Note: If used when the engine is not
running, the battery will lose charge. There
may be insufficient power to restart your
engine.
Note: Depending on applicable laws and
regulations in the country for which your
vehicle was originally built, the hazard
warning flashers may flash if you brake
heavily.
FIRST AID KIT
The first aid kit can be stowed under the
front passenger seat or in the luggage
compartment.
WARNING TRIANGLE
The warning triangle can be stowed under
the front passenger seat.
FUEL SHUTOFF
WARNING
Failure to inspect and, if necessary,
repair fuel leaks after a collision may
increase the risk of fire and serious
injury. Ford Motor Company recommends
that the fuel system be inspected by an
authorized dealer after any collision.
In the event of a moderate to severe
collision, this vehicle includes a fuel pump
shutoff feature that stops the flow of fuel
to the engine. Not every impact will cause
a shutoff.
Should your vehicle shut off after a
collision, you may restart your vehicle. For
vehicles equipped with a key system:
1. Switch off the ignition.
2. Switch on the ignition.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to re-enable the
fuel pump.
For vehicles equipped with a push button
start system:
1. Press the START/STOP button to
switch off the ignition.
2. Press the brake pedal and press the
START/STOP button to switch on the
ignition.
3. Remove your foot from the brake pedal
and press the START/STOP button
to switch off the ignition.
4. You can either attempt to start the
engine by pressing the brake pedal and
the START/STOP button, or switch
on the ignition only by pressing the
START/STOP button without
pressing the brake pedal. Both ways
re-enable the fuel system.
Note: When you try to restart your vehicle
after a fuel shutoff, the vehicle makes sure
that various systems are safe to restart.
Once your vehicle determines that the
systems are safe, then the vehicle will allow
you to restart.
Note: In the event that your vehicle does
not restart after your third attempt, contact
an authorized dealer.
203
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
JUMP STARTING THE VEHICLE
WARNINGS
Do not use fuel lines, engine rocker
covers or the intake manifold as
grounding points.
Connect batteries with only the same
nominal voltage.
Always use booster cables with
insulated clamps and adequate size
cable.
Note: Do not disconnect the battery from
your vehicle’s electrical system.
To Connect the Booster Cables
Flat battery vehicleA
Booster battery vehicleB
Positive connection cableC
Negative connection cableD
1. Position the vehicles so that they do
not touch one another.
2. Switch off the engine and any electrical
equipment.
3. Connect the positive (+) terminal of
vehicle B with the positive (+) terminal
of vehicle A (cable C).
4. Connect the negative (-) terminal of
vehicle B to the ground connection of
vehicle A (cable D).
WARNINGS
Do not connect directly to the
negative (–) terminal of the flat
battery.
Make sure that the cables are clear
of any moving parts and fuel delivery
system parts.
To Start the Engine
1. Run the engine of vehicle B at a
moderately high speed.
2. Start the engine of vehicle A.
3. Run both vehicles for a minimum of
three minutes before disconnecting the
cables.
204
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
WARNING
Do not switch the headlamps on
when disconnecting the cables. The
peak voltage could blow the bulbs.
Disconnect the cables in the reverse order.
POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEM
The system flashes the direction indicator
lamps in the event of a serious impact that
deploys an airbag (front, side, side curtain
or Safety Canopy) or the safety belt
pretensioners.
The lamps turn off when:
• You press the hazard control button.
• You press the panic button (if
equipped) on the remote entry
transmitter.
• Your vehicle runs out of power.
205
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
FUSE BOX LOCATIONS
Engine Compartment Fuse Box
This fuse box is located in the engine
compartment. See Under Hood
Overview (page 230).
Passenger Compartment Fuse Box
1. Pinch the retaining clips to release the
cover.
2. Lower the fuse box cover and pull it
towards you.
Install in the reverse order.
Luggage Compartment Fuse Box
Sedan
Five-door
206
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Fuses
Wagon
FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART - VEHICLES BUILT UP TO: 22-06-
2015
Engine Compartment Fuse Box
207
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Fuses
Circuits protectedFuse ratingFuse
Anti-lock brake system.
40A
**
F7
Electronic stability program.
Electronic stability program.
30A
**
F8
Headlamp washer.
20A
**
F9
Blower motor.
40A
**
F10
Auto-Start-Stop module.
30A
**
F11
Powertrain control module.
30A
**
F12
Starter relay.
30A
**
F13
Right-hand heated windshield element.
40A
**
F14
Intercooler fan (1.0L).
25A
**
F15
Cooling fan relay 1.
40A
**
Left-hand heated windshield element.
40A
**
F16
Auxiliary heater.
20A
**
F17
Windshield wipers.
20A
**
F18
Anti-lock brake system.
5A
*
F19
Electronic stability program.
Horn.
15A
*
F20
Brake lamps.
5A
*
F21
Battery monitor system.
15A
*
F22
Relay coils.
5A
*
F23
Lighting control.
Luggage compartment power point.
20A
*
F24
Not used.-F25
Transmission control module (TMC 6F35).
25A
*
F26
208
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Fuses
Circuits protectedFuse ratingFuse
Transmission control module (TMC MPS6).
15A
*
Air conditioning clutch.
15A
*
F27
Rear view camera.
7.5A
*
F28
Collision warning system.
Not used.-F29
Powertrain control module.
5A
*
F30
Not used.-F31
Powertrain control module.
10A
*
F32
Cooling fan module relay.
Powertrain control module.
15A
*
F33
Ignition coils.
Powertrain control module.
10A
*
F34
Water-in-fuel sensor.
10A
*
F35 Powertrain control module.
Ignition coils.
Not used.-F36
Not used.-F37
Powertrain control module.
15A
*
F38
Headlamp leveling.
5A
*
F39
Electronic power assist steering.
5A
*
F40
Body control module.
20A
*
F41
Not used.-F42
Headlamp leveling.
15A
*
F43
Adaptive front lighting unit.
Adaptive cruise control.
5A
*
F44
Heated washer nozzle.
10A
*
F45
Cooling fan.
25A
**
F46
209
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Fuses
Circuits protectedFuse ratingFuse
Not used.-F47
Diesel particulate filter vaporizer.
15A
*
F48
*
Mini fuses
**
Cartridge fuses
Circuits switchedRelay
Intercooler fan.R1
Horn.R2
Diesel particulate filter vaporizer.R3
Front wiper on/off relay.R4
Headlamp washer.R5
Front wiper hi/low relay.R6
Heated windshield.R7
Cooling fan relay.R8
Not used.R9
Cooling fan relay.R10
Air conditioning clutch.R11
Cooling fan relay.R12
Blower motor.R13
Engine control module.R14
Starter relay.R15
Ignition.R16
210
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Fuses
Passenger Compartment Fuse Box
Circuits protectedFuse ratingFuse
Fuel pump.20AF56
Not used.-F57
Not used.-F58
Passive anti-theft transceiver.5AF59
Interior lighting.
10AF60 Driver door switch pack.
Glove box lamp.
211
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Fuses
Circuits protectedFuse ratingFuse
Ambient lighting.
Front cigar lighter.
20AF61
Rear auxiliary power points.
Autowipers.
5AF62 Humidity sensor.
Auto-dimming interior mirror.
Adaptive cruise control.10AF63
Not used.-F64
Liftgate release.10AF65
Driver door lock.
20AF66 Fuel door lock.
Central double locking system.
SYNC module.
7.5AF67 Global positioning system module.
Information and entertainment display.
Electric steering column lock.15AF68
Instrument cluster.5AF69
Central locking system.20AF70
Air conditioning.7.5AF71
Steering wheel module.7.5AF72
Data link connector.
7.5AF73
Battery backup sounder.
High beam.15AF74
Front fog lamps.15AF75
Reversing lamps.10AF76
Front and rear windshield washer pump.20AF77
Ignition switch.
5AF78 Push button ignition switch.
Keyless vehicle module.
Audio unit.
15AF79 Hazard flasher switch.
Electronic finish panel.
212
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Fuses
Circuits protectedFuse ratingFuse
Moonroof.20AF80
Interior motion sensor.
5AF81 Radio frequency receiver.
Sunshade.
Front and rear windshield washer pump.20AF82
Central locking system.20AF83
Driver door unlock.
20AF84 Fuel door unlock.
Central double locking system.
Air conditioning.
7.5AF85
Rear wiper relay.
Auxiliary heater.
Radio.
Adaptive cruise control.
Restraints control module.
10AF86
Occupant classification system.
Heated steering wheel.15AF87
Voltage quality module.20AF88
Not used.-F89
Luggage Compartment Fuse Box
213
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Fuses
Circuits protectedFuse ratingFuse
Handsfree liftgate.
5A
*
F1
Not used.-F2
Keyless vehicle door handles.
5A
*
F3
Front left door control unit.
25A
*
F4
Front right door control unit.
25A
*
F5
Rear left door control unit.
25A
*
F6
Rear right door control unit.
25A
*
F7
Anti-theft alarm.
10A
*
F8
Driver seat.
25A
*
F9
Power windows.
25A
*
F10
Relay coil feed.
5A
*
F11
Not used.-F12
Not used.-F13
Not used.-F14
Not used.-F15
Not used.-F16
Not used.-F17
Not used.-F18
Not used.-F19
Not used.-F20
Not used.-F21
Not used.-F22
Not used.-F23
DC/AC power converter.
30A
**
F24
214
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Fuses
Circuits protectedFuse ratingFuse
Power operated tailgate.
25A
**
F25
Trailer tow module.
40A
**
F26
Rear window defroster.
30A
**
F27
Not used.-F28
Blind spot monitor.
5A
*
F29
Lane keeping system.
Active City Stop.
Rear view camera.
Parking aid module.
5A
*
F30
Not used.-F31
DC/AC power converter.
5A
*
F32
Rear window wiper relay.
15A
*
F33
Driver heated seat.
15A
*
F34
Passenger heated seat.
15A
*
F35
Not used.-F36
Sunshade.
15A
*
F37
Not used.-F38
Not used.-F39
Not used.-F40
Not used.-F41
Not used.-F42
Not used.-F43
Power exterior mirrors.
10A
*
F44
215
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Fuses
Circuits protectedFuse ratingFuse
Heated exterior mirrors.
7.5A
*
F45
Not used.-F46
*
Mini fuses
**
Cartridge fuses
Circuits switchedRelay
Ignition switch.R1
Heated rear window.R2
Rear window wiper.R3
Not used.R4
Anti-theft alarm horn.R5
Delayed accessory power.R6
216
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Fuses
FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART - VEHICLES BUILT FROM: 23-06-
2015
Engine Compartment Fuse Box
Circuits protectedFuse ratingFuse
Anti-lock brake system.
40A
**
F7
Electronic stability program.
Electronic stability program.
30A
**
F8
Headlamp washer.
20A
**
F9
Blower motor.
40A
**
F10
Auto-Start-Stop module.
30A
**
F11
Powertrain control module.
30A
**
F12
Starter relay.
30A
**
F13
217
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Fuses
Circuits protectedFuse ratingFuse
Right-hand heated windshield element.
40A
**
F14
Intercooler fan (1.0L).
25A
**
F15
Cooling fan relay 1.
40A
**
Left-hand heated windshield element.
40A
**
F16
Auxiliary heater.
20A
**
F17
Windshield wipers.
20A
**
F18
Anti-lock brake system.
5A
*
F19
Electronic stability program.
Horn.
15A
*
F20
Brake lamps.
5A
*
F21
Battery monitor system.
15A
*
F22
Relay coils.
5A
*
F23
Lighting control.
Luggage compartment power point.
20A
*
F24
Not used.-F25
Transmission control module (TMC 6F35).
25A
*
F26
Transmission control module (TMC MPS6).
15A
*
Air conditioning clutch.
15A
*
F27
Rear view camera.
7.5A
*
F28
Collision warning system.
Not used.-F29
Powertrain control module.
5A
*
F30
Not used.-F31
Powertrain control module.
10A
*
F32
Cooling fan module relay.
218
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Fuses
Circuits protectedFuse ratingFuse
Powertrain control module.
15A
*
F33
Ignition coils.
Powertrain control module.
10A
*
F34
Water-in-fuel sensor.
10A
*
F35 Powertrain control module.
Ignition coils.
Not used.-F36
Not used.-F37
Powertrain control module.
15A
*
F38
Headlamp leveling.
5A
*
F39
Electronic power assist steering.
5A
*
F40
Body control module.
20A
*
F41
Not used.-F42
Headlamp leveling.
15A
*
F43
Adaptive front lighting unit.
Adaptive cruise control.
5A
*
F44
Heated washer nozzle.
10A
*
F45
Cooling fan.
25A
**
F46
Not used.-F47
Diesel particulate filter vaporizer.
15A
*
F48
*
Mini fuses
**
Cartridge fuses
Circuits switchedRelay
Intercooler fan.R1
Horn.R2
Diesel particulate filter vaporizer.R3
219
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Fuses
Circuits switchedRelay
Cooling fan relay.R4
Front wiper on/off relay.R5
Front wiper hi/low relay.R6
Heated windshield.R7
Cooling fan relay.R8
Headlamp washer.R9
Starter relay.R10
Air conditioning clutch.R11
Cooling fan relay.R12
Blower motor.R13
Engine control module.R14
Glow plug relay.R15
Ignition.R16
220
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Fuses
Passenger Compartment Fuse Box
Circuits protectedFuse ratingFuse
Fuel pump.20AF56
Not used.-F57
Not used.-F58
Passive anti-theft transceiver.5AF59
Interior lighting.
10AF60 Driver door switch pack.
Glove box lamp.
221
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Fuses
Circuits protectedFuse ratingFuse
Ambient lighting.
Front cigar lighter.
20AF61
Rear auxiliary power points.
Autowipers.
5AF62 Humidity sensor.
Auto-dimming interior mirror.
Adaptive cruise control.10AF63
Not used.-F64
Liftgate release.10AF65
Driver door lock.
20AF66 Fuel door lock.
Central double locking system.
SYNC module.
7.5AF67 Global positioning system module.
Information and entertainment display.
Electric steering column lock.15AF68
Instrument cluster.5AF69
Central locking system.20AF70
Air conditioning.7.5AF71
Steering wheel module.7.5AF72
Data link connector.
7.5AF73
Battery backup sounder.
High beam.15AF74
Front fog lamps.15AF75
Reversing lamps.10AF76
Front and rear windshield washer pump.20AF77
Ignition switch.
5AF78 Push button ignition switch.
Keyless vehicle module.
Audio unit.
15AF79 Hazard flasher switch.
Electronic finish panel.
222
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Fuses
Circuits protectedFuse ratingFuse
Moonroof.20AF80
Interior motion sensor.
5AF81 Radio frequency receiver.
Sunshade.
Front and rear windshield washer pump.20AF82
Central locking system.20AF83
Driver door unlock.
20AF84 Fuel door unlock.
Central double locking system.
Air conditioning.
7.5AF85
Rear wiper relay.
Auxiliary heater.
Radio.
Adaptive cruise control.
Restraints control module.
10AF86
Occupant classification system.
Heated steering wheel.15AF87
Voltage quality module.20AF88
Not used.-F89
Luggage Compartment Fuse Box
223
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Fuses
Circuits protectedFuse ratingFuse
Handsfree liftgate.
5A
*
F1
Not used.-F2
Keyless vehicle door handles.
5A
*
F3
Front left door control unit.
25A
*
F4
Front right door control unit.
25A
*
F5
Rear left door control unit.
25A
*
F6
Rear right door control unit.
25A
*
F7
Anti-theft alarm.
10A
*
F8
Driver seat.
25A
*
F9
Power windows.
25A
*
F10
Relay coil feed.
5A
*
F11
Not used.-F12
Not used.-F13
Not used.-F14
Not used.-F15
Not used.-F16
Not used.-F17
Not used.-F18
Not used.-F19
Not used.-F20
Not used.-F21
Not used.-F22
Not used.-F23
DC/AC power converter.
30A
**
F24
224
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Fuses
Circuits protectedFuse ratingFuse
Power operated tailgate.
25A
**
F25
Trailer tow module.
40A
**
F26
Rear window defroster.
30A
**
F27
Not used.-F28
Blind spot monitor.
5A
*
F29
Lane keeping system.
Active City Stop.
Rear view camera.
Parking aid module.
5A
*
F30
Not used.-F31
DC/AC power converter.
5A
*
F32
Rear window wiper relay.
15A
*
F33
Driver heated seat.
15A
*
F34
Passenger heated seat.
15A
*
F35
Not used.-F36
Sunshade.
15A
*
F37
Not used.-F38
Not used.-F39
Not used.-F40
Not used.-F41
Not used.-F42
Not used.-F43
Power exterior mirrors.
10A
*
F44
225
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Fuses
Circuits protectedFuse ratingFuse
Heated exterior mirrors.
7.5A
*
F45
Not used.-F46
*
Mini fuses
**
Cartridge fuses
Circuits switchedRelay
Ignition switch.R1
Heated rear window.R2
Rear window wiper.R3
Not used.R4
Anti-theft alarm horn.R5
Delayed accessory power.R6
CHANGING A FUSE
Fuses
WARNING
Always replace a fuse with one that
has the specified amperage rating.
Using a fuse with a higher amperage
rating can cause severe wire damage and
could start a fire.
If electrical components in the vehicle are
not working, a fuse may have blown. Blown
fuses are identified by a broken wire within
the fuse. Check the appropriate fuses
before replacing any electrical
components.
Standard Fuse Amperage Rating and Color
Color
J-type fusesM-type fusesDual micro fusesMicro fusesFuse rating
--TanTan5A
--BrownBrown7.5A
--RedRed10A
226
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Fuses
Color
J-type fusesM-type fusesDual micro fusesMicro fusesFuse rating
-GreyBlueBlue15A
BlueLight Blue-Yellow20A
WhiteWhite-White25A
PinkPink-Green30A
GreenGreen--40A
Red---50A
Yellow---60A
227
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Fuses
GENERAL INFORMATION
Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help
maintain its roadworthiness and resale
value. There is a large network of Ford
authorized repairers that are there to help
you with their professional servicing
expertise. Authorized repairers are best
qualified to service your vehicle properly
and expertly, with a wide range of highly
specialized tools.
In addition to regular servicing, we
recommend that you carry out the
following checks.
WARNINGS
Switch the ignition off before
touching or attempting adjustment
of any kind.
Do not touch the electronic ignition
system parts after you have switched
the ignition on or when the engine is
running. The system operates at high
voltage.
Keep your hands and clothing clear
of the engine cooling fan. Under
certain conditions, the fan may
continue to run for several minutes after
you have switched the engine off.
Make sure that you fit filler caps
securely after carrying out
maintenance checks.
Daily Checks
• Exterior lamps.
• Interior lamps.
• Warning lamps and indicators.
Check When Refueling
• Engine oil level. See Engine Oil Check
(page 237).
• Brake fluid level. See Brake Fluid
Check (page 238).
• Washer fluid level. See Washer Fluid
Check (page 239).
• Tire pressures (when cold). See Tire
Pressures (page 269).
• Tire condition. See Wheels and Tires
(page 253).
Monthly Checks
• Engine coolant level (engine cold). See
Engine Coolant Check (page 237).
• Pipes, hoses and reservoirs for leaks.
• Air conditioning operation.
• Parking brake operation.
• Horn operation.
• Tightness of lug nuts. See Tire
Pressures (page 269).
OPENING AND CLOSING THE
HOOD
Opening the Hood
1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood release
handle located under the left-hand
side of the instrument panel.
2. Slightly lift the hood.
228
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Maintenance
3. Move the catch to the left.
4. Open the hood. Support the hood with
the strut.
Closing the Hood
1. Remove the hood strut from the catch
and secure it correctly after use.
2. Lower the hood and allow it to drop
under its own weight for the last 8-12
in (20-30 cm).
Note: Make sure that the hood is correctly
closed.
229
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Maintenance
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 1.0L ECOBOOST™
Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (right-hand drive). See Brake Fluid Check
(page 238).
A
Engine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 237).B
Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-hand drive). See Brake Fluid Check (page
238).
C
Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 239).D
Power distribution box. See Fuses (page 206).E
Air filter assembly.F
Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 236).G
Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 239).H
Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 237).I
230
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Maintenance
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 1.5L ECOBOOST™
Engine coolant reservoir
*
: See Engine Coolant Check (page 237).A
Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (right-hand drive)
*
: See Brake Fluid Check
(page 238).
B
Engine oil filler cap
*
: See Engine Oil Check (page 237).C
Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-hand drive)
*
: See Brake Fluid Check
(page 238).
D
Battery: See Maintenance (page 228).E
Engine compartment fuse box: See Fuses (page 206).F
Air cleaner: No maintenance necessary.G
Engine oil dipstick
*
: See Engine Oil Check (page 237).H
Screen washer fluid reservoir
*
: See Washer Fluid Check (page 239).I
*
For easy identification, filler caps and the engine oil dipstick are marked in color.
231
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Maintenance
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 1.6L DURATEC-16V TI-VCT (SIGMA)/
1.6L FLEX FUEL
Engine coolant reservoir
*
. See Engine Coolant Check (page 237).A
Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (right-hand drive)
*
. See Brake Fluid Check
(page 238). See Clutch Fluid Check (page 239).
B
Engine oil filler cap
*
. See Engine Oil Check (page 237).C
Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-hand drive)
*
. See Brake Fluid Check
(page 238). See Clutch Fluid Check (page 239).
D
Battery. See Jump Starting the Vehicle (page 204).E
Engine compartment fuse box. See Fuses (page 206).F
Air cleaner. No maintenance necessary.G
Engine oil dipstick
*
. See Engine Oil Check (page 237).H
Power steering fluid reservoir
*
.I
Screen washer fluid reservoir
*
. See Washer Fluid Check (page 239).J
*
For easy identification, filler caps and the engine oil dipstick are marked in color.
232
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Maintenance
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 1.5L DURATORQ-TDCI DIESEL
Engine coolant reservoir: See Engine Coolant Check (page 237).A
Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (right-hand drive): See Brake Fluid Check
(page 238).
B
Engine oil filler cap: See Engine Oil Check (page 237).C
Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-hand drive): See Brake Fluid Check (page
238).
D
Battery: See Changing the 12V Battery (page 239).E
Engine compartment fuse box: See Fuses (page 206).F
Air cleaner: No maintenance necessary.G
Engine oil dipstick: See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 236).H
Windshield and rear window washer fluid reservoir: See Washer Fluid Check
(page 239).
I
233
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Maintenance
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 1.6L DURATORQ-TDCI (DV) DIESEL
Engine coolant reservoir
*
: See Engine Coolant Check (page 237).A
Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (right-hand drive)
*
: See Brake Fluid Check
(page 238).
B
Engine oil filler cap
*
: See Engine Oil Check (page 237).C
Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-hand drive)
*
: See Brake Fluid Check
(page 238).
D
Battery: See Maintenance (page 228).E
Engine compartment fuse box: See Fuses (page 206).F
Air cleaner: No maintenance necessary.G
Engine oil dipstick
*
: See Engine Oil Check (page 237).H
Screen washer fluid reservoir
*
: See Washer Fluid Check (page 239).I
*
For easy identification, filler caps and the engine oil dipstick are marked in color.
234
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Maintenance
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 2.0L DURATORQ-TDCI (DW) DIESEL
Engine coolant reservoir
*
: See Engine Coolant Check (page 237).A
Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (right-hand drive)
*
: See Brake Fluid Check
(page 238).
B
Engine oil dipstick
*
: See Engine Oil Check (page 237).C
Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-hand drive)
*
: See Brake Fluid Check
(page 238).
D
Battery: See Maintenance (page 228).E
Engine compartment fuse box: See Fuses (page 206).F
Air cleaner: No maintenance necessary.G
Engine oil filler cap
*
: See Engine Oil Check (page 237).H
Screen washer fluid reservoir
*
: See Washer Fluid Check (page 239).I
*
For easy identification, filler caps and the engine oil dipstick are marked in colour.
235
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Maintenance
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 1.0L
ECOBOOST™
Minimum.A
Maximum.B
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 1.5L
ECOBOOST™
Minimum.A
Maximum.B
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 1.6L
DURATEC-16V TI-VCT
(SIGMA)/1.6L FLEX FUEL
MinimumA
MaximumB
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 1.5L
DURATORQ-TDCI DIESEL/1.6L
DURATORQ-TDCI (DV) DIESEL
Minimum.A
Maximum.B
236
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Maintenance
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 2.0L
DURATORQ-TDCI (DW) DIESEL
Minimum.A
Maximum.B
ENGINE OIL CHECK
1. Make sure that your vehicle is on level
ground.
2. Check the oil level before starting the
engine, or switch the engine off and
wait 10 minutes for the oil to drain into
the oil pan.
3. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with
a clean, lint free cloth. Replace the
dipstick and remove it again to check
the oil level.
If the oil level is at the minimum mark, add
oil immediately. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 279).
Note: Make sure that the oil level is
between the minimum and the maximum
marks.
Note: Do not use oil additives or other
engine treatments. Under certain conditions
they may cause engine damage.
Note: The oil consumption of new engines
reaches its normal level after approximately
3,000 mi (5,000 km).
Adding Engine Oil
WARNINGS
Only add oil when the engine is cold.
If the engine is hot, wait 10 minutes
for the engine to cool down.
Do not remove the filler cap when
the engine is running.
1. Remove the engine oil filler cap. See
Maintenance (page 228).
2. Add engine oil that meets Ford
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 279).
3. Replace the engine oil filler cap. Turn
it until you feel a strong resistance.
Note: Do not add oil further than the
maximum mark. Oil levels above the
maximum mark may cause engine damage.
Note: Soak up any spillage with an
absorbent cloth immediately.
ENGINE COOLANT CHECK
WARNINGS
Do not dispose of engine coolant in
the household refuse or the public
sewage system. Use an authorized
waste disposal facility.
Do not put engine coolant in the
windshield washer fluid container. If
sprayed on the windshield, engine
coolant could make it difficult to see
through the windshield.
237
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Maintenance
Make sure that the coolant level is
between the MIN and MAX marks on the
coolant reservoir. If the coolant level is at
or below the minimum mark, add coolant
immediately.
Maintain coolant concentration within
48% to 50%, which equates to a freeze
point between -20°F (-29°C) and -29.2°F
(-34°C).
Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The
level may extend beyond the MAX mark.
Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, cooling
system sealants or additives as they can
cause damage to the engine cooling or
heating systems.
Adding Engine Coolant
WARNINGS
Never remove the coolant reservoir
cap while the engine is running or hot.
Only add coolant when the engine is
cold. If the engine is hot, wait 10
minutes for the engine to cool down.
Do not allow the fluid to touch your
skin or eyes. If this happens, rinse the
affected areas immediately with
plenty of water and contact your physician.
Undiluted coolant is flammable and
may ignite if spilled on a hot exhaust.
Ford Motor Company does not recommend
the use of recycled engine coolant since a
Ford-approved recycling process is not yet
available.
Do not mix different colors or types of
coolant in your vehicle.
Note: Add a 50/50 mixture of antifreeze
and water or prediluted engine coolant that
meets the correct specification.
Note: Use fluids which meet the
specifications or requirements defined. Use
of other fluids may lead to damage which
is not covered by your vehicle's Warranty.
See Capacities and Specifications (page
275).
To top up the coolant level do the
following:
1. Remove the coolant reservoir cap.
2. Add engine coolant to the MAX mark,
do not overfill.
3. Replace the coolant reservoir cap. Turn
it clockwise until you feel a strong
resistance.
Note: In case of emergency, you can add
water without engine coolant in order to
reach a vehicle service location.
Note: Prolonged use of an incorrect dilution
of engine coolant can cause engine damage,
such as corrosion, overheating or freezing.
BRAKE FLUID CHECK
WARNINGS
Do not use any fluid other than the
recommended brake fluid as this will
reduce brake efficiency. Use of
incorrect fluid could result in the loss of
vehicle control, serious personal injury or
death.
238
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Maintenance
WARNINGS
Only use brake fluid from a sealed
container. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other
materials may result in brake system
damage or failure. Failure to adhere to this
warning could result in the loss of vehicle
control, serious personal injury or death.
Do not allow the fluid to touch your
skin or eyes. If this happens, rinse the
affected areas immediately with
plenty of water and contact your physician.
A fluid level between the MAX and
MIN lines is within the normal
operating range and there is no need
to add fluid. A fluid level not in the normal
operating range could compromise the
performance of the system. Have your
vehicle checked immediately.
Only use fluid that meets Ford
specifications.
See Capacities and Specifications
(page 275).
CLUTCH FLUID CHECK
The clutch and brake systems share the
same fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid
Check (page 238).
WASHER FLUID CHECK
When adding fluid, use a mixture of washer
fluid and water to help prevent freezing in
cold weather and improve the cleaning
capability. For information on fluid dilution,
refer to the product instructions.
Note: The reservoir supplies the front and
rear washer systems.
CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY
WARNINGS
Batteries normally produce explosive
gases which can cause personal
injury. Therefore, do not allow
flames, sparks or lighted substances to
come near the battery. When working near
the battery, always shield your face and
protect your eyes. Always provide correct
ventilation.
When lifting a plastic-cased battery,
excessive pressure on the end walls
could cause acid to flow through the
vent caps, resulting in personal injury and
damage to the vehicle or battery. Lift the
battery with a battery carrier or with your
hands on opposite corners.
Keep batteries out of reach of
children. Batteries contain sulfuric
acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or
clothing. Shield your eyes when working
near the battery to protect against possible
splashing of acid solution. In case of acid
contact with skin or eyes, flush
immediately with water for a minimum of
15 minutes and get prompt medical
attention. If acid is swallowed, call a
physician immediately.
Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead
compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
239
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Maintenance
WARNINGS
For vehicles with Auto-Start-Stop
the battery requirement is different.
You must replace the battery with
one of exactly the same specification.
The battery is located in the engine
compartment. See Under Hood
Overview (page 230).
Your vehicle has a maintenance-free
battery. It does not require additional water
during service.
If your vehicle battery has a cover, make
sure you correctly install it after cleaning
or replacing the battery.
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the
top of the battery clean and dry and the
battery cables tightly fastened to the
battery terminals. If any corrosion is
present on the battery or terminals, remove
the cables from the terminals and clean
with a wire brush. You can neutralize the
acid with a solution of baking soda and
water.
We recommend that you disconnect the
negative battery cable terminal from the
battery if you plan to store your vehicle for
an extended period.
To maintain correct operation of the
battery management system, if you add
any electrical devices to your vehicle, do
not connect the ground connection directly
to the negative battery terminal. A
connection at the negative battery terminal
can cause inaccurate measurements of
the battery condition and potential
incorrect system operation.
Note: Electrical accessories or components
added to your vehicle by you or an
authorized dealer, may adversely affect
battery performance, durability and the
performance of other electrical systems on
your vehicle.
If a replacement battery is required, we
recommend you use a Ford replacement
battery that matches the electrical
requirements of your vehicle.
If you disconnect or replace the battery
and your vehicle has an automatic
transmission, transmission must relearn
its adaptive strategy. Because of this, the
transmission may shift firmly when first
driven. This is normal operation while the
transmission fully updates its operation to
optimum shift feel.
Remove and Reinstall the Battery
To disconnect or remove the battery, do
the following:
1. Apply the parking brake and switch the
ignition off.
2. Switch all electrical equipment off, for
example lights and radio.
3. Wait a minimum of two minutes before
disconnecting the battery.
*
4. Disconnect the negative battery cable
terminal first.
5. Disconnect the positive battery cable
terminal last.
6. Remove the battery securing clamp.
7. Remove the battery.
8. Install in the reverse order.
**
*
The engine management system has a
power hold function and remains powered
for a period after you switch the ignition
off. This is to allow diagnostic and adaptive
tables to be stored. Disconnecting the
battery without waiting can cause damage
not covered by the vehicle Warranty.
**
Before reconnecting the battery, make
sure the ignition remains switched off.
240
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Maintenance
Note: If you only disconnect the negative
battery cable terminal, make sure it is
isolated or placed away from the battery
terminal to avoid un-intended connection
or arcing.
Note: Make sure the battery cable terminals
are fully tightened.
Note: If you disconnect or replace the
battery, you must reset the clock and the
pre-set radio stations once the battery is
reconnected.
Battery Disposal
Make sure that you dispose of old batteries
in an environmentally friendly way. Seek
advice from your local authority about
recycling old batteries.
CHECKING THE WIPER
BLADES
Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of
the blade to check for roughness.
Clean the wiper blades with washer fluid
or water applied with a soft sponge or
cloth.
CHANGING THE WIPER
BLADES
Note: Use the service position in winter to
provide easier access to the front wiper
blades for freeing them from snow and ice.
The front wipers will not return to their
normal position as soon as you switch on
the ignition. The front wipers will stay in the
service position when you switch the ignition
on or start the engine. Switch on the front
wipers to any mode, then switch off the
front wipers to bring the front wipers back
to the park position.
Note: The windshield wiper blades are
different in length. If you install wiper blades
of the wrong length, the wipers may not
work correctly. If equipped with autowipers,
the rain sensor may not work correctly.
Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks
into place. Lower the wiper arm and blade
back to the windshield. The wiper arms will
automatically return to their normal position
when the ignition is turned on.
Note: Replace wiper blades at least once
per year for optimum performance.
Note: Poor wiper quality can be improved
by cleaning the wiper blades and the
windshield
Setting the Front Wipers in the
Service Position
1. Make sure that the outside of the
windshield is free from snow and ice.
2. Switch on the ignition.
241
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Maintenance
3. Switch off the ignition and within three
seconds, pull the wiper lever to toward
you. Hold the lever in until wipers have
moved to the service position.
4. Release the lever when the wipers have
moved to the service position.
Changing the Front Wiper Blades
1. Pull the wiper blade and arm away
from the glass.
2. Press the locking buttons together.
3. Rotate and remove the wiper blade.
4. Install in the reverse order.
Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks
into place.
Changing the Rear Window Wiper
Blade
1. Lift the wiper arm.
2. Slightly rotate the wiper blade from the
wiper arm
3. Disengage the wiper blade from the
wiper arm.
4. Remove the wiper blade.
5. Install in the reverse order.
242
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Maintenance
Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks
into place.
REMOVING A HEADLAMP
1. Make sure the headlamp control is in
the off position and open the hood.
2. Remove the two screws from the
headlamp assembly.
3. Carefully pull the headlamp assembly
as far as possible towards the front of
the vehicle to disengage it from the
lower fixing point.
4. Carefully lift the outer side of the
headlamp and remove it.
5. Disconnect the electrical connector.
CHANGING A BULB
WARNINGS
Switch all of the lamps and the
ignition off. Failure to follow this
warning could result in serious
personal injury.
Bulbs can become hot. Let the bulb
cool down before removing it. Failure
to do so could result in personal
injury.
The following instructions describe how to
remove the bulbs. Fit replacements in the
reverse order unless otherwise stated.
Use the correct specification bulb. See
Bulb Specification Chart (page 250).
Headlamp
You must remove the headlamp assembly
prior to replacing any bulb. See Removing
a Headlamp (page 243).
Base Series Headlamp
Headlamp low beam.A
Headlamp high beam.B
Side lamp. Direction indicator.C
243
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Maintenance
High Series Headlamp
High intensity discharge
headlamp. Low and high beam.
*
A
Cornering lamp.B
Direction indicator.C
*
These lamps operate at a high voltage.
See an authoized dealer if they fail.
Front Side Lamp
1. Remove the headlamp.
2. Carefully remove the cover.
3. Gently pinch the bulb holder and pull
it straight out.
4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
Direction Indicator
1. Remove the headlamp.
244
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Maintenance
2. Carefully remove the cover.
3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
4. Press the bulb in and turn the bulb
counterclockwise to remove it.
Headlamp Low Beam
1. Remove the headlamp.
2. Carefully remove the cover.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
Note: Do not touch the bulb glass.
Headlamp High Beam
1. Remove the headlamp.
245
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Maintenance
2. Carefully remove the cover.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. Release the clip and remove the bulb.
Note: Do not touch the bulb glass.
Front Fog Lamp
1. Remove fog lamp grille from front
fascia then unscrew the fog lamp.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
Note: Do not touch the bulb glass.
Note: You cannot separate the bulb from
the bulb holder.
Rear lamps
Direction Indicator, Brake and Rear
Lamp
1. Carefully remove the cover.
246
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Maintenance
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Remove the wing nuts.
4. Remove the lamp.
5. Unclip the bulb holder.
6. Press the bulb in and turn the bulb
counterclockwise to remove it.
A. Direction indicator.
B. Brake and rear lamp.
Reversing Lamp, Rear Lamp
1. Carefully remove the cover.
2. Remove the wing nut.
3. Remove the lamp.
247
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Maintenance
4. Disconnect the electrical connector.
5. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
6. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
A. Reversing lamp.
B. Rear lamp.
Central High Mounted Brake Lamp
1. Insert a suitable tool, for example a
screwdriver, in the position shown and
gently push the clip.
2. Insert a suitable tool, for example a
screwdriver into the holes.
3. Carefully pull the lamp to release the
spring clips.
248
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Maintenance
4. Remove the lamp.
5. Unclip the bulb holder.
6. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
Interior Lamps
Footwell Lamp, Luggage Compartment
Lamps
1. Insert a suitable tool, for example a
screwdriver and pry out the lamp.
2. Remove the bulb.
Vehicles with LED lamps
LED lamps are not serviceable. See an
authoized dealer if they fail.
249
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Maintenance
BULB SPECIFICATION CHART
Exterior Lamps
Power (Watt)SpecificationLamp
21/5P21/5WBrake and rear lamp.
16W16WCentral high mounted brake lamp.
55H1Cornering lamps.
21PY21WFront direction indicator.
55H8Front fog lamp.
5W5WFront side lamp.
55H1Headlamp high beam.
LEDLEDDaytime running lamps.
LEDLEDLicense plate lamp.
55H7Headlamp low beam.
21PY21WRear direction indicator.
21P21WRear fog lamp.
16W16WReversing lamps.
5WY5WSide direction indicator.
Note: LED lamps are not serviceable. See an authorized dealer if they fail.
Interior Lamps
Power (Watt)SpecificationLamp
6W6WInterior lamp.
10211 FestoonLuggage compartment lamp.
6W6WMap lamp.
250
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Maintenance
CLEANING THE EXTERIOR
Note: If you use a car wash with a waxing
cycle, make sure that you remove the wax
from the windshield and the wiper blades.
Note: Prior to using a car wash facility
check the suitability of it for your vehicle.
Note: Some car washes use water at high
pressure. Due to this, water droplets may
enter inside your vehicle and could also
damage certain parts of your vehicle.
Note: Remove the aerial before using an
automatic car wash.
Note: Switch the heater blower off to
prevent contamination of the fresh air filter.
We recommend that you wash your vehicle
with a sponge and lukewarm water
containing a car shampoo.
Cleaning the Headlamps
Note: Do not scrape the headlamp lenses
or use abrasives, alcoholic solvents or
chemical solvents to clean them.
Note: Do not wipe the headlamps when
they are dry.
Cleaning the Rear Window
Note: Do not scrape the inside of the rear
window or use abrasives or chemical
solvents to clean it.
Use a clean, lint free cloth or a damp
chamois leather to clean the inside of the
rear window.
Cleaning the Chrome Trim
Note: Do not use abrasives or chemical
solvents. Use soapy water.
Note: Do not apply cleaning product to hot
surfaces and do not leave cleaning product
on chrome surfaces for a period of time
exceeding that which is recommended.
Note: Industrial-strength (heavy-duty)
cleaners, or cleaning chemicals, may cause
damage over a period of time.
Body Paintwork Preservation
WARNINGS
Do not polish your vehicle in strong
sunshine.
Do not allow polish to touch plastic
surfaces. It could be difficult to
remove.
Do not apply polish to the windshield
or rear window. This could cause the
wipers to become noisy and they
may not clear the window properly.
We recommend that you wax the
paintwork once or twice a year.
CLEANING THE INTERIOR
Note: Do not allow air fresheners and hand
sanitizers to spill on interior surfaces. If a
spill occurs, wipe off immediately. Damage
may not be covered by your warranty.
Safety Belts
Note: Do not use abrasives, or chemical
solvents to clean them.
Note: Do not allow moisture to penetrate
the safety belt retractor mechanism.
Clean them with interior cleaner or water
applied with a soft sponge. Let them dry
naturally, away from artificial heat.
Instrument Cluster Screens, LCD
Screens and Radio Screens
Note: Do not use abrasives, alcoholic
solvents or chemical solvents to clean the
instrument cluster screens, LCD screens or
radio screens. These cleaning products can
damage the screens.
251
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Vehicle Care
Clean the instrument panel and cluster
lens with a clean, damp and soft cloth,
then use a clean, dry and soft cloth to dry
these areas.
Rear Windows
Note: Do not use any abrasive materials to
clean the interior of the rear windows.
Note: Do not install stickers or labels to the
interior of the rear windows.
REPAIRING MINOR PAINT
DAMAGE
You should repair paintwork damage
caused by stones from the road or minor
scratches as soon as possible. A choice of
products are available from an authorized
dealer.
Remove particles such as bird droppings,
tree sap, insect deposits, tar spots, road
salt and industrial fallout before repairing
paint chips.
Always read and follow the manufacturer’s
instructions before using the products.
CLEANING THE ALLOY
WHEELS
Note: Do not apply a cleaning chemical to
warm or hot wheel rims and covers.
Note: Industrial-strength (heavy-duty)
cleaners, or cleaning chemicals, in
combination with brush agitation to remove
brake dust and dirt, could wear away the
clear coat finish over a period of time.
Note: Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based
or high caustic-based wheel cleaners, steel
wool, fuels or strong household detergent.
Note: If you intend parking your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the
wheels with a wheel cleaner, drive your
vehicle for a few minutes before doing so.
This will reduce the risk of increased
corrosion of the brake discs, brake pads and
linings.
Note: Some automatic car washes may
cause damage to the finish on your wheel
rims and covers.
Alloy wheels and wheel covers are coated
with a clear coat paint finish. To maintain
their condition we recommend that you:
• Clean them weekly with the
recommended wheel and tire cleaner.
• Use a sponge to remove heavy
deposits of dirt and brake dust
accumulation.
• Rinse them thoroughly with a
pressurized stream of water when you
have completed the cleaning process.
We recommend that you use Ford service
wheel cleaner. Make sure that you read
and follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
Using other non-recommended cleaning
products can result in severe and
permanent cosmetic damage.
252
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Vehicle Care
TEMPORARY MOBILITY KIT
Your vehicle may not have a spare tire.
Therefore you will have a temporary
mobility kit which will only repair one
damaged tire.
The kit is located in the left-hand side of
the rear luggage compartment.
General Information
WARNINGS
Depending on the type and extent of
tire damage, some tires can only be
partially sealed or not sealed at all.
Loss of tire pressure can affect vehicle
handling, leading to loss of vehicle control.
Do not use the kit on a previously
damaged tire, for example when it
has been driven under inflated. This
could cause loss of vehicle control,
personal injury or death.
Do not use the kit on run flat tires.
This could cause loss of vehicle
control.
Do not try to seal damage to the tire
sidewall. The tire could burst and
cause loss of vehicle control,
personal injury or death.
The kit seals most tire punctures with a
diameter of up to ¼ inch (six millimeters).
This is to temporarily restore mobility.
You must observe the following rules when
using the kit:
• Drive with caution and avoid making
sudden steering or driving maneuvers,
especially if your vehicle is heavily
loaded or you are towing a trailer.
• The kit will provide you with an
emergency temporary repair, enabling
you to continue your journey to the next
vehicle or tire dealer, or to drive a
maximum distance of 125 miles
(200 kilometers).
• Do not exceed a maximum speed of
50 mph (80 km/h).
• Keep the kit out of the reach of
children.
• Only use the kit when the ambient
temperature is between -40°F
(–40°C) and +158°F (+70°C).
Using the Kit
WARNINGS
Compressed air can act as an
explosive or propellant which could
cause serious personal injury.
Never leave the kit unattended while
in use.
Do not keep the compressor
operating for more than 10 minutes.
This could cause loss of vehicle
control or personal injury.
Note: You must only use the kit for the
vehicle with which it was supplied.
• Park your vehicle at the roadside so
that you do not obstruct the flow of
traffic and so that you are able to use
the kit without being in danger.
• Apply the parking brake, even if you
have parked on a level road, to make
sure that your vehicle will not move.
253
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
• Do not attempt to remove foreign
objects like nails or screws penetrating
the tire.
• Leave the engine running while the kit
is in use, but not if your vehicle is in an
enclosed or poorly ventilated area (for
example inside a building). In these
circumstances, switch the compressor
on with the engine switched off.
• You must replace the sealant bottle
with a new one before the expiry date
(see top of bottle).
• Inform all other users of your vehicle
that the tire has been temporarily
sealed with the kit. Make them aware
of the special driving conditions that
must be observed.
Inflating the Tire
WARNINGS
Check the sidewall of the tire prior to
inflation. If there are any cracks,
bumps or similar damage, do not
attempt to inflate the tire. This could cause
personal injury.
Do not stand directly beside the tire
while the compressor is operating.
This could cause personal injury if
the tire bursts.
Watch the sidewall of the tire. If any
cracks, bumps or similar damage
appears, switch the compressor off
and let the air out by means of the pressure
relief valve F. Do not continue driving with
this tire. This could cause loss of vehicle
control.
The sealant contains natural rubber
latex. Avoid contact with skin and
clothing. If this happens, rinse the
affected areas immediately with plenty of
water and consult a physician.
WARNINGS
If the tire inflation pressure does not
reach 1.8 bar (26 psi) within 10
minutes, the tire may have suffered
excessive damage, making a temporary
repair impossible. In this case, do not
continue driving with this tire. This could
cause loss of vehicle control.
Screwing the bottle onto the bottle
holder will pierce the seal of the
bottle. Do not unscrew the bottle
from the holder as the sealant will escape,
which could cause serious personal injury.
254
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Sealant bottleA
Bottle lidB
Orange capC
Compressor switchD
Power plug with cableE
Pressure relief valveF
Protective capG
HoseH
Bottle holderI
LabelJ
Pressure gaugeK
1. Peel off the label J showing the
maximum permissible speed of
50 mph (80 km/h) from the casing and
attach it to the instrument panel in the
driver’s field of view. Make sure the
label does not obscure anything
important.
2. Take the hose H and the power plug
with cable E out of the kit.
3. Unscrew the orange cap C and the
bottle lid B.
4. Screw the sealant bottle A clockwise
into the bottle holder I fully tight.
5. Remove the valve cap from the
damaged tire.
6. Detach the protective cap G from the
hose H and screw the hose H firmly
onto the valve of the damaged tire.
7. Make sure that the compressor switch
D is in position 0 and the pressure relief
valve F is closed.
8. Insert the power plug E into the cigar
lighter socket or auxiliary power point.
See Cigar Lighter (page 116). See
Auxiliary Power Points (page 116).
9. Start the engine.
10. Move the compressor switch D to
position 1.
11. Inflate the tire for no longer than 10
minutes to an inflation pressure of
minimum 1.8 bar (26 psi) and a
maximum of 3.5 bar (51 psi). Move
the compressor switch D to position
0 and check the current tire pressure
with pressure gauge K.
Note: When pumping in the sealant through
the tire valve, the pressure may rise up to
6 bar (87 psi) but will drop again after about
30 seconds.
255
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Note: After you have switched the
compressor off, you may hear air escaping
from the damaged tire. This is normal and
can be ignored provided that the specified
minimum tire pressure has been reached.
12. Remove the power plug E from the
cigar lighter socket or auxiliary power
point.
13. Quickly unscrew the hose H from the
tire valve and replace the protective
cap G. Fasten the valve cap again.
Note: Some residual sealant fluid may drip
or spray out of hose H while you are
disconnecting it. This is normal.
14. Leave the sealant bottle A in the
bottle holder I.
15. Make sure the kit, the bottle lid and
the orange cap are stored safely, but
still easily accessible in your vehicle.
The kit will be required again when
you check the tire pressure.
16. Immediately drive approximately
two miles (three kilometers) so that
the sealant can seal the damaged
area.
WARNING
If you experience heavy vibrations,
unsteady steering behavior or noises
while driving, reduce your speed
gradually and stop your vehicle as soon as
it is safe to do so. Recheck the tire and its
pressure. If the tire pressure is less than
1.3 bar (19 psi) or if there are any cracks,
bumps or similar damage visible, do not
continue driving with this tire. This could
cause loss of vehicle control.
Checking the Tire Pressure
WARNING
Before driving, make sure the tire is
adjusted to the recommended
inflation pressure. See Tire
Pressures (page 269). Monitor the tire
pressure until the sealed tire is replaced.
1. Stop your vehicle after driving
approximately two miles (three
kilometers). Check, and where
necessary, adjust the pressure of the
damaged tire.
2. Attach the kit and read the tire pressure
from the pressure gauge K.
3. If the pressure of the sealant-filled tire
is 1.3 bar (19 psi) or more, adjust it to
the specified pressure. See Tire
Pressures (page 269).
4. Follow the inflation procedure once
again to top up the tire.
5. Check the tire pressure again from the
pressure gauge K. If the tire pressure is
too high, deflate the tire to the
specified pressure using the pressure
relief valve F.
6. Once you have inflated the tire to its
correct tire pressure, move the
compressor switch D to position 0,
remove the power plug E from the
socket, unscrew the hose H, fasten the
valve cap and replace the protective
cap G.
7. Leave the sealant bottle A in the bottle
holder I and store the kit away safely
in its original location.
8. Drive to the nearest tire specialist to
get the damaged tire replaced. Before
the tire is removed from the rim, inform
your tire dealer that the tire contains
sealant. You must renew the sealant
bottle A and hose H as soon as
possible once used.
256
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Note: Remember that this kit only provides
temporary mobility. Regulations concerning
tire repair after usage of the kit may differ
from country to country. You should consult
a tire specialist for advice.
Empty sealant bottles can be disposed of
together with normal household waste.
Return remains of sealant to an authorized
dealer or dispose of it in compliance with
local waste disposal regulations.
TIRE CARE
Front wheel drive vehicles (front tires on
the left side of the diagram).
Non-directional tires
Directional tires
To make sure the front and rear tires of
your vehicle wear evenly and last longer,
we recommend that you swap the tires
from front to rear and vice versa at regular
intervals between 3,000 mi (5,000 km)
and 6,000 mi (10,000 km).
WARNING
Do not scrub the sidewalls of the
tires when you are parking.
If you have to mount a curb, do so slowly
and approach it with the wheels at
right-angles to the curb.
Examine the tires regularly for cuts, foreign
objects and uneven wear of the tread.
Uneven wear could mean that the wheel
alignment is outside specification.
Check the tire pressures (including the
spare) when cold, every two weeks.
USING WINTER TIRES
If winter tires are used you must inflate
them to the same tire pressures as those
listed in the tire pressure table. See Tire
Pressures (page 269).
USING SNOW CHAINS
WARNINGS
Do not exceed 30 mph (50 km/h).
Do not use snow chains on snow-free
roads.
Only fit snow chains to specified
tires. See Tire Pressures (page 269).
If your vehicle has wheel trims,
remove them before fitting snow
chains.
257
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Note: The anti-lock braking system will
continue to operate normally.
The tires on your vehicle may have
all-weather treads to provide traction in
rain and snow. However, in some climates
you may need to use snow chains.
Your vehicle may not be compatible with snow chain or cable usage with the
factory-fitted wheels and tires. Only certain chains or snow cables have been
approved by Ford as safe for use on your vehicle with the following wheel and tire
combination(s):
Chain SizeLoad IndexRim WidthTire Size
12mm94R6.5205/55R16
10mm93/976.5215/55R16
NONE93/977215/55R16
NONE95R7215/50R17
NONE95R8235/40R18
Not all S-class snow chains meet these
restrictions. Chains of this size restriction
will include a tensioning device. The chains
should be mounted in pairs on the front
tires only. If you need to use chains, it is
recommended that steel wheels (of the
same size and specification) be used, as
chains may chip aluminum wheels.
Vehicles with Stability Control
When stability control is on, your vehicle
may exhibit some unusual driving
characteristics. To reduce this, switch
traction control off. See Using Stability
Control (page 143).
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM
WARNING
The tire pressure monitoring system
is not a substitute for manually
checking tire pressures. You should
periodically check tire pressures using a
pressure gauge. Failure to correctly
maintain tire pressures could increase the
risk of tire failure, loss of control, vehicle
rollover and personal injury.
You must check the tire pressures
(including the spare tire where applicable)
every two weeks when the tires are cold.
You must inflate the tires to the correct
pressure.
258
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
See Wheels and Tires (page 253). The tire
pressures are also on the tire inflation
pressure label (located on the edge of
driver door or the B-Pillar).
As a driver assistance feature, your vehicle
has a tire pressure monitoring system. A
warning lamp will illuminate when one or
more of the tires are significantly
under-inflated. If the low tire pressure
warning lamp illuminates, you should stop
your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so,
check the tires and inflate them to the
correct pressure.
Driving on under-inflated tires can:
• Cause them to overheat.
• Lead to tire failure.
• Reduce fuel efficiency.
• Reduce tire life.
• Affect vehicle handling or stopping
ability.
The system is not a substitute for correct
tire maintenance.
You must maintain the correct tire
pressures, even if low tire pressure has not
illuminated the warning lamp.
The tire pressure monitoring system has a
system malfunction indicator to warn you
when the system is not operating correctly.
The malfunction indicator and low tire
pressure warning lamp have a combined
function. When the system detects a
malfunction, the warning lamp will flash
for approximately one minute and then
remain illuminated. This sequence will
occur every time you switch the ignition on
while the malfunction remains. The system
has detected a fault that requires service.
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be able
to detect or signal low tire pressures. A
malfunction may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of a
replacement tire or wheel that prevents
the system from functioning correctly.
Always check the tire pressure monitoring
system malfunction warning after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on
your vehicle. Make sure the replacement
tires or wheels allow the system to
continue to function correctly. See When
the Temporary Spare Tire is Installed
in this section.
How Temperature Affects the Tire
Pressures
Under normal driving conditions tire
pressures may increase by up to 4 psi
(0.3 bar) from a cold start situation.
If the vehicle is stationary overnight and
the temperature significantly lower than
the daytime temperature, tire pressures
may decrease by up to 3 psi (0.2 bar) when
there is a drop in the ambient temperature
of 31°F (17°C) or more. The system detects
this pressure decrease as being
significantly below the correct inflation
pressure and the warning lamp illuminates.
Changing Tires With a Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
You should always have tires serviced by
an authorized dealer.
259
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Note: Each road wheel and tire is fitted with
a tire pressure sensor located inside the
wheel and tire assembly cavity. The pressure
sensor attaches to the valve stem. The tire
covers the pressure sensor and it is not
visible unless the tire is removed. Take care
when changing the tire to avoid damaging
the sensor.
Understanding the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System
The system measures the pressure in the
four road tires and sends the tire pressure
readings to your vehicle.
The system detects this lower pressure as
being significantly below the correct
inflation pressure and the warning lamp
illuminates. You must inflate the tires to
the correct pressure.
When the Temporary Spare Tire is
Installed
If you need to replace a road wheel and
tire with the temporary spare wheel, the
system will continue to identify a defect.
This is to remind you to repair the damaged
road wheel and tire and refit the repaired
road wheel and tire assembly to your
vehicle. To restore the correct operation
of the system, you must have the repaired
road wheel and tire assembly refitted to
your vehicle.
When You Believe the System is Not
Operating Correctly
The main function of the system is to warn
you when the tire pressures are low. It can
also warn you in the event the system is
no longer capable of operating correctly.
See the following chart for information
concerning the system:
When Inflating the Tires
When inflating the tires the system may
not respond immediately to the air added
to the tires.
260
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
System Warning Lamps
ActionDescriptionWarning lamp
1. Make sure tires are at the correct
pressure. See Wheels and Tires
(page 253). The tire pressures are also
on the tire inflation pressure label
(located on the edge of driver door
or the B-Pillar).
2. After inflating the tires to the correct
pressure you must carry out the tire
pressure monitoring system reset
procedure. See Tire Pressure
Monitoring System Reset
Procedure in this chapter.
Tire(s) under-inflatedSolid warning lamp
Repair the damaged road wheel and tire
and refit the repaired road wheel and tire
assembly to your vehicle to restore the
correct operation of the system.
Spare tire in use
If the tires are correctly inflated and the
spare tire is not in use but the light
remains on, the system has detected a
fault that requires service.
Tire pressure monitoring
system malfunction
Repair the damaged road wheel and tire
and refit the repaired road wheel and tire
assembly to your vehicle to restore the
correct operation of the system.
Spare tire in useSolid warning lamp
initially followed by
a flashing warning
lamp
If the tires are correctly inflated and the
spare tire is not in use but the light
remains on, the system has detected a
fault that requires service.
Tire pressure monitoring
system malfunction
If the Warning Lamp is On:
1. Check each tire to verify that none are
flat.
2. If one or more tires are flat, repair as
necessary.
3. Check the tire pressures and inflate all
the tires to the correct pressure.
4. Carry out the tire pressure monitoring
system reset procedure.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Reset Procedure
Overview
You must carry out the system reset
procedure after each tire replacement or
adjustment of the tire pressures.
261
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
To maintain your vehicle load carrying
capability, your vehicle requires different
tire pressures in the front tires compared
to the rear tires.
The system illuminates the warning lamp
at different pressures for the front and rear
tires.
The tires need to be periodically rotated
to provide consistent performance and
maximum tire life, the system needs to
know when the tires have been rotated to
determine which set of tires are on the
front and rear axles. With this information,
the system can detect and correctly warn
of low tire pressures.
Carrying Out the System Reset
Procedure
1. Check the tire pressures and inflate all
the tires to the correct pressure.
2. Use the information display controls
on the steering wheel or instrument
panel. See Information Displays
(page 80).
To reset the tire pressure monitoring system, scroll to:
Description and ActionMessage
Press the OK button.Settings
Press the OK button.Driver assist
Press and hold the OK button until confirmation appears.
Alternatively, if your vehicle has a tire pressure monitoring
system reset button, press and hold the button until
confirmation appears.
Tire Monitor
CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL
Locking Lug Nuts
You can obtain a replacement locking lug
nut key and replacement locking lug nuts
from your dealer using the reference
number certificate.
Vehicles With a Spare Wheel
WARNINGS
When stowing a wheel in the spare
wheel well, to avoid the risk of injury,
do not hold the wheel by the hole in
the center.
WARNINGS
Drive the shortest possible distances.
Do not fit more than one spare wheel
on your vehicle at any one time.
Do not carry out any tire repairs on a
spare wheel.
Do not drive through an automatic
car wash.
If you are unsure what type of spare
wheel you have do not exceed
50 mph (80 km/h).
262
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
WARNINGS
On vehicles with a 2.0L EcoBoost
SCTi (MI4) engine, do not switch
stability control off or select sport
mode if you have fitted a temporary spare
wheel to your vehicle.
Only fit snow chains to specified
tires. See Using Snow Chains (page
257).
If the spare wheel is exactly the same type
and size as the other fitted road wheels,
you can replace the existing road wheel
with the spare wheel and continue to drive
in the normal manner.
If the spare wheel is different to the other
road wheels, it will carry a yellow label with
the appropriate speed limit.
Note: Your vehicle may exhibit some
unusual driving characteristics.
Refer to the following information before
changing the road wheel.
Note: The ground clearance of your vehicle
may be reduced. Take care when parking
next to a curb.
The spare wheel, vehicle jack, towing eye,
lug nut tool and wheel trim remover are
located in the luggage compartment
underneath the floor covering.
Note: The spare wheel, vehicle jack, towing
eye, lug nut tool and wheel trim remover are
located in the luggage compartment side
panel on Wagon variants.
1. Turn the spare wheel securing nut
counterclockwise and remove it.
Remove the wheel from the spare
wheel well.
263
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
2. Turn the vehicle jack securing bolt
counterclockwise and remove it.
3. Turn the vehicle jack screw
counterclockwise to remove the vehicle
jack handle and lug nut tool from the
vehicle jack.
4. Unfold the vehicle jack handle and the
hexagonal end into the correct position
prior to use. Use the hexagonal end to
operate the vehicle jack screw and to
remove the lug nuts.
Note: Use the hook at the hexagonal end
to remove the wheel trim.
Vehicles Without a Spare Wheel
Vehicles without a spare wheel are fitted
with a temporary mobility kit. See
Temporary Mobility Kit (page 253).
Vehicle Jack
WARNINGS
The vehicle jack supplied with your
vehicle should only be used when
changing a wheel in emergency
situations.
264
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
WARNINGS
Before using the vehicle jack, check
that it is not damaged or deformed
and that the thread is lubricated and
free from foreign matter.
Never place anything between the
vehicle jack and the ground, or
between the vehicle jack and the
vehicle.
You must use a vehicle jack with a
minimum lifting capacity of 1.5
tonnes and a lifting plate with a
minimum diameter of 3 in (80 mm).
It is recommended to use a workshop type
hydraulic jack for changing between
summer and winter tires.
Jacking and Lifting Points
WARNING
Use only the specified jacking points.
If you use other positions, you may
damage the body, steering,
suspension, engine, braking system or the
fuel lines.
Emergency use onlyA
MaintenanceB
265
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Small arrow-shaped marks on the sills A
show the location of the jacking points.
Place the hexagonal end of the vehicle jack
handle and lug nut tool onto the vehicle
jack. Turn the jack handle clockwise to
raise your vehicle.
Refer to vehicle jack manufacturer's
instructions.
Assembling the Wheel Brace
WARNING
The screw-in towing eye has a
left-hand thread. Turn it
counterclockwise to install it. Make
sure that the towing eye is fully tightened.
Type A
Insert the screw-in towing eye into the
wheel brace.
Type B
See Vehicles With a Spare Wheel earlier
in this section.
266
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Removing the Wheel Trim (If Equipped)
Note: Make sure that you pull the wheel
trim remover at right angles to the trim.
Type A
1. Insert the wheel trim remover.
2. Remove the wheel trim.
Type B
1. Use the hook on the vehicle jack handle
and lug nut tool to remove the wheel
trim.
Removing a Road Wheel
WARNINGS
Park your vehicle in such a position
that neither the traffic nor you are
hindered or endangered.
Set up a warning triangle.
Make sure that the vehicle is on firm,
level ground with the wheels pointing
straight ahead.
WARNINGS
Switch off the ignition and apply the
parking brake.
If your vehicle has a manual
transmission, select first or reverse
gear. If it has an automatic
transmission, select park (P).
Have the passengers leave the
vehicle.
Secure the diagonally opposite
wheel with an appropriate block or
wheel chock.
Make sure that the arrows on
directional tires point in the direction
of rotation when the vehicle is
moving forward. If you have to fit a spare
wheel with the arrows pointing in the
opposite direction, have the tire refitted in
the correct direction by a properly trained
technician.
Do not work underneath the vehicle
when it is supported only by a jack.
Make sure that the jack is vertical to
the jacking point and the base is flat
on the ground.
Note: Do not lay alloy wheels face down
on the ground, this will damage the paint.
Note: The spare wheel is located under the
floor cover in the luggage compartment.
1. Install the locking lug nut key.
267
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
2. Slacken the lug nuts.
3. Jack up the vehicle until the tire is clear
of the ground.
4. Remove the lug nuts and the wheel.
Installing a Road Wheel
WARNINGS
Use only approved wheel and tire
sizes. Using other sizes could
damage the vehicle and will make
the National Type Approval invalid. See
Using Snow Chains (page 257).
Do not fit run flat tires on vehicles
that were not originally fitted with
them. Please contact an authorized
dealer for more details regarding
compatibility.
WARNING
Do not install alloy wheels using lug
nuts designed for use with steel
wheels.
Note: The lug nuts of alloy wheels and
spoked steel wheels can also be used for
the steel spare wheel for a short time
(maximum two weeks).
Note: Make sure the wheel and hub contact
surfaces are free from foreign matter.
Note: Make sure that the cones on the lug
nuts are against the wheel.
1. Install the wheel.
2. Install the lug nuts finger tight.
3. Install the locking lug nut key.
4. Partially tighten the lug nuts in the
sequence shown.
5. Lower the vehicle and remove the jack.
6. Fully tighten the lug nuts in the
sequence shown. See Using Snow
Chains (page 257).
7. Install the wheel trim using the ball of
your hand.
WARNING
Have the lug nuts checked for
tightness and the tire pressure
checked as soon as possible.
268
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Stowing the Flat Tire
Vehicles without 3rd Row Seating
1. Put the jack and lug wrench away.
Make sure the jack is fastened so it
does not rattle when you drive.
2. Unblock the wheels.
3. Stow the flat tire on the floor in the
cargo area. Secure with the flat tire
retainer strap by following the next
steps.
4. Locate the cargo tie-down near the
seatback. Push the loop of the retainer
strap through the tie-down. Thread the
non-loop end through the loop
5. Weave the retainer strap through the
wheel openings.
6. Locate the front cargo tie-down at the
opposite corner of the cargo area to
the tie-down used in Step 4. Thread
the retainer strap through the tie-down
and pull tight.
7. Secure by tying a 2-half hitch knot.
Vehicles with 3rd Row Seating
The below procedure is to be used when
there are no passengers in the 3rd row
seat. If there are passengers present in the
3rd row seat, the flat tire cannot be stored
inside the vehicle.
1. Put the jack and lug wrench away.
Make sure the jack is fastened so it
does not rattle when you drive.
2. Unblock the wheels.
3. Secure the flat tire with a strap onto
the 3rd row seats.
TIRE PRESSURES
Check all tire pressures when they are cold,
at least once every two weeks.
CMAX COMPACT
269
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Continuous Speeds up to 100 mph (160 km/h) without towing
Full loadNormal load
EngineTire size
RearFrontRearFront
41 psi
(280 kPa)
36 psi
(250 kPa)
30 psi
(210 kPa)
33 psi
(230 kPa)
1.5L Petrol
ECO 105PS
205/55R16
1
41 psi
(280 kPa)
36 psi
(250 kPa)
30 psi
(210 kPa)
33 psi
(230 kPa)
Diesel
Engines
41 psi
(280 kPa)
36 psi
(250 kPa)
30 psi
(210 kPa)
30 psi
(210 kPa)
Petrol
Engines
41 psi
(280 kPa)
36 psi
(250 kPa)
30 psi
(210 kPa)
33 psi
(230 kPa)
Diesel
Engines
215/55R16
2
41 psi
(280 kPa)
36 psi
(250 kPa)
30 psi
(210 kPa)
30 psi
(210 kPa)
Petrol
Engines
41 psi
(280 kPa)
36 psi
(250 kPa)
30 psi
(210 kPa)
30 psi
(210 kPa)
Petrol
Engines
215/50R17
41 psi
(280 kPa)
36 psi
(250 kPa)
30 psi
(210 kPa)
33 psi
(230 kPa)
1.5L Diesel
41 psi
(280 kPa)
36 psi
(250 kPa)
30 psi
(210 kPa)
33 psi
(230 kPa)
1.6L Diesel
41 psi
(280 kPa)
36 psi
(250 kPa)
30 psi
(210 kPa)
35 psi
(240 kPa)
2.0L Diesel
42 psi
(290 kPa)
38 psi
(260 kPa)
30 psi
(210 kPa)
30 psi
(210 kPa)
Petrol
Engines
235/40R18
42 psi
(290 kPa)
38 psi
(260 kPa)
30 psi
(210 kPa)
30 psi
(210 kPa)
1.5L Diesel
42 psi
(290 kPa)
38 psi
(260 kPa)
30 psi
(210 kPa)
30 psi
(210 kPa)
1.6L Diesel
42 psi
(290 kPa)
38 psi
(260 kPa)
30 psi
(210 kPa)
35 psi
(240 kPa)
2.0L Diesel
60 psi
(420 kPa)
60 psi
(420 kPa)
60 psi
(420 kPa)
60 psi
(420 kPa)
AnyT125/80R16
1
Up to 12mm snow chains with steel and
alloy wheels.
2
Up to 10mm snow chains with steel and
alloy wheels.
270
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Only fit snow chains to specified tires. See Using Snow Chains (page 257).
Continuous Speeds in excess of 100 mph (160 km/h) or under Trailer Tow
conditions up to 62 mph (100 km/h)
Full loadNormal load
EngineTire size
RearFrontRearFront
41 psi
(280 kPa)
36 psi
(250 kPa)
30 psi
(210 kPa)
33 psi
(230 kPa)
1.5L Petrol
ECO 105PS
205/55R16
41 psi
(280 kPa)
36 psi
(250 kPa)
30 psi
(210 kPa)
33 psi
(230 kPa)
Diesel
Engines
41 psi
(280 kPa)
36 psi
(250 kPa)
30 psi
(210 kPa)
30 psi
(210 kPa)
Petrol
Engines
41 psi
(280 kPa)
38 psi
(260 kPa)
30 psi
(210 kPa)
33 psi
(230 kPa)
Diesel
Engines
215/55R16
41 psi
(280 kPa)
38 psi
(260 kPa)
30 psi
(210 kPa)
32 psi
(220 kPa)
Petrol
Engines
41 psi
(280 kPa)
39 psi
(270 kPa)
30 psi
(210 kPa)
32 psi
(220 kPa)
Petrol
Engines
215/50R17
41 psi
(280 kPa)
39 psi
(270 kPa)
30 psi
(210 kPa)
33 psi
(230 kPa)
1.5L Diesel
41 psi
(280 kPa)
39 psi
(270 kPa)
30 psi
(210 kPa)
33 psi
(230 kPa)
1.6L Diesel
41 psi
(280 kPa)
39 psi
(270 kPa)
30 psi
(210 kPa)
36 psi
(250 kPa)
2.0L Diesel
42 psi
(290 kPa)
39 psi
(270 kPa)
30 psi
(210 kPa)
32 psi
(220 kPa)
Petrol
Engines
235/40R18
42 psi
(290 kPa)
39 psi
(270 kPa)
30 psi
(210 kPa)
30 psi
(210 kPa)
1.5L Diesel
42 psi
(290 kPa)
39 psi
(270 kPa)
30 psi
(210 kPa)
30 psi
(210 kPa)
1.6L Diesel
42 psi
(290 kPa)
39 psi
(270 kPa)
30 psi
(210 kPa)
36 psi
(250 kPa)
2.0L Diesel
60 psi
(420 kPa)
60 psi
(420 kPa)
60 psi
(420 kPa)
60 psi
(420 kPa)
AnyT125/80R16
CMAX GRAND
271
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Continuous Speeds up to 100 mph (160 km/h) without towing
Full loadNormal load
EngineTire size
RearFrontRearFront
41 psi
(280 kPa)
36 psi
(250 kPa)
33 psi
(230 kPa)
30 psi
(210 kPa)
Petrol
Engines
205/55R16
1
42 psi
(290 kPa)
38 psi
(260 kPa)
33 psi
(230 kPa)
33 psi
(230 kPa)
Diesel
Engines
215/55R16
2
42 psi
(290 kPa)
38 psi
(260 kPa)
33 psi
(230 kPa)
30 psi
(210 kPa)
Petrol
Engines
42 psi
(290 kPa)
38 psi
(260 kPa)
33 psi
(230 kPa)
33 psi
(230 kPa)
1.5L Diesel
215/50R17
42 psi
(290 kPa)
38 psi
(260 kPa)
33 psi
(230 kPa)
33 psi
(230 kPa)
1.6L Diesel
42 psi
(290 kPa)
38 psi
(260 kPa)
33 psi
(230 kPa)
35 psi
(240 kPa)
2.0L Diesel
42 psi
(290 kPa)
38 psi
(260 kPa)
33 psi
(230 kPa)
30 psi
(210 kPa)
Petrol
Engines
42 psi
(290 kPa)
38 psi
(260 kPa)
30 psi
(210 kPa)
32 psi
(220 kPa)
1.5L Diesel
235/40R18
42 psi
(290 kPa)
38 psi
(260 kPa)
30 psi
(210 kPa)
32 psi
(220 kPa)
1.6L Diesel
42 psi
(290 kPa)
38 psi
(260 kPa)
30 psi
(210 kPa)
35 psi
(240 kPa)
2.0L Diesel
42 psi
(290 kPa)
38 psi
(260 kPa)
30 psi
(210 kPa)
30 psi
(210 kPa)
Petrol
Engines
60 psi
(420 kPa)
60 psi
(420 kPa)
60 psi
(420 kPa)
60 psi
(420 kPa)
AnyT125/80R16
1
Up to 12mm snow chains with steel and
alloy wheels.
2
Up to 10mm snow chains with steel and
alloy wheels.
Only fit snow chains to specified tires. See
Using Snow Chains (page 257).
272
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Continuous Speeds in excess of 100 mph (160 km/h) or under Trailer Tow
conditions up to 62 mph (100 km/h)
Full loadNormal load
EngineTire size
RearFrontRearFront
44 psi
(300 kPa)
38 psi
(260 kPa)
33 psi
(230 kPa)
32 psi
(220 kPa)
Petrol
Engines
205/55R16
46 psi
(320 kPa)
39 psi
(270 kPa)
33 psi
(230 kPa)
35 psi
(240 kPa)
Diesel
Engines
215/55R16
46 psi
(320 kPa)
39 psi
(270 kPa)
33 psi
(230 kPa)
33 psi
(230 kPa)
Petrol
Engines
46 psi
(320 kPa)
39 psi
(270 kPa)
33 psi
(230 kPa)
33 psi
(230 kPa)
1.5L Diesel
215/50R17
46 psi
(320 kPa)
39 psi
(270 kPa)
33 psi
(230 kPa)
33 psi
(230 kPa)
1.6L Diesel
46 psi
(320 kPa)
39 psi
(270 kPa)
33 psi
(230 kPa)
36 psi
(250 kPa)
2.0L Diesel
46 psi
(320 kPa)
39 psi
(270 kPa)
33 psi
(230 kPa)
33 psi
(230 kPa)
Petrol
Engines
46 psi
(320 kPa)
39 psi
(270 kPa)
30 psi
(210 kPa)
32 psi
(220 kPa)
1.5L Diesel
235/40R18
46 psi
(320 kPa)
39 psi
(270 kPa)
30 psi
(210 kPa)
32 psi
(220 kPa)
1.6L Diesel
46 psi
(320 kPa)
39 psi
(270 kPa)
30 psi
(210 kPa)
36 psi
(250 kPa)
2.0L Diesel
46 psi
(320 kPa)
39 psi
(270 kPa)
30 psi
(210 kPa)
33 psi
(230 kPa)
Petrol
Engines
60 psi
(420 kPa)
60 psi
(420 kPa)
60 psi
(420 kPa)
60 psi
(420 kPa)
AnyT125/80R16
273
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
LUG NUTS
WARNING
When a wheel is installed, always
remove any corrosion, dirt or foreign
materials present on the mounting
surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the
wheel hub, brake drum or brake disc that
contacts the wheel. Make sure that any
fasteners that attach the rotor to the hub
are secured so they do not interfere with
the mounting surfaces of the wheel.
Installing wheels without correct
metal-to-metal contact at the wheel
mounting surfaces can cause the wheel
nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off
while the vehicle is in motion, resulting in
loss of control.
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified
torque within 100 mi (160 km) after any
wheel disturbance (such as tire rotation,
changing a flat tire, wheel removal).
Wheel lug nut
torque*
Bolt size
100 lb.ft (135 Nm)M12 x 1.5
*Torque specifications are for nut and bolt
threads free of dirt and rust. Use only Ford
recommended replacement fasteners.
Wheel pilot boreA
Inspect the wheel pilot bore and mounting
surface prior to installation. Remove any
visible corrosion or loose particles.
274
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
VEHICLE DIMENSIONS
in (mm)Description
172.4 (4,380)Overall length MIN
173.1 (4,396)Overall length MAX
81.4 (2,067)Overall width including exterior mirrors MIN
82.1 (2,086)Overall width including exterior mirrors MAX
73.1 (1,858)Overall width with mirrors folded MIN
75.6 (1,920)Overall width with mirrors folded MAX
104.3 (2,648)Wheelbase
60.8 (1,544)Front track MIN
61.4 (1,559)Front track MAX
61.2 (1,554)Rear track MIN
61.8 (1,569)Rear track MAX
275
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
TOWBAR DIMENSIONS
276
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
in (mm)Dimension DescriptionItem
3.3858 (86 mm)Bumper to center of tow ball.A
0.1969 (5 mm)Attachment point to center of tow ball.B
36.4173 (925 mm)Wheel center to center of tow ball.C
20.3937 (518 mm)Center of tow ball to side member.D
40.7874 (1,036 mm)Distance between side members.E
16.7717 (426 mm)Center of tow ball to center of first attachment point.F
28.5827 (726 mm)Center of tow ball to center of second attachment point.G
Maximum Permissible Trailer Vertical
Weight
lb (kg)
198.4 (90)
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION PLATE
Model.A
Variant.B
Engine designation.C
Engine power and emission level.D
277
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Vehicle identification number.E
Gross vehicle weight.F
Gross train weight.G
Maximum front axle weight.H
Maximum rear axle weight.I
The vehicle identification plate is within
the right-hand door aperture.
Note: The vehicle identification plate may
vary to that shown.
Note: Information on the vehicle
identification plate is dependent upon
market requirements.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER
The vehicle identification number is
stamped into the floor panel on the
right-hand side, beside the front seat. It is
also shown on the left-hand side of the
instrument panel.
278
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 1.0L ECOBOOST™
Capacities
CapacityItem
0.9 gal (4.1 L)Engine lubrication system - including the oil filter
0.9 gal (4 L)Engine lubrication system - excluding the oil filter
0.3 gal (1.3 L)Engine cooling system
12.1 gal (55 L)Fuel tank
1.0 gal (4.5 L)Windshield and rear window washer system - including
headlamp washer
Engine Oil Adding Capacities
QuantityEngine
0.2 gal (1 L)All
Specifications
Note: Use fluids which meet the
specifications or requirements defined. Use
of other fluids may lead to damage which
is not covered by your vehicle's warranty.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C948-BEngine Oil - 5W-20
WSS-M97B44-DAntifreeze Super Plus Premium
4U7J-19544-xxxx
WSS-M6C65-A2Brake Fluid DOT 4 LV High Performance
BU7J-M6C65-xxxx
WSS-M2C200-D2Transmission Oil - 75W FE
7U7J-M2C200-BA/CA
WSS-M2C204-A2Hydraulic Fluid DP-PS
5U7J-M2C204-AB
WSS-M14P19-AScreen Wash
2U7J-M8B16-AA/CA/DA, 5U7J-19C544-AA,
3U7J-19523-GA
279
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
The engine has been designed to be used
with Castrol and Ford Engine Oil, which
gives a fuel economy benefit while
maintaining the durability of the engine.
Adding oil: If you are unable to find an oil
that meets the specification defined by
WSS-M2C948-B, you must use SAE
5W-30 that meets the specification
defined by ACEA A5/B5.
Note: Do not use more than 0.2 gal (1 L) of
the alternative engine oil between
scheduled service intervals.
Using oils other than the one specified can
result in longer engine cranking periods,
reduced engine performance, reduced fuel
economy and increased emission levels.
We recommend Castrol and Ford engine
oils and lubricants.
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 1.5L ECOBOOST™
Capacities
CapacityItem
0.89 gal (4.05 L)Engine lubrication system - including the oil filter
0.82 gal (3.75 L)Engine lubrication system - excluding the oil filter
1.3 gal (5.8 L)Engine cooling system
12.1 gal (55 L)Fuel tank
1.0 gal (4.5 L)Windshield and rear window washer system - including
headlamp washer
Engine Oil Adding Capacities
QuantityEngine
0.2 gal (0.75 L)All
Specifications
Note: Use fluids which meet the
specifications or requirements defined. Use
of other fluids may lead to damage which
is not covered by your vehicle's warranty.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C948-BEngine Oil - 5W-20
280
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
WSS-M97B44-DAntifreeze Super Plus Premium
4U7J-19544-xxxx
WSS-M6C65-A2Brake Fluid DOT 4 LV High Performance
BU7J-M6C65-xxxx
WSS-M2C200-D2Transmission Oil - 75W FE
7U7J-M2C200-BA/CA
WSS-M2C204-A2Hydraulic Fluid DP-PS
5U7J-M2C204-AB
WSS-M14P19-AScreen Wash
2U7J-M8B16-AA/CA/DA, 5U7J-19C544-AA,
3U7J-19523-GA
The engine has been designed to be used
with Castrol and Ford Engine Oil, which
gives a fuel economy benefit while
maintaining the durability of the engine.
Adding oil: If you are unable to find an oil
that meets the specification defined by
WSS-M2C948-B, you must use SAE
5W-20 that meets the specification
defined by ACEA C2.
Note: Do not use more than 0.2 gal (1 L) of
the alternative engine oil between
scheduled service intervals.
Using oils other than the one specified can
result in longer engine cranking periods,
reduced engine performance, reduced fuel
economy and increased emission levels.
We recommend Castrol and Ford engine
oils and lubricants.
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 1.6L DURATEC-16V TI-VCT
(SIGMA)/1.6L FLEX FUEL
Capacities
CapacityItem
0.9 gal (4.1 L)Engine lubrication system - including the oil filter
0.8 gal (3.75 L)Engine lubrication system - excluding the oil filter
1.3 gal (5.7 L)Engine cooling system
12.1 gal (55 L)Fuel tank
1.0 gal (4.5 L)Windshield and rear window washer system - including
headlamp washer
281
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Engine Oil Adding Capacities
QuantityEngine
0.2 gal (0.8 L)All
Specifications
Note: Use fluids which meet the
specifications or requirements defined. Use
of other fluids may lead to damage which
is not covered by your vehicle's warranty.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C948-BEngine Oil - 5W-20
WSS-M2C913-CEngine Oil - 5W-30
WSS-M97B44-DAntifreeze Super Plus Premium
4U7J-19544-xxxx
WSS-M6C65-A2Brake Fluid DOT 4 LV High Performance
BU7J-M6C65-xxxx
WSS-M2C200-D2Transmission Oil - 75W FE
7U7J-M2C200-BA/CA
WSS-M2C204-A2Hydraulic Fluid DP-PS
5U7J-M2C204-AB
WSS-M14P19-AScreen Wash
2U7J-M8B16-AA/CA/DA, 5U7J-19C544-AA,
3U7J-19523-GA
The engine has been designed to be used
with Castrol and Ford Engine Oil, which
gives a fuel economy benefit while
maintaining the durability of the engine.
Adding oil: If you are unable to find an oil
that meets the specification defined by
WSS-M2C948-B or WSS-M2C913-C, you
must use SAE 5W-20 or SAE 5W-30 that
meets the specification defined by ACEA
A5/B5.
Note: Do not use more than 0.2 gal (1 L) of
the alternative engine oil between
scheduled service intervals.
Using oils other than the one specified can
result in longer engine cranking periods,
reduced engine performance, reduced fuel
economy and increased emission levels.
We recommend Castrol and Ford engine
oils and lubricants.
282
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 1.5L DURATORQ-TDCI
DIESEL
Capacities
CapacityItem
0.85 gal (3.85 L)Engine lubrication system - including the oil filter
0.76 gal (3.45 L)Engine lubrication system - excluding the oil filter
1.6 gal (7.3 L)Engine cooling system
12.1 gal (55 L)Fuel tank
1.0 gal (4.5 L)Windshield and rear window washer system - including
headlamp washer
Engine Oil Adding Capacities
QuantityEngine
0.4 gal (1.6 L)All
Specifications
Note: Use fluids which meet the
specifications or requirements defined. Use
of other fluids may lead to damage which
is not covered by your vehicle's warranty.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C950-AEngine Oil - 0W-30
WSS-M97B44-DAntifreeze Super Plus Premium
4U7J-19544-xxxx
WSS-M6C65-A2Brake Fluid DOT 4 LV High Performance
BU7J-M6C65-xxxx
WSS-M2C200-D2Transmission Oil - 75W FE
7U7J-M2C200-BA/CA
WSS-M2C204-A2Hydraulic Fluid DP-PS
5U7J-M2C204-AB
WSS-M14P19-AScreen Wash
2U7J-M8B16-AA/CA/DA, 5U7J-19C544-AA,
3U7J-19523-GA
283
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
The engine has been designed to be used
with Castrol and Ford Engine Oil, which
gives a fuel economy benefit while
maintaining the durability of the engine.
Adding oil: If you are unable to find an oil
that meets the specification defined by
WSS-M2C950-A, you must use SAE
0W-30 that meets the specification
defined by ACEA C2. Alternatively you can
use SAE 5W-30 that meets the
specification defined by WSS-M2C913-D
or ACEA A5/B5.
Note: Do not use more than 0.2 gal (1 L) of
the alternative engine oil between
scheduled service intervals.
Using oils other than the specified
WSS-M2C950-A SAE 0W-30 can result
in longer engine cranking periods, reduced
engine performance, reduced fuel
economy and increased emission levels.
We recommend Castrol and Ford engine
oils and lubricants.
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 1.6L DURATORQ-TDCI (DV)
DIESEL
Capacities
CapacityItem
0.8 gal (3.85 L)Engine lubrication system - including the oil filter
0.8 gal (3.45 L)Engine lubrication system - excluding the oil filter
1.6 gal (7.3 L)Engine cooling system
12.1 gal (55 L)Fuel tank
1.0 gal (4.5 L)Windshield and rear window washer system - including
headlamp washer
Engine Oil Adding Capacities
QuantityEngine
0.4 gal (1.6 L)All
284
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Specifications
Note: Use fluids which meet the
specifications or requirements defined. Use
of other fluids may lead to damage which
is not covered by your vehicle's warranty.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C913-CEngine Oil - 5W-30
WSS-M97B44-DAntifreeze Super Plus Premium
4U7J-19544-xxxx
WSS-M6C65-A2Brake Fluid DOT 4 LV High Performance
BU7J-M6C65-xxxx
WSS-M2C200-D2Transmission Oil - 75W FE
7U7J-M2C200-BA/CA
WSS-M2C204-A2Hydraulic Fluid DP-PS
5U7J-M2C204-AB
WSS-M14P19-AScreen Wash
2U7J-M8B16-AA/CA/DA, 5U7J-19C544-AA,
3U7J-19523-GA
The engine has been designed to be used
with Castrol and Ford Engine Oil, which
gives a fuel economy benefit while
maintaining the durability of the engine.
Adding oil: If you are unable to find an oil
that meets the specification defined by
WSS-M2C913-C, you must use SAE 5W-30
that meets the specification defined by
ACEA A5/B5.
Note: Do not use more than 0.2 gal (1 L) of
the alternative engine oil between
scheduled service intervals.
Using oils other than the one specified can
result in longer engine cranking periods,
reduced engine performance, reduced fuel
economy and increased emission levels.
We recommend Castrol and Ford engine
oils and lubricants.
285
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 2.0L DURATORQ-TDCI
(DW) DIESEL
Capacities
CapacityItem
1.3 gal (6.1 L)Engine lubrication system - including the oil filter
1.2 gal (5.65 L)Engine lubrication system - excluding the oil filter
1.4 gal (6.5 L)Engine cooling system
12.1 gal (55 L)Fuel tank
1.0 gal (4.5 L)Windshield and rear window washer system - including
headlamp washer
Engine Oil Adding Capacities
QuantityEngine
0.4 gal (1.6 L)All
Specifications
Note: Use fluids which meet the
specifications or requirements defined. Use
of other fluids may lead to damage which
is not covered by your vehicle's warranty.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C950-AEngine Oil - 0W-30
WSS-M97B44-DAntifreeze Super Plus Premium
4U7J-19544-xxxx
WSS-M6C65-A2Brake Fluid DOT 4 LV High Performance
BU7J-M6C65-xxxx
WSS-M2C200-D2Transmission Oil - 75W FE
7U7J-M2C200-BA/CA
WSS-M2C204-A2Hydraulic Fluid DP-PS
5U7J-M2C204-AB
WSS-M14P19-AScreen Wash
2U7J-M8B16-AA/CA/DA, 5U7J-19C544-AA,
3U7J-19523-GA
286
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
The engine has been designed to be used
with Castrol and Ford Engine Oil, which
gives a fuel economy benefit while
maintaining the durability of the engine.
Adding oil: If you are unable to find an oil
that meets the specification defined by
WSS-M2C950-A, you must use SAE
0W-30 that meets the specification
defined by ACEA A5/B5.
Note: Do not use more than 0.2 gal (1 L) of
the alternative engine oil between
scheduled service intervals.
Using oils other than the one specified can
result in longer engine cranking periods,
reduced engine performance, reduced fuel
economy and increased emission levels.
We recommend Castrol and Ford engine
oils and lubricants.
FUEL CONSUMPTION FIGURES
Please refer to the regional Ford website.
287
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
GENERAL INFORMATION
Radio Frequencies and Reception Factors
Radio reception factors
The further you travel away from an FM station, the weaker
the signal and the weaker the reception.
Distance and Strength
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with the reception.
Terrain
When you pass near a radio transmission tower, a stronger
signal can override a weaker signal and can cause interfer-
ence in the audio system.
Station overload
CD and CD Player Information
Note: CD units play commercially pressed
4.75-inch (12 centimeter) audio compact
discs only. Due to technical incompatibility,
certain recordable and re-recordable
compact discs may not function correctly
when used in Ford CD players.
Note: Do not insert CDs with homemade
paper (adhesive) labels into the CD player
as the label may peel and cause the CD to
become jammed. You should use a
permanent felt tip marker rather than
adhesive labels on your homemade CDs.
Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please
contact an authorized dealer for further
information.
Note: Do not use any irregularly shaped
discs or discs with a scratch protection film
attached.
Always handle discs by their edges only.
Clean the disc with an approved CD
cleaner only. Wipe it from the center of the
disc toward the edge. Do not clean in a
circular motion.
Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or
heat sources for extended periods.
MP3 and WMA Track and Folder
Structure
Audio systems capable of recognizing and
playing MP3 and WMA individual tracks
and folder structures work as follows:
• There are two different modes for MP3
and WMA disc playback: MP3 and
WMA track mode (system default) and
MP3 and WMA folder mode.
• MP3 and WMA track mode ignores any
folder structure on the MP3 and WMA
disc. The player numbers each MP3
and WMA track on the disc (noted by
the MP3 or WMA file extension) from
T001 to a maximum of T255. The
maximum number of playable MP3 and
WMA files may be less depending on
the structure of the CD and exact
model of radio present.
288
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Audio System
• MP3 and WMA folder mode represents
a folder structure consisting of one
level of folders. The CD player numbers
all MP3 and WMA tracks on the disc
(noted by the MP3 or WMA file
extension) and all folders containing
MP3 and WMA files, from F001 (folder)
T001 (track) to F253 T255.
• Creating discs with only one level of
folders helps with navigation through
the disc files.
If you are burning your own MP3 and WMA
discs, it is important to understand how
the system reads the structures you create.
While various files may be present, (files
with extensions other than MP3 and
WMA), only files with the MP3 and WMA
extension are played; other files are
ignored by the system. This enables you to
use the same MP3 and WMA disc for a
variety of tasks on your work computer,
home computer and your in-vehicle
system.
In track mode, the system displays and
plays the structure as if it were only one
level deep (all MP3 and WMA files play,
regardless of being in a specific folder). In
folder mode, the system only plays the
MP3 and WMA files in the current folder.
289
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Audio System
AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH: AM/FM/CD
On, Off and Volume: Press the button to switch the audio system on or off.
Turn the dial to adjust the volume.
A
CD slot: Where you insert a CD.B
Eject: Press the button to eject a CD.C
Numeric keypad: Press the button to recall a previously stored station. To
store a favorite station press and hold until the sound returns.
D
TUNE and Play or Pause: In radio mode, turn to search the frequency band
in individual increments. Press to mute a station. In media mode, turn to select
a new track. Press to either play or pause a track.
E
290
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Audio System
MENU: Press this button to access different audio system features. See Menu
Structure later in this section.
F
INFO: Press this button to access more information depending upon the source
selected.
G
SOUND: Press the button to adjust the sound settings for bass, treble, middle,
balance and fade. Use the up and down arrow buttons to select the required
setting. Use the left and right arrow buttons to make the necessary adjustment.
Press OK to set or press MENU to exit. Sound settings can be set for each audio
source independently.
H
Arrow up and down: Press a button to scroll through on-screen choices.I
Seek and Fast Forward: In radio mode, select a frequency band and press
this button. The system stops at the first station up the band. Press and hold
the button to move quickly, then release to stop at the next available station.
In CD mode, press this button to select the next track. Press and hold the button
to move quickly forward through the current track.
J
Arrow left and right: Press a button to scroll through on-screen choices.K
Seek and Reverse: In radio mode, select a frequency band and press this
button. The system stops at the first station down the band. Press and hold
the button to move quickly, then release to stop at the previous available station.
In CD mode, press this button to select the previous track. Press and hold the
button to move quickly backward through the current track.
L
TA: Press the button to turn traffic announcements on or off and cancels
announcements during an active announcement.
M
RADIO: Press this button to listen to the radio or change radio bands, for
example AM, FM or DAB.
N
MEDIA: Press this button to listen to media or to switch between media sources,
for example CD, USB or Line In.
O
OK: Press the button to confirm on-screen selections.P
291
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Audio System
AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH: SYNC
On, off and VOL: Press this button to turn the system off and on. Turn it to
adjust the volume.
A
Function buttons 1 - 4: Select different functions of the audio system
depending on which mode you are in (for example Radio mode or CD mode).
B
CD slot: Insert a CD.C
Eject: Press this button to eject a CD.D
Number block: In radio mode, store and recall your favorite radio stations. To
store a radio station, tune to the station, then press and hold a preset button
until sound returns. In CD mode, select a track. In phone mode, enter a phone
number.
E
292
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Audio System
TUNE and Play or Pause: In radio mode, turn to search the frequency band
in individual increments or jump to the next station of the station list. Press to
mute a station. In media mode, turn to select a new track. Press to either play
or pause a track.
F
CLOCK: Press to display the clock.G
MENU: Press this button to access different audio system features. See Menu
Structure later in this section.
H
PHONE: Press this button to access the phone features of the SYNC system.
See SYNC™ (page 300).
I
SOUND: Press this button to access settings for Treble, Midrange, Bass, Fade
and Balance. Use the up and down arrow buttons to select the various settings.
When you make your selection, press the left and right arrow buttons to change
the settings. Press OK to set or press MENU to exit. Sound settings can be set
for each audio source independently.
J
Arrow up and down: Press to navigate within menus.K
Seek and Fast Forward: In radio mode, select a frequency band and press
this button. The system stops at the first station up the band. Press and hold
the button to move quickly, then release to stop at the next available station.
In CD mode, press this button to select the next track. Press and hold the button
to move quickly forward through the current track.
L
Arrow left and right: Press to navigate within menus.M
Seek and Reverse: In radio mode, select a frequency band and press this
button. The system stops at the first station down the band. Press and hold
the button to move quickly, then release to stop at the previous available station.
In CD mode, press this button to select the previous track. Press and hold the
button to move quickly backward through the current track.
N
TA: Press this button to turn traffic announcements on and off.O
RADIO: Press this button multiple times to select a radio band. Press and hold
to select the autostore function. Press to return to the main screen of the active
radio band.
P
MEDIA: Press this button multiple times to switch between CD and a
SYNC-Media device. Press this button to return to the main screen of the active
device.
Q
OK: Press this button to confirm menu selections.R
293
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Audio System
AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:
SYNC 2
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Note: The system controls most of the
audio features. See SYNC™ 2 (page 340).
Note: The CD slot is located above the
touchscreen.
- TUNE: Press this button to manually search through the radio frequency band.A
TUNE +: Press this button to manually search through the radio frequency
band.
B
On, off and VOL: Press this button to switch the audio system off and on. Turn
to adjust the volume.
C
SOURCE: Press this button to access different audio modes, for example AM,
FM and CD.
D
294
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Audio System
Eject: Press this button to eject a CD.E
DISP: Press this button to switch the display screen off.F
SOUND: Press this button to adjust the sound settings for Bass, Treble, Balance,
Fade and Occupancy.
G
Seek and Fast Forward: In radio mode, select a frequency band and press
this button. The system stops at the first station up the band. Press and hold
the button to move quickly, then release to stop at the next available station.
In CD mode, press this button to select the next track. Press and hold the button
to move quickly forward through the current track.
H
Seek and Reverse: In radio mode, select a frequency band and press this
button. The system stops at the first station down the band. Press and hold
the button to move quickly, then release to stop at the previous available station.
In CD mode, press this button to select the previous track. Press and hold the
button to move quickly backward through the current track.
I
DIGITAL RADIO
The system allows you to listen to DAB
(Digital Audio Broadcast) radio stations.
Note: Coverage differs from region to region
and will influence the quality of reception.
It is broadcast nationwide, regionally and
locally.
The following formats are supported:
• DAB
• DAB+
• DMB-Audio (Digital Multimedia
Broadcasting).
Ensembles
Ensembles contain a group of radio
stations. Each ensemble can consist of
several different radio stations.
The radio station name displays below the
ensemble name.
Note: When you tune from one ensemble
to another, it can take a while until the
system synchronizes to the next ensemble.
The system mutes during synchronization.
Selecting Radio Band
DAB1 and DAB2 operate in the same way.
You can store up to 10 different presets on
each band.
1. Press the RADIO button.
2. Press the left arrow button to display
the available wavebands.
3. Select DAB1 or DAB2.
Note: When you reach the first or last radio
station within an ensemble, further tuning
will skip to the next ensemble. There may
be a delay during this change and the audio
will briefly mute.
Radio Station Tuning Controls
Seek Tuning (Alternative 1)
Press a seek button. The system will stop
at the first radio station it finds in the
direction chosen.
Radio Station List (Alternative 2)
This feature displays all the available radio
stations in a list.
1. Press function button 1.
295
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Audio System
2. Press the left or right arrow buttons to
change ensembles. Press the up or
down arrow button to navigate to your
required radio station.
3. Press OK to confirm your selection.
Note: The display will only show radio
stations in the current ensemble.
Manual Tuning (Alternative 3)
1. Press function button 2.
2. Press the left or right arrow button to
tune up or down the waveband in small
increments. Press and hold to move
through the waveband quickly.
3. Press OK to confirm your selection.
Note: Seek tuning is also possible within
this screen.
Radio Station Preset Buttons
This feature allows you to store up to 10
favorite radio stations from any ensemble
in each preset bank.
1. Select a radio station.
2. Press and hold one of the preset
buttons. A progress bar and message
will appear. When the progress bar
completes the radio station has been
stored. The system will mute
momentarily as confirmation.
Once stored press a preset button at any
time to select a favourite radio station.
Note: Radio stations stored on the preset
buttons may not always be available if you
have left the coverage area. The system will
mute when this happens.
Radio Text
You can display extra information. For
example; artist name. To switch this option
on, select a radio station and press
function button 3.
Note: Extra information may not always be
available.
Service Linking
If you leave the coverage area of a DAB
radio station the system will automatically
switch to the corresponding FM radio
station.
You can switch this feature on and off
using the information display. See General
Information (page 80).
Note: If a DAB radio station has no
corresponding FM radio station, the audio
will mute when attempting to switch.
Note: The system will display the FM
symbol when DAB and FM radio stations
link.
DIGITAL RADIO - VEHICLES
WITH: SYNC 2
The system allows you to listen to DAB
(Digital Audio Broadcast) radio stations.
Note: Coverage differs from region to region
and will influence the quality of reception.
It is broadcast nationwide, regionally and
locally.
The following formats are supported:
• DAB
• DAB+
• DMB-Audio (Digital Multimedia
Broadcasting).
Ensembles
Ensembles contain a group of radio
stations. Each ensemble can consist of
several different radio stations.
The radio station name displays below the
ensemble name.
Note: When you tune from one ensemble
to another, it can take a while until the
system synchronizes to the next ensemble.
The system mutes during synchronization.
296
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Audio System
Selecting Radio Band
DAB 1, DAB 2 and DAB 3 operate in the
same way. You can store up to 10 different
presets on each band.
1. Press the RADIO button.
2. Press the left arrow button to display
the available wavebands.
3. Select DAB 1, DAB 2 or DAB 3.
Note: When you reach the first or last radio
station within an ensemble, further tuning
will skip to the next ensemble. There may
be a delay during this change and the audio
will briefly mute.
Radio Station Tuning Controls
Seek Tuning (Alternative 1)
Press a seek button. The system will stop
at the first radio station it finds in the
direction chosen
Radio Station List (Alternative 2)
This feature displays all the available radio
stations in a list.
1. Press the browse button.
2. Press the previous or next arrow
buttons to change ensembles.
3. Navigate through the list and select the
required station by pressing the touch
screen button for the station.
4. Press OK to confirm your selection.
Note: The display will only show radio
stations in the current ensemble.
Manual Tuning (Alternative 3)
Press the tune plus or tune minus buttons.
Radio Station Preset Buttons
This feature allows you to store up to 6
favorite radio stations from any ensemble
in each preset bank.
1. Select a radio station.
2. Press and hold one of the preset
buttons. A progress bar and message
will appear. When the progress bar
completes the radio station has been
stored. The system will mute
momentarily as confirmation.
Once stored press a preset button at any
time to select a favorite radio station.
Note: Radio stations stored on the preset
buttons may not always be available if you
have left the coverage area. The system will
mute when this happens.
Radio Text
You can display extra information. For
example; artist name. To switch this option
on, select the radio text on feature in the
options menu.
Note: Extra information may not always be
available.
Service Linking
If you leave the coverage area of a DAB
radio station the system will automatically
switch to the corresponding FM radio
station.
You can switch this feature on and off.
Note: If a DAB radio station has no
corresponding FM radio station, the audio
will mute when attempting to switch.
Note: The system will display the FM
symbol when DAB and FM radio stations
link.
AUDIO INPUT JACK
WARNINGS
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
297
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Audio System
WARNINGS
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Do not connect or adjust the settings
on your portable music player when
your vehicle is moving.
Do not place your portable music
player on the instrument panel. Hard
objects may become projectiles in a
crash or sudden stop, which may increase
the risk of serious injury.
The audio input jack allows you to connect
and play music from a portable music
player through your vehicle speakers. You
can use any portable music player
designed for use with headphones.
Your audio extension cable must have
male 1/8th-inch (3.5 millimeter)
connectors at each end.
1. Switch off the radio and portable music
player. Apply the parking brake and
shift the transmission into park (P) for
automatic transmission or first gear for
manual transmission. Switch the
ignition off.
2. Plug the extension cable from the
portable music player into the audio
input jack.
3. Switch the radio on. Select either a
tuned FM station or a CD.
4. Adjust the volume as desired.
5. Switch your portable music player on
and adjust its volume to half its
maximum level.
6. Press AUX or MEDIA until LINE or
LINE IN appears in the display. You
should hear music from your device
even if it is low.
7. Adjust the volume on your portable
music player until it reaches the volume
level of the FM station or CD. Do this
by switching back and forth between
the AUX and FM or CD controls.
USB PORT
The USB port is located in the center
console.
The USB port allows you to plug in media
playing devices, memory sticks and charge
devices (if supported). See SYNC™ (page
300).
MEDIA HUB
The media hub is located in front of the
gearshift.
298
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Audio System
Line inA
USB portsB
SD card slotC
See Entertainment (page 361).
AUDIO TROUBLESHOOTING
Description and ActionMessage
General error message for CD fault conditions. For
example cannot read the CD, data-CD inserted, etc.
Make sure the disc is loaded correctly. Clean and re-try,
or replace disc with known music disc. If the error
persists contact an authorized dealer.
Please check CD
General error message for a mechanism fault. The
system has detected a fault that requires service.
CD
Drive malfunction
General error message for the mechanism being too
hot. The unit will not work until it has cooled down. If
the error persists contact an authorized dealer.
CD
drive too hot
299
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Audio System
GENERAL INFORMATION
SYNC is an in-vehicle communications
system that works with your
Bluetooth-enabled cell phone and
portable media player.
This allows you to:
• Make and receive calls
• Access and play music from your
media player
• Use Emergency Assistance and
applications, via SYNC Applink
*
• Access phonebook contacts and music
using voice commands
• Stream music from your connected cell
phone
• Select pre-defined text messages (if
your device supports this)
• Use the advanced voice recognition
system
• Charge your USB device (if your device
supports this)
*
These features are not available in all
markets and may require activation.
Available AppLink enabled apps vary by
market.
Make sure that you review your device's
manual before using it with SYNC.
Support
For further support, see an authorized
dealer. For more information, visit the
regional Ford website.
300
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Safety Information
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
When using SYNC:
• Do not operate playing devices if the
power cords or cables are broken, split
or damaged. Carefully place cords and
cables where you cannot step on them
or they do not interfere with the
operation of pedals, seats,
compartments or safe driving abilities.
• Do not leave playing devices in your
vehicle during extreme conditions as it
could cause them damage. Refer to
your device's manual for further
information.
• Do not attempt to service or repair the
system. See an authorized dealer.
Privacy Information
When a cell phone is connected to SYNC,
the system creates a profile that is linked
to that cell phone. The system creates the
profile to offer you more mobile features
and to operate more efficiently. Among
other things, this profile may contain data
about your phonebook, text messages
(read and unread) and call history. This
will include the history of calls when your
cell phone was not connected to the
system. If you connect a media player, the
system creates and retains an index of
supported media content. The system also
records a short development log of
approximately 10 minutes of all recent
system activity. The log profile and other
system data may be used to improve the
system and help diagnose any problems
that may occur.
The cell phone profile, media player index
and development log will remain in the
system unless deleted. They are generally
accessible in your vehicle only when you
connect your cell phone or media player.
If you no longer plan to use the system or
your vehicle, we recommend you complete
a master reset to erase all stored
information. See SYNC™ (page 300).
Special equipment is required to access
system data. Access to your vehicle's
SYNC module is also required. We will not
access the system data for any purpose
other than as described without consent.
Examples where system data can be
accessed are for a court order, where
required by law enforcement, other
government authorities or other third
parties acting with lawful authority. Other
parties may seek to access the information
independently of us. Further privacy
information is available. See SYNC™
Applications and Services (page 315).
USING VOICE RECOGNITION
This system helps you control many
features using voice commands. This
allows you to keep your hands on the
steering wheel and focus on what is in front
of you.
Helpful Hints
Make sure the interior of your vehicle is as
quiet as possible. Wind noise from open
windows and road vibrations may prevent
the system from correctly recognizing
spoken commands.
301
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Before giving a voice command, wait for
the system announcement to finish
followed by a single beep. Any command
spoken before this does not register with
the system.
Speak naturally, without long pauses
between words.
You can interrupt the system at any time
while it is speaking by pressing the voice
button. You can also cancel a voice session
at any time by pressing and holding the
voice button.
Initiating a Voice Session
Press the voice button located
on the steering wheel. A list of
available commands appears in
the display.
Global voice commands
This command ends the voice session. You
can also cancel a session by holding the
voice button for two or more seconds.
(cancel | stop | exit)
This command provides you with hints,
examples and instructions.
help
This command restarts the voice session
from the initial starting point.
main menu
System Interaction and Feedback
The system provides feedback through
audible tones, prompts, questions and
spoken confirmations depending on the
situation and your chosen level of
interaction. You can customize the voice
recognition system to provide more or less
instruction and feedback.
The default setting is to a higher level of
interaction in order to help you learn to use
the system. You can change these settings
at any time.
Adjusting the Interaction Level
Press the voice button. When
prompted:
DescriptionCommand
Provides access to change the interaction level.voice settings
Then any of the following:
DescriptionCommand
Provides less audible interaction and more tone prompts.interaction mode
advanced
Provides more detailed interaction and guidance.interaction mode novice
302
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Confirmation prompts are short questions
the system asks when it is not sure of your
request or when there is more than one
possible response to your request. For
example, the system may ask if the
command phone is correct.
Press the voice button. When prompted:
DescriptionCommand
Provides access to change the confirmation prompt setting.voice settings
Then any of the following:
DescriptionCommand
Makes a best guess from the command. You may still occa-
sionally be asked to confirm settings.
confirmation prompts off
Clarifies your voice command with a short question.confirmation prompts on
The system creates suggestion lists when
it has the same confidence level of several
options based on your voice commands.
When switched on, the system may
prompt you with as many as four
possibilities for clarification.
DescriptionCommand
Makes a best guess from the media suggestion list. The
system may occasionally ask you questions.
media candidate lists off
Clarifies your voice command for media suggestions.media candidate lists on
Makes a best guess from the cell phone suggestion list. The
system may occasionally ask you questions.
phone candidate lists off
Clarifies your voice command for cell phone suggestions.phone candidate lists on
Changing the Voice Settings
You can change the voice settings using
the information and entertainment display.
Press the MENU button.
303
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
You can then select the following:
MessageAction
SYNC-Settings
Enters menu for voice options.Voice settings
USING SYNC™ WITH YOUR
PHONE
Hands-free calling is one of the main
features of SYNC. While the system
supports a variety of features, many are
dependent on your cell phone's
functionality.
At a minimum, most cell phones with
Bluetooth wireless technology support the
following functions:
• Answering an incoming call.
• Ending a call.
• Using privacy mode.
• Dialing a number.
• Redialing.
• Call waiting notification.
• Caller ID.
Other features such as text messaging
using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook
download are cell phone dependent
features. To check your cell phone's
compatibility, refer to your device's manual
or visit the regional Ford website.
Pairing a Cell Phone For the First
Time
Wirelessly pairing your cell phone with the
system allows you to make and receive
hands-free calls.
Note: You must switch the ignition and
radio on.
Note: To scroll through the menus, press
the up or down arrows on your audio system.
1. Make sure the Bluetooth feature on
your cell phone is switched on before
starting the search. Refer to your
device's manual if necessary.
2. Press the PHONE button. When the
audio display indicates that no phones
are paired, select the option to add.
3. When a message to begin pairing
appears in the audio display, search for
SYNC on your cell phone to start the
pairing process.
4. Select SYNC on your cell phone.
5. Wait until the PIN appears on the
phone display. Compare the PIN on the
phone with the PIN shown in the audio
display and accept the request on the
phone and the vehicle display. The
display indicates when the pairing is
successful.
Note: In some cases the phone will request
to enter a PIN. Enter the six-digit PIN
provided by the system in the audio display.
The display indicates when the pairing is
successful.
Depending on your cell phone's capability
and your market, the system may prompt
you with questions such as setting the
current cell phone as the primary cell
phone (the cell phone the system
automatically tries to connect with first
when you switch the ignition on) or
downloading your phonebook.
304
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
The information display may
show your cell phone's battery
charge level and signal strength.
Using Voice Commands
Make sure to switch on your phone's
Bluetooth feature before starting the
search. See your device's manual if
necessary.
Press the voice button and when
prompted say:
Action and Descrip-
tion
Voice Command
Follow the instruc-
tions on the audio
display.
(pair ([Bluetooth]
device | phone |
Bluetooth [audio])
| add phone)
Words in square brackets [ ] are optional
and do not have to be spoken for the
system to understand the command.
Depending on your phone's capability and
your market, the system may prompt you
with questions, such as setting the current
phone as the primary phone (the phone
SYNC automatically tries to connect with
first upon vehicle start-up) and
downloading your phonebook.
Pairing Subsequent Cell Phones
Wirelessly pairing your cell phone with the
system allows you to make and receive
hands-free calls.
Note: You must switch the ignition and
radio on.
Note: To scroll through the menus, press
the up or down arrows on your audio system.
1. Make sure the Bluetooth feature on
your cell phone is switched on before
starting the search. Refer to your
device's manual if necessary.
2. Press the PHONE button.
3. Select the option for Bluetooth devices.
4. Press the OK button.
5. Select the option to add. This starts
the pairing process.
6. When a message to begin pairing
appears in the audio display, search for
SYNC on your device to start the
pairing process.
7. Select SYNC on your cell phone.
8. Wait until the PIN appears on the
phone display. Compare the PIN on the
phone with the PIN shown in the audio
display and accept the request on the
phone and the vehicle display. The
display indicates when the pairing is
successful.
Note: In some cases the phone will request
to enter a PIN. Enter the six-digit PIN
provided by the system in the audio display.
The display indicates when the pairing is
successful.
The system may prompt you with
questions such as setting the current cell
phone as the primary cell phone or
downloading your phonebook.
Cell Phone Voice Commands
Press the voice button and when
prompted say:
Voice Command
(phone | Blackberry | iPhone | Mobile)
Then say any of the following:
call (___)
call ___ at home
305
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Voice Command
call ___ ([at] work | [(in | at) [the]] office)
call ___ on (mobile | cell)
call ___ on other
1
dial [[a] number]
2
([go to] privacy [on] | transfer to
phone | handsfree off)
2
(hold call [on] | (put | place) call on
hold)
2
join (call | calls)
2
mute [call] [on]
2
(mute [call] off | Unmute [call])
(turn ringer on | silent mode off)
Voice Command
(turn ringer off | silent mode [on])
3
[text] (messages | message)
Help
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it
could be the name of anything, such as a
group, artist or song. For example you
could say "Play artist The Beetles".
1
See Dial table below.
2
These commands are only valid while in
a phone call.
3
See the text message table below.
Dial Commands
Press the voice button and when prompted
say any of the following commands:
Action and DescriptionVoice Command
This will add a # symbol to the number or name.Pound
0 (zero) to 9 (nine)Number
This will add a * symbol to the number or name.Asterisk or Star
Deletes all entered digitsclear
Deletes the last set of entered digits.(delete | correct)
This will add a + symbol to the number or name.Plus
Note: To exit dial mode, press and hold the phone button or any button on the audio unit.
Phonebook Hints
To hear how the SYNC system speaks a
name browse phonebook, select a contact
and press:
Menu Item
Hear it
Making a Call
Press the voice button and when prompted
say either:
306
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Action and Description
Voice
Command
call
(someone
| [[a]
name])
SYNC prompts you to say
the numbers that you wish
to dial. After you say the
numbers, the system
confirms it.
dial [[a]
number]
When the system has stated the
number, you say any of the following:
Action and Description
Voice
Command
This initiates the call.(dial |
send)
To erase the last spoken
digit.
(delete |
correct)
To erase all spoken digits.clear
To end the call, press the end call button
on the steering wheel or select the end call
option in the audio display and press OK.
Receiving a Call
When receiving a call, you can:
• Answer the call by pressing the accept
call button on the steering wheel or by
selecting the accept call option in the
audio display and pressing the OK
button.
• Reject the call by pressing the reject
call button on the steering wheel or by
selecting the reject call option in the
audio display and pressing the OK
button.
• Ignore the call by doing nothing.
Cell Phone Options During an
Active Call
During an active call, you have extra menu
features which become available, for
example putting a call on hold.
To access this menu, choose one of the
options available at the bottom of the
audio display or select the option for more.
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Turn your vehicle's microphone off. To turn the microphone
on, select the option again.
Mic. off
Switch a call from an active hands-free environment to your
cell phone for a more private conversation. When selected,
the audio display will indicate the call is private.
Privacy
Put an active call on hold. When selected, the audio display
will indicate the call is on hold.
Hold
Enter numbers using the audio system numeric keypad, for
example numbers for passwords.
Dial a number
307
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Join two separate calls. The system supports a maximum of
three callers on a multi-party or conference call.
Join calls
1. Select the option for more.
2. Access the desired contact through the system or use
voice commands to place the second call. Once actively
in the second call, select the option for more.
3. Scroll to the option to join calls and press the OK button.
Access your phonebook contacts.Phonebook
1. Select the option for more.
2. Scroll to the option for phonebook and press the OK
button.
3. Scroll through your phonebook contacts.
4. Press the OK button again when the desired selection
appears in the audio display.
5. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection.
Access your call history log.Call history
1. Select the option for more.
2. Scroll to the option until call history appears. Press the
OK button.
3. Scroll through your call history options (incoming,
outgoing or missed).
4. Press the OK button again when the desired selection
appears in the audio display.
5. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection.
Accessing Features Through the
Cell Phone Menu
You can access your call history,
phonebook, sent text messages as well as
access cell phone and system settings.
You can also access advanced features
such as emergency assistance.
The system attempts to automatically
re-download your phonebook and call
history each time your cell phone connects
to the system. You must turn on the auto
download feature if your cell phone
supports it.
Note: This is a cell phone dependent
feature.
1. Press the PHONE button to enter the
cell phone menu.
2. Select one of the options available.
308
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Dial a number using the audio system numeric keypad.Dial a number
Redial the last number called (if available). Press the OK
button to select.
Redial
Access your downloaded phonebook.Phonebook
1. Press the OK button to confirm and enter. You can use
the options at the bottom of the screen to quickly access
an alphabetical category. You can also use the letters on
the keypad to jump in the list.
2. Scroll through your phonebook contacts.
3. Press the OK button again when the desired selection
appears in the audio display.
4. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection.
Access any previously dialed, received or missed calls.Call history
1. Press the OK button to select.
2. Scroll to select either incoming calls, outgoing calls or
missed calls. Press the OK button to make your selection.
3. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection.
Select one of 10 speed dial entries. To set a speed dial entry,
go to the phonebook and press and hold one of the numbers
on the audio system numeric keypad.
Speed Dial
Send, download and delete text messages.Text messaging
Access the following option for Bluetooth device menu list-
ings:
BT Devices
Add
Delete
Conn.
Discon.
Master
View various settings and features on your cell phone.Phone settings
309
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Text Messaging
The system allows you to receive, send,
download and delete text messages. The
system can also read incoming text
messages to you so that you do not have
to take your eyes off the road.
Note: This is a cell phone dependent
feature.
Receiving a Text Message
Note: This is a phone-dependent feature.
Your phone must support downloading text
messages using Bluetooth to receive
incoming text messages.
Note: This is a speed-dependent feature
and is only available when your vehicle is
traveling at 3.1 mph (5 km/h) or less.
When a new message arrives, an audible
tone sounds and the audio display
indicates you have a new message.
To hear the message you can say:
Action and Descrip-
tion
Voice command
Select this option
to have the system
read the message
to you.
(listen to | read)
([text] message)
Using the screen you also have the following options:
Action and DescriptionMenu
Item
Select this option, or do nothing, and the message goes into your text message
inbox.
Ignore
Select the view option to open the text message. Once selected, you have
the ability to have the message read to you, to view other messages. For
additional options select:
View
If you select this option, use the arrow button to scroll through the
following options:
More...
Press the OK button to access, and then scroll
through a list of pre-defined messages to send.
Reply to
sender
Press the OK button to call the sender of the
message.
Call sender
Press the OK button to forward the message to
anyone in your phonebook or call history. You can
also choose to enter a number.
Forward
msg.
Sending, Downloading and Deleting
Your Text Messages
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Select the text messaging option, then
press the OK button.
Choose from the following:
310
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
When you select the option to send a text message, a list of
pre-defined messages appear in the audio display. Allows
you to send a new text message based on a pre-defined set
of 15 messages.
New
Allows you to read the full message and in addition provides
the option to have the message read out to you by the system.
To go to the next message select the more option. This allows
you to reply to the sender, call the sender or forward the
message.
View
Allows you to delete current text messages from the system
(not your cell phone). The audio display indicates when all
your text messages have been deleted.
Delete
Allows you to delete all messages or to manually trigger a
download of all unread messages from your cell phone.
More...
Sending a Text Message
1. Select the send option when the
desired selection is highlighted in the
audio display.
2. Select the confirmation option when
the contact appears and press the OK
button again to confirm when the
system asks if you would like to send
the message. Each text message is
sent with a pre-defined signature.
Note: You can send text messages two
ways. You can chose a contact from your
phonebook, call history or by entering a
phone number and selecting the text option
from the audio display. You can also reply
to a received message in the inbox.
Note: Only one recipient is allowed per text
message.
Accessing Your Cell Phone
Settings
These are cell phone dependent features.
Your cell phone settings allow you to
access and adjust features such as your
ringtone, text message notification, modify
your phonebook and set up automatic
download.
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Scroll until the phone settings option
appears, then press the OK button.
3. Scroll to select from the following
options:
311
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
If this option is checked, the system will use this cell phone
as the master when there is more than one cell phone paired
to the system. This option can be changed for all paired cell
phones (not only for the active one) using the Bluetooth
devices menu.
Set as master
See the cell phone name, provider name, cell phone number,
signal level and battery level. When done, press the left arrow
button to return to the cell phone status menu.
Phone status
Select which ringtone sounds during an incoming call (one
of the system's or your cell phone's). If your cell phone
supports in-band ringing, your cell phone's ringtone sounds
when you choose the cell phone ringtone option.
1. Press the OK button to select and scroll to hear each
ringtone.
2. Press the OK button to select.
Set ringtone
Have the option of hearing an audible tone to notify you when
a text message arrives. Press the OK button to turn the
audible tone on or off.
Text msg notify
Modify the contents of your phonebook, e.g. add, delete,
download. Press the OK button to select and scroll between
the options in the table below.
Phonebook pref.
To modify the phone book preferences,
choose from the following:
312
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Push the desired contacts on your cell phone. Refer to your
device's manual on how to push contacts. Press the OK
button to add more contacts from your phonebook.
Add contacts
When a message asking you to delete appears, select the
option to confirm. Press the OK button to delete the current
phonebook and call history. The system takes you back to
the menu for phone settings.
Delete
Press the OK button to select and download your phonebook
to the system.
Download now
When automatic download is switched on, any changes,
additions or deletions saved in the system since your last
download are deleted.
Auto-download
When automatic download is switched off, your phonebook
will not be downloaded when your cell phone connects to
the system.
Your phonebook, call history and text messages can only be
accessed when your paired cell phone is connected to the
system.
Check or uncheck this option to automatically download your
phonebook each time your cell phone connects to the system.
Downloading times are cell phone dependent and quantity
dependent.
Bluetooth Devices
This menu provides access to your
Bluetooth devices. Use the arrow buttons
to scroll through the menu options. It
allows you to add, connect and delete
devices and set a cell phone as primary.
Bluetooth Devices Menu Options
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Scroll until the Bluetooth device option
appears, then press the OK button.
3. Scroll to select from the following
options:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Pair additional cell phones to the system.Add
1. Select the option to add to start the pairing process.
2. When a message to begin pairing appears in the audio
display, search for SYNC on your cell phone. Refer to your
device's manual if necessary.
3. Select SYNC on your cell phone.
313
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
4. Wait until the PIN appears on the phone display. Compare
the PIN on the phone with the PIN shown in the audio
display and accept the request on the phones and the
vehicles display. The display indicates when the pairing
is successful.
*
5. When the option to set the cell phone as the primary cell
phone appears, select either yes or no.
6. Depending on the functionality of your cell phone, the
system may ask you extra questions (for example, if you
would like to download your phonebook). Select either
yes or no to confirm your response.
After deleting a cell phone from the list, the cell phone can
only be connected again by repeating the full pairing process.
Select the delete option and confirm when the system asks
to delete the selected device.
Delete
The system attempts to connect with the primary cell phone
every time you switch the ignition on. When a cell phone is
selected as primary, it appears first in the list and is marked
with an asterisk.
Master
Set a previously paired cell phone as your primary cell phone.
Select the master option to confirm the primary cell phone.
Connect a previously paired cell phone. You can only have
one cell phone connected at a time to use the cell phone
functionality. When another cell phone is connected, the
previous cell phone will be disconnected from the telephone
services. The system allows you to use different Bluetooth
devices for the cell phone functionality and the Bluetooth
audio music playback feature at the same time.
Conn.
Disconnects the selected cell phone. Select this option and
confirm when asked to. After disconnecting a cell phone, it
can be connected again without repeating the full pairing
process.
Discon.
*
In some cases the phone will request to enter a PIN. Enter the six-digit PIN provided by
the system in the audio display. The display indicates when the pairing is successful.
System Settings
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Select the SYNC settings option, then
press the OK button.
3. Scroll to select from the following
options:
314
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Check or uncheck this option to turn the Bluetooth interface
of the system on or off. Select this option then press the OK
button to change the option's status.
Bluetooth on
This selection does not erase your indexed information
(phonebook, call history, text messages and paired devices).
Set defaults
Select this option and confirm when prompted in the audio
display. Return to the factory default settings.
Completely erase all information stored on the system
(phonebook, call history, text messages and paired devices)
and return to the factory default settings.
Master reset
Select this option and confirm when prompted in the audio
display. The display indicates when complete and the system
takes you back to the previous menu.
Install applications or software updates you have down-
loaded.
Install on SYNC
Select this option and confirm when prompted in the audio
display. There must be a valid SYNC application or update
available on the USB thumb drive in order to finish an
installation successfully.
Display the system's version numbers as well as its serial
number.
System info
Press the OK button to select.
The voice settings submenu contains various options. See
Using Voice Recognition (page 301).
Voice settings
Browse the actual menu structure of the connected USB
device. Press the OK button and use the up or down arrows
to scroll through the folders and files. Use the left or right
arrows to enter and leave a folder. Media content can be
directly selected for playback from this menu.
Browse USB
SYNC™ APPLICATIONS AND
SERVICES
A list of available applications appears.
Each application may have its own specific
settings.
Press the MENU button to enter the
system menu.
315
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Description and ActionMessage
Scroll to this option, and then press OK.SYNC-Apps
SYNC Emergency Assistance
WARNINGS
For this feature to work, your cell
phone must have Bluetooth and be
compatible with the system.
Always place your cell phone in a
secure location inside your vehicle.
Failure to do so may cause serious
injury to someone or damage the cell
phone which could prevent this feature
from working correctly.
Unless the feature setting is switched
on prior to a crash, the system will
not attempt to place an emergency
call which could delay the response time,
potentially increasing the risk of serious
injury or death. Do not wait for the system
to make an emergency call if you can do it
yourself. Dial emergency services
immediately to avoid a delayed response
time. If you do not hear Emergency
Assistance within five seconds of the crash,
the system or cell phone may be damaged
or non-functional.
If a crash deploys an airbag or triggers the
fuel pump shut off, the system may
contact emergency services through a
paired and connected cell phone. For more
information about the system and
Emergency Assistance, visit the regional
Ford website.
Note: Before selecting this feature, you
must read the Emergency Assistance privacy
notice later in this section for important
information.
Note: When you switch this feature on or
off, that setting applies for all paired cell
phones. If you have turned this feature off
and a previously paired phone connects
when you switch on the ignition, either a
voice message plays, a display message or
icon is shown, or both.
Note: Every cell phone operates differently.
While this feature works with most cell
phones, some cell phones may experience
difficulties using this feature.
Note: Make sure you are familiar with the
information about airbag deployment. See
Supplementary Restraints System (page
27).
Switching Emergency Assistance
On and Off
Press the MENU button then select:
ActionMessage
Press OK.SYNC-Apps
Press OK. Select the option you require and press OK.Emerg. assist
316
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Display Options
If you switch on this feature, a confirmation
message appears in the display.
If you switch off this feature, a dialog will
appear in the display, which allows you to
set a voice reminder.
Off with voice reminder provides a display
and voice reminder when your cell phone
connects and your vehicle starts.
Off without voice reminder provides a
display reminder only without a voice
reminder when your cell phone connects.
To make sure that Emergency Assistance
works correctly:
• The system must have power and be
working correctly at the time of the
crash and during feature activation and
use.
• You must switch on the feature before
a crash.
• You must have a cell phone connected
to the system.
• In certain countries, it may be
necessary to have a valid and
registered SIM card with credit in order
to place and maintain an emergency
call.
• A connected cell phone must have the
ability to make and maintain an
outgoing call at the time of the crash.
• A connected cell phone must have
adequate network coverage, battery
power and signal strength.
• Your vehicle must have battery power.
Note: This feature only works in countries
or regions where SYNC Emergency
Assistance can call the local emergency
services. Visit the regional Ford website for
details.
In the Event of a Crash
Note: Not every crash deploys an airbag or
triggers the fuel pump shut off (which may
turn on Emergency Assistance). However,
if Emergency Assistance is triggered the
system tries to contact the emergency
services. If a connected cell phone sustains
damage or loses connection to the system,
it searches for and tries to connect to any
available previously paired cell phone. The
system attempts to make an emergency
call.
Before making a call:
• If you do not cancel the call and SYNC
makes a successful call, an
introductory message plays for the
emergency operator. After this
message, there is hands-free
communication between your vehicle's
occupants and the operator.
• The system provides a short window
of time (approximately 10 seconds) to
cancel the call. If you do not cancel the
call, the system attempts to make an
emergency call.
• The system plays a message letting
you know when it attempts to make an
emergency call. You can cancel the call
by selecting the relevant function
button or by pressing the end call
button on the steering wheel.
317
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
During a call:
• Emergency Assistance uses your
vehicle GPS or cellular network
information when available to
determine the most appropriate
language to use. It alerts the
emergency operator of the crash and
delivers the introductory message. This
may include your vehicle GPS
coordinates.
• The language the system uses to
interact with the occupants of your
vehicle may differ from the language
used to deliver information to the
emergency operator.
• After the delivery of the introductory
message the voice line opens so that
you can speak hands-free with the
emergency operator.
• When the line is connected, you must
be prepared to provide your name,
phone number and location
information immediately.
Note: While the system provides
information to the emergency operator, the
system plays a message letting you know
it is sending important information. It then
lets you know when the line is open to start
hands-free communication.
Note: During an Emergency Assistance call,
an emergency priority screen appears which
contains vehicle GPS coordinates when
available.
Note: It is possible that GPS location
information is not available at the time of
the crash; in this case, Emergency
Assistance will still attempt to place an
emergency call.
Note: It is possible that the emergency
services will not receive the GPS
coordinates; in this case, hands-free
communication with an emergency operator
is available.
Note: The emergency operator may also
receive information from the cellular
network such as cell phone number, cell
phone location and cell phone carrier name
independent from SYNC Emergency
Assistance.
Emergency Assistance may not work if:
• Your cell phone or Emergency
Assistance hardware sustains damage
in the crash.
• The vehicle battery or the system has
no power.
• A crash ejects your cell phone from
your vehicle.
• You do not have a valid and registered
SIM card with credit in your cell phone.
• You are in a country or region where
the SYNC Emergency Assistance
cannot place the call. Visit the regional
Ford website for details.
Important Information about the
Emergency Assistance Feature
Emergency Assistance does not currently
call emergency services in the following
markets: Albania, Belarus, Bosnia and
Herzegovina, Macedonia, Netherlands,
Ukraine, Moldova and Russia.
Visit the regional Ford website for the
latest details.
Emergency Assistance Privacy Notice
When you switch on Emergency
Assistance, it may disclose to emergency
services that your vehicle has been in a
crash involving the deployment of an
airbag or activation of the fuel pump shut
off. This feature has the capability to
disclose your location information to the
emergency operator or other details about
your vehicle or crash to provide the most
appropriate emergency services.
If you do not want to disclose this
information, do not switch on the feature.
318
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
SYNC AppLink
The system enables voice and manual
control of SYNC AppLink enabled
smartphone apps. Once an app is running
through AppLink, you can control main
features of the app through voice
commands and manual controls.
Note: You must pair and connect your
smartphone to SYNC to access AppLink.
Note: iPhone users need to connect the
phone to the USB port.
Note: Android users need to connect the
phone to SYNC using Bluetooth.
Note: For information on available apps,
supported smartphone devices and
troubleshooting tips please visit the Ford
website.
Note: Make sure you have an active account
for the app that you have downloaded.
Some apps will work automatically with no
setup. Other apps will want you to configure
your personal settings and personalize your
experience by creating stations or favorites.
We recommend you do this at home or
outside of your vehicle.
To Access Using the SYNC Menu
Scroll through the list of available
applications and press OK to select an
app. Once an app is running through SYNC,
press the right arrow button to access the
app menu. You can access various app
features from here, for example thumbs
up and thumbs down. Press the left arrow
button to exit the app menu.
Press the MENU button then select:
Description and ActionMessage
SYNC-Apps
Scroll to this option, and then press OK.Mobile Apps
Select this option if the app required is not listed.Find new Apps
Note: If a SYNC AppLink compatible app cannot be found, make sure the required app is
running on the mobile device.
To Access Using Voice Commands
Press the voice button and when prompted
say:
Description and ActionCommand
Say the name of the application after the tone. The applica-
tion will start. While an app is running through SYNC, you can
press the voice button and speak commands specific to the
app.
mobile (apps | applica-
tions)
The following voice commands are always
available:
319
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Description and ActionCommand
Use this command to hear a list of available voice commands.[main menu] help
The system will prompt you to say the name of the app to
start it.
mobile (apps | applica-
tions)
The system will list all of the currently available mobile apps.list [mobile] (apps |
applications)
The system will search your connected mobile device for
SYNC compatible apps.
find [new] [mobile]
(apps | applications)
Use this command followed by the name of the app.(quit | exit | close)
You can also say the name of any SYNC
compitable app to start it on SYNC. To see
a list of the available voice commands for
an app, say the name of an app followed
by help. For example you could say
"Spotify help".
Enabling and Disabling Push
Notifications
Some apps can send push notifications. A
push notification is an alert from an app
running in the background and is delivered
by voice, pop up or both. This may be
particularly useful for news or location
based apps.
Press the MENU button then select:
Description and ActionMessage
SYNC-Apps
Mobile Apps
SYNC-Settings
If push notifications are supported, this setting will be listed.
Select to enable or disable the feature as required.
All Apps
Enabling SYNC Mobile Apps
To use the system you must consent to
send and receive app authorization
information and updates, using the data
plan associated with the connected device.
Data is sent to Ford in the United States
through the connected device. The
information is encrypted and includes your
VIN, SYNC module number, anonymous
usage statistics and debugging
information. Updates may take place
automatically.
Note: You must enable mobile apps for
each connected device the first time you
select a mobile app using the system.
320
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Note: Standard data rates will apply. Ford
is not responsible for any additional charges
you may receive from your service provider,
when your vehicle sends or receives data
through the connected device. This includes
any additional charges incurred due to
driving in areas when roaming out of a home
network.
App Status
You can view the current status of an app
in the settings menu. There are three
possible statuses:
Description and ActionMessage
The system has detected a new app requiring authorization
or a general permissions update is required.
Update needed
No update is required.Up-to-date
The system is trying to receive an update.Updating...
Options in the settings menu:
Description and ActionMessage
If an update is required and you want to manually request
the update, for example when you are in a Wi-Fi hotspot.
Request Update
Select this option to disable automatic updates.Disable Updates
App Permissions
Permissions are divided by groups. You can
grant these group permissions individually.
You can change a permission group status
any time when not driving, by using the
settings menu.
When you launch an app using SYNC, the
system may ask you to grant certain
permissions, for example:
• To allow your vehicle to provide vehicle
information to the app including, but
not limited to: Fuel level, fuel
consumption, engine speed, battery
voltage, odometer, VIN, external
temperature, gear position, tire
pressure, ambient temperature, date
and time.
• To allow your vehicle to provide driving
characteristic information, including,
but not limited to: MyKey, seat belt
status, engine speeds, braking events,
brake pedal switch, acceleration,
accelerator pedal position, clutch pedal
switch, trip length, trip time, trip cost,
percent engine on time, and percent of
time at speed.
321
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
• To allow your vehicle to provide
location information, including: GPS
and speed.
• To allow the app to send push
notifications using the vehicle display
and voice capabilities while running in
a background state.
Note: You will only need to grant
permissions the first time you use an app
with SYNC.
Note: We are not responsible or liable for
any damages or loss of privacy relating to
usage of an app, or dissemination of any
vehicle data that you approve us to provide
to an app.
USING SYNC™ WITH YOUR
MEDIA PLAYER
You can access and play music from your
media player through your vehicle's
speaker system using the system's media
menu or voice commands. You can also
sort and play your music by specific
categories, for example artist or albums.
SYNC is capable of hosting nearly any
media player including: iPod, Zune, Plays
from device players, and most USB drives.
SYNC also supports audio formats, for
example MP3, WMA, WAV and ACC.
Confirm that the USB device has been
formatted correctly and has the following
specifications:
• USB 2.0.
• File format must be FAT16/32.
Note: NTFS file format is not supported.
The format of the audio files on the USB
device must be:
• MP3.
• Non DRM protected WMA.
• WAV.
• AAC.
Connecting Your Media Player to
the USB Port
Note: If your media player has a power
switch, make sure you switch on the device.
To Connect Using Voice Commands
1. Plug the device into your vehicle's USB
port.
2. Press the voice button and when
prompted say:
Action and DescriptionVoice Command
You can now play music by saying any of the appropriate
voice commands. Refer to the media voice commands.
(USB [stick] | iPod | MP3
[player])
You do not need to say words that appear within square brackets. For example, for where
(USB [stick] | iPOD | MP3 [player]) appears, you can say USB or USB stick.
To Connect Using the System Menu
1. Plug the device into your vehicle's USB
port.
2. Press the Media button (next to the
audio display) until an initializing
message appears in the display.
322
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Depending on how many media files are on your connected
device, an indexing message may appear in the display. When
indexing is complete, the screen returns to the playback menu.
Browse USB
Choose from the following:
Menu Item
Play all
Playlists
Songs
Artists
Albums
Genres
Browse USB
Reset USB
Exit
What's Playing?
At any time during playback, you can press
the voice button and ask the system what
is playing. The system reads the metadata
tags of the current track, if populated.
Media Voice Commands
Press the voice button and when
prompted say:
Action and DescriptionVoice Command
You can now play music by saying any of the appropriate
voice commands.
(USB [stick] | iPod | MP3
[player])
You can say any of the voice commands that appear within open and close brackets that
are separated by |. For example, where; (what's | what is) appears you say; what's or
what is.
You must say any of the voice commands that appear outside of open and close brackets.
For example, where; who plays this (what's | what is) playing, you must say; who plays
this (what's or what is) playing.
323
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Description and ActionVoice Command
Pauses device playback.pause
Resumes device playback.play
play [album] ___
Play all media on the device from the first
track to the last.
play all
play [artist] ___
play [genre] ___
play [playlist] ___
Plays the next track on the current media.next [track | title | song | file | podcast |
chapter | episode]
Plays the previous track on current media.previous [track | title | song | file |
podcast | chapter | episode]
Creates a play list of similar genre to the one
currently playing.
[play] (similar music | more like this)
play [song | track | title | file] ___
repeat off
Repeats the current track.repeat one [on]
Plays the current play list in a random order.
(Not all devices support this command.)
shuffle [all] [on]
shuffle off
At any time during playback, you can press
the voice button and ask the system what is
playing. The system reads the metadata tags
(if populated) of the current track.
((who's | who is) this | who plays this |
(what's | what is) playing [now] | (what
| which) (song | track | artist) is this |
(who's | who is) playing | (what's | what
is) this)
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it
could be the name of anything, such as a
group, artist or song. For example you
could say "Play artist The Beatles".
Examples of USB Commands
SYNC provides the user with many intuitive
ways to find and play a song using voice.
For example, if we have a song called
"Penny Lane" from the album "Magical
Mystery Tour" we can say the following to
play this song:
324
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
• Play song "Penny Lane".
• Play "Penny Lane".
If we wanted to play the entire album, we
can say:
• Play album "Magical Mystery Tour".
• Play "Magical Mystery Tour".
Bluetooth Audio
The system is also capable of playing
music from your cellular phone through
Bluetooth.
To switch the Bluetooth audio on, use the
MEDIA button (next to the audio display)
or Source button, or press the voice button
and when prompted say:
Voice Command
Bluetooth audio
Then any of the following:
Voice Command
pause
play
next [track | title | song | file | podcast |
chapter | episode]
previous [track | title | song | file | podcast
| chapter | episode]
Media Menu Features
The media menu allows you to select how
to play your music, for example by artist,
genre, shuffle or repeat, and to find similar
music or reset the index of your USB
devices.
Press AUX to select USB playback.
Description and ActionMessage
This will enter the media menu.Options
Then any of the following:
Description and ActionMessage
Choose to shuffle or repeat your music. Once you make your
choice, it remains on until you switch it off.
Shuffle
Choose to shuffle or repeat your music. Once you make your
choice, it remains on until you switch it off.
Repeat track
You can play similar types of music to the current playlist
from the USB port. The system uses the metadata informa-
tion of each track to compile a playlist. The system then
creates a new list of similar tracks and then begins playing.
Each track must have the metadata tags populated for this
feature. With certain playing devices, if your metadata tags
Similar music
325
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Description and ActionMessage
are not populated, the tracks will not be available in voice
recognition, the play menu or this option. However, if you
place these tracks onto your playing device in mass storage
device mode they are available in voice recognition, the play
menu or this option. The system places unknowns into any
unpopulated metadata tag.
Resets the USB index. After the new indexing is complete
you can choose what to play from the USB song library.
Reset USB
Accessing Your USB Song Library
1. Plug the device into your vehicle's USB
port.
2. Press AUX to select USB playback.
Description and ActionMessage
This menu allows you to select and play your media files by
artist, album, genre, playlist and track or even to browse what
is on your USB device.
Browse USB
If there are no media files to access, the
display indicates there is no media. If there
are media files, you have the following
options to scroll through and select:
Description and ActionMessage
Play all indexed media files from your playing device one at
a time in numerical order.
*
Play all
1. Press OK to select. The first track title appears in the
display.
Access your playlists from formats, ASX, M3U, WPL or MTP.
*
1. Press OK to select.
2. Scroll to select the desired playlist, and then press OK.
Playlists
Search for and play a specific indexed track.
*
1. Press OK to select.
2. Scroll to select the desired track, and then press OK.
Songs
326
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Description and ActionMessage
Sort all indexed media files by artist. Once selected, the
system lists and then plays all artists and tracks alphabetic-
ally.
*
1. Press OK to select.
2. Scroll to select the desired artist, and then press OK.
Artists
Sort all indexed media files by albums.
*
1. Press OK to select.
2. Scroll to select the desired albums, and then press OK.
Albums
Sort indexed music by genre type.
*
1. Press OK to select.
2. Scroll to select the desired genre, and then press OK.
Genres
Browse all supported media files on your media player
connected to the USB port. You can only view media files
that are compatible with SYNC; other saved files are not
visible.
1. Press OK to select.
2. Scroll to browse indexed media files on your flash drive,
and then press OK.
Browse USB
Resets the USB index. After the new indexing is complete,
you can choose what to play from the USB song library.
Reset USB
*
You can use the buttons at the bottom of the audio display to jump to a certain
alphabetical category quickly. You can also use the letters on the numeric keypad to jump
in the list.
Using Voice Commands
You can access and view your USB songs
using voice commands.
Plug the device into your vehicle's USB
port.
327
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Press the voice button and when
prompted, say any of the following
commands:
Voice Command
(browse | search | show) all (album |
albums)
(browse | search | show) all (artist |
artists)
(browse | search | show) all (genre |
genres)
(browse | search | show) all (playlist |
playlists)
(browse | search | show) all (song | songs
| title | titles | file | files | track | tracks)
(browse | search | show) album ___
(browse | search | show) artist ___
(browse | search | show) genre ___
(browse | search | show) playlist ___
Line In Audio
To access the Line in audio source say:
Voice Command
((line | AV | audio video) in | AUX | audio
video)
USB 2 (If Equipped)
Your vehicle may come equipped with an
additional USB port. If so, USB 1 is located
at the front of the vehicle at the bottom of
the instrument panel. USB 2 is located
inside the storage compartment of the
vehicle's center console.
You can plug in an additional USB device
into the second USB port.
Note: SYNC only supports one connected
iOS (Apple) devices at a time (whichever
one you plug in first). When you connect a
second iOS device, the systems charges it,
but does not support playback from it.
Voice Commands for Audio
Sources
Your voice system allows you to change
audio sources with a simple voice
command.
Press the voice button and when
prompted say:
Voice Command
(music | audio | entertainment) [system]
Below are a few examples of voice
commands you can use.
[tune [to]] AM
[tune [to]] AM1
[tune [to]] (AM | medium wave) (auto-
store | AST | autoset)
[tune [to]] (AM | medium wave) 2
Bluetooth (audio | stereo)
(disc | CD [player]) play
[tune [to]] FM
[tune [to]] FM1
[tune [to]] FM (autostore | AST |
autoset) preset ___
[tune [to]] FM 2
((line | AV | audio video) in | AUX | audio
video)
Radio
328
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Voice Command
(USB [stick] | iPod | MP3 [player])
((who's | who is) this | who plays this |
(what's | what is) playing [now] | (what
| which) (song | track | artist) is this |
(who's | who is) playing | (what's | what
is) this)
Help
Radio Voice Commands
If you are listening to the radio,
press the voice button, and then
say any of the commands in the
following table.
If you are not listening to the radio,
press the voice button and, after the
tone, say:
Voice Command
Radio
You can then say any of the following
commands.
[tune [to]] AM
[tune [to]] AM1
[tune [to]] (AM | medium wave) (auto-
store | AST | autoset)
[tune [to]] (AM | medium wave) 2
[tune [to]] ((AM | medium wave) ___ |
___ [AM | medium wave])
[tune [to]] (AM | medium wave) preset
___
[tune [to]] (AM | medium wave) 1 preset
___
[tune [to]] FM
[tune [to]] FM1
Voice Command
[tune [to]] FM (autostore | AST |
autoset)
[tune [to]] FM 2
[tune [to]] (FM ___ | ___ [FM])
[tune [to]] FM (autostore | AST |
autoset) preset ___
[tune [to]] FM preset ___
[tune [to]] FM 2 preset ___
[tune [to]] preset ___
tune [radio]
Help
CD Voice Commands
If you are listening to a CD, press
the voice button, and then say
any of the commands in the
following table.
If you are not listening to a CD, press
the voice button and, after the tone,
say:
Voice Command
(disc | CD [player]) play
You can then say any of the following
commands.
pause
play
[play] next track
[play] previous track
[play | change to] track [number] ___
*
repeat (track | song) [on]
329
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Voice Command
repeat folder [on]
repeat off
*
(shuffle | random | mix) [on |
(tracks | songs) [on]]
(shuffle | random | mix) (CD [player] |
disc) [on]
(shuffle | random | mix) folder [on]
shuffle off
*
You need to indicate to the system which
track or folder to repeat or shuffle when
using these commands.
Bluetooth Devices and System
Settings
You can access these menus using the
audio display. See Using SYNC™ With
Your Phone (page 304).
SYNC™ TROUBLESHOOTING
Your SYNC system is easy to use. However,
should questions arise, please refer to the
tables below.
To check your cell phone's compatibility,
visit the regional Ford website.
Cell phone issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Refer to your device's manual about audio
adjustments.
The audio control
settings on your cell
phone may be affecting
SYNC performance.
A lot of back-
ground noise
during a phone
call.
Try switching off your cell phone, resetting
it or removing the battery, then trying again.
Possible cell phone
malfunction.
During a call, I
can hear the
other person
but they cannot
hear me.
Make sure that the microphone for SYNC
is not set to off.
Check your cell phone's compatibility.
This is a cell phone-
dependent feature.
SYNC is not
able to down-
load my phone-
book.
Try switching off your cell phone, resetting
it or removing the battery, then trying again.
Possible cell phone
malfunction.
Try pushing your phonebook contacts to
SYNC by selecting the option to add.
You must switch on your cell phone and
the automatic phonebook download
feature on SYNC.
330
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Cell phone issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Try pushing your phonebook contacts to
SYNC by selecting the option to add.
Limitations on your cell
phone's capability.
The system
says "Phone-
book down-
loaded" but my
SYNC phone-
book is empty or
is missing
contacts.
If the missing contacts are stored on your
SIM card, try moving them to your cell
phone's memory.
Remove any pictures or special ring tones
associated with the missing contact.
You must switch on your cell phone and
the automatic phonebook download
feature on SYNC.
Check your cell phone's compatibility.
This is a cell phone-
dependent feature.
I am having
trouble
connecting my
cell phone to
SYNC.
Try switching off your cell phone, resetting
it or removing the battery, then trying again.
Possible cell phone
malfunction.
Try deleting your device from SYNC and
deleting SYNC from your device, then trying
again.
Always check the security and auto accept
prompt settings relative to the SYNC
Bluetooth connection on your cell phone.
Update your cell phone's firmware.
Switch off the auto download setting.
Check your cell phone's compatibility.
This is a cell phone-
dependent feature.
Text messaging
is not working
on SYNC.
Try switching off your cell phone, resetting
it or removing the battery, then trying again.
Possible cell phone
malfunction.
iPhone • Go to your cell phone's Settings.
• Go to the Bluetooth Menu.
• Make sure the connection status shows
Not Connected.
• Press the blue circle to enter the next
menu.
• Turn on Show Notifications.
• Turn on Sync Contacts.
331
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Cell phone issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Your iPhone is now set up to forward
incoming text messages to SYNC.
Repeat these steps for every other Sync
vehicle you are connected to.
Your iPhone will only forward incoming text
messages to SYNC if it is unlocked.
Replying to text messages using SYNC is
not supported by iPhone.
Text messages from WhatsApp and Face-
book Messenger are not supported.
Your cell phone must support downloading
text messages through Bluetooth to receive
incoming text messages.
This is a cell phone-
dependent feature.
Audible text
messages do
not work on my
cell phone.
Access the text messaging menu of SYNC
to see if your cell phone supports the
feature. Press the PHONE button and then
scroll and select the option for text
messaging, then press OK.
Because each cell phone is different, refer
to your device's manual for the specific cell
phone you are pairing. In fact, there can be
differences between cell phones due to
brand, model, service provider and software
version.
This is a cell phone limita-
tion.
USB and media issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Try switching off the device, resetting it or
removing the battery, then trying again.
Possible device malfunc-
tion.
I am having
trouble
connecting my
device.
Make sure you are using the manufacturer's
cable.
Make sure correctly insert the USB cable to
the device and your vehicle's USB port.
Make sure that the device does not have
an auto-install program or active security
settings.
332
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
USB and media issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Make sure you are not leaving the device in
your vehicle during very hot or cold
temperatures.
This is a device limitation.
SYNC does not
recognize my
device when I
start my vehicle.
Make sure you connect the device to SYNC
and press play on your device.
This is a device-
dependent feature.
Bluetooth audio
does not
stream.
The device is not
connected.
Make sure that all song details are popu-
lated.
Your music files may not
contain the correct artist,
song title, album or genre
information.
SYNC does not
recognize music
that is on my
device.
Try replacing the corrupt file with a new
version.
The file may be
corrupted.
Some devices require you to change the
USB settings from mass storage to media
transfer protocol class.
The song may have
copyright protection that
does not allow it to play.
From the iPhone or iPod Touch music now
playing screen, select the audio device
airplay icon at the very bottom of your
iPhone or iPod Touch screen.
This is a device limitation.
When I connect
my iPhone or
iPod Touch
through the
USB and
Bluetooth Audio
at the same
time, I some-
times do not
hear any sound.
To listen to the iPhone or iPod Touch
through Bluetooth Audio, select SYNC.
To listen to the iPhone or iPod Touch
through USB, select Dock Connector.
333
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Voice command issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Review the cell phone voice commands
and the media voice commands at the
beginning of their respective sections.
You may be using the
wrong voice commands.
SYNC does not
understand
what I am
saying.
Refer to the audio display during an active
voice session to find a list of voice
commands there.
The microphone for the system is either in
your rear view mirror or in the headliner just
above the windshield.
You may be speaking too
soon or at the wrong
time.
Review the media voice commands at the
beginning of the media section.
You may be using the
wrong voice commands.
SYNC does not
understand the
name of a song
or artist.
Say the song or artist exactly as the system
saved it. If you say, "Play Artist Prince", the
system does not play music by Prince and
the Revolution or Prince and the New
Power Generation.
You may not be saying
the name exactly as the
system saved it.
Make sure you are saying the complete title
such as "California remix featuring Jennifer
Nettles".
If the song titles are in capital letters, you
have to spell them. LOLA requires you to
say "L-O-L-A".
Do not use special characters in the title,
as the system does not recognize them.
The system may not be
reading the name the
same way you are saying
it.
Review the cell phone voice commands at
the beginning of the cell phone section.
You may be using the
wrong voice commands.
SYNC does not
understand or is
calling the
wrong contact
when I want to
make a call.
You can also use the cell phone and media
suggestion lists to get a list of possible
suggestions when the system cannot fully
understand you. See Using Voice Recog-
nition (page 301).
334
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Voice command issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Make sure you are saying the name exactly
as the system saved it. For example, if the
contact name is Joe Wilson, say "Call Joe
Wilson".
You may not be saying
the name exactly as the
system saved it.
The system works better if you list full
names such as "Joe Wilson" rather than
"Joe".
Do not use special characters such as 123
or ICE as the system does not recognize
them.
Contacts in your phone-
book may be very short
and similar or they may
contain special charac-
ters.
If the contacts are in capital letters, you
have to spell them. JAKE requires you to
say "Call J-A-K-E".
Your phonebook
contacts may be in
capital letters.
SYNC applies the phonetic pronunciation
rules of the selected language to the
contact names stored on your cell phone.
You may be saying the
foreign names using the
currently selected
language for SYNC.
The SYNC voice
control system
is having trouble
recognizing
foreign names
stored on my
cell phone.
Helpful Hint: You can select your contact
manually. Press PHONE. Select the option
for phonebook and then contact name.
Press the soft-key option to hear it. SYNC
will read the contact name to you, giving
you some idea of the pronunciation it is
expecting.
SYNC applies the phonetic pronunciation
rules of the selected language to the names
stored on your media player or USB flash
drive. It is able to make some exceptions
for very popular artist names (for example,
U2) such that you can always use the
English pronunciation for these artists.
You may be saying the
foreign names using the
currently selected
language for SYNC.
The SYNC voice
control system
is having trouble
recognizing
foreign tracks,
artists, albums,
genres and
playlist names
from my media
player or USB
flash drive.
335
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
Voice command issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
SYNC uses a synthetically generated voice
rather than pre-recorded human voice.
SYNC uses text-to-
speech voice prompt
technology.
The system
generates voice
prompts and
the pronunci-
ation of some
words may not
be accurate for
my language.
SYNC offers several new voice control
features for a wide range of languages.
Dialing a contact name directly from the
phonebook without pre-recording (for
example, “call John Smith”) or selecting a
track, artist, album, genre or playlist directly
from your media player (for example," play
artist Madonna).
SYNC offers significant capability beyond
the previous system such as dialing a
contact name directly from the phonebook
without pre-recording (for example, “call
John Smith”) or selecting a track, artist,
album, genre or playlist directly from your
media player (for example, " play artist
Madonna).
The focus of SYNC is to
control your mobile
devices and the content
stored on them.
My previous
Bluetooth voice
control system
allowed me to
control the
radio, CD, and
climate control
systems. Why
can I not control
these systems
with SYNC?
336
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
General
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
SYNC only supports four languages in a
single module for text display, voice control
and voice prompts. The country where you
bought your vehicle dictates the four
languages based on the most popular
languages spoken. If the selected language
is not available, SYNC remains in the
current active language.
SYNC does not support
the currently selected
language for the instru-
ment cluster and inform-
ation and entertainment
display.
The language
selected for the
instrument
cluster and
information and
entertainment
display does not
match the
SYNC language
(phone, USB,
Bluetooth
audio, voice
control and
voice prompts).
SYNC offers several new voice control
features for a wide range of languages.
Dialing a contact name directly from the
phonebook without pre-recording (for
example, “call John Smith”) or selecting a
track, artist, album, genre or playlist directly
from your media player (for example, play
artist Madonna).
337
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
AppLink issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Ensure you have a compatible smartphone;
an Android with OS 2.3 or higher or an
iPhone 3GS or newer with iOS 5.0 or higher.
Additionally, ensure your phone is paired
and connected to SYNC in order to find
AppLink-capable apps on your device.
iPhone users must also connect to SYNC's
USB port with an Apple USB cable.
An AppLink capable
phone is not connected
to SYNC.
AppLink Mobile
Applications:
When I select
"Find New
Apps," SYNC
does not find
any applica-
tions.
Ensure you have downloaded and installed
the latest version of the app from your
phone's app store. Ensure the app is running
on your phone. Some apps require you to
register or login on the app on the phone
before using them with AppLink. Also, some
may have a "Ford SYNC" setting, so check
the app's settings menu on the phone.
AppLink-enabled apps
are not installed and
running on your mobile
device.
My phone is
connected, but
I still cannot find
any apps.
Closing and restarting apps may help SYNC
find the application if you cannot discover
it inside the vehicle. On an Android device,
if apps have an "Exit' or 'Quit' option, select
that then restart the app. If the app does
not have that option, you can also manually
Sometime apps do not
properly close and re-
open their connection to
SYNC, over ignition
cycles, for example.
My phone is
connected, my
app(s) are
running, but I
still cannot find
any apps.
"Force Close" the app by going to the
phone's settings menu, selecting 'Apps.'
then finding the particular app and
choosing 'Force stop.' Don't forget to restart
the app afterwards, then select "Find New
Apps" on SYNC.
On an iPhone with iOS7+, to force close an
app, double tab the home button then
swipe up on the app to close it. Tab the
home button again, then select the app
again to restart it. After a few seconds, the
app should then appear in SYNC's Mobile
App's Menu.
338
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
AppLink issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Reset the Bluetooth on your phone by
turning it off and then turning Bluetooth
back on. If you are in your vehicle, SYNC
should be able to automatically re-connect
to your phone if you press the "Phone"
button.
There is a bluetooth bug
on some order versions
of the Android OS that
may cause apps that
were found on your
previous vehicle drive to
not be found again if you
have not turned off
bluetooth.
My Android
phone is
connected, my
app(s) are
running, I
restarted them,
but I still cannot
find any apps.
Unplug the USB cable from the phone, wait
a moment, and plug the USB cable back in
to the phone. After a few seconds, the app
should appear in SYNC's Mobile Apps
Menu. If not, "Force Close" the application
and restart it.
The USB connection to
SYNC may need to be
reset.
My iPhone
phone is
connected, my
app is running, I
restarted the
app but I still
cannot find it on
SYNC.
Try increasing the Bluetooth volume of the
device by using the device's volume control
buttons which are most often found on the
side of the device.
The bluetooth volume on
the phone may be low.
I have an
Android phone.
I found and
started my
media app on
SYNC, but there
is no sound or
the sound is
very low.
Force close or uninstall the apps you do not
want SYNC to find. If the app has a "Ford
SYNC" setting, disable that setting in the
app's settings menu on the phone.
Some Android devices
have a limited number of
bluetooth ports apps can
use to connect. If you
have more AppLink apps
on your phone than the
number of availble
Bluetooth ports, you will
not see all of your apps
listed in SYNC's mobile
apps menu.
I can only see
some of the
AppLink apps
running on my
phone listed in
SYNC's Mobile
Apps Menu.
339
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
MessageItem
PhoneA
NavigationB
ClimateC
SettingsD
MessageItem
HomeE
InformationF
EntertainmentG
340
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™ 2
This system uses a four-corner strategy to
provide quick access to several vehicle
features and settings. The touchscreen
provides easy interaction with your cellular
phone, multimedia, climate control and
navigation system. The corners display any
active modes within those menus, such as
phone status or the climate temperature.
Note: Some features are not available while
your vehicle is moving.
Note: Your system is equipped with a
feature that allows you to access and
control audio features for 10 minutes after
you switch the ignition off (and no doors
open).
PHONE
Press to select any of the following:
Message
Phone
Speed dial
Phonebook
Call history
Messaging
Settings
NAVIGATION
Press to select any of the following:
Message
My Home
Favourites
Previous Destinations
Place of interest
Emergency
Address
Message
Junction
Town centre
Latitude/Longitude
Edit Route
Cancel Route
CLIMATE
Press the corresponding icons to control
the following options:
• Driver Settings
• Recirculated Air
• Auto
• Dual
• Passenger Settings
• A/C
• Defrost
SETTINGS
Press to select any of the following:
Message
Clock
Display
Sound
Vehicle
Settings
Help
341
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™ 2
HOME
Press to access the home
screen.
Note: Depending on your vehicle’s option
package and software, the screens may vary
in appearance from the descriptions in this
section. The features may also be limited
depending on the market. Check with an
authorized dealer for availability.
INFORMATION
Press to select any of the following:
Message
Traffic
Notific.
Calendar
Apps
Where Am I?
ENTERTAINMENT
Press to select any of the following:
Message
AM
FM
*
DAB
CD
USB
BT Stereo
SD Card
Line In
*
If equipped.
Using the Audio Controls
Depending on your vehicle, it may also have the following controls:
Action and DescriptionControls
Switch the media features on or off.Power
Adjust the volume of playing media.Volume
Use as you normally would in media modes.Seek
Use as you normally would in media modes.Tune
Eject a CD from the entertainment system.Eject
Press this button to switch the display screen off. Press again,
or touch the screen to switch the display screen on.
Display
Touch the control repeatedly to switch between media
modes.
Source
342
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™ 2
Action and DescriptionControls
Adjust the settings for:Sound
Bass
Treble
Midrange
Set Balance and Fade
DSP
EQ Mode
Adaptive volume
Using the Steering Wheel Controls
Depending on your vehicle and option
package, you can use your steering wheel
controls to interact with the touchscreen
system.
• VOL: Control the volume of audio
output.
• Mute: Mute the audio output.
• Voice: Press to start a voice session.
Press again and hold to end a voice
session.
• SEEK and PHONE ACCEPT:
• While in radio mode, press to seek
between memory presets or press
and hold to seek between stations.
• While in USB or CD mode, press to
seek between stations or press and
hold to fast seek.
• While in phone mode, press to
answer a call, or to switch between
calls.
• SEEK and PHONE REJECT:
• While in radio mode, press to seek
between memory presets or press
and hold to seek between stations.
• While in USB or CD mode, press to
seek between stations or press and
hold to fast seek.
• While in phone mode, press to end
a call, or to reject an incoming call.
• Source: Touch the control repeatedly
to switch between media modes.
• Sound: Touch the control to adjust the
sound settings. See Settings (page
347).
See Steering Wheel (page 53).
Cleaning the Touchscreen Display
Use a dry, clean, soft cloth. If dirt or
fingerprints are still visible, apply a small
amount of alcohol to the cloth. Do not pour
or spray alcohol onto the display. Do not
use detergent or any type of solvent to
clean the display.
Support
For further support, contact an authorized
dealer. For more information, visit the
regional Ford website.
343
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™ 2
Safety Information
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
• Do not attempt to service or repair the
system. Have an authorized dealer
check your vehicle.
• Do not operate playing devices if the
power cords or cables are broken, split
or damaged. Place cords and cables
out of the way, so they do not interfere
with the operation of pedals, seats,
compartments or safe driving abilities.
• Do not leave playing devices in your
vehicle during extreme conditions as it
could cause them damage. See your
device's user guide for further
information.
• For your safety, some SYNC functions
are speed-dependent. Their use is
limited to when your vehicle is traveling
at speeds under 5 mph (8 km/h).
Make sure that you review your device's
manual before using it with SYNC.
Speed-restricted Features
Some features of this system may be too
difficult to use while your vehicle is moving
so they are restricted from use unless your
vehicle is stationary.
See the following chart for more specific
examples.
Restricted features
Editing settings while the rear view camera or active park
assist are active.
System Functionality
Playing video.Videos, Photos and Graphics
Composing text messages.Text Messages
Editing preset text messages.
Demo navigation route.Navigation
344
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™ 2
Privacy Information
When a cell phone connects to SYNC, the
system creates a profile that links to that
cell phone. The system creates the profile
to offer you more mobile features and to
operate more efficiently. Among other
things, this profile may contain data about
your phonebook, text messages (read and
unread) and call history. This includes the
history of calls when your cell phone was
not connected to the system. If you
connect a media player, the system
creates and retains an index of supported
media content. The system also records a
short development log of approximately
10 minutes of all recent system activity.
Use the log profile and other system data
to improve the system and help diagnose
any problems that may occur.
The cell phone profile, media player index
and development log remain in the system
unless deleted. They are generally
accessible in your vehicle only when you
connect your cell phone or media player.
If you no longer plan to use the system or
your vehicle, we recommend you complete
a master reset to erase all stored
information. See Information Displays
(page 80).
Special equipment is required to access
system data. Access to your vehicle's
SYNC module is also required. We will not
access the system data for any purpose
other than as described without consent.
Examples where we can access system
data are for a court order, where required
by law enforcement, other government
authorities or other third parties acting with
lawful authority. Other parties may seek
to access the information independently
of us. Further privacy information is
available.
Using Voice Recognition
This system helps you control many
features using voice commands. This
allows you to keep your hands on the
wheel and focus on what is in front of you.
The system provides feedback through
audible tones, prompts, questions and
spoken confirmations depending on the
situation and the chosen level of
interaction (voice settings).
The system also asks short questions
(confirmation prompts) when it is not sure
of your request or when there are multiple
possible responses to your request.
When using voice commands, words and
icons may appear in the lower left status
bar indicating the status of the voice
command session.
How to Use Voice Commands
The following are some of the
voice commands that you can
say at any time during a voice
command session.
Press the voice button and when
prompted say:
Voice command
Main Menu
What Can I Say
Previous Page
Go Back
Help
345
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™ 2
Helpful Hints
• Make sure the interior of your vehicle is
as quiet as possible. Wind noise from
open windows and road vibrations may
prevent the system from correctly
recognizing spoken voice commands.
• After pressing the voice command icon,
wait until after the tone sounds and a
message appears before saying a voice
command. Any voice command spoken
prior to this does not register with the
system.
• Speak naturally, without long pauses
between words.
• At any time, you can interrupt the
system while it is speaking by pressing
the voice command icon.
Accessing a List of Available Voice
Commands
To access a list of available voice
commands you can do either of the
following.
Using the touchscreen, press:
Menu Item
Settings
Help
Voice Command List
Using the steering wheel control, press
the voice button and when prompted
say one of the following:
Voice Commands
List of Commands
Radio List of Commands
Phone List of Commands
Voice Instructions List of Commands
Voice Command Settings
These allow you to customize the level of
system interaction, help and feedback. The
system defaults to standard interaction
that uses candidate lists and confirmation
prompts as these provide the highest level
of guidance and feedback.
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
In this mode the system provides
detailed interaction and guidance.
NoviceInteraction Mode
This mode has less audible interac-
tion and more tone prompts.
Advanced
The system uses these short questions to confirm your voice
command. If turned off, the system simply makes a best guess
as to what you requested. The system may still occasionally
ask you to confirm a voice command.
Confirmation Prompts
Candidate lists are lists of possible results from your voice
commands. The system creates these lists when it has the
same confidence level of several options based on your voice
command.
Phone Candidate Lists
Media Candidate Lists
346
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™ 2
Using the touchscreen, press the
settings icon, then press:
Menu Item
Voice Settings
Voice Control
Select from the following:
Interaction Mode
Confirmation Prompts
Media Candidate Lists
Phone Candidate Lists
Voice Control Volume
Using Voice Commands with the
Touchscreen Options
The voice command system has a dual
mode feature which allows you to switch
between using voice commands and
making on-screen selections. This is
available only when the system displays a
list of candidates generated during a voice
command session. For example, this can
be used when entering a street address or
trying to call a contact from a cell phone
paired to the system.
SETTINGS
347
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™ 2
Menu ItemItem
ClockA
DisplayB
SoundC
VehicleD
SettingsE
HelpF
Clock
Under this menu, you can set the
clock, access and adjust the
display, sound and vehicle
settings as well as access settings for
specific modes or the help feature.
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Press the settings icon.Settings
Press the + or - to adjust the time.Clock
From this screen, you can also make other adjustments such
as 12-hour or 24-hour mode, activate GPS time synchroniza-
tion and have the system automatically update new time
zones.
You can also switch the outside air temperature display off
and on. It appears at the top center of the touchscreen, next
to the time and date.
Note: You cannot manually set the date. Your vehicle’s GPS does this for you.
Note: If the battery has been disconnected, your vehicle needs to acquire a GPS signal to
update the clock. Once your vehicle acquires the signal, it may take a few minutes for the
update to display the correct time.
Display
You can adjust the display using
the touchscreen or the voice
button on the steering wheel
controls.
348
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™ 2
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Press the settings icon.Settings
Display
Then select from the following:
Allows you to switch the display off. It also allows you to set the screen
to a certain brightness or have the system automatically change based
on the outside light level.
Mode
If you also select:
These features will allow you to adjust the dimming of
your screen.
Auto
Night
Allows you to display the default photo or upload your own.Edit Wallpaper
When set to On, lets you use the automatic dimming feature.Auto Dim
When set to Off you are able to adjust the brightness of the screen.
Make the screen display brighter or dimmer.Brightness
Allows you to adjust screen dimming as the outside lighting conditions
change from day to night.
Auto Dim
Manual Offset
To make adjustments using the voice
button, press the button and when
prompted, say:
Voice command
Display Settings
Uploading Photos for Your Home
Screen Wallpaper
Note: You cannot load photos directly from
your camera. You must access the photos
either from your USB mass storage device
or from an SD card.
Note: Photographs with extremely large
dimensions (such as 2048 x 1536) may not
be compatible and appear as a blank
(black) image on the display.
The system allows you to upload and view
up to 32 photos.
To access, press:
349
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™ 2
To upload your photos, select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Press the settings icon.Settings
Display
Follow the system prompts to upload your photographs.Edit Wallpaper
Only the photograph(s), which meets the
following conditions display:
• Compatible file formats are as follows:
JPG, GIF, PNG, BMP.
• Each file must be 1.5 MB or less.
• Recommended dimensions: 800 x 384.
Sound
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Menu Item
Settings
Sound
Then select from the following:
Bass
Midrange
Treble
Set Balance and Fade
DSP occupancy
EQ Mode
Adaptive volume
Note: Your vehicle may not have all of these sound settings.
Vehicle
350
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™ 2
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Menu Item
Settings
Vehicle
Then select from the following:
Ambient light
Camera Settings
Enable Valet Mode
Ambient Lighting (If Equipped)
When you switch this feature on, ambient
lighting illuminates footwells and
cupholders with a choice of colors.
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Press the settings icon.Settings
Vehicle
Ambient light
• You can then touch the desired color.
• Use the scroll bar to increase or decrease the intensity.
• To switch the feature on or off, press the power button.
Camera Settings
This menu allows you to access
settings for your rear view
camera.
351
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™ 2
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Press the settings icon.Settings
Vehicle
Camera Settings
Then select from the following:
Enhanced Park Pilot
Rear Camera Delay
You can find more information on the rear view camera system in another chapter. See
Parking Aids (page 144).
Enable Valet Mode
Valet mode allows you to lock
the system. No information is
accessible until the system is
unlocked with the correct PIN.
Note: If the system locks, and you need to
reset the PIN, contact an authorized dealer.
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Press the settings icon.Settings
Vehicle
Then enter a four digit PIN twice, as prompted.Enable Valet Mode
After you press Continue the system locks until you enter the
PIN again.
Continue
Settings
Access and adjust system settings, voice
features, as well as phone, navigation and
wireless settings.
System
352
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™ 2
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Press the settings icon.Settings
System
Then select from the following:
Select to have the touchscreen display in any of the select-
able language options
*
.
Language
Select to display units in kilometers or miles.Distance
Select to display units in Celsius or Fahrenheit.Temperature
Adjust the volume of voice prompts from the system.System Prompt Volume
Select to have the system beep to confirm choices made
through the touchscreen.
Touch Screen Button
Beep
Have the touchscreen keyboard display in QWERTY or ABC
format.
Keyboard Layout
Install any downloaded applications or view the current
software licenses.
Install Applications
Select to restore factory defaults. This erases all personal
settings and personal data.
Master Reset
*
The options include: English, Spanish, French, Portuguese, German, Italian, Dutch,
Swedish, Polish, Turkish and Russian. Only four of these languages are available for voice
input and output, depending on your location.
Voice Control
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Settings
Voice Control
Then select from the following:
353
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™ 2
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Standard interaction mode provides more detailed interaction
and guidance. Advanced mode has less audible interaction
and more tone prompts.
Interaction Mode
Have the system ask you short questions if it has not clearly
heard or understood your request.
Confirmation Prompts
Note: Even with confirmation prompts turned off, the system
may occasionally ask you to confirm settings.
Candidate lists are possible results from your voice
commands. The system simply makes a best guess at your
request with these turned off.
Media Candidate Lists
Candidate lists are possible results from your voice
commands. The system simply makes a best guess at your
request with these turned off.
Phone Candidate Lists
This allows you to adjust the system’s voice volume level.Voice Control Volume
Media Player
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Press the settings icon.Settings
Media Player
Then select from the following:
When this feature is on, the system automatically switches
to the media source upon initial connection. This allows you
to listen to music during the indexing process. When this
feature is off, the system does not automatically switch to
the inserted media source.
Autoplay
Select to connect, disconnect, add or delete a device. You
can also set a device as your favorite so that the system
automatically attempts to connect to that device at every
ignition cycle.
Bluetooth Devices
354
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™ 2
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
This allows you to view the version level of the Gracenote
Database.
Gracenote® Database
Info
With this feature on, the Gracenote Database supplies
metadata information for your music files. This overrides
information from your device. This feature defaults to off.
Gracenote® Manage-
ment
With this feature on, the Gracenote Database supplies cover
art for your music files. This overrides any art from your device.
This feature defaults to Media Player.
Cover Art Priority
Navigation
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Press the settings icon.Settings
Navigation
Then select from the following:
Switch breadcrumbs on and off.Map Preferences
Have the system display your turn list top to bottom or
bottom to top.
Switch the Parking POI notification on and off.
Select shortest route, fastest route or ecological route as
your preferred route. This route displays first.
Route Preferences
Always use preferred route. If set to yes, the system only
calculates a single route. This speeds up your destination
entry process.
Select a low, medium or high cost for the calculated ecolo-
gical route. This may incur a time penalty.
Have the system avoid freeways.
Have the system avoid toll roads.
Have the system avoid ferries or car trains.
355
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™ 2
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Have the system avoid tunnels.
Have the system use guidance prompts.Navigation Preferences
Have the system automatically fill in Country information.
Hazard Spot Warning
Have the system activate hazard spot warning in countries
where legally allowed.
Have the system avoid traffic problems automatically.Traffic Preferences
Switch traffic alert notifications on or off.
Have the system display accident icons.
Have the system display traffic jam icons.
Have the system display closed roads.
Have the system display road work icons.
Have the system display incident icons.
Have the system display icons for areas where difficult driving
conditions may occur.
Have the system display icons for areas where snow and ice
on the road may occur.
Have the system display any smog icons.
Have the system display weather warning icons.
Have the system display where there may be reduced visib-
ility.
Have the system display icons to recommend switching on
your radio for traffic announcements.
Enter specific areas that you would like to avoid on planned
navigation routes.
Avoid Areas
Phone
356
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™ 2
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Press the settings icon.Settings
Phone
Then select from the following:
Connect, disconnect, add or delete a device, as well as save
it as a favorite.
Bluetooth Devices
Switch Bluetooth on and off.Bluetooth
Have all calls go directly to your voice mail and not ring inside
your vehicle. With this feature turned on, text message noti-
fications are also suppressed and do not ring inside your
vehicle.
Do Not Disturb
Switch on or turn off the Emergency Assistance feature. See
Information (page 378).
Emergency Assistance
Select the type of notification for phone calls - ring tone,
beep, text to speech or silent.
Phone Ringer
Select the type of notification for text messages - alert tone,
beep, text to speech, or have it be silent.
Text Message Notifica-
tion
If compatible with your phone, you can adjust your internet
data connection. Select to make your connection profile with
the personal area network or to switch off your connection.
You can also choose to adjust your settings or have the
system always connect, never connect when roaming, or
query on connect. Press ? for more information.
Internet Data Connection
Access features, such as automatic phonebook download,
re-download your phonebook, add contacts from your phone
as well as delete or upload your phonebook.
Manage Phonebook
Have the system alert you when in Roaming mode.Roaming Warning
Wireless and Internet
Your system has a Wi-Fi feature
that creates a wireless network
within your vehicle, thereby
allowing other devices (such as personal
computers or phones) in your vehicle to
speak to each other, share files or play
games. Using this Wi-Fi feature, everyone
in your vehicle can also access the internet
if you have a USB mobile broadband
connection inside your vehicle, your phone
supports personal area networking or if
you park outside a wireless hotspot.
357
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™ 2
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Press the settings icon.Settings
Wireless & Internet
Then select from the following:
Wi-Fi Network (Client) ModeWi-Fi Settings
Turns the Wi-Fi feature on and off in your vehicle. Make sure
you switch it on for connectivity purposes.
Choose a Wireless Network
Allows you to use a previously stored wireless network. You
can categorize by alphabetical listing, priority and signal
strength. You can also choose to search for a network,
connect to a network, disconnect from a network, receive
more information, prioritize a network or delete a network.
Gateway (Access Point) Mode
Makes SYNC an access point for a phone or a computer when
turned on. This forms the local area network within your
vehicle for things, such as game playing, file transfer and
internet browsing. Press ? for more information.
Gateway (Access Point) Settings
Allows you to view and change settings for using SYNC as
the internet gateway.
Gateway (Access Point) Devices List
Allows you to view recent connections to your Wi-Fi system.
Instead of using Wi-Fi, your system can also use a USB mobile
broadband connection to access the internet. (You must
switch on your mobile broadband device on your personal
computer before connecting it to the system.) This screen
allows you to set up what is your typical area for your USB
mobile broadband connection. (USB mobile broadband
settings may not display if the device is already on.) You can
select the following:
USB Mobile Broadband
Country
Carrier
358
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™ 2
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Phone Number
User Name
Password
Shows you the currently paired devices as well as giving you
your typical Bluetooth options to connect, disconnect, set as
favorite, delete and add device. Bluetooth is a registered
trademark of the Bluetooth SIG.
Bluetooth Settings
Choose your connection methods and change them as
needed. You can select to change order and have the system
either always attempt to connect using a USB mobile
broadband or using Wi-Fi.
Prioritize Connection
Methods
The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED Logo is a certification
mark of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
Help
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Press the settings icon.Settings
Help
Then select from the following:
Touchscreen system serial numberSystem Inform-
ation
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Touchscreen system software version
Navigation system version
Map database version
Gracenote® Database Information and Library version
View the licenses for any software and applications installed on your
system.
View Software
Licenses
359
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™ 2
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Certain features are not accessible when your vehicle is moving.Driving Restric-
tions
Switch on and off the Emergency Assistance feature. See Information
(page 378).
Emergency
Assistance
Allows you to save up to two
numbers as ICE contacts for
quick access if there is an
emergency.
In Case of Emergency (ICE) speed dial
The ICE contacts you select
appear at the end of the
Emergency Assistance call
process.
Select to access your phone-
book and then select the
desired contacts. The
numbers then appear as
options on this screen for the
ICE 1 and ICE 2 buttons.
Edit
View categorized lists of voice commands.Voice
Command List
You can also access Help using
the voice commands. The
system provides allowable voice
commands for the current mode.
Press the voice button and when
prompted say:
Voice command
Help
You can say help at any time to get
assistance with commands, menus or
other information.
360
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™ 2
ENTERTAINMENT
Message and DescriptionMessage
AMA
FMB
DABC
CDD
USBE
Touch this button to scroll
down for more options, such as
SD Card, BT Stereo and Line In.
F
Message and DescriptionMessage
These buttons provide addi-
tional controls for the radio or
media source. See the AM/FM
radio controls table for more
information.
G
Radio memory presets and CD
controls.
H
Note: Some features may not be available
in your area. Contact an authorized dealer
for more information.
You can access these options using the
touchscreen or voice commands.
AM/FM/DAB Radio
The following controls are
available for AM/FM/DAB radio
361
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™ 2
Controls
Action and DescriptionItem
Touch either tab to listen to the radio. To change between AM, FM
and DAB presets, just touch the AM, FM or DAB tab.
AM
FM
DAB
Save a station by pressing and holding one of the memory preset
areas. There is a brief mute while the radio saves the station. Sound
returns when finished.
Presets
Touch this button to go to the next strong AM, FM or DAB radio
station. The light on the button illuminates when the feature is on.
Scan
When the info button is pressed, the system shows the
corresponding block number for the active DAB radio
station. If you press the info button a second time the
radio station name is displayed again.
(DAB
only)
Information
For AM and FM only, touch this button to manually enter the desired
station number. Touch Enter when you are done.
Tune
Turn on to receive traffic announcements.TA
See a list of all currently available radio stations.Browse
Options
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Touch this button to adjust settings for:Sound Settings
Bass
Midrange
Treble
Set Balance and Fade
DSP occupancy
EQ Mode
Adaptive volume
This allows you to view the information
broadcast by FM stations.
Radio Text
362
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™ 2
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
AST (Autostore) allows you to have the
system automatically store the six
strongest stations in your current location.
AST
With news announcement option active,
the system interrupts active audio source
to provide incoming news announcements,
if currently tuned station (or last tuned
station in case of other media active)
supports news.
News announcement
With Regional option active, the system
stays on the regional subprogram instead
of switching to a different frequency with
better reception.
Regional
With alternative frequency option active,
the system re-tunes to a different
frequency with better reception for the
same station.
Alternate Frequency
With Service Linking active, the system
automatically switches from DAB to FM, in
case DAB becomes unavailable.
Service Linking
Note: Your vehicle may not have all these
sound settings.
Radio Voice Commands
Press the voice button and when prompted say:
Voice command
Radio
Then you can say a command similar to the following:
Say a frequency or preset.FM
Say a preset.DAB
Off
Help
363
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™ 2
CD
To access, press the lower left corner
on the touchscreen, then select:
Menu Item
CD
Insert your CD then select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Touch this button to repeat the currently playing track, all tracks
on the disc or switch the feature off if already on.
Repeat
Touch this button to play the tracks or entire albums in random
order, or switch the feature off if already on.
Shuffle
Touch this button to hear a brief sampling of all available tracks.Scan
Touch this button to see disc information.More Info
Touch this button to look through all available CD tracks.Browse
To adjust the Sound Settings, select:
Menu Item
Options
Sound Settings
Then any of the following:
Bass
Midrange
Treble
Set Balance and Fade
DSP occupancy
EQ Mode
Adaptive volume
Note: Your vehicle may not have all these
sound settings.
CD Voice Commands
If you are listening to a CD, press
the voice button on the steering
wheel controls. When prompted,
say any of the following commands.
364
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™ 2
If you are not listening to a CD, press
the voice button and, after the tone,
say:
Voice command
CD Player
When listening to a CD you can say
many commands. Following are a few
examples of what you can say.
Voice command
Play
Pause
Next Track
Previous Track
Help
SD Card Slot and USB Port
The SD card slot and USB port are located
in the Media Hub. See Media Hub (page
298).
SD Card
Note: Your SD card slot is spring-loaded.
To remove the SD card, press the card in
and the system ejects it. Do not attempt to
pull the card to remove it as this could cause
damage.
Note: The navigation system also uses this
card slot. See Navigation (page 384).
To access and play music from your device,
press the lower left corner of the
touchscreen.
SD logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
USB Port
To access and play music from your device,
press the lower left corner of the
touchscreen.
This feature allows you to plug in media
playing devices, memory sticks, flash drives
or thumb drives, and charge devices if they
support this feature.
365
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™ 2
Playing Music from Your Device
Note: The system is capable of indexing up
to 30,000 songs.
Insert your device and select:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Once the system recognizes your USB or SD card you can
then select from the following options:
USB
SD Card
This feature replays the currently playing song or album.Repeat
Touch this button to play music on the selected album or
folder in random order.
Shuffle
This feature allows you to choose music similar to what is
currently playing.
Similar Music
Touch this button to see disc information, for example current
track, artist name, album and genre.
More Info
Touch this button to view and adjust various media settings.Options
Sound
Sound settings allows you to adjust settings for:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Bass
Midrange
Treble
Set Balance and Fade
DSP
EQ Mode
Adaptive volume
Allows you to select more settings, which is under Media
Player. See Settings (page 347).
Media Player Settings
366
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™ 2
Action and DescriptionMessage
Displays software and firmware information about the
currently connected media device.
Device Information
Indexes your device when you connect it for the first time and
each time the content changes (for example adding or
removing tracks) to make sure you have the latest voice
commands available for all media on the device.
Update Media Index
Note: Your vehicle may not have all these sound settings.
Browse
This feature allows you to view the
contents of the device. It also allows you
to search by categories, for example genre,
artist or album.
If you want to view song information, for
example Title, Artist, File, Folder, Album,
and Genre, touch the on-screen album art.
You can also select:
Action and DescriptionMessage
To hear how the system pronounces the current band and
song. This can be helpful when using voice commands to
make sure the system correctly plays your request.
What’s Playing?
USB and SD Card Voice Commands
Press the voice button and when prompted say:
Voice command
SD Card
USB
Then commands such as the following:
Browse
Next Track
Pause
Say the name of what you would like to listen to such as a band, song,
album or playlist.
Play
367
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™ 2
Voice command
*
Play Artist ___
*
Play Song ___
Similar Music
Help
*
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it could be the name of anything, such as a group,
artist or song. For example you could say "Play artist The Beatles" or "Play song Penny
Lane".
Supported Media Players, Formats
and Metadata Information
SYNC is capable of hosting nearly any
digital media player, including iPod,
Zune™, plays from device players, and
most USB drives. Supported audio formats
include MP3, WMA, WAV and AAC.
It is also able to organize your indexed
media from your playing device by
metadata tags. Metadata tags, which are
descriptive software identifiers embedded
in the media files, provide information
about the file.
If your indexed media files contain no
information embedded in these metadata
tags, SYNC may classify the empty
metadata tags as unknown.
Bluetooth Audio
The system allows you to stream audio
over your vehicle's speakers from your
connected, Bluetooth-enabled cell phone.
To access, press the lower left corner
on the touchscreen, then select:
Message
BT audio
Bluetooth Audio Voice Commands
The voice system allows you to control
your media with a simple voice command.
For example to change songs, press the
voice button and follow the system
prompts.
Line In
WARNINGS
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any handheld device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
368
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™ 2
WARNINGS
For safety reasons, do not connect
or adjust the settings on your
portable music player while your
vehicle is moving.
Store the portable music player in a
secure location, such as the center
console or the glove box, when your
vehicle is moving. Hard objects may
become projectiles in a crash or sudden
stop, which may increase the risk of serious
injury. The audio extension cable must be
long enough to allow the portable music
player to be safely stored while your
vehicle is moving.
Your auxiliary input jack allows you to play
music from your portable music player over
your vehicle's speakers. The jack is located
in your center console.
Press the lower left corner of the
touchscreen, and then select Line In.
To use the auxiliary input jack feature,
make sure that your portable music player
is designed for use with headphones and
that it is fully charged. You also need an
audio extension cable with stereo male
1/8-inch (3.5 millimeter) connectors at
both ends.
1. Switch off the engine, radio and
portable music player. Set the parking
brake and put the transmission in
position P.
2. Attach one end of the audio extension
cable to the headphone output of your
player and the other end into the
adapter in one of the jack inside the
center console.
3. Press the lower left corner on the
touchscreen. Select either a tuned FM
station or a CD (if there is a CD already
loaded into the system).
4. Adjust the volume as desired.
5. Turn the portable music player on and
adjust the volume to ½ the maximum.
6. Press the lower left corner on the
touchscreen. Then select:
Menu Item
You should hear audio
from your portable music
player although it may be
low.
Line In
Adjust the sound on your
portable music player until
it reaches the level of the
FM station by switching
back and forth between
the controls.
Troubleshooting
• Do not connect the audio input jack to
a line level output. The jack only works
correctly with devices that have a
headphone output with a volume
control.
• Do not set the portable music player's
volume level higher than is necessary
to match the volume of the CD or FM
radio as this causes distortion and
reduces sound quality.
369
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™ 2
• If the music sounds distorted at lower
listening levels, turn the portable music
player volume down. If the problem
persists, replace or recharge the
batteries in the portable media player.
• Control the portable media player in
the same manner when used with
headphones, as the auxiliary input jack
does not provide control (such as Play
or Pause) over the attached portable
media player.
PHONE
Menu ItemItem
PhoneA
Speed dialB
PhonebookC
HistoryD
MessagingE
SettingsF
370
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™ 2
Hands-free calling is one of the main
features of SYNC. Once you pair your cell
phone, you can access many options using
the touchscreen or voice commands. While
the system supports a variety of features,
many are dependent on your cell phone’s
functionality.
At a minimum, most cell phones with
Bluetooth wireless technology support the
following functions:
• Answering an incoming call.
• Ending a call.
• Dialing a number.
• Call waiting notification.
• Caller ID.
Other features, such as text messaging
using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook
download, are phone-dependent features.
To check your phone’s compatibility, see
your phone’ s user manual or the local Ford
website.
Pairing Your Cell Phone for the
First Time
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any handheld device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
The first thing you must do to use the
phone features of SYNC is to pair your
Bluetooth-enabled cell phone with SYNC.
This allows you to use your cell phone in a
hands-free manner.
Touch the upper left corner of the touchscreen:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Pair phone
Follow the on-screen instructions.Find SYNC
Make sure that Bluetooth is set to On and that your cell phone
is in the correct mode. See your cell phone’s manual if
necessary.
Select SYNC and a six-digit PIN appears on your device.
If you are prompted to enter a PIN on your device, it does not
support Secure Simple Pairing. To pair, enter the PIN
displayed on the touchscreen. Skip the next step.
When prompted on your cell phone’s display, confirm that
the PIN provided by SYNC matches the PIN displayed on your
cell phone.
The display indicates when the pairing is successful.
SYNC may prompt you with more cell phone options. For
more information on your cell phone's capability, see your
cell phone's manual and visit the website.
371
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™ 2
Pairing Subsequent Cell Phones
Make sure that Bluetooth is set to On and
that your cell phone is in the correct mode.
See your device's manual if necessary.
To pair a subsequent cell phone, select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Phone
Settings
Bluetooth Devices
Add Device
Follow the on-screen instructions.Find SYNC
Make sure that Bluetooth is set to On and that your cell phone
is in the correct mode. See your cell phone’s manual if
necessary.
Select SYNC and a six-digit PIN appears on your device.
If you are prompted to enter a PIN on your device, it does not
support Secure Simple Pairing. To pair, enter the PIN
displayed on the touchscreen. Skip the next step.
When prompted on your cell phone’s display, confirm that
the PIN provided by SYNC matches the PIN displayed on your
cell phone.
The display indicates when the pairing is successful.
SYNC may prompt you with more cell phone options. For
more information on your cell phone's capability, see your
cell phone's manual and visit the website.
Making Calls
Press the voice button and say a
command similar to the following:
Voice command
Call
Dial
You can say the name of a person from
your phone book to call or a say a number
to dial. For example "Call Jenny" or "Dial
867-5309".
To end the call or exit phone
mode, press and hold the phone
button.
372
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™ 2
Receiving Calls
During an incoming call, an audible tone
sounds. Call information appears in the
display if it is available.
To accept the call, select:
Menu Item
Accept
Note: You can also accept the call by
pressing the phone button on the steering
wheel.
To reject the call, select:
Menu Item
Reject
Note: You can also reject the call by
pressing the phone button on the steering
wheel.
Ignore the call by doing nothing. SYNC logs
it as a missed call.
Phone Menu Options
Press the top left corner on the
touchscreen to select from the following
options:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Touch this button to access the on-screen numerical pad to
enter a number and place a call. During an active call, you can
also choose any of these options:
Phone
Mute Call
Hold Call
Hands-free off
Join Calls
End
Select to call stored contacts.Speed dial
Touch this button to access and call any contacts in your
previously downloaded phonebook. The system places the
entries in alphabetical categories summarized at the top of
the screen
Phonebook
To turn on contact picture settings, if your device supports this
feature, select:
Phone
Settings
373
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™ 2
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Manage Phonebook
Display Photos from Phonebook
Certain smartphones may support transferring street addresses
when listed with phonebook contact information. If your cell
phone supports this feature, you can select and use these
addresses as destinations and save them as favorites.
Note: This is a cell phone-dependent feature. If your cell phone
does not support downloading call history using Bluetooth,
SYNC keeps track of calls made with the SYNC system.
Call History
After you connect your Bluetooth-enabled cell phone to SYNC,
you can access any previously dialed, received or missed calls.
You can also choose to save these to:
Quick DialFavorites
Send text messages using the touchscreen. See Text
Messaging later in this section.
Messaging
Touch this button to access various phone settings, for
example turning Bluetooth on and off, managing your phone-
book and more. See Phone Settings later in this section
Settings
Text Messaging
Note: Downloading and sending text
messages using Bluetooth are cell
phone-dependent features.
Note: Certain features in text messaging
are speed-dependent and not available
when your vehicle is traveling at speeds over
5.0 mph (8 km/h).
Note: SYNC does not download read text
messages from your cell phone.
You can send and receive text messages
using Bluetooth, read them aloud and
translate text messaging acronyms, for
example LOL.
Touch the top left corner of the display,
then select:
Menu Item
Phone
Messaging
Then any of the following:
Listen (speaker icon)
Dial
Send Text
View
Delete
Delete All
374
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™ 2
Composing a Text Message
Note: This is a speed-dependent feature.
It is unavailable when your vehicle is
traveling at speeds over 5 mph (8 km/h).
Note: Downloading and sending text
messages using Bluetooth are cell
phone-dependent features.
To compose and send a text message, select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Phone
Messaging
Enter a cell phone number or choose from your phonebook.Send Text
Allows you to customize the pre-defined message or create
a message on your own.
Edit Text
Sends the message as it is.Send
You can then preview the message, verify
the recipient as well as update the
message list, and send it to a connected
device, for example a USB drive.
Text Message Options
Messages
I’ll call you back in a few minutes.
I just left, I’ll be there soon.
Can you give me a call?
I’m on my way.
I’m running a few minutes late.
I’m ahead of schedule, so I’ll be there
early.
Messages
I’m outside.
I’ll call you when I get there.
OK
Yes
No
Thanks
Stuck in traffic.
Call me later.
LOL
375
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™ 2
Receiving a Text Message
When a new message arrives, an audible tone sounds and the screen displays a
pop-up with the caller name and ID, if supported by your cell phone. You can select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
To view the text message.View
For SYNC to read the message to you.Listen
To call the contact.Dial
To exit the screen.Ignore
Phone Settings
To enter the phone settings menu select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Phone
Settings
Then any of the following:
Connect, disconnect, add or delete a device, as well as save
it as a favorite.
Bluetooth Devices
To turn Bluetooth off or on.Bluetooth
If you want all calls to go directly to your voicemail and not
ring in the vehicle. When this feature is on, text message
notifications do not ring inside the cabin either.
Do Not Disturb
Switch the Emergency Assistance feature on or off. See
Information (page 378).
Emergency Assistance
Select the ring tone you want to hear when you receive a call.
Choose from possible system ring tones, your currently paired
cell phone’s ring tone, a beep, text-to-speech or a silent
notification.
Phone Ringer
Select a text message notification, if supported by your cell
phone. Choose from possible system alert tones, text-to-
speech or silent.
Text Message Notifica-
tion
376
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™ 2
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
If your cell phone is compatible, use this screen to adjust your
internet data connection. Select to make your connection
profile with the personal area network or to turn off your
connection. You can also choose to adjust your settings or
have the system always connect, never connect when
roaming or query on connect. Press ? for more information.
Internet Data Connection
To access features such as automatic phonebook download,
re-download your phonebook, add contacts from your cell
phone as well as delete or upload your phonebook.
Manage Phonebook
To have the system alert you when your cell phone is in
roaming mode.
Roaming Warning
Phone Voice Commands
Press the voice button and when
prompted say any of the following or a
similar command:
Voice command
Call Voicemail
Listen to Message
Reply to Message
Pair Phone
help
377
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™ 2
INFORMATION
Menu ItemItem
TrafficA
NotificationsB
CalendarC
SYNC-AppsD
Where Am I?E
If your vehicle is equipped with
Navigation, press the
Information button to access
these features. If your vehicle is not
equipped with Navigation, press the corner
of the touchscreen with the green tab.
Notifications
If your vehicle is equipped with
Navigation, touch the I
(Information) button to access
these features. If your vehicle is not
equipped with Navigation, touch the corner
of the touchscreen with the green tab.
378
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™ 2
Press Notifications, and then choose from any of the following services:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
The complete messageView
The messageDelete
MessagesDelete All
This screen displays any system messages
(such as an SD card fault).
Note: The system alerts you to any
messages by turning the information icon
yellow. After you read or delete the
messages, the icon returns to white.
Calendar
If your vehicle is equipped with
Navigation, touch the I
(Information) button to access
these features. If your vehicle is not
equipped with Navigation, touch the corner
of the touchscreen with the green tab.
Press Calendar. You can view the current
calendar by day, week or month.
Emergency Assistance (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
For this feature to work, your mobile
phone must be Bluetooth capable
and compatible with the system.
Always place your mobile phone in
a secure location inside your vehicle.
Failure to do so may cause serious
injury to someone or damage the phone
which could prevent Emergency Assistance
from working correctly.
Unless the Emergency Assistance
setting is set to on prior to a collision,
the system will not attempt to place
an emergency call which could delay the
response time, potentially increasing the
risk of serious injury or death. Do not wait
WARNINGS
for Emergency Assistance to make an
emergency call if you can do it yourself.
Dial emergency services immediately to
avoid a delayed response time. If you do
not hear Emergency Assistance within five
seconds of the crash, the system or cell
phone may be damaged or non-functional.
Note: Before setting the feature on, please
read the important notice about the
Emergency Assistance feature and the
Emergency Assistance privacy notice later
in this section for important information.
Note: When you switch Emergency
Assistance on or off, the setting apply to all
paired mobile phones. If you switch
Emergency Assistance off and a previously
paired phone connects when you switch the
ignition on, either a voice message plays, a
display message or icon is shown, or both.
Note: Every mobile phone operates
differently. While Emergency Assistance
works with most mobile phones, some
mobile phones may experience difficulties
using this feature.
If a crash deploys an airbag or triggers the
fuel pump shut off, the system may
contact emergency services by dialing 112
(the wireless emergency number that
works in most European countries) through
a paired and connected cell phone. For
more information about the system and
Emergency Assistance, visit the regional
Ford website.
379
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™ 2
Note: In case of an emergency, Emergency
Assistance, as a means of communication
aid, can help you contact specific rescue
departments of public security. Emergency
Assistance does not implement the rescue
operations. The local public security
department deploys specific rescue
operations according to the actual situation.
See Supplementary Restraints System
(page 27). Important information
regarding airbag deployment is in this
chapter.
See Roadside Emergencies (page 203).
Important information regarding the fuel
pump shut-off is in this chapter.
Setting Emergency Assistance On
If your vehicle is equipped with
Navigation, touch the I (Information)
button to access these features. If your
vehicle is not equipped with
Navigation, touch the corner of the
touchscreen with the green tab. Then
select:
Menu Item
Apps
Emergency Assistance
On
Display Options
If you switch on this feature, a confirmation
message appears in the display when your
cell phone connects and your vehicle
starts.
If you switch off this feature, the dialog
allows you to set a reminder.
Off with reminder provides a display and
voice reminder when your cell phone
connects and your vehicle starts.
Off without reminder provides a display
reminder only without a voice reminder
when your cell phone connects.
To make sure that Emergency Assistance
works correctly:
• The system must have power and be
working correctly at the time of the
crash and during feature activation and
use.
• You must switch on the feature before
a crash.
• You must have a cell phone connected
to the system.
• In certain countries, it may be
necessary to have a valid and
registered SIM card with credit in order
to place and maintain an emergency
call.
• A connected cell phone must have the
ability to make and maintain an
outgoing call at the time of the crash.
• A connected cell phone must have
adequate network coverage, battery
power and signal strength.
• Your vehicle must have battery power.
Note: This feature only works in a European
country or region where SYNC Emergency
Assistance can call the local emergency
services. Visit the regional Ford website for
details.
380
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™ 2
In the Event of a Crash
Note: Not every crash deploys an airbag or
triggers the fuel pump shut off (which may
turn on Emergency Assistance). However,
if Emergency Assistance is triggered the
system tries to contact the emergency
services. If a connected cell phone sustains
damage or loses connection to the system,
it searches for and tries to connect to any
available previously paired cell phone. The
system attempts to dial 112.
Before making a call:
• If you do not cancel the call and SYNC
makes a successful call, an
introductory message plays for the
emergency operator. After this
message, there is hands-free
communication between your vehicle's
occupants and the operator.
• The system provides a short window
of time (approximately 10 seconds) to
cancel the call. If you do not cancel the
call, the system attempts to dial 112.
• The system plays a message letting
you know when it attempts to make an
emergency call. You can cancel the call
by selecting the relevant button or by
pressing the end call button on the
steering wheel.
During a call:
• Emergency Assistance uses your
vehicle GPS or cellular network
information when available to
determine the most appropriate
language to use. It alerts the
emergency operator of the crash and
delivers the introductory message. This
may include your vehicle GPS
coordinates.
• The language the system uses to
interact with the occupants of your
vehicle may differ from the language
used to deliver information to the
emergency operator.
• After the delivery of the introductory
message the voice line opens so that
you can speak hands-free with the
emergency operator.
• When the line is connected, you must
be prepared to provide your name,
phone number and location
information immediately.
Note: While the system provides
information to the emergency operator, the
system plays a message letting you know
it is sending important information. It then
lets you know when the line is open to start
hands-free communication.
Note: During an Emergency Assistance call,
an emergency priority screen appears which
contains vehicle GPS coordinates when
available.
Note: It is possible that GPS location
information is not available at the time of
the crash; in this case, Emergency
Assistance will still attempt to place an
emergency call.
Note: It is possible that the emergency
services will not receive the GPS
coordinates; in this case, hands-free
communication with an emergency operator
is available.
Note: The emergency operator may also
receive information from the cellular
network such as cell phone number, cell
phone location and cell phone carrier name
independent from SYNC Emergency
Assistance.
Emergency Assistance may not work
if:
• Your cell phone or Emergency
Assistance hardware sustains damage
in the crash.
• The vehicle battery or the system has
no power.
• A crash ejects your cell phone from
your vehicle.
381
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™ 2
• You do not have a valid and registered
SIM card with credit in your cell phone.
• You are in a European country or region
where the SYNC Emergency Assistance
cannot place the call. Visit the regional
Ford website for details.
Important Information about the
Emergency Assistance Feature
Emergency Assistance does not currently
call emergency services in the following
markets: Albania, Belarus, Bosnia and
Herzegovina, Macedonia, Netherlands,
Ukraine, Moldova and Russia.
Visit the regional Ford website for latest
details.
Emergency Assistance Privacy Notice
When you switch on Emergency
Assistance, it may disclose to emergency
services that your vehicle has been in a
crash involving the deployment of an
airbag or activation of the fuel pump shut
off. This feature has the capability to
disclose your location information to the
emergency operator or other details about
your vehicle or crash to provide the most
appropriate emergency services.
If you do not want to disclose this
information, do not switch on the feature.
Where Am I?
For vehicle location and information select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Information
Help
Then select:
View your vehicle's current location, if your
vehicle is equipped with navigation. If your
vehicle is not equipped with navigation, you
do not see this button.
Where Am I?
CLIMATE
Press the lower right corner on the
touchscreen to access your climate control
features. Depending on your vehicle line
and option package, your climate screen
may look different from the screen shown
here.
Note: You can switch temperature units
between Fahrenheit and Celsius. See
Settings (page 347).
382
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™ 2
Power: Touch to switch the system off and on. Outside air cannot enter your
vehicle when you switch off the system.
A
Passenger settings: Touch + or – to adjust the temperature.B
Fan speed: Touch + or - to adjust fan speed.C
DUAL: Touch to switch on the passenger temperature control.D
Recirculated air: Touch to switch the recirculated air on or off which may
reduce the amount of time needed to cool down the interior and help reduce
odors from reaching the interior. Recirculated air also engages automatically
when MAX A/C or MAX defrost is selected and may be engaged manually in
any airflow mode except defrost. It may also turn off in all airflow modes except
MAX A/C and MAX defrost to reduce fog potential.
E
MAX A/C: Touch to cool your vehicle with recirculated air. Touch again for
normal A/C operation. MAX A/C distributes air through instrument panel vents
and may help reduce odors from entering your vehicle. MAX A/C is more
economical and efficient than normal A/C mode.
F
A/C: Touch to switch the air conditioning on or off. Use A/C with recirculated
air to improve cooling performance and efficiency. A/C engages automatically
in MAX A/C, defrost and footwell/defrost.
G
AUTO: Touch to engage automatic operation, then set the temperature using
the temperature control. The system automatically controls fan speed, airflow
distribution, A/C on or off and the use of fresh or recirculated air.
H
383
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™ 2
Manual airflow distribution controls: Footwell and Defrost: Distributes
air through the windshield defroster vents, demister vents, floor vents and rear
seat floor vents, and provides outside air to reduce window fogging. Panel:
Distributes air through the instrument panel vents. Panel and Floor: Distributes
air through the instrument panel vents, demister vents, floor vents and rear seat
floor vents. Floor: Distributes air through the demister vents, floor vents and
I
rear seat floor vents. Defrost: Touch to clear the windshield of fog and thin ice.
Touch again to return to the previous airflow selection. When on, defrost provides
outside air to reduce window fogging and distributes air through the windshield
defroster vents and demister vents. MAX Defrost: Distributes outside air
through the windshield air vents and automatically turns the air conditioning
on. The fan is set to the highest speed and the temperature to HI. When the air
distribution is set in this position, you are unable to select recirculated air or
manually adjust the fan speed and temperature control.
Driver settings: Touch + or – to adjust the temperature.J
Climate Control Voice Commands
Press the voice button on the
steering wheel controls. When
prompted, say any of the
following or a similar command:
Voice commands
Climate On
Climate Off
Adjust the temperature to between 15.0 - 30.0°C or
59 - 86°F.
Set temperature
NAVIGATION
Note: The navigation SD card must be in
the SD card slot to operate the navigation
system. If you need a replacement SD card,
contact an authorized dealer.
Note: The SD card slot is spring-loaded. To
remove the SD card, just push the card in
and release it. Do not attempt to pull the
card out to remove it; this could cause
damage.
Your navigation system is comprised of
two main features, destination mode and
map mode.
384
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™ 2
Destination Mode
To set a destination press the green corner of your touchscreen, then press:
Menu Item
Dest.
Choose any of the following:
My Home
Favourites
Previous Destinations
Place of interest
Emergency
Address
Junction
Town centre
Latitude/Longitude
Edit Route
Cancel Route
To set your destination, enter the
necessary information into the highlighted
text fields (in any order).
For an address destination entry, press:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Pressing this button makes the address
location appear on the map.
Go
To choose a previous destination, press:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
The last 20 destinations you have selected
appear.
Previous Destinations
385
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™ 2
Once you have chosen you destination press:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
To make this your destination. You can also choose to set this
as a waypoint (have the system route to this point on the way
to your current destination) or save it as a favorite. You can
then choose your route from three different options.
Set as Dest
Uses the fastest moving roads
possible.
Fastest Route
Uses the shortest distance possible.Shortest Route
Uses the most fuel-efficient route.Eco Route
Your pre-set selections are considered when your route is
calculated. For more information on these selections, see
Setting Your Navigation Preferences later in this chapter.
Avoid Areas
To begin navigation press:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
You can cancel the route or have the system demo the route
for you.
Start Route
During route guidance, you can press the talking bubble icon
that appears in the upper right navigation corner (green bar)
if you want the system to repeat route guidance information.
When the system repeats the last guidance instruction, it
updates the distance to the next guidance instruction, since
it detects when the vehicle is moving.
To set route preferences press:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
In route preferences you can set preferences like avoiding
motorways, tollroads, ferries and car trains or tunnels.
Route Prefs
Note: If your vehicle is on a recognized road
and you do not press the Start Route
button, the system defaults to the Fastest
Route option and begins guidance.
Michelin Travel Guide (If Equipped)
The Michelin travel guide is a service which
provides additional information about
certain places of interests (POI) such as
restaurants, hotels and touristic sites (if
available).
386
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™ 2
If you have paired your phone with the
system, you can press the phone button
to directly establish a call with the selected
POI.
Note: Not all features are available in all
languages and countries.
Places of Interest (POI)
Categories
Main categories
Fuel Station
Parking
Food, Drink and Dining
Automotive
Travel and Transportation
Shopping
Financial
Entertainment & Arts
Main categories
Emergency
Recreation & Sports
Community
Government
Health & Medicine
Domestic Services
To expand these listings, press the + in
front of the listing.
The system also allows you to sort
alphabetically or by distance.
Setting Your Navigation
Preferences
Select settings for the system to
take into account when planning
your route.
To access the settings options, press:
Menu Item
Settings
Navigation
Then select any of the following:
Map Preferences
Second Level Messages, Actions and DescriptionsMenu Item
Map Preferences
Then select any of the following:
Display your vehicle’ s previously traveled route with white dots.
You can switch this feature:
Breadcrumbs
OffOn
387
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™ 2
Second Level Messages, Actions and DescriptionsMenu Item
Have the system display your turn list:Turn List Format
Bottom to TopTop to Bottom
When parking point of interest notification is on, the icons
display on the map when you get close to your destination.
This may not be very useful in dense areas, and may clutter
the map when other points of interest display. Set the auto-
matic parking point of interest notification. You can switch this
feature:
Parking POI Notification
OffOn
Route Preferences
Second Level Messages, Actions and DescriptionsMenu Item
Route Prefer-
ences
Then select any of the following:
Choose to have the system display your chosen route type.Preferred Route
EcologicalFastest RouteShortest Route
Bypass route selection in destination programming. The system only
calculates one route based on preferred route setting.
Always use
Preferred Route
When activated, the system uses your selected route type to calculate
only one route to the desired destination.
Select a level of cost for the calculated Eco Route. The higher the
setting, the longer the time allotment is for the route.
Eco Time
Penalty
When activated, you can to choose to have the system avoid motor-
ways, toll roads, ferries, car trains and tunnels when planning your
route.
Avoid
388
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™ 2
Navigation Preferences
Second Level Messages, Actions and DescriptionsMenu Item
Navigation Preferences
Then select any of the following:
Have the system activate hazard spot warning in countries
where legally allowed.
Hazard Spot Warning
Select the type of prompts the system uses.Guidance Prompts
Have the system automatically fill in the country based on
the information already entered into the system. You can
switch this feature:
Auto-fill country
OffOn
Traffic Preferences
Second Level Messages, Actions and DescriptionsMenu Item
Traffic Preferences
Then select any of the following:
You can choose how you want the system to handle traffic
problems along your route.
Avoid Traffic Problems
Have the system reroute you to avoid
traffic incidents that develop and
impact the current route. The system
does not provide a traffic alert notific-
ation
Automatic
Have the system always provide a
traffic alert notification for traffic
incidents along the planned route.
You have a choice to accept or ignore
the notification before making the
route deviation.
Manual
Activate traffic alert notifications on or off.Traffic alert notification
You can choose to activate any of the following Traffic Icon
Settings.
Traffic Icon Settings
Have the system avoid traffic problems automatically.
389
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™ 2
Second Level Messages, Actions and DescriptionsMenu Item
Switch traffic alert notifications on or off.
Have the system display accident icons.
Have the system display traffic jam icons.
Have the system display closed roads.
Have the system display road work icons.
Have the system display incident icons.
Have the system display icons for areas where difficult driving
conditions may occur.
Have the system display icons for areas where snow and ice
on the road may occur.
Have the system display any smog icons.
Have the system display weather warning icons.
Have the system display where there may be reduced visibility.
Have the system display icons to recommend switching on
your radio for traffic announcements.
Avoid Area
Second Level Messages, Actions and DescriptionsMenu Item
Choose areas which you want the system to avoid when
calculating a route for you.
Avoid Areas
Then select any of the following:
Once you make a selection, the system tries to avoid the
area(s) if possible for all routes. To program an entry, press:
Add
To delete a section choose the listing on the screen. The screen
will change, then press:
Delete
390
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™ 2
Map Mode
Press the green bar in the upper right area
of the touchscreen to view map mode. Map
mode shows advanced viewing comprised
of both 2D city maps as well as 3D
landmarks (when available).
2D city maps show detailed outlines of
buildings, visible land use and land
elements and detailed railway
infrastructure for the most essential cities
around the globe. These maps also contain
features, such as town blocks, building
footprints and railways.
3D landmarks appear as clear, visible
objects that are typically recognizable and
have a certain tourist value. The 3D
landmarks appear in 3D map mode only.
Coverage varies and improves with
updated map releases.
Change the appearance of the map display
by repeatedly pressing the arrow button in
the upper left corner of the screen. It
toggles between three different map
modes:
Heading up (2D map) This
always shows the direction of
forward travel to be upward on the
screen. This view is available for
map scales up to 3 mph (5 km/h).
North up (2D map) always shows
the northern direction to be
upward on the screen.
3D map mode provides an
elevated perspective of the map.
This viewing angle can be adjusted
and the map can be rotated 180
degrees by touching the map twice, and
then dragging your finger along the shaded
bar with arrows at the bottom of the map.
You can also select the following
options:
Menu Items
Switches between
full map, street list
and exit view in
route guidance.
View
Displays a pop-up
box that allows
direct access to
navigation settings.
Menu
Press the speaker button on the
map to mute route guidance.
When the light on the button
illuminates, the feature is on. The speaker
button appears on the map only when
route guidance is active.
Re-center the map by pressing
this icon whenever you scroll the
map away from your vehicle’s
current location.
Auto Zoom
Press the green bar to access map mode,
then select the + or - zoom button to bring
up the zoom level and Auto buttons on the
touchscreen. When you press Auto, Auto
Zoom turns on and Auto displays in the
bottom left corner of the screen in the map
scale. The map zoom level then
391
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™ 2
synchronizes with vehicle speed. The
slower your vehicle is traveling, the farther
in the map zooms in; the faster your vehicle
is traveling, the farther the map zooms out.
To switch the feature off, just press the +
or - button again.
In 3D mode, rotate the map view by
swiping your finger across the shaded bar
with the arrows.
The ETA box under the zoom buttons
appears when a route is active and
displays the distance and time to your
destination. If the button is pressed, a pop
up appears with the destination listed (and
waypoint if applicable) along with mileage
and time to destination. You may also
select to have either the estimated time
to reach your destination or your estimated
arrival time.
Map Icons
Vehicle mark shows the current
location of your vehicle. It stays
in the center of the map display,
except when in scroll mode.
Scroll cursor allows you to scroll
the map; the fixed icon is in the
center of the screen. The map
position closest to the cursor is in
a window on the top center part of the
screen.
Address book entry default
icon(s) indicates the location on
the map of an address book entry.
This is the default symbol shown
after the entry has been stored to the
Address Book by any method other than
the map. You can select from any of the
22 icons available. You can use each icon
more than once.
Home indicates the location on
the map currently stored as the
home position. You can only save
one address from the Address
Book as your Home entry. You cannot
change this icon.
POI (Point Of Interest) icons
indicate locations of any point of
interest categories you choose to
display on the map. You can
choose to display three point of interest
categories on the map at one time.
Starting point indicates the
starting point of a planned route.
Waypoint indicates the location
of a waypoint on the map. The
number inside the circle is different
for each waypoint and represents
the position of the waypoint in the route
list.
Destination symbol indicates the
ending point of a planned route.
Next maneuver point indicates
the location of the next turn on the
planned route.
No GPS symbol indicates that
insufficient GPS satellite signals
are available for accurate map
positioning. This icon may display
under normal operation in an area with
poor GPS access.
Quick-touch Buttons
When in map mode, touch anywhere on
the map display to access the following
options:
392
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™ 2
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Touch this button to select a scrolled location on the map as
your destination. You may scroll the map by pressing your index
finger on the map display. When you reach the desired location,
simply let go and then touch this button.
Set as Dest
Touch this button to set the current location as a waypoint.Set as Waypoint
Touch this button to save the current location to your favorites.Save to Favorites
Touch this button to select icons to display on the map. You
can select up to three icons to display on the map at the same
time. You can switch these features:
POI Icons
OffOn
Touch this button to cancel the active route.Cancel Route
View/Edit Route
Access these features when a route is
active:
Menu Item
View Route
Edit Destination/Waypoints
Edit Turn List
Detour
Edit Route Preferences
Edit Traffic Preferences
Cancel Route
HERE is the digital map provider for the
navigation application. If you find map data
errors, you may report them directly to
HERE by going to www.here.com. HERE
evaluates all reported map errors and
responds with the result of their
investigation by e-mail.
Navigation Map Updates
Annual navigation map updates are
available for purchase through your
dealership.
Navigation Voice Commands
When in navigation mode, press
the voice button on the steering
wheel controls.
393
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™ 2
After the tone, say any of the following or a similar command:
Voice command
Destination
Zoom Out
Zoom In
Where Am I
help
The following commands can only be used when a navigation route is active:
Voice command
Reroute
Cancel Route
Show whole route
Repeat last instruction
Show route summary
One-shot Destination Street Address
To set a destination with voice
commands, you can say:
Action and Descrip-
tion
Voice Command
The system asks
you to say the full
address. The
system displays an
example on-screen.
Destination
address
You can then speak the address naturally,
such as "One two three four Main Street,
Anytown".
SYNC™ TROUBLESHOOTING
Your SYNC system is easy to use. However,
should questions arise, please refer to the
tables below.
To check your cell phone's compatibility,
visit the regional Ford website.
394
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™ 2
Cell phone issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Refer to your device's manual about
audio adjustments.
The audio control
settings on your cell
phone may be affecting
SYNC performance.
A lot of background
noise during a phone
call.
Try switching off your cell phone,
resetting it or removing the battery,
then trying again.
Possible cell phone
malfunction.
During a call, I can hear
the other person but
they cannot hear me.
Make sure that the microphone for
SYNC is not set to off.
Check your cell phone's compatib-
ility.
This is a cell phone-
dependent feature.
SYNC is not able to
download my phone-
book.
Try switching off your cell phone,
resetting it or removing the battery,
then trying again.
Possible cell phone
malfunction.
Try pushing your phonebook
contacts to SYNC by selecting the
option to add.
You must switch on your cell phone
and the automatic phonebook
download feature on SYNC.
Try pushing your phonebook
contacts to SYNC by selecting the
option to add.
Limitations on your cell
phone's capability.
The system says
"Phonebook down-
loaded" but my SYNC
phonebook is empty or
is missing contacts.
If the missing contacts are stored
on your SIM card, try moving them
to your cell phone's memory.
Remove any pictures or special ring
tones associated with the missing
contact.
You must switch on your cell phone
and the automatic phonebook
download feature on SYNC.
Check your cell phone's compatib-
ility.
This is a cell phone-
dependent feature.
I am having trouble
connecting my cell
phone to SYNC.
395
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™ 2
Cell phone issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Try switching off your cell phone,
resetting it or removing the battery,
then trying again.
Possible cell phone
malfunction.
Try deleting your device from SYNC
and deleting SYNC from your
device, then trying again.
Always check the security and auto
accept prompt settings relative to
the SYNC Bluetooth connection on
your cell phone.
Update your cell phone's firmware.
Switch off the auto download
setting.
Check your cell phone's compatib-
ility.
This is a cell phone-
dependent feature.
Text messaging is not
working on SYNC.
Try switching off your cell phone,
resetting it or removing the battery,
then trying again.
Possible cell phone
malfunction.
iPhone • Go to your cell phone's Settings.
• Go to the Bluetooth Menu.
• Make sure the connection status
shows Not Connected.
• Press the blue circle to enter the
next menu.
• Turn on Show Notifications.
• Turn on Sync Contacts.
Your iPhone is now set up to
forward incoming text messages to
SYNC.
Repeat these steps for every other
Sync vehicle you are connected to.
Your iPhone will only forward
incoming text messages to SYNC if
it is unlocked.
Replying to text messages using
SYNC is not supported by iPhone.
396
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™ 2
Cell phone issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Text messages from WhatsApp and
Facebook Messenger are not
supported.
Your cell phone must support
downloading text messages
through Bluetooth to receive
incoming text messages.
This is a cell phone-
dependent feature.
Audible text messages
do not work on my cell
phone.
Access the text messaging menu of
SYNC to see if your cell phone
supports the feature. Press the
PHONE button and then scroll and
select the option for text
messaging, then press OK.
Because each cell phone is
different, refer to your device's
manual for the specific cell phone
you are pairing. In fact, there can be
differences between cell phones
due to brand, model, service
provider and software version.
This is a cell phone limit-
ation.
USB and media issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Try switching off the device, resetting
it or removing the battery, then trying
again.
Possible device
malfunction.
I am having trouble
connecting my device.
Make sure you are using the manufac-
turer's cable.
Make sure correctly insert the USB
cable to the device and your vehicle's
USB port.
Make sure that the device does not
have an auto-install program or
active security settings.
397
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™ 2
USB and media issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Make sure you are not leaving the
device in your vehicle during very hot
or cold temperatures.
This is a device limita-
tion.
SYNC does not recog-
nize my device when I
start my vehicle.
Make sure you connect the device to
SYNC and press play on your device.
This is a device-
dependent feature.
Bluetooth audio does
not stream.
The device is not
connected.
Make sure that all song details are
populated.
Your music files may not
contain the correct
artist, song title, album
or genre information.
SYNC does not recog-
nize music that is on my
device.
Try replacing the corrupt file with a
new version.
The file may be
corrupted.
Some devices require you to change
the USB settings from mass storage
to media transfer protocol class.
The song may have
copyright protection
that does not allow it to
play.
From the iPhone or iPod Touch music
now playing screen, select the audio
device airplay icon at the very
bottom of your iPhone or iPod Touch
screen.
This is a device limita-
tion.
When I connect my
iPhone or iPod Touch
through the USB and
Bluetooth Audio at the
same time, I sometimes
do not hear any sound.
To listen to the iPhone or iPod Touch
through Bluetooth Audio, select
SYNC.
To listen to the iPhone or iPod Touch
through USB, select Dock Connector.
398
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™ 2
Voice command issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Review the cell phone voice commands
and the media voice commands at the
beginning of their respective sections.
You may be using the
wrong voice
commands.
SYNC does not
understand what
I am saying.
Refer to the audio display during an active
voice session to find a list of voice
commands there.
The microphone for the system is either in
your rear view mirror or in the headliner just
above the windshield.
You may be speaking
too soon or at the
wrong time.
Review the media voice commands at the
beginning of the media section.
You may be using the
wrong voice
commands.
SYNC does not
understand the
name of a song or
artist.
Say the song or artist exactly as the system
saved it. If you say, "Play Artist Prince", the
system does not play music by Prince and
the Revolution or Prince and the New
Power Generation.
You may not be saying
the name exactly as the
system saved it.
Make sure you are saying the complete title
such as "California remix featuring Jennifer
Nettles".
If the song titles are in capital letters, you
have to spell them. LOLA requires you to
say "L-O-L-A".
Do not use special characters in the title,
as the system does not recognize them.
The system may not be
reading the name the
same way you are
saying it.
Review the cell phone voice commands at
the beginning of the cell phone section.
You may be using the
wrong voice
commands.
SYNC does not
understand or is
calling the wrong
contact when I
want to make a
call.
You can also use the cell phone and media
suggestion lists to get a list of possible
suggestions when the system cannot fully
understand you. See Using Voice Recog-
nition (page 301).
399
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™ 2
Voice command issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Make sure you are saying the name exactly
as the system saved it. For example, if the
contact name is Joe Wilson, say "Call Joe
Wilson".
You may not be saying
the name exactly as the
system saved it.
The system works better if you list full
names such as "Joe Wilson" rather than
"Joe".
Do not use special characters such as 123
or ICE as the system does not recognize
them.
Contacts in your
phonebook may be very
short and similar or they
may contain special
characters.
If the contacts are in capital letters, you
have to spell them. JAKE requires you to
say "Call J-A-K-E".
Your phonebook
contacts may be in
capital letters.
SYNC applies the phonetic pronunciation
rules of the selected language to the
contact names stored on your cell phone.
You may be saying the
foreign names using the
currently selected
language for SYNC.
The SYNC voice
control system is
having trouble
recognizing
foreign names
stored on my cell
phone.
Helpful Hint: You can select your contact
manually. Press PHONE. Select the option
for phonebook and then contact name.
Press the soft-key option to hear it. SYNC
will read the contact name to you, giving
you some idea of the pronunciation it is
expecting.
400
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™ 2
Voice command issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
SYNC applies the phonetic pronunciation
rules of the selected language to the names
stored on your media player or USB flash
drive. It is able to make some exceptions
for very popular artist names (for example,
U2) such that you can always use the
English pronunciation for these artists.
You may be saying the
foreign names using the
currently selected
language for SYNC.
The SYNC voice
control system is
having trouble
recognizing
foreign tracks,
artists, albums,
genres and
playlist names
from my media
player or USB
flash drive.
SYNC uses a synthetically generated voice
rather than pre-recorded human voice.
SYNC uses text-to-
speech voice prompt
technology.
The system
generates voice
prompts and the
pronunciation of
some words may
not be accurate
for my language.
SYNC offers several new voice control
features for a wide range of languages.
Dialing a contact name directly from the
phonebook without pre-recording (for
example, “call John Smith”) or selecting a
track, artist, album, genre or playlist directly
from your media player (for example," play
artist Madonna).
401
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™ 2
General
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
SYNC only supports four languages in a
single module for text display, voice
control and voice prompts. The country
where you bought your vehicle dictates
the four languages based on the most
popular languages spoken. If the selected
language is not available, SYNC remains
in the current active language.
SYNC does not support
the currently selected
language for the instru-
ment cluster and
information and enter-
tainment display.
The language
selected for the
instrument cluster
and information
and entertainment
display does not
match the SYNC
language (phone,
USB, Bluetooth
audio, voice
control and voice
prompts).
SYNC offers several new voice control
features for a wide range of languages.
Dialing a contact name directly from the
phonebook without pre-recording (for
example, “call John Smith”) or selecting
a track, artist, album, genre or playlist
directly from your media player (for
example, play artist Madonna).
SYNC with Touchscreen System Reset
The system has a System Reset feature that can be performed if the function of a SYNC
feature is lost. This reset is intended to restore functionality and will not erase any
information previously stored in the system (such as paired devices, phonebook, call
history, text messages, or user settings). To perform a System Reset, press and hold
the Seek Up (>>) button while pressing and holding the Radio Power button. After
approximately 5 seconds the screen will go black. Allow 1-2 minutes for the system
reset to complete. You may then resume using the SYNC system.
402
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
SYNC™ 2
ELECTROMAGNETIC
COMPATIBILITY
WARNINGS
Your vehicle has been tested and
certified to legislations relating to
electromagnetic compatibility
(72/245/EEC, UN ECE Regulation 10 or
other applicable local requirements). It is
your responsibility to make sure that any
equipment you have fitted complies with
applicable local legislations. Have any
equipment fitted by an authorized dealer.
WARNINGS
The radio frequency transmitter
equipment, for example cellular
telephones and amateur radio
transmitters, may only be fitted to your
vehicle if they keep to the parameters
shown in the table below. There are no
special provisions or conditions for
installations or use.
Do not mount any transceiver,
microphones, speakers, or any other
item in the deployment path of the
airbag system.
Do not fasten antenna cables to
original vehicle wiring, fuel pipes and
brake pipes.
Keep antenna and power cables at
least 3.9 in (10 cm) from any
electronic modules and airbags.
403
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Appendices
Antenna PositionsMaximum output power Watt (Peak
RMS)
Frequency Band
MHz
350 W1-30
1, 250 W30-54
1, 250 W68-87.5
1, 250 W142-176
1, 250 W380-512
1, 210 W806-940
1, 210 W1200-1400
1, 210 W1710-1885
1, 210 W1885-2025
Note: After the installation of radio
frequency transmitters, check for
disturbances from and to all electrical
equipment in your vehicle, both in the
standby and transmit modes.
Check all electrical equipment:
• With the ignition on.
• With the engine running.
• During a road test at various speeds.
Check that electromagnetic fields
generated inside your vehicle cabin by the
transmitter installed do not exceed
applicable human exposure requirements.
END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT
SYNC End User License Agreement
(EULA)
• You have acquired a device ("DEVICE")
that includes software licensed by Ford
Motor Company and its affiliates
("FORD MOTOR COMPANY") from an
affiliate of Microsoft Corporation
("MS") . Those installed software
products of MS origin, as well as
associated media, printed materials,
404
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Appendices
and "online" or electronic
documentation ("MS SOFTWARE")
are protected by international
intellectual property laws and treaties.
The MS SOFTWARE is licensed, not
sold. All rights reserved.
• The MS SOFTWARE may interface with
and/or communicate with, or may be
later upgraded to interface with and/or
communicate with additional software
and/or systems provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY. The additional
software and systems of FORD
MOTOR COMPANY origin, as well as
associated media, printed materials,
and "online" or electronic
documentation ("FORD SOFTWARE")
are protected by international
intellectual property laws and treaties.
The FORD SOFTWARE is licensed, not
sold. All rights reserved.
• The MS SOFTWARE and/or FORD
SOFTWARE may interface with and/or
communicate with, or may be later
upgraded to interface with and/or
communicate with additional software
and/or systems provided by third party
software and service suppliers. The
additional software and services of
third party origin, as well as associated
media, printed materials, and "online"
or electronic documentation ("THIRD
PARTY SOFTWARE") are protected by
international intellectual property laws
and treaties. The THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. All
rights reserved.
• The MS SOFTWARE, FORD
SOFTWARE and THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE hereinafter collectively
and individually will be referred to as
"SOFTWARE".
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END
USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("EULA")
DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR COPY
THE SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE
SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICE, WILL
CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT TO
THIS EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF ANY
PREVIOUS CONSENT).
GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: This
EULA grants you the following license:
• You may use the SOFTWARE as
installed on the DEVICE and as
otherwise interfacing with systems
and/or services provide by or through
FORD MOTOR COMPANY or its third
party software and service providers.
Description of Other Rights and
Limitations
• Speech Recognition: If the
SOFTWARE includes speech
recognition component(s), you should
understand that speech recognition is
an inherently statistical process and
that recognition errors are inherent in
the process. Neither FORD MOTOR
COMPANY nor its suppliers shall be
liable for any damages arising out of
errors in the speech recognition
process.
• Limitations on Reverse Engineering,
Decompilation and Disassembly:
You may not reverse engineer,
decompile, or disassemble nor permit
others to reverse engineer, decompile
or disassemble the SOFTWARE, except
and only to the extent that such activity
is expressly permitted by applicable
law notwithstanding this limitation.
405
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Appendices
• Limitations on Distributing,
Copying, Modifying and Creating
Derivative Works: You may not
distribute, copy, make modifications
to or create derivative works based on
the SOFTWARE, except and only to the
extent that such activity is expressly
permitted by applicable law
notwithstanding this limitation.
• Single EULA: The end user
documentation for the DEVICE and
related systems and services may
contain multiple EULAs, such as
multiple translations and/or multiple
media versions (e.g., in the user
documentation and in the software).
Even if you receive multiple EULAs, you
are licensed to use only one (1) copy of
the SOFTWARE.
• SOFTWARE Transfer: You may
permanently transfer your rights under
this EULA only as part of a sale or
transfer of the DEVICE, provided you
retain no copies, you transfer all of the
SOFTWARE (including all component
parts, the media and printed materials,
any upgrades, and, if applicable, the
Certificate(s) of Authenticity), and the
recipient agrees to the terms of this
EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade,
any transfer must include all prior
versions of the SOFTWARE.
• Termination: Without prejudice to any
other rights, FORD MOTOR COMPANY
or MS may terminate this EULA if you
fail to comply with the terms and
conditions of this EULA.
• Security Updates/Digital Rights
Management: Content owners use
the WMDRM technology included in
your DEVICE to protect their
intellectual property, included
copyrighted content. Portions of the
SOFTWARE on your DEVICE use
WMDRM software to access
WMDRM-protected content. If the
WMDRM software fails to protect the
content, content owners may ask
Microsoft to revoke the SOFTWARE's
ability to use WMDRM to play or copy
protected content. This action does
not affect unprotected content. When
your DEVICE downloads licenses for
protected content, you agree that
Microsoft may include a revocation list
with the licenses. Content owners may
require you to upgrade the SOFTWARE
on your DEVICE to access their content.
If you decline an upgrade, you will not
be able to access content that requires
the upgrade.
• Consent to Use of Data: You agree
that MS, Microsoft Corporation, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, third party
software and systems suppliers, their
affiliates and/or their designated agent
may collect and use technical
information gathered in any manner as
part of product support services related
to the SOFTWARE or related services.
MS, Microsoft Corporation, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, third party
software and services suppliers, their
affiliates and/or their designated agent
may use this information solely to
improve their products or to provide
customized services or technologies to
you. MS, Microsoft Corporation, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, third party
software and systems suppliers, their
affiliates and/or their designated agent
may disclose this information to others,
but not in a form that personally
identifies you.
406
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Appendices
• Internet-Based Services
Components: The SOFTWARE may
contain components that enable and
facilitate the use of certain
Internet-based services. You
acknowledge and agree that MS,
Microsoft Corporation, FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, third party software and
service suppliers, their affiliates and/or
their designated agent may
automatically check the version of the
SOFTWARE and/or its components
that you are utilizing and may provide
upgrades or supplements to the
SOFTWARE that may be automatically
downloaded to your DEVICE.
• Additional Software/Services: The
SOFTWARE may permit FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, third party software and
service suppliers, MS, Microsoft
Corporation, their affiliates and/or their
designated agent to provide or make
available to you SOFTWARE updates,
supplements, add-on components, or
Internet-based services components
of the SOFTWARE after the date you
obtain your initial copy of the
SOFTWARE ("Supplemental
Components").
If FORD MOTOR COMPANY or third party
software and services suppliers provide or
make available to you Supplemental
Components and no other EULA terms are
provided along with the Supplemental
Components, then the terms of this EULA
shall apply.
If MS, Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates
and/or their designated agent make
available Supplemental Components, and
no other EULA terms are provided, then
the terms of this EULA shall apply, except
that the MS, Microsoft Corporation or
affiliate entity providing the Supplemental
Component(s) shall be the licensor of the
Supplemental Component(s).
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, MS, Microsoft
Corporation, their affiliates and/or their
designated agent reserve the right to
discontinue without liability any
Internet-based services provided to you or
made available to you through the use of
the SOFTWARE.
• Links to Third Party Sites: The MS
SOFTWARE may provide you with the
ability to link to third party sites through
the use of the SOFTWARE. The third
party sites are not under the control of
MS, Microsoft Corporation, their
affiliates and/or their designated
agent. Neither MS nor Microsoft
Corporation nor their affiliates nor their
designated agent are responsible for
(i) the contents of any third party sites,
any links contained in third party sites,
or any changes or updates to third
party sites, or (ii) webcasting or any
other form of transmission received
from any third party sites. If the
SOFTWARE provides links to third
party sites, those links are provided to
you only as a convenience, and the
inclusion of any link does not imply an
endorsement of the third party site by
MS, Microsoft Corporation, their
affiliates and/or their designated
agent.
• Obligation to Drive Responsibly:
You recognize your obligation to drive
responsibly and keep attention on the
road. You will read and abide with the
DEVICE operating instructions
particularly as they pertain to safety
and assumes any risk associated with
the use of the DEVICE.
UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA:
If the SOFTWARE is provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY separate from the
DEVICE on media such as a ROM chip, CD
ROM disk(s) or via web download or other
means, and is labeled "For Upgrade
Purposes Only" or "For Recovery Purposes
Only" you may install one (1) copy of such
407
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Appendices
SOFTWARE onto the DEVICE as a
replacement copy for the existing
SOFTWARE, and use it in accordance with
this EULA, including any additional EULA
terms accompanying the upgrade
SOFTWARE.
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS:
All title and intellectual property rights in
and to the SOFTWARE (including but not
limited to any images, photographs,
animations, video, audio, music, text and
"applets" incorporated into the
SOFTWARE), the accompanying printed
materials, and any copies of the
SOFTWARE, are owned by MS, Microsoft
Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, or
their affiliates or suppliers. The
SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You may
not copy the printed materials
accompanying the SOFTWARE. All title
and intellectual property rights in and to
the content which may be accessed
through use of the SOFTWARE is the
property of the respective content owner
and may be protected by applicable
copyright or other intellectual property
laws and treaties. This EULA grants you no
rights to use such content. All rights not
specifically granted under this EULA are
reserved by MS, Microsoft Corporation,
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party
software and service providers, their
affiliates and suppliers. Use of any on-line
services which may be accessed through
the SOFTWARE may be governed by the
respective terms of use relating to such
services. If this SOFTWARE contains
documentation that is provided only in
electronic form, you may print one copy of
such electronic documentation.
EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You
acknowledge that the SOFTWARE is
subject to U.S. and European Union export
jurisdiction. You agree to comply with all
applicable international and national laws
that apply to the SOFTWARE, including
the U.S. Export Administration Regulations,
as well as end-user, end-use and
destination restrictions issued by U.S. and
other governments. For additional
information, see
http://www.microsoft.com/exporting/.
TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grant
you any rights in connection with any
trademarks or service marks of FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, MS, Microsoft
Corporation, third party software or service
providers, their affiliates or suppliers.
PRODUCT SUPPORT: Product support
for the SOFTWARE is not provided by MS,
its parent corporation Microsoft
Corporation, or their affiliates or
subsidiaries. For product support, please
refer to FORD MOTOR COMPANY
instructions provided in the documentation
for the DEVICE. Should you have any
questions concerning this EULA, or if you
desire to contact FORD MOTOR
COMPANY for any other reason, please
refer to the address provided in the
documentation for the DEVICE.
No Liability for Certain Damages:
EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, ANY THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE OR SERVICES SUPPLIERS,
MS, MICROSOFT CORPORATION AND
THEIR AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO
LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS
LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY
REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL
PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL MS,
MICROSOFT CORPORATION AND/OR
THEIR AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR ANY
AMOUNT IN EXCESS OF U.S. TWO
HUNDRED FIFTY DOLLARS (U.S.
$250.00).
408
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Appendices
• THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES OTHER
THAN THOSE THAT MAY EXPRESSLY
BE PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW
VEHICLE.
Adobe
Contains Adobe® [Flash® Player] or
[AIR®] technology by Adobe Systems
Incorporated. This [Licensee Product]
contains [Adobe® Flash® Player]
[Adobe® AIR®] software under license
from Adobe Systems Incorporated,
Copyright ©1995-2009 Adobe
Macromedia Software LLC. All rights
reserved. Adobe, Flash and AIR are
trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorporated.
End User Notice
Microsoft® Windows® Mobile for
Automotive Important Safety
Information
This system Ford SYNC contains software
that is licensed to Manufacturer FORD
MOTOR COMPANY by an affiliate of
Microsoft Corporation pursuant to a license
agreement. Any removal, reproduction,
reverse engineering or other unauthorized
use of the software from this system in
violation of the license agreement is strictly
prohibited and may subject you to legal
action.
Read and follow instructions: Before
using your Windows Automotive- based
system, read and follow all instructions
and safety information provided in this end
user manual ("User's Guide"). Not
following precautions found in this User's
Guide can lead to an accident or other
serious consequences.
Keep User's Guide in vehicle: When kept
in the vehicle, the User's Guide will be a
ready reference for you and other users
unfamiliar with the Windows
Automotive-based system. Please make
certain that before using the system for
the first time, all persons have access to
the User's Guide and read its instructions
and safety information carefully.
WARNING
Operating certain parts of this
system while driving can distract
your attention away from the road,
and possibly cause an accident or other
serious consequences. Do not change
system settings or enter data non-verbally
(using your hands) while driving. Stop the
vehicle in a safe and legal manner before
attempting these operations. This is
important since while setting up or
changing some functions you might be
required to distract your attention away
from the road and remove your hands from
the wheel.
General Operation
Voice Command Control: Functions
within the Windows Automotive-based
system may be accomplished using only
voice commands. Using voice commands
while driving allows you to operate the
system without removing your hands from
the wheel.
Prolonged Views of Screen: Do not
access any function requiring a prolonged
view of the screen while you are driving.
Pull over in a safe and legal manner before
attempting to access a function of the
system requiring prolonged attention. Even
occasional short scans to the screen may
be hazardous if your attention has been
diverted away from your driving task at a
critical time.
409
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Appendices
Volume Setting: Do not raise the volume
excessively. Keep the volume at a level
where you can still hear outside traffic and
emergency signals while driving. Driving
while unable to hear these sounds could
cause an accident.
Use of Speech Recognition Functions:
Speech recognition software is inherently
a statistical process which is subject to
errors. It is your responsibility to monitor
any speech recognition functions included
in the system and address any errors.
Navigation Features: Any navigation
features included in the system are
intended to provide turn by turn
instructions to get you to a desired
destination. Please make certain all
persons using this system carefully read
and follow instructions and safety
information fully.
Distraction Hazard: Any navigation
features may require manual (non-verbal)
setup. Attempting to perform such set-up
or insert data while driving can seriously
distract your attention and could cause an
accident or other serious consequences.
Stop the vehicle in a safe and legal manner
before attempting these operations.
Let Your Judgment Prevail: Any
navigation features are provided only as
an aid. Make your driving decisions based
on your observations of local conditions
and existing traffic regulations. Any such
feature is not a substitute for your personal
judgment. Any route suggestions made by
this system should never replace any local
traffic regulations or your personal
judgment or knowledge of safe driving
practices.
Route Safety: Do not follow the route
suggestions if doing so would result in an
unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you would be
placed in an unsafe situation, or if you
would be directed into an area that you
consider unsafe. The driver is ultimately
responsible for the safe operation of the
vehicle and therefore, must evaluate
whether it is safe to follow the suggested
directions.
Potential Map Inaccuracy: Maps used
by this system may be inaccurate because
of changes in roads, traffic controls or
driving conditions. Always use good
judgment and common sense when
following the suggested routes.
Emergency Services: Do not rely on any
navigation features included in the system
to route you to emergency services. Ask
local authorities or an emergency services
operator for these locations. Not all
emergency services such as police, fire
stations, hospitals and clinics are likely to
be contained in the map database for such
navigation features.
Telenav Software End User License
Agreement
Please read these terms and conditions
carefully before you use the Telenav
Software. Your use of the Telenav
Software indicates that you accept these
terms and conditions. If you do not accept
these terms and conditions, do not break
the seal of the package, launch, or
otherwise use the Telenav Software.
These terms and conditions represent the
agreement (“Agreement”) between you
and Telenav, Inc. (“Telenav”) with respect
to the Telenav Software (including
upgrades, modifications, or additions
thereto) (collectively “Telenav Software”).
All references herein to “you” and “your”
means you, your employees, agents, and
contractors, and any other entity on whose
behalf you accept these terms and
410
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Appendices
conditions, all of whom shall also be bound
by this Agreement. Additionally, all of your
account information, as well as other
payment and personal information
provided by you to Telenav (directly or
through the use of the Telenav Software,
is subject to Telenav’s privacy policy
located at http://www.telenav.com.
Telenav may revise this Agreement and
the privacy policy at any time, with or
without notice to you. You agree to visit
http://www.telenav.com from time to time
to review the then current version of this
Agreement and of the privacy policy.
1. Safe and Lawful Use
You acknowledge that devoting attention
to the Telenav Software may pose a risk
of injury or death to you and others in
situations that otherwise require your
undivided attention, and you therefore
agree to comply with the following when
using the Telenav Software: (a) observe
all traffic laws and otherwise drive safely;
(b) use your own personal judgment while
driving. If you feel that a route suggested
by the Telenav Software instructs you to
perform an unsafe or illegal maneuver,
places you in an unsafe situation, or directs
you into an area that you consider to be
unsafe, do not follow such instructions; (c)
do not input destinations, or otherwise
manipulate the Telenav Software, unless
your vehicle is stationary and parked; (d)
do not use the Telenav Software for any
illegal, unauthorized, unintended, unsafe,
hazardous, or unlawful purposes, or in any
manner inconsistent with this Agreement;
(e) arrange all GPS and wireless devices
and cables necessary for use of the
Telenav Software in a secure manner in
your vehicle so that they will not interfere
with your driving and will not prevent the
operation of any safety device (such as an
airbag).
You agree to indemnify and hold Telenav
harmless against all claims resulting from
any dangerous or otherwise inappropriate
use of the Telenav Software in any moving
vehicle, including as a result of your failure
to comply with the directions above.
2. Account Information
You agree: (a) when registering the
Telenav Software, to provide Telenav with
true, accurate, current, and complete
information about yourself, and (b) to
inform Telenav promptly of any changes
to such information, and to keep it true,
accurate, current and complete.
3. Software License
Subject to your compliance with the terms
of this Agreement, Telenav hereby grants
to you a personal, non-exclusive,
non-transferable license (except as
expressly permitted below in connection
with your permanent transfer of the
Telenav Software license), without the
right to sublicense, to use the Telenav
Software (in object code form only) in
order to access and use the Telenav
Software. This license shall terminate upon
any termination or expiration of this
Agreement. You agree that you will use the
Telenav Software only for your personal
business or leisure purposes, and not to
provide commercial navigation services to
other parties.
3.1 License Limitations
You agree not to do any of the following:
(a) reverse engineer, decompile,
disassemble, translate, modify, alter or
otherwise change the Telenav Software
or any part thereof; (b) attempt to derive
the source code, audio library or structure
of the Telenav Software without the prior
express written consent of Telenav; (c)
remove from the Telenav Software, or
alter, any of Telenav’s or its suppliers’
trademarks, trade names, logos, patent or
411
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Appendices
copyright notices, or other notices or
markings; (d) distribute, sublicense or
otherwise transfer the Telenav Software
to others, except as part of your permanent
transfer of the Telenav Software; or (e)
use the Telenav Software in any manner
that (i) infringes the intellectual property
or proprietary rights, rights of publicity or
privacy or other rights of any party, (ii)
violates any law, statute, ordinance or
regulation, including but not limited to laws
and regulations related to spamming,
privacy, consumer and child protection,
obscenity or defamation, or (iii) is harmful,
threatening, abusive, harassing, tortuous,
defamatory, vulgar, obscene, libelous, or
otherwise objectionable; and (f) lease, rent
out, or otherwise permit unauthorized
access by third parties to the Telenav
Software without advanced written
permission of Telenav.
4. Disclaimers
To the fullest extent permissible pursuant
to applicable law, in no event will Telenav,
its licensors and suppliers, or agents or
employees of any of the foregoing, be
liable for any decision made or action
taken by you or anyone else in reliance on
the information provided by the Telenav
Software. Telenav also does not warrant
the accuracy of the map or other data used
for the Telenav Software. Such data may
not always reflect reality due to, among
other things, road closures, construction,
weather, new roads and other changing
conditions. You are responsible for the
entire risk arising out of your use of the
Telenav Software. For example but
without limitation, you agree not to rely on
the Telenav Software for critical navigation
in areas where the well-being or survival
of you or others is dependent on the
accuracy of navigation, as the maps or
functionality of the Telenav Software are
not intended to support such high risk
applications, especially in more remote
geographical areas.
TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS AND
EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES IN
CONNECTION WITH THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE, WHETHER STATUTORY,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALL
WARRANTIES WHICH MAY ARISE FROM
COURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOM OR
TRADE AND INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY
RIGHTS WITH RESPECT TO THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE. Certain jurisdictions do not
permit the disclaimer of certain warranties,
so this limitation may not apply to you.
5. Limitation of Liability
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER
APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO
CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV OR
ITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS BE
LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD PARTY
FOR ANY INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL, SPECIAL OR
EXEMPLARY DAMAGES (INCLUDING IN
EACH CASE, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
DAMAGES FOR THE INABILITY TO USE
THE EQUIPMENT OR ACCESS DATA,
LOSS OF DATA, LOSS OF BUSINESS,
LOSS OF PROFITS, BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION OR THE LIKE) ARISING
OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO
USE THE TELENAV SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
TELENAV HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DAMAGES
THAT YOU MIGHT INCUR FOR ANY
REASON WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, ALL DAMAGES
REFERENCED HEREIN AND ALL DIRECT
OR GENERAL DAMAGES IN CONTRACT,
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE) OR
OTHERWISE), THE ENTIRE LIABILITY OF
TELENAV AND OF ALL OF TELENAV’S
SUPPLIERS SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE
AMOUNT ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR
412
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Appendices
THE TELENAV SOFTWARE. SOME
STATES AND/OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT
ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION
OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS
OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO
YOU.
6. Arbitration and Governing Law
You agree that any dispute, claim or
controversy arising out of or relating to this
Agreement or the Telenav Software shall
be settled by independent arbitration
involving a neutral arbitrator and
administered by the American Arbitration
Association in the County of Santa Clara,
California. The arbitrator shall apply the
Commercial Arbitration Rules of the
American Arbitration Association, and the
judgment upon the award rendered by the
arbitrator may be entered by any court
having jurisdiction. Note that there is no
judge or jury in an arbitration proceeding
and the decision of the arbitrator shall be
binding upon both parties. You expressly
agree to waive your right to a jury trial.
This Agreement and performance
hereunder will be governed by and
construed in accordance with the laws of
the State of California, without giving
effect to its conflict of laws provisions. To
the extent judicial action is necessary in
connection with the binding arbitration,
both Telenav and you agree to submit to
the exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of
the County of Santa Clara, California. The
United Nations Convention on Contracts
for the International Sale of Goods shall
not apply.
7. Assignment
You may not resell, assign, or transfer this
Agreement or any of your rights or
obligations, except in totality, in connection
with your permanent transfer of the
Telenav Software, and expressly
conditioned upon the new user of the
Telenav Software agreeing to be bound by
the terms and conditions of this
Agreement. Any such sale, assignment or
transfer that is not expressly permitted
under this paragraph will result in
immediate termination of this Agreement,
without liability to Telenav, in which case
you and all other parties shall immediately
cease all use of the Telenav Software.
Notwithstanding the foregoing, Telenav
may assign this Agreement to any other
party at any time without notice, provided
the assignee remains bound by this
Agreement.
8. Miscellaneous
8.1
This Agreement constitutes the entire
agreement between Telenav and you with
respect to the subject matter hereof.
8.2
Except for the limited licenses expressly
granted in this Agreement, Telenav retains
all right, title and interest in and to the
Telenav Software, including without
limitation all related intellectual property
rights. No licenses or other rights which are
not expressly granted in this Agreement
are intended to, or shall be, granted or
conferred by implication, statute,
inducement, estoppel or otherwise, and
Telenav and its suppliers and licensors
hereby reserve all of their respective rights
other than the licenses explicitly granted
in this Agreement.
8.3
By using the Telenav Software, you
consent to receive from Telenav all
communications, including notices,
agreements, legally required disclosures
or other information in connection with the
Telenav Software (collectively, “Notices”)
electronically. Telenav may provide such
413
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Appendices
Notices by posting them on Telenav’s
Website or by downloading such Notices
to your wireless device. If you desire to
withdraw your consent to receive Notices
electronically, you must discontinue your
use of the Telenav Software.
8.4
Telenav’s or your failure to require
performance of any provision shall not
affect that party’s right to require
performance at any time thereafter, nor
shall a waiver of any breach or default of
this Agreement constitute a waiver of any
subsequent breach or default or a waiver
of the provision itself.
8.5
If any provision herein is held
unenforceable, then such provision will be
modified to reflect the intention of the
parties, and the remaining provisions of
this Agreement will remain in full force and
effect.
8.6
The headings in this Agreement are for
convenience of reference only, will not be
deemed to be a part of this Agreement,
and will not be referred to in connection
with the construction or interpretation of
this Agreement. As used in this Agreement,
the words “include” and “including,” and
variations thereof, will not be deemed to
be terms of limitation, but rather will be
deemed to be followed by the words
“without limitation.”
9. Other Vendors Terms and Conditions
The Telenav Software utilizes map and
other data licensed to Telenav by third
party vendors for the benefit of you and
other end users. This Agreement includes
end-user terms applicable to these
companies (included at the end of this
Agreement), and thus your use of the
Telenav Software is also subject to such
terms. You agree to comply with the
following additional terms and conditions,
which are applicable to Telenav’s third
party vendor licensors:
9.1 End User Terms Required by HERE
North America, LLC
The data (“Data”) is provided for your
personal, internal use only and not for
resale. It is protected by copyright, and is
subject to the following terms and
conditions which are agreed to by you, on
the one hand, and Telenav (“Telenav”) and
its licensors (including their licensors and
suppliers) on the other hand.
© 2013 HERE. All rights reserved.
The Data for areas of Canada includes
information taken with permission from
Canadian authorities, including: © Her
Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada, ©
Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada Post
Corporation, GeoBase®, © Department of
Natural Resources Canada.
HERE holds a non-exclusive license from
the United States Postal Service® to
publish and sell ZIP+4® information.
©United States Postal Service® 2014.
Prices are not established, controlled or
approved by the United States Postal
Service®. The following trademarks and
registrations are owned by the USPS:
United States Postal Service, USPS, and
ZIP+4.
The Data for Mexico includes certain data
from Instituto Nacional de Estadística y
Geografía.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS
414
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Appendices
9.2 End User Terms Required by NAV2
(Shanghai) Co., Ltd
The data (“Data”) is provided for your
personal, internal use only and not for
resale. It is protected by copyright, and is
subject to the following terms and
conditions which are agreed to by you, on
the one hand, and NAV2 (Shanghai) Co.,
Ltd (“NAV2”) and its licensors (including
their licensors and suppliers) on the other
hand.
© 20xx. All rights reserved.
Permitted Use.
You agree to use this Data together with
the Telenav Software solely for the internal
business and personal purposes for which
you were licensed, and not for service
bureau, time-sharing or other similar
purposes. Accordingly, but subject to the
restrictions set forth in the following
paragraphs, you agree not to otherwise
reproduce, copy, modify, decompile,
disassemble, create any derivative works
of, or reverse engineer any portion of this
Data, and may not transfer or distribute it
in any form, for any purpose, except to the
extent permitted by mandatory laws.
Restrictions.
Except where you have been specifically
licensed to do so by Telenav, and without
limiting the preceding paragraph, you may
not use this Data (a) with any products,
systems, or applications installed or
otherwise connected to or in
communication with vehicles, capable of
vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch,
real time route guidance, fleet
management or similar applications; or (b)
with or in communication with any
positioning devices or any mobile or
wireless-connected electronic or computer
devices, including without limitation
cellular phones, palmtop and handheld
computers, pagers, and personal digital
assistants or PDAs.
Warning.
The Data may contain inaccurate or
incomplete information due to the passage
of time, changing circumstances, sources
used and the nature of collecting
comprehensive geographic data, any of
which may lead to incorrect results.
No Warranty.
This Data is provided to you “as is,” and
you agree to use it at your own risk. Telenav
and its licensors (and their licensors and
suppliers) make no guarantees,
representations or warranties of any kind,
express or implied, arising by law or
otherwise, including but not limited to,
content, quality, accuracy, completeness,
effectiveness, reliability, fitness for a
particular purpose, usefulness, use or
results to be obtained from this Data, or
that the Data or server will be
uninterrupted or error-free.
Disclaimer of Warranty:
TELENAV AND ITS LICENSORS
(INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS AND
SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM ANY
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OF
QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States,
Territories and Countries do not allow
certain warranty exclusions, so to that
extent the above exclusion may not apply
to you.
415
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Appendices
Disclaimer of Liability:
TELENAV AND ITS LICENSORS
(INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS AND
SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO
YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY CLAIM,
DEMAND OR ACTION, IRRESPECTIVE OF
THE NATURE OF THE CAUSE OF THE
CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION ALLEGING
ANY LOSS, INJURY OR DAMAGES, DIRECT
OR INDIRECT, WHICH MAY RESULT FROM
THE USE OR POSSESSION OF THE
INFORMATION; OR FOR ANY LOSS OF
PROFIT, REVENUE, CONTRACTS OR
SAVINGS, OR ANY OTHER DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING
OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO
USE THIS INFORMATION, ANY DEFECT IN
THE INFORMATION, OR THE BREACH OF
THESE TERMS OR CONDITIONS,
WHETHER IN AN ACTION IN CONTRACT
OR TORT OR BASED ON A WARRANTY,
EVEN IF TELENAV OR ITS LICENSORS
HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some
States, Territories and Countries do not
allow certain liability exclusions or
damages limitations, so to that extent the
above may not apply to you.
Export Control.
You shall not export from anywhere any
part of the Data or any direct product
thereof except in compliance with, and
with all licenses and approvals required
under, applicable export laws, rules and
regulations, including but not limited to the
laws, rules and regulations administered
by the Office of Foreign Assets Control of
the U.S. Department of Commerce and the
Bureau of Industry and Security of the U.S.
Department of Commerce. To the extent
that any such export laws, rules or
regulations prohibit HERE from complying
with any of its obligations hereunder to
deliver or distribute Data, such failure shall
be excused and shall not constitute a
breach of this Agreement.
Entire Agreement.
These terms and conditions constitute the
entire agreement between Telenav (and
its licensors, including their licensors and
suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject
matter hereof, and supersedes in their
entirety any and all written or oral
agreements previously existing between
us with respect to such subject matter.
Governing Law.
The above terms and conditions shall be
governed by the laws of the State of Illinois
[insert “Netherlands” where European
HERE Data is used], without giving effect
to (i) its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii)
the United Nations Convention for
Contracts for the International Sale of
Goods, which is explicitly excluded. You
agree to submit to the jurisdiction of the
State of Illinois [insert “The Netherlands”
where European HERE Data is used] for
any and all disputes, claims and actions
arising from or in connection with the Data
provided to you hereunder.
Government End Users.
If the Data is being acquired by or on behalf
of the United States government or any
other entity seeking or applying rights
similar to those customarily claimed by the
United States government, this Data is a
“commercial item” as that term is defined
at 48 C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, is licensed in
accordance with these End-User Terms,
and each copy of Data delivered or
otherwise furnished shall be marked and
embedded as appropriate with the
following “Notice of Use,” and shall be
treated in accordance with such Notice:
416
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Appendices
NOTICE OF USE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
SUPPLIER) NAME: HERE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
SUPPLIER) ADDRESS: c/o Nokia, 425
West Randolph Street, Chicago, Illinois
60606
This Data is a commercial item as
defined in FAR 2.101 and is subject to
these End-User Terms under which this
Data was provided.
© 1987 – 2014 HERE – All rights reserved.
If the Contracting Officer, federal
government agency, or any federal official
refuses to use the legend provided herein,
the Contracting Officer, federal
government agency, or any federal official
must notify HERE prior to seeking
additional or alternative rights in the Data.
I. US/Canada Territory
A. United States Data. The End-User
Terms for any Application containing
Data for the United States shall contain
the following notices:
“HERE holds a non-exclusive license
from the United States Postal
Service® to publish and sell ZIP+4®
information.”
“©United States Postal Service®
20XX. Prices are not established,
controlled or approved by the United
States Postal Service®. The following
trademarks and registrations are
owned by the USPS: United States
Postal Service, USPS, and ZIP+4.”
B. Canada Data. The following provi-
sions apply to the Data for Canada,
which may include or reflect data from
third party licensors (“Third Party
Data”), including Her Majesty the Queen
in Right of Canada (“Her Majesty”),
Canada Post Corporation (“Canada
Post”) and the Department of Natural
Resources of Canada (“NRCan”):
1. Disclaimer and Limitation: Client
agrees that its use of the Third Party
Data is subject to the following provi-
sions:
a. Disclaimer: The Third Party Data
is licensed on an “as is” basis. The
licensors of such data, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
make no guarantees, representa-
tions or warranties respecting such
data, either express or implied,
arising by law or otherwise, including
but not limited to, effectiveness,
completeness, accuracy or fitness
for a particular purpose.
b. Limitation on Liability: The Third
Party Data licensors, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
shall not be liable: (i) in respect of
any claim, demand or action, irre-
spective of the nature of the cause
of the claim, demand or action
alleging any loss, injury or damages,
direct or indirect, which may result
from the use or possession of such
Data; or (ii) in any way for loss of
revenues or contracts, or any other
consequential loss of any kind
resulting from any defect in the
Data.
417
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Appendices
2. Copyright Notice: In connection with
each copy of all or any portion of the
Data for the Territory of Canada, Client
shall affix in a conspicuous manner the
following copyright notice on at least
one of: (i) the label for the storage
media of the copy; (ii) the packaging
for the copy; or (iii) other materials
packaged with the copy, such as user
manuals or end user license agree-
ments: “This data includes information
taken with permission from Canadian
authorities, including © Her Majesty
the Queen in Right of Canada, ©
Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada
Post Corporation, GeoBase®, © The
Department of Natural Resources
Canada. All rights reserved.”
3. End-User Terms: Except as other-
wise agreed by the parties, in connec-
tion with the provision of any portion
of the Data for the Territory of Canada
to End-Users as may be authorized
under the Agreement, Client shall
provide such End-Users, in a reason-
ably conspicuous manner, with terms
(set forth with other end user terms
required to be provided under the
Agreement, or as otherwise may be
provided, by Client) which shall include
the following provisions on behalf of
the Third Party Data licensors,
including Her Majesty, Canada Post
and NRCan:
The Data may include or reflect
data of licensors, including Her
Majesty the Queen in the Right of
Canada (“Her Majesty”), Canada
Post Corporation (“Canada Post”)
and the Department of Natural
Resources Canada (“NRCan”). Such
data is licensed on an “as is” basis.
The licensors, including Her Majesty,
Canada Post and NRCan, make no
guarantees, representations or
warranties respecting such data,
either express or implied, arising by
law or otherwise, including but not
limited to, effectiveness, complete-
ness, accuracy or fitness for a
particular purpose. The licensors,
including Her Majesty, Canada Post
and NRCan, shall not be liable in
respect of any claim, demand or
action, irrespective of the nature of
the cause of the claim, demand or
action alleging any loss, injury or
damages, direct or indirect, which
may result from the use or posses-
sion of the data or the Data. The
licensors, including Her Majesty,
Canada Post and NRCan, shall not
be liable in any way for loss of
revenues or contracts, or any other
consequential loss of any kind
resulting from any defect in the data
or the Data.
End User shall indemnify and save
harmless the licensors, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
and their officers, employees and
agents from and against any claim,
demand or action, irrespective of
the nature of the cause of the claim,
demand or action, alleging loss,
costs, expenses, damages or injuries
(including injuries resulting in death)
arising out of the use or possession
of the data or the Data.
4. Additional Provisions: The terms
contained in this Section are in addi-
tion to all of the rights and obligations
of the parties under the Agreement.
To the extent that any of the provi-
sions of this Section are inconsistent
with, or conflict with, any other provi-
sions of the Agreement, the provisions
of this Section shall prevail.
418
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Appendices
II. Mexico. The following provision applies
to the Data for Mexico, which includes
certain data from the Instituto Nacional
de Estadística y Geografía (“INEGI”):
A. Any and all copies of the Data and/or
packaging containing Data for Mexico
shall contain the following notice:
“Fuente: INEGI (Instituto Nacional de
Estadística y Geografía)”
III. Latin America Territory
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used
as described below corresponding to
the Territory (or portion thereof)
included in such copy:
NoticeTerritory
“INSTITUTO GEOGRAFICO
MILITAR DEL ECUADOR
AUTORIZACION N° IGM-
2011-01- PCO-01 DEL 25 DE
ENERO DE 2011”
Ecuador
“source: © IGN 2009 - BD
TOPO ®”
“Fuente: INEGI (Instituto
Nacional de Estadística y
Geografía)”
Guade-
loupe,
French
Guiana
and
Marti-
nique
Mexico
IV. Middle East Territory
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used
as described below corresponding to
the Territory (or portion thereof)
included in such copy:
NoticeCountry
“© Royal Jordanian
Geographic Centre”. The
foregoing notice requirement
for Jordan Data is a material
term of the Agreement. If
Client or any of its permitted
Jordan
sublicensees (if any) fail to
meet such requirement, HERE
shall have the right to
terminate Client’s license
with respect to the Jordan
Data.
B. Jordan Data. Client and its permitted
sublicensees (if any) are restricted from
licensing and/or otherwise distributing
HERE’s database for the country of
Jordan (“Jordan Data”) for use in Enter-
prise Applications to (i) non-Jordanian
entities for use of the Jordan Data solely
in Jordan or (ii) Jordan-based customers.
In addition, Client, its permitted subli-
censees (if any) and End-Users are
restricted from using the Jordan Data in
Enterprise Applications if such party is
(i) a non-Jordanian entity using the
Jordan Data solely in Jordan or (ii) a
Jordan-based customer. For purposes
of the foregoing, “Enterprise Applica-
tions” shall mean Geomarketing applic-
ations, GIS applications, mobile business
asset management applications, call
center applications, telematics applica-
tions, public organization Internet
applications or for providing geocoding
services.
419
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Appendices
V. Europe Territory
A. Use of Certain Traffic Codes in Europe
1. General Restrictions Applicable to
Traffic Codes. Client acknowledges
and agrees that in certain countries of
the Europe Territory, Client will need
to obtain rights directly from third
party RDS-TMC code providers to
receive and use the Traffic Codes in
the Data and to deliver to End-Users
Transactions in any way derived from
or based on such Traffic Codes. For
such countries, HERE shall deliver the
Data incorporating Traffic Codes to
Client only after receiving certification
from Client of its having obtained such
rights.
2. Display of Third Party Rights
Legends for Belgium. Client shall, for
each Transaction that uses Traffic
Codes for Belgium, provide the
following notice to the End-User:
“Traffic Codes for Belgium are
provided by the Ministerie van de
Vlaamse Gemeenschap and the
Ministèrie de l’Equipement et des
Transports.”
B. Paper Maps. With respect to any
license granted to Client relating to
making, selling or distributing paper
maps (i.e., a map fixed on a paper or
paper-like medium): (a) such license
with respect to Data for the Territory of
Great Britain is conditioned on Client’s
entering into and complying with a
separate written agreement with the
Ordnance Survey (“OS”) to create and
sell paper maps, Client’s paying to the
OS any and all applicable paper map
royalties, and Client’s complying with
the OS copyright notice requirements;
(b) such license for selling or otherwise
distributing for charge with respect to
Data for the Territory of Czech Republic
is conditioned on Client’ s obtaining prior
written consent from Kartografie a.s.;
(c) such license for selling or distributing
with respect to Data for the Territory of
Switzerland is conditioned on Client’s
obtaining a permit from Bundesamt für
Landestopografie of Switzerland; (d)
Client is restricted from using Data for
the Territory of France to create paper
maps with a scale between 1:5,000 and
1:250,000; and (e) Client is restricted
from using any Data to create, sell or
distribute paper maps that are the same
or substantially similar, in terms of data
content and specific use of color,
symbols and scale, to paper maps
published by the European national
mapping agencies, including without
limitation, Landervermessungämter of
Germany, Topografische Dienst of the
Netherlands, Nationaal Geografisch
Instituut of Belgium, Bundesamt für
Landestopografie of Switzerland,
Bundesamt für Eich-und Vermessung-
swesen of Austria, and the National
Land Survey of Sweden.
C. OS Enforcement. Without limiting
Section IV(B) above, with respect to
Data for the Territory of Great Britain,
Client acknowledges and agrees that
the Ordnance Survey (“OS”) may bring
a direct action against Client to enforce
compliance with the OS copyright notice
(see Section IV(D) below) and paper
map requirements (see Section IV(B)
above) contained in this Agreement.
D. Third Party Notices. Any and all
copies of the Data and/or packaging
relating thereto shall include the
respective Third Party Notices set forth
below and used as described below
corresponding to the Territory (or
portion thereof) included in such copy:
NoticeCountry(ies)
420
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Appendices
“© Bundesamt für Eich- und
Vermessungswesen”
Austria
“© EuroGeographics”
Croatia
Cyprus,
Estonia,
Latvia,
Lithuania,
Moldova,
Poland,
Slovenia
and/or
Ukraine
“source: © IGN 2009 – BD
TOPO ®”
France
“Die Grundlagendaten
wurden mit Genehmigung der
zuständigen Behörden
entnommen”
Germany
“Contains Ordnance Survey
data © Crown copyright and
database right 2010 Contains
Royal Mail data © Royal Mail
copyright and database right
2010”
Great
Britain
“Copyright Geomatics Ltd.”Greece
“Copyright © 2003; Top-Map
Ltd.”
Hungary
“La Banca Dati Italiana è
stata prodotta usando quale
riferimento anche cartografia
numerica ed al tratto
prodotta e fornita dalla
Regione Toscana.”
Italy
“Copyright © 2000; Norwe-
gian Mapping Authority”
Norway
“Source: IgeoE – Portugal”Portugal
“Información geográfica
propiedad del CNIG”
Spain
“Based upon electronic data
© National Land Survey
Sweden.”
Sweden
“Topografische Grundlage: ©
Bundesamt für Landestopo-
graphie.
Switzer-
land
E. Respective Country Distribution. Client
acknowledges that HERE has not
received approvals to distribute map
data for the following countries in such
respective countries: Albania, Belarus,
Kyrgyzstan, Moldova and Uzbekistan.
HERE may update such list from time to
time. The license rights granted to Client
under this TL with respect to the Data
for such countries are contingent upon
Client’s compliance with all applicable
laws and regulations, including, without
limitation, any required licenses or
approvals to distribute the Application
incorporating such Data in such
respective countries.
VI. Australia Territory
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used
as described below corresponding to
the Territory (or portion thereof)
included in such copy:
Copyright. Based on data provided
under license from PSMA Australia
Limited (www.psma.com.au).
421
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Appendices
Product incorporates data which is ©
20XX Telstra Corporation Limited, GM
Holden Limited, Intelematics Australia
Pty Ltd and Continental Pty Ltd.
B. Third Party Notices for Australia. In
addition to the foregoing, the End-User
Terms for any Application containing
RDS-TMC Traffic Codes for Australia
shall contain the following notice:
“Product incorporates traffic location
codes which is © 20XX Telstra Corpora-
tion Limited and its licensors.”
VII. China Territory
Personal Use Only
You agree to use this Data together with
[insert name of Client Application] for the
solely personal, non-commercial purposes
for which you were licensed, and not for
service bureau, time-sharing or other
similar purposes. Accordingly, but subject
to the restrictions set forth in the following
paragraphs, you may copy this Data only
as necessary for your personal use to (i)
view it, and (ii) save it, provided that you
do not remove any copyright notices that
appear and do not modify the Data in any
way. You agree not to otherwise reproduce,
copy, modify, decompile, disassemble or
reverse engineer any portion of this Data,
and may not transfer or distribute it in any
form, for any purpose, except to the extent
permitted by mandatory laws.
Restrictions
Except where you have been specifically
licensed to do so by NAV2 , and without
limiting the preceding paragraph, you may
not (a) use this Data with any products,
systems, or applications installed or
otherwise connected to or in
communication with vehicles, capable of
vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch,
real time route guidance, fleet
management or similar applications; or (b)
with or in communication with any
positioning devices or any mobile or
wireless-connected electronic or computer
devices, including without limitation
cellular phones, palmtop and handheld
computers, pagers, and personal digital
assistants or PDAs. You agree to cease
using this Data if you fail to comply with
these terms and conditions.
Limited Warranty
NAV2 warrants that (a) the Data will
perform substantially in accordance with
the accompanying written materials for a
period of ninety (90) days from the date
of receipt, and (b) any support services
provided by NAV2 shall be substantially as
described in applicable written materials
provided to you by NAV2, and NAV2’s
support engineers will make commercially
reasonable efforts to solve any problem
issues.
rigCustomer Remedies
NAV2 and its suppliers’ entire liability and
your exclusive remedy shall be, at NAV2’s
sole discretion, either (a) return of the price
paid, if any, or (b) repair or replacement of
the Data that do not meet NAV2’s Limited
Warranty and that are returned to NAV2
with a copy of your receipt. This Limited
Warranty is void if failure of the Data has
resulted from accident, abuse, or
misapplication. Any replacement Data will
be warranted for the remainder of the
original warranty period or thirty (30) days,
whichever is longer. Neither these remedies
nor any product support services offered
by NAV2 are available without proof of
purchase from an authorized international
source.
422
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Appendices
No Other Warranty:
EXCEPT FOR THE LMITED WARRANTY
SET FORTH ABOVE AND TO THE EXTENT
PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2
AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM
ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OWNERSHIP OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Certain warranty
exclusions may not be permitted under
applicable law, so to that extent the above
exclusion may not apply to you.
Limited Liability:
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY
APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2 AND ITS
LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT
BE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY
CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION,
IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE
CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR
ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR
DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH
MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR
POSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR
FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE,
CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY
OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR
INABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION,
ANY DEFECT IN THE INFROMATION, OR
THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR
CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A
WARRANTY, EVEN IF NAV2 OR ITS
LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. UNDER
NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL NAV2’s OR
ITS SUPPLIERS’ LIABILITY HEREUNDER
EXCEED THE PRICE PAID. Certain liability
exclusions may not be permitted under
applicable law, so to that extent the above
exclusion may not apply to you.
Export Control
You agree not to export to anywhere any
part of the Data provided to you or any
direct product thereof except in
compliance with, and with all licenses and
approvals required under, applicable
export laws, rules and regulations.
IP Protection
The Data are owned by NAV2 or its
suppliers and are protected by applicable
copyright and other intellectual property
law and treaties. The Data are provided
solely on the basis of a license to use, not
sale.
Entire Agreement
These terms and conditions constitute the
entire agreement between NAV2(and its
licensors, including their licensors and
suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject
matter hereof, and supersedes in their
entirety any and all written or oral
agreements previously existing between
us with respect to such subject matter.
Governing Law.
The above terms and conditions shall be
governed by the laws of the People’s
Republic of China, without giving effect to
(i) its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii) the
United Nations Convention for Contracts
for the International Sale of Goods, which
is explicitly excluded. Any dispute arising
from or in connection with the Data
provided to you hereunder shall be
submitted to the Shanghai International
Economic and Trade Arbitration
Commission for arbitration.
423
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Appendices
Gracenote® Copyright
CD and music-related data from
Gracenote, Inc., copyright© 2000-2007
Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright
© 2000-2007 Gracenote. This product and
service may practice one or more of the
following U.S. Patents #5,987,525,
#6,061,680, #6,154,773, #6,161,132,
#6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6.240,459,
#6,330,593 and other patents issued or
pending. Some services supplied under
license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S.
Patent: #6,304,523.
Gracenote and CDDB are registered
trademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenote
logo and logotype, and the "Powered by
Gracenote™" logo are trademarks of
Gracenote.
Gracenote® End User License Agreement
(EULA)
This device contains software from
Gracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell Street
Emeryville, California 94608
("Gracenote").
The software from Gracenote (the
"Gracenote Software") enables this device
to do disc and music file identification and
obtain music-related information, including
name, artist, track, and title information
("Gracenote Data") from online servers
("Gracenote Servers"), and to perform
other functions. You may use Gracenote
Data only by means of the intended End
User functions of this device.
This device may contain content belonging
to Gracenote's providers. If so, all of the
restrictions set forth herein with respect to
Gracenote Data shall also apply to such
content and such content providers shall
be entitled to all of the benefits and
protections set forth herein that are
available to Gracenote.
You agree that you will use the content
from Gracenote ("Gracenote Content") ,
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software,
and Gracenote Servers for your own
personal, non-commercial use only. You
agree not to assign, copy, transfer or
transmit the Gracenote Content,
Gracenote Software or any Gracenote
Data (except in a Tag associated with a
music file) to any third party. YOU AGREE
NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE
CONTENT, GRACENOTE DATA, THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS
EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive licenses
to use the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers will terminate if you
violate these restrictions. If your licenses
terminate, you agree to cease any and all
use of the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers. Gracenote,
respectively, reserve all rights in Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and the
Gracenote Servers and Gracenote Content,
including all ownership rights. Under no
circumstances will either Gracenote
become liable for any payment to you for
any information that you provide, including
any copyrighted material or music file
information. You agree that Gracenote
may enforce its respective rights,
collectively or separately, under this
agreement against you, directly in each
company's own name.
Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track
queries for statistical purposes. The
purpose of a randomly assigned numeric
identifier is to allow Gracenote to count
queries without knowing anything about
who you are. For more information, see the
web page at www.gracenote.com for the
Gracenote Privacy Policy.
424
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Appendices
THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEM
OF GRACENOTE DATA AND THE
GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED
TO YOU "AS IS". NEITHER GRACENOTE
MAKES ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF ANY
GRACENOTE DATA FROM THE
GRACENOTE SERVERS OR GRACENOTE
CONTENT. GRACENOTE COLLECTIVELY
AND SEPARATELY RESERVE THE RIGHT
TO DELETE DATA AND/OR CONTENT
FROM THE COMPANIES' RESPECTIVE
SERVERS OR, IN THE CASE OF
GRACENOTE, CHANGE DATA
CATEGORIES FOR ANY CAUSE THAT
GRACENOTE DEEMS SUFFICIENT. NO
WARRANTY IS MADE THAT EITHER
GRACENOTE CONTENT OR THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS ARE ERROR-FREE
OR THAT THE FUNCTIONING OF THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BE
UNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS NOT
OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY
ENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES
THAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TO
PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREE
TO DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE SERVICES
AT ANY TIME. GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHER
GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTS
THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE
OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY
GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL
GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS
OR LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASON
WHATSOEVER.
© Gracenote 2007.
Vehicle with SYNC only
United States and Mexico
FCC ID: KMHSG1G1
IC: 1422A-SG1G1
Mexico
Model: KMHSG1P1
NOM-121-SCT1-2009
The operation of this equipment is subject
to the following two conditions: (1) This
equipment or device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this
equipment or device must accept any
interference, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
Vehicle with SYNC with
Touchscreen/My Touch
FCC ID: KMHSYNCG2
IC: 1422A-SYNCG2
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
WARNING
Changes or modifications not
expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user's authority to operate the
equipment. The term "IC" before the radio
certification number only signifies that
Industry Canada technical specifications
were met.
The antenna used for this transmitter must
not be co-located or operating in
conjunction with any other antenna or
transmitter.
425
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Appendices
TYPE APPROVALS
RF Certification Logos for Tire
Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s)
Argentina
Abu Dhabi, Dubai
Brazil
European Union EU
Jordan
Malaysia
Moldova
426
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Appendices
Morocco
Philippines
Serbia
Singapore
South Africa
Taiwan
427
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Appendices
Ukraine
428
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Appendices
A
A/C
See: Climate Control...........................................92
About This Manual...........................................7
ABS
See: Brakes...........................................................139
ABS driving hints
See: Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes................................................................139
Accessories
See: Replacement Parts
Recommendation............................................10
ACC
See: Using Adaptive Cruise Control.............159
Active City Stop.............................................178
Principle of Operation.......................................178
Switching the System Off and On................179
Active Park Assist.........................................149
Deactivating the Active Park Assist
Feature...............................................................153
Parallel Parking, Perpendicular Parking,
Park Out Assist...............................................149
Troubleshooting the System..........................153
Adjusting the Steering Wheel....................53
Air Conditioning
See: Climate Control...........................................92
Air Vents.............................................................92
Center Air Vents....................................................92
Side Air Vents........................................................93
Alarm
See: Anti-Theft Alarm - Vehicles With: Integral
Battery.................................................................48
See: Anti-Theft Alarm - Vehicles With: Interior
Sensor.................................................................50
See: Anti-Theft Alarm - Vehicles With:
Perimeter Alarm...............................................52
Ambient Lighting...........................................66
Anti-Theft Alarm - Vehicles With:
Integral Battery............................................48
Alarm System........................................................48
Arming the Alarm................................................50
Disarming the Alarm...........................................50
Full and Reduced Guard....................................49
Triggering the Alarm...........................................49
Anti-Theft Alarm - Vehicles With: Interior
Sensor.............................................................50
Alarm System........................................................50
Arming the Alarm.................................................52
Disarming the Alarm...........................................52
Full and Reduced Guard.....................................51
Triggering the Alarm.............................................51
Anti-Theft Alarm - Vehicles With:
Perimeter Alarm...........................................52
Arming the Alarm.................................................52
Disarming the Alarm...........................................52
Appendices...................................................403
At a Glance.........................................................11
Audible Warnings and Indicators.............78
Automatic Transmission...................................78
Fuel Gauge..............................................................78
Headlamps On......................................................78
Key Outside Car....................................................78
Low Fuel Reminder..............................................78
Safety Belt Minder...............................................78
Audio Control...................................................53
Type One.................................................................53
Type Two.................................................................54
Audio Input Jack...........................................297
Audio System...............................................288
General Information.........................................288
Audio Troubleshooting..............................299
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/
CD..................................................................290
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: SYNC
2......................................................................294
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: SYNC.........292
Autolamps.........................................................61
Automatic Climate Control........................94
Mono Mode............................................................96
Switching Mono Mode Back On.....................96
Switching Mono Mode Off...............................96
Temperature Control..........................................96
Automatic High Beam Control..................62
Activating the System........................................63
Manually Overriding the System....................63
429
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Index
Automatic Transmission............................136
Automatic Transmission Adaptive
Learning.............................................................138
Emergency Park Position Release
Lever....................................................................137
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or
Snow..................................................................138
Selector Lever Positions..................................136
Auto-Start-Stop............................................127
Limitations of Use...............................................127
Switching the System On and Off...............128
Using Auto-Start-Stop Automatic
Transmission....................................................127
Using Auto-Start-Stop Manual
Transmission....................................................127
Autowipers.......................................................56
Auxiliary Heater..............................................99
Fuel Operated Heater.......................................102
Fuel Operated Parking Heater........................99
Auxiliary Power Points.................................116
12 Volt DC Power Point......................................116
Location..................................................................116
B
Blind Spot Information System...............173
Blind Spot Information System (BLIS™)
with Cross Traffic Alert.................................173
Bonnet Lock
See: Opening and Closing the Hood..........228
Brake Fluid Check........................................238
Brakes...............................................................139
General Information..........................................139
Breaking-In....................................................200
Brakes and Clutch.............................................200
Engine....................................................................200
Tires........................................................................200
Bulb Specification Chart..........................250
C
Cabin Air Filter...............................................103
Capacities and Specifications - 1.0L
EcoBoost™.................................................279
Capacities.............................................................279
Specifications......................................................279
Capacities and Specifications - 1.5L
Duratorq-TDCi Diesel..............................283
Capacities.............................................................283
Specifications.....................................................283
Capacities and Specifications - 1.5L
EcoBoost™................................................280
Capacities............................................................280
Specifications.....................................................280
Capacities and Specifications - 1.6L
Duratec-16V Ti-VCT (Sigma)/1.6L Flex
Fuel.................................................................281
Capacities..............................................................281
Specifications.....................................................282
Capacities and Specifications - 1.6L
Duratorq-TDCi (DV) Diesel..................284
Capacities............................................................284
Specifications.....................................................285
Capacities and Specifications - 2.0L
Duratorq-TDCi (DW) Diesel.................286
Capacities............................................................286
Specifications.....................................................286
Capacities and Specifications................275
Car Wash
See: Cleaning the Exterior...............................251
Catalytic Converter......................................132
Driving with a Catalytic Converter................132
Center Console................................................117
Changing a Bulb...........................................243
Central High Mounted Brake Lamp............248
Front Fog Lamp..................................................246
Headlamp.............................................................243
Interior Lamps.....................................................249
Rear lamps...........................................................246
Changing a Fuse...........................................226
Fuses......................................................................226
Changing a Road Wheel...........................262
Assembling the Wheel Brace.......................266
Installing a Road Wheel..................................268
Jacking and Lifting Points...............................265
Locking Lug Nuts...............................................262
Removing a Road Wheel.................................267
Removing the Wheel Trim..............................267
Stowing the Flat Tire........................................269
Vehicle Jack.........................................................264
Vehicles With a Spare Wheel........................262
Changing the 12V Battery.........................239
Remove and Reinstall the Battery..............240
430
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Index
Changing the Wiper Blades......................241
Changing the Front Wiper Blades...............242
Changing the Rear Window Wiper
Blade..................................................................242
Setting the Front Wipers in the Service
Position..............................................................241
Checking MyKey System Status...............36
MyKey Distance....................................................36
Number of Admin Keys......................................36
Number of MyKeys..............................................36
Checking the Wiper Blades.......................241
Child Safety........................................................17
Child Safety Locks - Vehicles With:
Mechanical Child Proof Locks................24
Left-Hand Side......................................................24
Right-Hand Side...................................................24
Child Safety Locks - Vehicles With:
Remote Child Proof Locks.......................24
Child Seat Positioning..................................20
Cigar Lighter....................................................116
Cleaning the Alloy Wheels.......................252
Cleaning the Exterior...................................251
Body Paintwork Preservation.........................251
Cleaning the Chrome Trim..............................251
Cleaning the Headlamps.................................251
Cleaning the Rear Window..............................251
Cleaning the Interior....................................251
Instrument Cluster Screens, LCD Screens
and Radio Screens........................................251
Rear Windows.....................................................252
Safety Belts...........................................................251
Clearing All MyKeys.......................................34
Climate............................................................382
Climate Control Voice Commands.............384
Climate Control...............................................92
Principle of Operation........................................92
Clutch Fluid Check......................................239
Cold Weather Precautions........................201
Collision Warning System.........................180
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION...........................180
Coolant Check
See: Engine Coolant Check............................237
Cornering Lamps............................................65
Creating a MyKey............................................34
Vehicles with Keyless Starting........................34
Vehicles without Keyless Starting.................34
Cruise Control..................................................54
Principle of Operation.......................................158
Type 1........................................................................54
Type 2.......................................................................55
Cruise control
See: Using Cruise Control................................158
Cup Holders......................................................117
D
Data Recording..................................................9
Daytime Running Lamps.............................62
Diesel Particulate Filter..............................124
Regeneration........................................................124
Digital Radio..................................................295
Digital Radio - Vehicles With: SYNC
2......................................................................296
Direction Indicators.......................................65
Dog Guard.......................................................185
Installing behind the front seats..................186
Installing behind the rear seats....................186
DPF
See: Diesel Particulate Filter...........................124
Driver Airbag.....................................................27
Driver Alert.......................................................167
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION............................167
USING DRIVER ALERT.....................................168
Driving Aids.....................................................166
Driving Hints..................................................200
Driving Through Water................................201
DRL
See: Daytime Running Lamps.........................62
E
Eco Mode.........................................................179
Resetting Eco Mode..........................................180
Type 1......................................................................180
Type 2 and 3.........................................................180
Economical Driving....................................200
Accessories...........................................................201
Anticipation..........................................................201
Efficient Speed....................................................201
Electrical Systems..............................................201
Gear Shifting.......................................................200
Tire Pressures.....................................................200
Electromagnetic Compatibility..............403
431
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Index
End User License Agreement.................404
SYNC End User License Agreement
(EULA).............................................................404
Engine Block Heater....................................125
Using the Engine Block Heater......................126
Engine Coolant Check................................237
Adding Engine Coolant....................................238
Engine Immobilizer
See: Passive Anti-Theft System.....................48
Engine Oil Check...........................................237
Adding Engine Oil...............................................237
Engine Oil Dipstick - 1.0L
EcoBoost™.................................................236
Engine Oil Dipstick - 1.5L Duratorq-TDCi
Diesel/1.6L Duratorq-TDCi (DV)
Diesel.............................................................236
Engine Oil Dipstick - 1.5L
EcoBoost™.................................................236
Engine Oil Dipstick - 1.6L Duratec-16V
Ti-VCT (Sigma)/1.6L Flex Fuel...........236
Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.0L Duratorq-TDCi
(DW) Diesel.................................................237
Entertainment...............................................361
AM/FM/DAB Radio............................................361
Bluetooth Audio.................................................368
CD............................................................................364
Line In.....................................................................368
SD Card Slot and USB Port...........................365
Supported Media Players, Formats and
Metadata Information................................368
Event Data Recording
See: Data Recording..............................................9
Exterior Mirrors................................................70
Blind Spot Monitor................................................71
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors.................................71
Heated Exterior Mirrors........................................71
Power Exterior Mirrors........................................70
Power-Folding Mirrors.........................................71
F
Fastening the Safety Belts..........................25
Using Safety Belts During Pregnancy...........25
First Aid Kit.....................................................203
Flat Tire Inflation
See: Temporary Mobility Kit...........................253
Floor Mats.......................................................201
Fog Lamps - Front
See: Front Fog Lamps........................................63
Fog Lamps - Rear
See: Rear Fog Lamps..........................................63
Front Exterior Overview.................................11
Front Fog Lamps............................................63
Front Parking Aid..........................................145
Front Sensing System......................................146
Obstacle Distance Indicator...........................147
Fuel and Refueling.......................................129
Fuel Burning Heater
See: Auxiliary Heater..........................................99
Fuel Consumption Figures.......................287
Fuel Consumption........................................134
Calculating Fuel Economy..............................135
Filling the Fuel Tank...........................................135
Fuel Filler Funnel Location.........................131
Fuel Quality - Diesel......................................131
Long-Term Storage.............................................131
Fuel Quality - E85........................................130
Choosing the Right Fuel..................................130
Fuel Quality - Gasoline...............................130
Long-Term Storage............................................130
Fuel Shutoff...................................................203
Fuse Box Locations....................................206
Engine Compartment Fuse Box..................206
Luggage Compartment Fuse Box...............206
Passenger Compartment Fuse Box...........206
Fuses................................................................206
Fuse Specification Chart - Vehicles Built
From: 23-06-2015......................................217
Engine Compartment Fuse Box.....................217
Luggage Compartment Fuse Box................223
Passenger Compartment Fuse Box.............221
Fuse Specification Chart - Vehicles Built
Up To: 22-06-2015...................................207
Engine Compartment Fuse Box...................207
Luggage Compartment Fuse Box.................213
Passenger Compartment Fuse Box..............211
G
Gauges................................................................74
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge.............75
Fuel Gauge..............................................................75
Information Display.............................................74
General Information on Radio
Frequencies...................................................29
432
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Index
Global Opening and Closing......................69
Global Closing.......................................................70
Global Opening.....................................................69
H
Handbrake
See: Parking Brake.............................................140
Hands-Free Power Liftgate........................44
.....................................................................................44
Opening and Closing the Liftgate..................45
Setting the Liftgate Open Height...................45
Hazard Warning Flashers.........................203
Headlamp Exit Delay.....................................61
Headlamp Leveling.......................................64
Recommended Headlamp Leveling Switch
Positions.............................................................64
Headlamp Washers......................................59
Head Restraints............................................104
Adjusting the Head Restraints......................104
Removing the Head Restraints.....................105
Heated Seats...................................................115
Heated Steering Wheel................................55
Heated Windows and Mirrors...................99
Heated Exterior Mirrors......................................99
Heated Rear Window.........................................99
Heated Windshield........................................99
Heating
See: Climate Control...........................................92
Hill Start Assist.............................................140
Switching the System On and Off................141
Using Hill Start Assist.........................................141
Hints on Controlling the Interior
Climate...........................................................96
Cooling the Interior Quickly..............................98
General Hints.........................................................96
Heating the Interior Quickly..............................97
Recommended Settings for Cooling ...........98
Recommended Settings for Heating............97
Side Window Defogging in Cold
Weather..............................................................98
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes............................................................139
Hood Lock
See: Opening and Closing the Hood..........228
I
Ignition Switch................................................118
Information Display Control.......................55
Information Displays....................................80
General Information...........................................80
Information....................................................378
Calendar................................................................379
Emergency Assistance.....................................379
Notifications........................................................378
Information Messages.................................83
Active City Stop....................................................84
Airbag.......................................................................84
Alarm........................................................................84
Battery and Charging System.........................85
Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic
Alert System.....................................................85
Child Safety Locks...............................................86
Engine......................................................................86
Hill Start Assist.....................................................86
Keyless Vehicle.....................................................86
Lane Keeping Aid..................................................87
Lighting.....................................................................87
Maintenance..........................................................88
Message Indicator...............................................84
MyKey.......................................................................88
Occupant Protection..........................................88
Park Aid...................................................................89
Park Brake...............................................................89
Power Steering.....................................................89
Starting System ...................................................89
Start-Stop..............................................................90
Transmission.........................................................90
Tyre Pressure Monitoring System...................91
Installing Child Seats......................................17
Attaching a Child Seat With a Support
Leg........................................................................20
Attaching a Child Seat With Top
Tethers..................................................................19
Booster Seats.........................................................18
Child Seats for Different Mass Groups..........17
ISOFIX Anchor Points..........................................19
Top Tether Anchor Points .................................19
Instrument Cluster.........................................74
Instrument Lighting Dimmer......................61
Instrument Panel Overview - LHD............14
Instrument Panel Overview - RHD...........15
433
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Index
Interior Lamps.................................................65
Front Interior Lamps (If Equipped)...............66
Interior Mirror.....................................................71
Auto-Dimming Mirror...........................................71
Introduction.........................................................7
J
Jump Starting the Vehicle........................204
To Connect the Booster Cables...................204
To Start the Engine...........................................204
K
Keyless Entry....................................................45
Disabled Keys.........................................................47
General Information............................................45
Locking and Unlocking the Doors with the
Key Blade............................................................47
Locking Your Vehicle...........................................46
Passive Key.............................................................46
Unlocking Your Vehicle.......................................47
Keys and Remote Controls.........................29
L
Lane Keeping System.................................169
Switching the System On and Off...............169
Lighting Control..............................................60
Headlamp Flasher................................................61
High Beams............................................................60
Lighting..............................................................60
General Information...........................................60
Load Carriers
See: Roof Racks and Load Carriers.............185
Load Carrying.................................................184
General Information..........................................184
Locking and Unlocking.................................38
Locking and Unlocking the Doors from
Inside....................................................................38
Locking and Unlocking the Doors
Individually with the Key ..............................39
Locking and Unlocking the Doors with the
Key........................................................................38
Opening the Liftgate...........................................39
Power Door Locks................................................38
Remote Control....................................................38
Locks...................................................................38
Luggage Anchor Points..............................184
Luggage Retention Nets..................................184
Luggage Covers.............................................185
Removing the Cover..........................................185
Lug Nuts
See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................262
Lug Nuts...........................................................274
M
Maintenance..................................................228
General Information.........................................228
Manual Climate Control..............................93
Manual Liftgate - Compact MAV
(5-seater)......................................................40
Closing the Liftgate..............................................41
Opening the Liftgate..........................................40
Manual Liftgate - Grand MAV (5+2
seater)..............................................................41
Closing the Liftgate.............................................42
Opening the Liftgate............................................41
Manual Seats.................................................105
Adjusting the Angle of the Seatback..........106
Adjusting the Height of the Driver
Seat....................................................................106
Adjusting the Lumbar Support.....................106
Moving the Seat Backward and
Forward.............................................................105
Manual Transmission..................................136
Selecting Reverse Gear....................................136
Media Hub......................................................298
Message Center
See: Information Displays................................80
Mirrors
See: Heated Windows and Mirrors................99
See: Windows and Mirrors...............................68
Mobile Communications
Equipment......................................................10
MyKey Troubleshooting...............................36
MyKey™.............................................................33
Principle of Operation.........................................33
434
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Index
N
Navigation......................................................384
Destination Mode..............................................385
Map Mode.............................................................391
Michelin Travel Guide......................................386
Navigation Map Updates................................393
Navigation Voice Commands.......................393
Places of Interest (POI) Categories............387
Quick-touch Buttons........................................392
Setting Your Navigation Preferences.........387
O
Oil Check
See: Engine Oil Check.......................................237
Opening and Closing the Hood..............228
Closing the Hood...............................................229
Opening the Hood.............................................228
Overhead Console.........................................117
P
Parking Aids....................................................144
Principle of Operation.......................................144
Parking Brake.................................................140
All Vehicles...........................................................140
Vehicles With Automatic
Transmission...................................................140
Vehicles With Manual Transmission...........140
Passenger Airbag............................................27
.....................................................................................27
Passive Anti-Theft System........................48
Arming the Engine Immobilizer......................48
Coded Keys............................................................48
Disarming the Engine Immobilizer................48
Principle of Operation........................................48
PATS
See: Passive Anti-Theft System.....................48
Phone...............................................................370
Making Calls.........................................................372
Pairing Subsequent Cell Phones..................372
Pairing Your Cell Phone for the First
Time....................................................................371
Phone Menu Options........................................373
Phone Settings...................................................376
Phone Voice Commands.................................377
Receiving Calls....................................................373
Text Messaging...................................................374
Post-Crash Alert System..........................205
Power Door Locks
See: Locking and Unlocking.............................38
Power Liftgate.................................................42
Obstacle Detection.............................................44
Opening and Closing the Liftgate..................42
Setting the Liftgate Open Height...................43
Stopping the Liftgate Movement...................43
Power Seats...................................................106
Power Windows.............................................68
Accessory Delay...................................................69
Bounce-Back.........................................................68
One-Touch Down................................................68
One-Touch Up......................................................68
Window Lock.........................................................68
Push Button Ignition Switch......................118
Failure to Start......................................................119
Fast Restart............................................................121
Starting Your Vehicle..........................................119
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Moving...............................................................120
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Stationary.........................................................120
Switching the Ignition On to Accessory
Mode....................................................................119
R
Rear Exterior Overview..................................12
Rear Fog Lamps..............................................63
Rear Parking Aid............................................144
Rear Sensing System........................................144
Rear Seats.......................................................107
Second row seats - C-MAX.............................107
Second row seats - Grand C-MAX................112
Third row seats - Grand C-MAX.....................114
435
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Index
Rear Under Floor Storage..........................184
Adjustable Load Floor......................................184
Cargo Management System..........................184
Rear View Camera........................................155
Using the Rear View Camera System.........155
Rear View Camera
See: Rear View Camera....................................155
Rear Window Wiper and Washers...........58
Rear Window Washer.........................................59
Rear Window Wiper............................................58
Reduced Engine Performance...............200
Refueling..........................................................133
Remote Control - Vehicles With: Keyless
Entry.................................................................29
Changing the Remote Control Battery........30
Intelligent Access Key.........................................29
Locating Your Vehicle...........................................31
Programming a New Remote Control.........30
Remote Control - Vehicles With: Remote
Flip Key.............................................................31
Changing the Remote Control Battery..........31
Locating Your Vehicle..........................................32
Programming a New Remote Control...........31
Reprogramming the Unlocking
Function...............................................................31
Removing a Headlamp..............................243
Repairing Minor Paint Damage...............252
Replacement Parts
Recommendation........................................10
Collision Repairs....................................................10
Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical
Repairs.................................................................10
Warranty on Replacement Parts....................10
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote
Control.............................................................32
Roadside Emergencies..............................203
Roof Racks and Load Carriers.................185
Running-In
See: Breaking-In................................................200
Running Out of Fuel......................................131
Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel
Container...........................................................132
Filling a Portable Fuel Container....................131
S
Safety Belt Height Adjustment.................25
Safety Belt Minder.........................................26
Turning the Safety Belt Minder Off................26
Safety Belts......................................................25
Safety Precautions.......................................129
Seats.................................................................104
Security..............................................................48
Settings............................................................347
Clock......................................................................348
Display...................................................................348
Settings..................................................................352
Sound....................................................................350
Vehicle...................................................................350
Side Airbags.....................................................28
Side Curtain Airbags.....................................28
Side Sensing System...................................147
Distance Indication............................................148
Sitting in the Correct Position.................104
Sliding Door.....................................................40
Snow Chains
See: Using Snow Chains..................................257
Speed Control
See: Cruise Control............................................158
Speed Limiter - Vehicles With: Adaptive
Cruise Control..............................................167
Principle of Operation.......................................167
Using the System................................................167
Speed Limiter - Vehicles With: Cruise
Control...........................................................166
Principle of Operation......................................166
Using the System...............................................166
Stability Control............................................143
Principle of Operation.......................................143
Starter Switch
See: Ignition Switch............................................118
Starting a Diesel Engine.............................124
Cold or Hot Engine.............................................124
Failure to Start.....................................................124
Starting a Gasoline Engine.........................121
Automatic Shutdown........................................122
Failure to Start.....................................................122
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes................123
Important Ventilating Information...............124
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Moving................................................................123
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Stationary.........................................................123
Vehicles with an Ignition Key..........................122
Vehicles with Keyless Start.............................122
436
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Index
Starting and Stopping the Engine...........118
General Information...........................................118
Steering Wheel Lock - Vehicles With:
Push Button Start.......................................121
Unlocking the Steering Wheel........................121
Steering Wheel Lock - Vehicles Without:
Push Button Start.......................................121
Steering Wheel................................................53
Storage Compartments..............................117
Sun Shades.......................................................72
Bounce-Back..........................................................72
Opening and Closing the Sun Shade............72
Sun Shade Relearning........................................73
Sun Visors..........................................................72
Illuminated Vanity Mirror....................................72
Supplementary Restraints System..........27
Principle of Operation.........................................27
Switching Off the Engine...........................125
Vehicles With a Turbocharger........................125
Symbols Glossary.............................................7
SYNC™ 2........................................................340
General Information.........................................340
SYNC™ Applications and Services.......315
In the Event of a Crash......................................317
Switching Emergency Assistance On and
Off.......................................................................316
SYNC AppLink.....................................................319
SYNC Emergency Assistance........................316
SYNC™...........................................................300
General Information........................................300
SYNC™ Troubleshooting.........................330
T
Tailgate
See: Manual Liftgate - Compact MAV
(5-seater)..........................................................40
See: Manual Liftgate - Grand MAV (5+2
seater)..................................................................41
See: Power Liftgate.............................................42
Technical Specifications
See: Capacities and Specifications.............275
Temporary Mobility Kit..............................253
Checking the Tire Pressure............................256
General Information.........................................253
Inflating the Tire.................................................254
Using the Kit.........................................................253
Tire Care...........................................................257
Tire Inflation When Punctured
See: Temporary Mobility Kit...........................253
Tire Pressure Monitoring System..........258
Changing Tires With a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System.......................................259
How Temperature Affects the Tire
Pressures.........................................................259
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Reset
Procedure.........................................................261
Understanding the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System.............................................................260
Tire Pressures...............................................269
Tire Repair Kit
See: Temporary Mobility Kit...........................253
Tires
See: Wheels and Tires.....................................253
Tow Ball...........................................................189
Detachable Tow Ball.........................................194
Retractable Tow Ball - Electrically
Operated...........................................................192
Retractable Tow Ball - Manually
Operated..........................................................189
Towbar Dimensions....................................276
Towing a Trailer.............................................188
Towing Points................................................196
Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels -
Automatic Transmission........................198
Emergency Towing............................................198
Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels -
Manual Transmission...............................197
Towing..............................................................188
Traction Control............................................142
Principle of Operation.......................................142
Traffic Sign Recognition..............................177
Principle of Operation........................................177
Using the System.................................................177
Trailer Sway Control....................................189
Transmission..................................................136
Transmission
See: Transmission..............................................136
Trip Computer.................................................83
All Values.................................................................83
Average Fuel Consumption..............................83
Distance to Empty...............................................83
Outside Air Temperature...................................83
Resetting the Trip Computer...........................83
Trip Odometer.......................................................83
Trip Timer................................................................83
437
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Index
Type Approvals............................................426
RF Certification Logos for Tire Pressure
Monitoring Sensor(s)..................................426
U
Under Hood Overview - 1.0L
EcoBoost™.................................................230
Under Hood Overview - 1.5L
Duratorq-TDCi Diesel..............................233
Under Hood Overview - 1.5L
EcoBoost™..................................................231
Under Hood Overview - 1.6L Duratec-16V
Ti-VCT (Sigma)/1.6L Flex Fuel............232
Under Hood Overview - 1.6L
Duratorq-TDCi (DV) Diesel...................234
Under Hood Overview - 2.0L
Duratorq-TDCi (DW) Diesel.................235
Unique Driving Characteristics.................127
USB Port.........................................................298
Using Adaptive Cruise Control................159
Automatic Cancellation...................................162
Blocked Sensor...................................................164
Canceling the Set Speed................................160
Changing the Set Speed.................................160
Detection Issues..................................................163
Following a Vehicle.............................................161
Hilly Condition Usage........................................163
Overriding the Set Speed................................162
Resuming the Set Speed................................160
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed.............160
Setting the Gap Distance.................................161
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
Off.......................................................................160
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
On........................................................................160
Switching to Normal Cruise Control............165
System Not Available.......................................164
Using Cruise Control....................................158
Switching Cruise Control Off.........................158
Switching Cruise Control On..........................158
Using MyKey With Remote Start
Systems..........................................................36
Using Snow Chains......................................257
Vehicles with Stability Control.....................258
Using Stability Control................................143
Switching the System Off and On Using the
Information Display Controls....................143
Switching the System Off Using a
Switch................................................................143
Using SYNC™ With Your Media
Player.............................................................322
Accessing Your USB Song Library...............326
Bluetooth Devices and System
Settings............................................................330
Connecting Your Media Player to the USB
Port.....................................................................322
Line In Audio........................................................328
Media Menu Features.......................................325
Media Voice Commands.................................323
USB 2......................................................................328
Using Voice Commands..................................327
Voice Commands for Audio Sources.........328
What's Playing?.................................................323
Using SYNC™ With Your Phone...........304
Accessing Features Through the Cell Phone
Menu.................................................................308
Accessing Your Cell Phone Settings.............311
Bluetooth Devices..............................................313
Cell Phone Options During an Active
Call.....................................................................307
Cell Phone Voice Commands.......................305
Making a Call......................................................306
Pairing a Cell Phone For the First
Time..................................................................304
Pairing Subsequent Cell Phones.................305
Receiving a Call..................................................307
Text Messaging....................................................310
Using Traction Control................................142
Switching the System Off and On Using the
Information Display Controls....................142
Switching the System Off Using a
Switch................................................................142
Using Voice Recognition............................301
Helpful Hints........................................................301
Initiating a Voice Session................................302
System Interaction and Feedback..............302
Using Winter Tires........................................257
V
Vehicle Care....................................................251
Vehicle Dimensions.....................................275
438
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Index
Vehicle Identification Number................278
Vehicle Identification Plate.......................277
Vehicle Interior Overview..............................13
Ventilation
See: Climate Control...........................................92
Vents
See: Air Vents.........................................................92
VIN
See: Vehicle Identification Number............278
Voice Control...................................................54
W
Warning Lamps and Indicators.................75
Anti-Lock Braking System Warning
Lamp....................................................................75
Automatic High Beam Lamp...........................75
Battery Warning Lamp.......................................75
Blind Spot Monitor Indicator............................75
Brake System Warning Lamp..........................75
Cruise Control Indicator.....................................76
Direction Indicator................................................76
Door Ajar..................................................................76
Engine Oil Warning Lamp..................................76
Engine Warning Lamps......................................76
Fasten Safety Belt Warning Lamp.................76
Front Airbag Warning Lamp.............................76
Front Fog Lamps Indicator................................77
Frost Warning Lamp............................................77
Glow Plug Indicator..............................................77
Headlamp and Parking Lamp
Indicator...............................................................77
High Beam Indicator............................................77
Information Indicator...........................................77
Liftgate Ajar.............................................................77
Low Fuel Level Warning Lamp.........................77
Low Washer Fluid..................................................77
Rear Fog Lamps Indicator..................................77
Shift Indicator.........................................................77
Stability Control Off Indicator..........................77
Stability Control Warning Lamp.....................78
Start-Stop Active Indicator..............................78
Start-Stop Unavailable Indicator...................78
Warning Triangle..........................................203
Washer Fluid Check....................................239
Washers
See: Cleaning the Exterior...............................251
See: Wipers and Washers.................................56
Wheel Nuts
See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................262
Wheels and Tires.........................................253
Windows and Mirrors...................................68
Windshield Washers.....................................58
Windshield Wipers........................................56
Intermittent Wipe................................................56
Speed Dependent Wipers................................56
Winter Tires
See: Using Winter Tires....................................257
Wipers and Washers.....................................56
439
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
Index
440
C-MAX (CEU) Vehicles Built From: 16-03-2015 Vehicles Built Up To: 19-07-2015, CG3642en enGBR, Edition date: 02/2015, First Printing
CG3642en
3 …

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels
1

Forum

Ford-C-Max-2015

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Ford C-Max 2015 bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Ford C-Max 2015 in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 33,85 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Andere handleiding(en) van Ford C-Max 2015

Ford C-Max 2015 Snelstart handleiding - Nederlands - 19 pagina's

Ford C-Max 2015 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Nederlands - 356 pagina's

Ford C-Max 2015 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Deutsch - 492 pagina's

Ford C-Max 2015 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Deutsch - 19 pagina's

Ford C-Max 2015 Snelstart handleiding - English - 17 pagina's


Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info